ee a eee ane
SDT ES OT SET ST
‘ EET
PGT Ne 3 ig
a a ie <4
ine
4 ag
A
ANNALS
OF THE
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOLUME Xx!
1911
Editor
EDMUND OTIS HOVEY
New York
Published by the Academy
1912
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lycrum or Natural History, 1817-1876)
OFFICERS, 1911
President—FRanz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents--GrorcE F. Kunz, FrepErIc A. Lucas,
WILLIAM CAMPBELL, R. 8. WoopworTH
Recording Secretary—Evmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum
Corresponding Secretary—Hrrmon C, Bumpus, American Museum
Treasurer—EMERSON McMituin, 40 Wall Street
TAbrarian—Ratpeu W. Tower, American Museum
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chairman—GeorGE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—CuHAk Les P. Berkey, Columbia University
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—Freveric A. Lucas, American Museum
Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University
Secretary—EpwarpD J. THaTcHER, Teachers College
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University
Secretary—F. LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University
CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXI
Page
PEL Oy A Ces icevats hate etavelc suclevelovey sicher cratetasiolat setae) crevesehaleveieilel aisle Srerercieersioa dle oe vals i
(Qi Wsaa oo ocodon DUB OOODOUCCOOOSOGUGUDUEOOOOD gi ttr tsetse ects t eee ee ee ii
COTTE 5h 5 5.0 db OOO CeO Goal bocuE CDADeOODCE.CCG GUGOOO OL OC OnRCr DME EmCaor iii
WMAteShOre EU pDiCaAtOns OtcAULNOLS s SCPALAGCCS «le cielsretelololelelslelsiciicls|s/ cies s\cleleyaic’s iii
HOTS O te USE ALIONS 2 2121. c/s) -lovcic! oreo SOPaCADAOOOGOIS BOO DOD OC DOOD RCOOGOOOOT iv
The Ravenswood Granodiorite. By Victor ZirEGLER. (Plates 1-II)....... il
Geology of the Cortlandt Series and Its Emery Deposits. By G. SHER-
BOURNE PLOGERS a) (E1ACES DET Vill) Ss. cere «c1s<.5 5 .ciale ote ci creer ohenete le efeveleuaiere 11
The Influence of Heredity and of Environment in Determining the Coat
Colorssin) Mices By, 22 EH Morgan. (Plates) VII—WX5) <n os eerie 87
On Some New Genera and Species of Pennsylvanian Fossils from the
Wewoka Formation of Oklahoma. By Grorce H. Girty........... 119
A List of the Type Species of the Genera and Sub-genera of Formicide.
ES Van EAI VL ORTON WEUBEIMNR 5 Se. js/eccvoise carci © 0.65 chee cic o.h a cer ermremiele 157
The History of the American Race: By FRANZ BOAS............cceecce«s ECE
Records of Meetings, 1911. -By EDMUND OTIS HOVEY..........-ccccceccee 185
PHN Orxani ZA] ONO fet yA GAGE ciscrs oles oles e) core co Sie aei cole: che sulci e oilers PPL
new Orieinell a © WaArberc ays, se syscfeisre, craiel erelers sialecere wicks eid. wiecesa/a nie tehermre oma PPL
CO RGLEEFO fe OO Us bee reread oi eteavols vel che oy oh eae saved e,) ot on siiel eae Gud Siac aletbinin igre ahelse ao
Mier Am end@edeG Marveleee ers ere synch sors he Societe iano i erere) ae. 8." aeselloyéieis Aion ect otereee 230
OOMSITTETLED Me 5 Oso oo RAC CCID eG COE. CIO DIS OLIGO CEC nee aaa aN EAD 233
LEWIN hetecees olen och CRANE ESCO COR CRRCIS OSE CEN EC Fra ee eer a 234
MEemMPErESHIP MISTS ole CCEMD eT al Oil rare stars accls, © citcvcisicie o's: « o o\aterore cielcrelecerceie 241
ire Cl oxcretemereteronsretevene cratorctere lace terciokenetcns¥ caer ecko seis ene aval clei svar sie le Slaven o's Guseatoreiaie w wate 253
DATES OF PUBLICATIONS OF AUTHORS’ SEPARATES
Edition.
Pp. 1-10, 10 May, 1911. 325 copies.
Pp. 11-86, 15 May, 1911. 275 copies.
Pp. 87-117, 5 July, 1911. 200 copies.
Pp. 119-156, 26 August, 1911. 50 copies.
Pp. 157-175, 17 October, 1911. 250 copies.
Pp.177-183, 20 March, 1912. 150 copies.
Pp. 227-252, 25 March, 1912. 50 copies.
iii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
Plates.
I.—Photomicrographs of Ravenswood Granodiorite.
II.—Distribution of the Ravenswood Granodiorite.
II1I.—Pyroxenite and Diorite.
IV.—Gneissoid Structure.
V.—McCoy Mine and Schist.
VI.—Geological Map of the Cortlandt Series.
VII.—Changes in Coat Colors of Mice.
VIII.—Changes in Coat Colors of Mice.
IX.—Changes in Coat Colors of Mice.
Text Figures.
Poikilitic Relation of Biotite and Olivine in Peridotite................... Tae
Diagram of the Relations of the more important Types of the Cortlandt
S12) 4 (ne en cae nmr ne Ana Ae oad acai dic boo oN Go 58
Variation Diagram) of the Cortlandté ‘Seriesiecicc civ sceeeeireieteiaie tele ieee 59
Relations of Spinel, Corundum and Magnetite in Hmery.................. 68
Sillimanite: Sehist... Vs nc5 4g wleseieionst eves nie aie aut ele alee sie etesiete ace nite arene etatetenrte 71
iv
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. XXI, pp. 1-10, pll. -Il
Editor, EpMunp Otis Hovey
~THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE
BY
Victor ZIEGLER
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
10 May, 1911
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or Natural History, 1817-1876)
OFFICERS, 1911
President—FRranz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—Guorce F. Kunz, Freprric A. Lucas,
R. 8S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL
Recording Secretary—Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum
. Corresponding Secretary—HeEnry- E. Crampton, American Museum
Treasurer—EMERSON McMitt1in, 40 Wall Street
Librarian—RatrH W. Tower, American Museum
SECTION OF GHOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chairman—GeorceE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—Cuar.is P. Berkey, Columbia University
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—Freperic A. Lucas, Brooklyn Museum
Secretary—L. Hussakor, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WItLiAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University
Secretary—EDWarD J. THATCHER, Teachers’ College
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY .AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—R. 8S. WoopwortH, Columbia University
Secretary—F reprric LyMan WELLS, Columbia University
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West
[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., Vol. XXI, pp. 1-10, Pll. I, II. 10 May, 1911]
THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE
By Victor ZIEGLER
(Presented before the Academy, 6 March, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
Geoiogical Section of New York City.......... Stet Saar a nieve s: aha, cites Sey eke a!
Surface distribution of the Ravenswood granodiorite................... 2
PereOeLanine GeSCEItIOns ANG ANALYSES <2)... 60% 2 <0 sis wre oie socials vie o's euera bleleiwe 2
Mineral occurrences in the granoGiorite...............--2002 Pieler ae 3
Granite phaseé.........0.4+. yeigisniselseeeiessicces fh tae witieinve ainiat aMgldbel ommetioute 4
IDIGe JUPR OS 6 S53 ee he B06 DEOMI OE rer ODO LS BE Grerrer bir st - coc 6
Probable extent of the rock as disclosed by borings................-ee00% 7
Robi iaety fai OM OTT GLENS) aR yarere ais, « cldte Tale’ a orsicie.e lets Slee ig ele 6 «sis, o% ole arertie ele. sion £¢
Comparison with the Harrison granodiorite..... ween eee e eee eee e eens 9
GEOLOGICAL SECTION oF NEw YorK CITY
In the New York City folio of the United States Geological Survey,
the following succession of formations is recognized: Fordham gneiss,
Inwood limestone, called Stockbridge dolomite, and Manhattan schist,
called Hudson schist. In addition, there are several minor intrusive
masses, of which two, the Harrison diorite and the Yonkers gneiss, are
large. The former is located along the eastern side of Westchester County,
and the latter, immediately east of the city of Yonkers. To these two
large intrusives, we may now add a third, exposed along the western shore
of Long Island and first recognized by James F. Kemp,” who, in a paper
describing the section of the rocks revealed by a tunnel beneath the Kast
River, applied the name “Ravenswood granodiorite” to it. Subsequent
field work and the exploratory borings undertaken by various engineering
enterprises have proved the importance of this intrusive.
1The writer takes pleasure in acknowledging his obligation to Professor James F.
Kemp, and especially to Professor C. P. Berkey, for aid in securing data and for many
‘kind and helpful suggestions.
2Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., vol. 14, p. 273.
9 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SOIENSES
SURFACE DISTRIBUTION OF THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE
The western part of Long Island is covered by drift, so that exposures
of rock are rare, except along the shore of the East River and about the
Blackwell’s Island bridge. Here is found a series of scattering outcrops,
beginning near the corner of Boulevard and Potter Avenues and recurring
at intervals as far south as Fifth Street. North and south of the above
areas, drift masks everything, and the only clue to the underlying forma-
tions is afforded by a series of bore-holes which will be described later. In
the New York City folio, most of the exposures of this rock are mapped
as separate acidic intrusives in the Fordham, but the idea that these repre-
sented one large igneous body was not expressed. Since there are no
traces of Fordham gneiss found between the above exposures, and since in
a number of cases granodiorite was found between some of the outcrops in
the excavations for the foundations of buildings, it seems to the writer
that we may safely map this whole area as granodiorite. Thus we cut off
at once an area of at least a square mile from the old Fordham formation
and add it to the series of igneous intrusives mentioned above.
PETROGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION
The Ravenswood granodiorite is a light to dark gray rock, varying from
granitoid to gneissic in texture and ranging from a hornblende-biotite-
granite to a diorite in composition. Garnet is present in nearly all speci-
mens and in some cases is very abundant. For the purpose of establishing
a type composition for the rock, the following table has been prepared to
show the minerals present in a number of slides. A system of notation
devised by C. P. Berkey, in which X denotes an essential, Y an accessory
and Z a secondary mineral, is used.
ZIEGLER, THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE
Mineral Occurrences in the Granodiorite
E Pe eta |
es Semesters) ct | Oe | ses O8 lacs: el cee alley ol ee | et | os
Bee eS Oe | 4 ao ee Ss | eee VS:
iL alte allie 4 eer XE + | Veal Nea Ve EN iN Y
mee xe ee ‘cel Ae Nal A: ail avail celle sia] sc
3 Mee yl teal XO OX. SW | | Weave ave ease Y
4 5 ISG geld ecient 4 Valls ealnx y|y
5 RGRAY CVS Int [eh eH | ea Won ¥ Y
6 ar eee | Ne Me XY. ey Wwe |X Y
7 pKa RemeVen|eXG Cea seve WY lay. | YY Y
BRN fe: Y Nan en ee nee UID |) Me | oe | Y
ell ee | OE. EU Biull ail ev desl hs gd Y
10 pKa PONE lyse |) WAH EX: an oy tly yay Y
u SN ees tz SSE 3/8 x ye || ye | AY
12 SS Saal Wee Ns Alexa sad line be Y
Ieee eee ONAT Val ervanexeeie Sux: | | oy | OY. | x
14 CNS ohare calm 4 Vee | Ob aWa ie |W.
Nome re eae ese Vas ave eX |4aeel oxo ae | Wea) We |
16 Ru GY | Rh aR | IK SPH YG EY ea CY.
owe oll O° Ee 1a Mlle Nit cui al, aa al aa Ug Y |
18 > pal a Bd (dp. BEN eve Vly. Y |
19 Gu [eal i ail ip aleve Ny, «ONE || NG
ERCP aXe Ba eee Ye | Ys | Y
NNN SN ‘See. Carbonates.
N
NNN N
NNN NN N
N
A summary of these occurrences for each individual constituent is as
follows, F denoting the absence of the mineral from the slide:
a(cageteLeuehel se ivlleel ails eke © is)w alse). ¢ 0 \6..¢ = 10)4),8 6, a \¢ s.e:\0
Sie ele) 6, 8) y ae \e (oA tse eiieli= eh e).e)0 0) ¢ 0 ls «le se a alee
Pee SSeS Be ee eels a6 2S Se eee eee
Hornblende
Ow) af'v) 6) Nie elev ala fel ve: ui) 6 0.\0,'e) @,s 0c 6, 8 6) 8) 6 0 e610
Mi wiwEe ela) \s\ «leis (6 1s)\s)\s'/\ 0) wisi) «| 6 ¢ 6) ¢.c) oe) © 6) 0) 06 (610 eve © e's
«) wiella 69,0) iellsive) valle lele) es 66 © 6, 00 le)(e, m6 © 0/8.) 8 6 608
PGY:
Ss) ad
a) Ye
8 Y
Ne
OWE
3X
OZ
0Z
0 Z
0Z
0Z
0Z
0Z
2F
EE
13 F
1F
2F
18 F
OF
4 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES
GreATT CLE aes oR ee este ele aio eern as 34 ON 15) 4 OZ 2F
ANU IG) bio ooo So AG e oa On nae Ob SOC ORenr 0x 20 Y¥ 0Z OF
FATE COON Ae 5 SAR As, SEP ee a nner 0X 20°¥ 0Z OF
JX ORUNIES Cot Glen bobbie S.cOGHee OO cao Me Ae ric OIe 0X 20-Y OZ OF
Ie Adt a ae ae en see Uc etvato sxc as ote siaeia eae 0x ons 0Z 13 F
Pye AOUIGS ee Breet civic slacole Fieie's"olayc's Oke mime 0x 5 Y 0Z 15 F
NIA OME Me Rete ines os olers a s&s. she cere evel siptas 0X ae 0Z ILS
(CanlOI Lester Bictar (eis oss okie 2th =e oes eves secs 0x Om UAE 8 F
TRSYOININ, 2 6.4 So Hons Rp OOO OR nee e ao nh orca .c 0X Ons 14Z 6F
From this summary, we see that quartz, orthoclase, oligoclase, horn-
blende and biotite are the essential minerals, and that garnet, titanite,
zircon and apatite are the common accessories, while microcline, anortho-
clase, augite, pyrite, pyrrhotite and magnetite are rarer. The acid min-
erals are dominant.
Granite Phase
The hand specimen shows a medium dark gray rock, evenly and finely
granitoid in texture and essentially composed of quartz, feldspar, horn-
blende and mica. Pink garnets of small size are present throughout the
specimen and give it a mottled appearance. The rock is slightly gneissoid.
The feldspars are fresh and semi-transparent and show polysynthetic
twinning. The hornblende is a dark green variety, sometimes almost.
black.
Under the microscope, great differences in the size of grains are no-
ticed, and there is also a tendency for the smaller grains of quartz and
feldspar to surround the larger ones. The small individuals seem to be
the result of the crushing to which the rock was subjected. Fractures are
common in the rock and are coated with limonite and in some cases with
quartz. The following minerals have been identified in the slide: quartz,
orthoclase, anorthoclase and hornblende as essential minerals, also micro-
cline, oligoclase, garnet, titanite, apatite, zircon, augite, magnetite and
pyrite. Secondary alteration is slight, although limonite and kaolin are
noticeable.
The quartz occurs allotriomorphically and also as small elongated
prisms included in the feldspars. The latter case show between crossed
nicols a fine rim of interference colors. Included in the quartz are zircon,
apatite, biotite and fine trails of dust. Some of the quartzes have deep
embayments and irregular outlines due to resorption. Nearly all show
wavy extinction.
The predominant feldspar is orthoclase. This is, as a rule, allotrio-
morphic. Microperthitic structure is faintly developed. Carlsbad twins
are common. Cleavage parallel to (010) is well marked, not so strong
ZIEGLER, THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE 5
parallel to (001). Several grains of microcline are present usually show-
ing, between crossed nicols, the characteristic “Scotch-plaid” structure.
The plagioclase is of the oligoclase type and is twinned according to the
albite law, although some patches are twinned under the pericline law in
addition. The bands due to the latter law are commonly the wider. In-
clusions of all the other minerals occur.
The hornblende is a dark green variety, in irregular shreds and grains.
Good cleavage is shown parallel to (110) and strong absorption along this.
The pleochroism is intense, ranging from dark olive green to light green
to yellowish brown. The extinction angle is 21 degrees.
Light green augite is present. It has weak pleochroism and an extinc-
tion angle of 36 degrees. Uralitization has developed, and the greater
part of the augite has gone over into green hornblende. This uralite
closely resembles the other hornblende in the rock in appearance and in
optical properties. Both augite and hornblende seem to be primary min-
erals, and the alteration of the augite seems to be the result of the pressure
which is also suggested by the wavy extinction and the crushed rims.
Brown biotite is present in small amounts, some of it as an alteration
product of the hornblende. It then spreads along the cracks towards the
center of the grains of hornblende. It is also present in small shreds and
in lath-shaped crystals and often occurs in beautiful aggregates.
The garnet in this type of the rock is light red in color, pale pink in
thin sections. It is associated with the darker minerals.
Magnetite and pyrite are usually present in small amounts. Titanite,
zircon and apatite are found in all slides.
Chemical analysis:
Per cent
IOS. pabidtcU deen dood dc OC UOT aS COO In OS renee enact 75.61
INUGH deabt tet pddacodd6c bo COD OC OC: Rene aera ices PER
HO ramyafet thterctarelater ete) ates to) cia Slee eraile esale 6. 6 eyelv'a7a\e aches whaleiere Pape
INZO) Gady wb bos 60H ODOR ECONO OD OURLOO Oe OCC eerie 86
WIEO) Seda AbGR OOS GUS OO DO EIEIO CIEE TCI aS 20
CRYO): Sr SPA b 6 OOS GOTO CHEE LET CNC MERC RO NERC IO a Re sees)
140) 54 A oid OO HIELO OI OC IO ECO DEIO OCI CISC IGOR Rao rae 3.18
INO Beererei evel totoneict ciererectetsversislcharste lens) shel seus erecta oie oS ielaverallerausls aya
IBLO) So Gada Uo OGOG Ec cOC 6 DOGO TIBCTEC DeICIC apn orion 6 09
101.25
Recasting into the component minerals we obtain
Per cent
(QUEIIA opts Ob COG obs DO RROOE DEO a ROA ODODE RO OU CO SOO 31.62
ORUMO CLASS eters rererai lore hiss 'exerelissole: orev stolavetet tev cues ober enctsteraterebere 16.68
6 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES
Per cent
JNU OEIC HRCI AACS GOODE aD Oooo do DOA COU Bae .83
GIOSSUIATITC (oo ois oe Sesis arse ats cies 6 ate store ansttersiotelsteweletoceleters< 1.35
PAUTTIVATIGI UC ere roc. cire,s tavere. 8 sa)6 lo oi re.0. 8 ole we emecotoh Meno CeToE Peters 1.49
18 Ko) gc 6) (2000 (A Re AA RIA ACLONGTY cir, cow 0 oc. 8 ODI 2.83
SI OELES Bebb ate wi aval Sate ss ostere soa jo chek a elaievalel alevate enReeeaneter ates ke IU 7 Ee
13 Ginko eee eee nciccc moe asc bind bom odo ae 1.28
101.27
Diorite Phase
From this highly acidic type, the Ravenswood rock varies through inter-
mediate stages to a quartz-diorite. It is then darker gray in color,
medium in grain and slightly gneissic in structure. The mass of the rock
is made up of oligoclase, green hornblende, brown biotite and garnet.
Under the microscope, orthoclase, augite, zircon, titanite, apatite, pyrrho-
tite, pyrite, magnetite and kaolin were also identified. Here, as in the
more acid type, the rock is granitoid with the component grains irregular
in outline and interlocking. In size, they average about .8 to 1 mm. in
diameter.
Oligoclase is the predominent feldspar. Polysynthetic twinning is
shown, sections parallel to which have extinction angles of about seven
degrees. Pericline twinning and Carlsbad twinning also occur, and in
several cases all three are in combination. Strong wavy extinction is
shown. Inclusions of hornblende, biotite, apatite, zircon and pyrrhotite
are common.
The hornblende and the augite are of the same type as described in the
granite phase and show the same alteration. The alteration of the augite
is especially well shown. This takes place from the edges of the grains
toward the center, but in some cases the change has taken place through-
out the entire grain, the surface of which is spotted and blotchy from the
formation of hornblende.
A chemical analysis of the typical diorite rock gave the following
result :
Per cent
SLO Svc ec Se Rei alae kena rete re elie otto faledotalcle Creda, sit eheeyst MeeeL teas 64.98
IRV Olg'oi5's SOS OMS haga leter ore ehatic caterers oi shetene, ofele nuaite @, 6: sistBtal eis ce MRT LO
GLO), | (a ste evens eee eter tetotensie le 2 8 aratherasoraie enais/ 910,019 @ieleter stores 50
OO) io cos eee he eee aed Masa ore kouete of ava: oiate Sie lee reiait ah 2:00
1 Cee 0 RE PEED, 33.0) cy in ERD POS LOLA ONG 0 Sidon ene ns CRONE core RC 93
CSO ivkicis oo cient ee lordiole ie oh Pore iwlate sets Rists| ote s/eie fee 4.23
1. OEE INT 56 Bbc kin Scki0Ao OO GO COORG CMe 1.84
INGO cia tla Sin Pee erectus etA RE ese oo wae ots oie §.22
NS 2 0 RRR AR Ae RPE Cro BIND CIE cl CCLRC ROR ERR RRC Be 11
ZIEGLER, THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE Y
Recasting into the component minerals we obtain
Per cent
QUAL ee sel sis cece ereleveras UP aNoLWeliot oi cPepopsicieuerce petri hayare estas 18.48
Orthoclase 2.3... PS IDE CUO IE OCICS OS HOSS Sar 8.34
INVONIGY Bo aoe ae a iiss wal sueirairene tate raat avonten sreicnste mete lake Ai aren nisia lay wi gkertons 44.02
PATOL OL oe oo: avenici'ar «. die7s crave ehererenaysenetare oft SOD Oro este LOO
GROSSUIAT ICS Bie os}. s,5 aia si 5}. alone aa Mo ato a pee sie nora ct eel alc 2.25
PAUIMANGIC Pe os <6 cis cm sos We OMe OM eeu SaaS Oa os 3.48
Hornblende and Augite....... oud) aheh sitet @taiat elslevouelete Saas. 5 5 UePatl
LOGIE Mars crc, sess ats sie asi wl'a''s chore ata my oua oes aay a itueLa ane al onatias 1.05
Corundumyes ss. Sraiaee gen Sereisvers onernie SSUES ASS as 5 Oks
MASI CLILAM ye Face Lklc cis ssn we dd dnenddas A Wale a eet aces 70
PROBABLE EXTENT OF THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE AS DISCLOSED
BY BoRINGS
Aside from the actual outcrops of the granodiorite so far discussed,
records of it are found in borings undertaken in the drift-covered areas.
Thus, north of the exposures and slightly southeast of Lawrence Point
the Consolidated Gas Company of New York while drilling for water put
down an eighteen-hundred foot borehole. The entire core is the typical
Ravenswood rock. Again, south of the actual exposures, a series of bor-
ings* is now available from the corner of Myrtle Avenue and Gold Street.
Brooklyn, across the East River into Manhattan, as far as Hester and
Allen Streets. Several other drill records are also known as depicted on
the map. In all of these, the core is a massive gray rock, in all respects
like the exposed Ravenswood. It has the same appearance, texture and
mineral composition, and it seems io be a part of the same igneous mass.
Whether the rock is actually continuous so as to include all these areas,
cannot be said with certainty, but the conclusion seems probable, and the
corresponding extent has been so indicated on the accompanying map.
ORIGIN OF THE GARNET
Some of the cores brought up on the above line and located near the
intersection of John and Bridge Streets show a highly garnetiferous rock,
reddish-brown in color. The rock is finely granitoid. Under the micro-
scope, the following minerals were found: garnet and quartz as essential,
also some feldspar, which varied extremely in different specimens, and
%The corundum molecule in this and the following analyses is probably to a great
extent contained in the biotite.
4The borings and cores here referred to, samples from which were made available for
this study, belong to the series of explorations made by the New York City Board of
Water Supply along the proposed line of the distribution conduit for Catskill water.
8 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES
some biotite, hornblende, titanite, apatite, pyrite and zircon. The garnet
occurs in small grains closely bunched and cemented by quartz. They
appear to be the crushed fragments of originally large garnets.
An analysis gave
Per cent
SIO EE oc iegition Acc ok een ee Rhee eee Pere rene 52.82
LUO as aa REMC a Orme SO e yo Goaoh do Sab aco 22.75
INMOM Sagenactodd duencedad soWoos op oodb don oaddaos ones HESS)
1G Oe anne errr a contra odbonda aed 9.50
MEOMs cc cist da woke eee PEER ERO EE REE eC EERE ROE eC EEE alicy
(O}:10 ea Aer Pe Ia a RIN AMa nS Sa deuutEA Gd Gon Acco Kdo gon. a6 % 7.43
EO) Bavaieldlerorraiolele sissere wise Misvaehe orele Va eeom et Rr Re ea oRtenener one 86
INEM OM AA Gam OSU nS OOOO GOODGIC OOOO OOOOH ON CHObORO Soo 0,0 123
13 0 Wee eo ac UA tot et aie oer eeRMine Bele Oecdtic Bicier e aaa 14
98.87
Recasting into the component minerals we obtain
Per cent
OUCHEWAL po OUdo O.6co GOS MA COD AIOA MMOS aU mG Ooaecdacke 22.44
@MUEEHOCIAS@ Mee ere eieierele 6 ie aiave. clsieelsrisl one toils ovens totetofoletensheneroteeonatte 2.78
PAUP ILO a aetene racers. ctiaFe a te ole vaia a\istele lo: l0 sys /o oe leucvav ese ehcreiel reletome tere 10.48
ANITORUOILE A Sagic-d Aguado GOO On Mae OO SOUS TOGO Ano OC 8.34
CUVOSSUM ETUC prise eh rare coiers jo te-s sieyatate,cxecsveystencieaeretovel steteronebetenenets 13.50
PANTING tasereretapevare ale letevs (cielictensre elerenerelclonehodeyabareneveteleNerotenetat= 14.94
IRICEN NMOS. Sa caocanncdocma os OQuNbUMsouUC Uda acodaggonoC PPS
IDOI oon Dro OCOD OO DMOGDaOOs AOU emo Oo Oaoaca Gonos aNdC 1.53
(OD TAULTD CULT a eeve reeves ove rave areye Ge aie se ote tencicks Concreeteredel cictietere ores tober .82
IGGIICRO NM GGpe ays cisrs aves ctorere & cheers ciclo eiterioiS ecto eke ter 2.08
Glancing over the analysis, we see that this variety of the rock is very
low in silica, as compared with the other two phases. It is high in
alumina, lime and ferrous oxide. The latter three constituents are in the
garnet, thus making it a composite of the grossularite and almandite
molecules. There is also a decrease in the amount of soda and potash.
On the whole, the rock has the appearance of a contact zone developed
from an aluminous and ferruginous limestone, which furnished part of
the lime, alumina and iron necessary for the formation of the garnet.
Or else the aggregate may be due to the absorption of a mass of impure
limestone in the granodiorite. Since Professor Berkey has shown that
there are interbedded limestones practically everywhere in the Fordham
gneiss, this explanation seems to the writer to be the best. According to
Van Hise,® combined contact and mechanical action furnish the most
favorable conditions for the formation of garnets, which are usually the
5 Monograph on ‘“‘Metamorphism,” p. 300.
ZIEGLER, THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE 9
result of the rearrangement of two or more adjacent minerals. It is diffi-
cult to say just what minerals formed the garnet occurring so extensively
throughout the granodiorite, but the following reactions are offered.
Anorthite + wollastonite = grossularite + quartz
CaO, A1,0;,2SiO, + 2(CaO,SiO,) == 3Ca0,Al,0;,3Si0, + SiO,
Anorthite + hypersthene = garnet + quartz
CaO, Al,O3,2SiO, + 2( (MgFe)O,Si0O,) = Ca0,2(MgFe)O,A1,0;,3Si0, + SiO,
Pyroxene == anorthite = amphibole-
(MgFe)0, (AlFe),0;,Si0,,2(MgO,Si0,) + 2(CaO, Al,03,2Si0,) = 2(CaO) (MgFe)0O,
pyroxene molecule + garnet + quartz
(AlFe),0,,3Si0, -++ 2(Mg0O,Al,0;,Si0O,) + 3Si0,
Starting with orthoclase, the following reaction might take place.
Orthoclase + pyroxene =r wollastonite + hypersthene +
K,0,A1,03,6S8i0, + 2( (MgFe) O,(AlFe),0;,Si0,) + 2(Ca0,SiO,)+ (MgFe)0,SiO, +
water—garnet — biotite “=
H,O=2Ca0, (Mg¥e)0O, Al,O;,3Si0,4-2((HK)O, (AlFe),0;,2Si0,)2((MgFe)O,SiO,)+
quartz
38i0,
Yielding in this last case a complex garnet, biotite and quartz.
COMPARISON WITH THE HARRISON GRANODIORITE
A comparison of the Ravenswood granodiorite with the Harrison grano-
diorite as described by H. Ries® was made for the purpose of determining
any relationship which might exist between the two rocks. Professor
Ries says, regarding the Harrison diorite,
“Throughout its extent, the rock has a pronounced gneissic structure. Strong
effects of folding and crushing with the consequent formation of ‘augen’ of
quartz and feldspar are shown. The rock varies from a more or less massive
gneiss . . . to a mica-schist. The minerals forming the granite are quartz,
plagioclase, biotite, hornblende, orthoclase, and in lesser amounts garnet, tita-
nite, zircon, apatite, muscovite, and microline.
“Quartz composes from two fifths to one half of the rock. It occurs in
grains and in rounded masses, filling the spaces between the other minerals.
The grains are often cracked and show undulatory extinction and zonal struc-
ture. Dustlike inclusions are often present and are arranged in more or less
parallel rows, which often extend across the cracks from one grain to another.
Intergrowths with plagioclase are not uncommon, especially around the edges
of the feldspar augen.
“The plagioclase is rich in inclusions of biotite, apatite, and zircon, but
¢Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., vol. xiv, p. 80.
10 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES
smaller undeterminable ones are present in countless numbers. Some of the
plagioclases show microperthitie structure.
“Orthoclase is less abundant than the quartz and the plagioclase. Microcline
is rare. Biotite composes about one half of the rock. MHornblende is less in
amount than the quartz, its pleochroism is green to brown.”
Considering this description, we may establish the following points:
1. The rocks have the same mineral composition.
2. Texturally, they agree closely. Both are gneissic and show augen of
quartz and feldspar, crushed rims, interpenetration of quartz and feldspar.
undulatory extinction, etc.
3. Micro-perthite is present in both.
4. The hornblende shows the same pleochroism.
These points seem to bring out a strong similarity in the two rocks.
We must remember, however, that this similarity may well exist in rocks
of the same group which may come from widely separated localities.
These points of semblance are offset by the following contrasts:
1. Quartz is very abundant in the Harrison granodiorite where it forms
as much as one half of the rock. In much of the Ravenswood rock, it is
present in small amounts and in some cases is absent entirely.
2. The gneissic structure is present throughout the Harrison diorite,
but it is lacking in much of the Ravenswood rock.
3. No muscovite was found in the latter.
4. Biotite is far more abundant in the former.
5. No augite was described from the Harrison occurrence, and no
uralite was noticed.
Considering both of the above groups of points, it seems to the writer
that the Ravenswood is not a continuation of the Harrison granodiorite.
He believes that there are two distinct igneous bodies, of which one, the
Harrison, has been the more thoroughly metamorphosed.
PETROGRAPHIC LABORATORY, COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.
Fic.
Fie.
W1e. 3.
Fia.
Fig.
Fig.
PLATH I
PHOTOMICROGRAPHS OF RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE
. Alteration of augite (A) into uralite (Hb). Biotite (B) and feldspar
(F). Field, 1.7 mm.
. Shows the relation of biotite (B), hornblende (Hb), garnet (G) and
feldspar (EF). Field, 1.7 mm.
The garnet phase. Garnet (G), biotite (B) and quartz (Q). Tield,
1.7 mm. -
. Nest of biotite laths (B), with feldspar (F), quartz (Q), apatite (A)
and zircon (Z). Field, 1.7 mm.
. Microperthitic feldspar (F) and quartz (Q) between crossed nicols.
Field, 1.7 mm.
. The diorite phase. Hornblende (Hb) and oligoclase (F). Field, 1.7
mm,
Se co eee 4
‘
ee dads fhe
Pete
. poor
yote e he petiat inti at yene 2 :
ee
, bi ed
i Se ee
ee Ree
.
*
remand in both? aa
abe ne elie?
-aretaoidoK a0 usrmansr bi ae a ;
cole Sits similar | Sea
‘ in bo (Q atitoit a, osileur ee Ca gitar te |
B ‘ace (oy scr amy bunks a) » stile
eae
ee 4
I
aan rca ‘igeblod itive rata sHitoid 0 Jea%
- 1 seria as port (Xo oF DBS
rn d ; 2 .
ato mo Wy ay ba ae) taebit sisson a 5 ot
-.
> pome
on Gs Fach
ANNALS N. Y. Acab. Scr VOLUME XXI, Puate I
RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE
»
a
¢
s
o be Wid ae ae
ae ETS A IT a ss
PLATE II
DISTRIBUTION OF THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE
Map showing the outcrops of the Ravenswood granodiorite in solid black;
the boreholes reaching it, in black circular spots, and its probable extent, in
broken lines.
Pe ry oe
i- = 3
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. XXI, pp. 11-86, pll. II-VI
Editor, EpMunp Otis Hovey
GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES
AND ITS EMERY DEPOSITS
BY
G. SHERBURNE ROGERS
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
15 May, 1911
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or NaTuRAL History, 1817-1876)
OFFIcErs, 1911
President—FRanz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—GnoRGE F. Kunz, Freperic A. Lucas,
R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL
Recording Secretary—Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum
Corresponding Secretary—Hunry EH. Crampton, American Museum
Treasurer—EMERSON McMIittin, 40 Wall Street
TAbrarian—Ratrxu W. Tower, American Museum
SECTION OF GHOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chatrman—GerorceE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—CuHakLES P. Berkey, Columbia University
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—Freveric A. Lucas, Brooklyn Museum
Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WIt1L1AM CAMPBELL, Columbia University
Secretary—EpwarpD J. THatcoHer, Teachers’ College
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University
Secretary—F rEDERIC Lyman WELLS, Columbia University
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o'clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West
[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XXI, pp. 11-86, Pll. III-VI. 15 May, 1911]
GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES AND ITS EMERY
DEPOSITS?
By G. SHERBURNE ROGERS
(Presented in abstract before the Academy, 6 March, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
GINS CaP MEN IG LOLA ete ora ati toe ole) s ‘aval Gials dro. oe Slat wore dela wile: eleveideeetaldaverkie 4 eletersiaeaee 11
MAES eterna all MEMENTO RT Pal eats ey Yo tel cts) & jo: 1s aitol'a,e' Guede ws ow wile, dude duel ayaraya'd anwel #dlens ausveveee 13
CORE IGM: Sato s deh A Ry 2 ae ee erie ee YW 19
. PURDIOENS \ clad aeons Ge Bt ae Gre ee ee ee aa an a OR 20
LAO MOCKS MERE ee Reger ace aerials alislevaliels a) e' bie ay due ia celeleis ace io elk meee eee 20
PPP URC BTS() CAGE MEEREY Ourers LTA EH SMe re anata ck add felts axe dele iae alehel 6 <va.ele eilanero sale dverehe ere 47
ANS OTEYORPITRIZT NS COOTOT REE BE OCIS 5 Oy Og a og 50
TV CUITS TOM SIM eRe ii che kere iio! 6 Aidlanisih Joeu eddlabecs slopate'elete cet atte: ole eta: eores 52
PSL tee OO LMS aN Aas ai real eho ndrore: chk uiletecai ysis oletns eisiah Gkyeld lo atlorauaere 54
Fe AMON SH Otst he LY PES, WAL MGaNAlVSES... cs sj./s4 2 bac ae %sle ce es eeene sila atc 57
EBDAG ESS: OI SELGY GIGI, OS CaO 6 Cad OS COA, SEA PIA re een nearer. 66
Petrography of the emery and associated rocksS.............0.00eeee 68
EV MESmrO ben OCIEMIEREN Cll celeRynternon ais <6 cic tavs dislvs. chavelaudte Viet a shevele alale otis waters 72
TAAL eRe SUNSET cio saree. Siche i clo stelalenacy a clordererels eleeve Sisch(ethawe at 77
STORERTITEIAS Woe Ble 6 Gadhe Chow OED aeRO oe aE Ree PE to et Ry 85
INTRODUCTION
The Cortlandt Series is a small but remarkably complete igneous
complex, lying to the south and east of Peekskill, N. Y., or about 35
miles north of New York City. It was so named by James D. Dana, the
first geologist to bestow upon it any particular attention, because of the
approximate coincidence of its boundaries with those of the township of
Cortlandt, the most northwesterly in Westchester County. More careful
work upon its extent emphasizes the roughness of its conformation with
1The writer desires to acknowledge his obligation to Prof. J. F. Kemp, who suggested
the subject of this investigation and under whose general direction it was carried out.
To Prof. C. P. Berkey, the thanks of the writer are due for valuable advice and many
suggestions generously imparted in the course of the work; and to Dr. M. A. Lamme for
assistance and advice in connection with some of the chemical problems encountered.
(11)
12 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the limits of the township, but the work of Dana and the later and more
detailed investigations of George H. Williams have served to give the
series a rather wide repute under this name. This area is between 25 and
30 square miles in extent, as will be seen from the map. The same rocks
are found also in a small patch, less than a quarter of a square mile, on
Stony Point, on the west side ef the Hudson opposite the main develop-
ment; these have been rather carefully mapped by Dana.? James F.
Kemp has also described an extension of the series at Rosetown, N. J.,
where several of the types have been found; and Wm. H. Hobbs has dis-
covered two large and well developed patches in western Connecticut.
The present paper will be confined to the type development of the series
around Peekskill, which exhibits the greatest complexity of differentiation.
The Cortlandt Series has hitherto, according to Williams’s description,
been thought of as a confused aggregrate of basic rocks, in which the
norite type predominated. As a matter of fact, although the norites are
the most prominent type, examples of nearly every group from pegmatite
to peridotite have been found, with local developments of very peculiar
and abnormal rocks. It is thus much more complete than was formerly
supposed and would merit a thorough study from the standpoint of mag-
matic differentiation. The rocks never show a distinct gneissoid struc-
ture; they are massive and unsheared, although there are several excep-
tions to this which will be considered later. The series is surrounded on
every side by the Manhattan schist, inclusiornf§ of which are sometimes
found in it but which are easily distinguishable on account of their schis-
tose structure. Inwood limestone, underlying the schist, outcrops along
the river bank from Verplanck Point north to Lent’s Cove, and the inclu-
sions of limestone are also found in the igneous rock, but the main areas
are usually separated from them by the schist. Still other basic gneissoid
inclusions are found which resemble the gneisses of the Highlands to the
north. The whole Cortlandt Series, therefore, is a very complex and
intricate mass and presents a petrographical problem of rare interest.
There is no lack of outcrops in the district, but it is seldom that the
rocks can be distinguished in the field ; all of them except the granites are
dark pink or gray, and while the writer after some practice became able to
identify typical specimens, the microscope could alone be relied on. It
was deemed wise, therefore, to conduct the field work in a somewhat
unusually careful manner; from 25 to 30 specimens to the square mile
were collected in the areal work alone, and ten of these on the average
were sectioned. Notwithstanding this care, there is, of course, consid-
7Am. Jour. Sci., (3), XXII, 112. 1881.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES ie
erable room for error; and it is to be understood that the various bound-
aries are probably not always exactly where they are drawn on the map,
although never far away.
The massive character of the rocks precludes any topographic structures
of particular interest. The weathering of the rocks is like that in all
other such regions ; in the case of the olivine rocks alone is there anything
worthy of mention, and this will be taken up under their description
(Plate III, Fig. 1). The most striking valley in the district is that in
which lies the long curved tongue of schist, projecting north into the
series ; it is due, however, to a line of weakness along the contact and not
to the igneous rocks themselves. In like manner, Lake Meahach, a stag-
nant inlet, seems to occupy a similar, though much less pronounced de-
pression. Aside from these instances, the region is a succession of appar-
ently irregular hills and valleys, becoming to the east rather wild and
beautiful in a small way.
HistoricaL REVIEW
Considerable work has been done on this small district, and the evolu-
tion of our present ideas concerning it is interesting. Each of the earlier
~-workers expresses a different view, which have been regarded since Wil-
liams’s work as antiquated; yet it seems that some of these theories are
not entirely to be cast aside, after all.
It is a very curious and interesting fact that the emery in this district
was first seen and recognized by the first white man to ascend the river.
The following passage is taken from Henry Hudson’s report:* “The
Mountaynes looke as if some Metall or Minerall were in them. For the
Trees that grow on them were all blasted, and some of them barren with
few or no Trees on them. The people [Indians] brought a stone aboord
like to Emery (a stone vsed by Glasiers to cut Glasse) it would cut Iron
or Steele: Yet being bruised small, and water put to it, it made a colour
like blacke Lead glistering: It is also good for Painters Colours. At
three of the clocke they departed, and we rode still all night.” This trans-
action took place on his voyage down the river; and we read further that
he descended eighteen leagues below this and was driven by the Indians to
the shelter of a “Cliffe, that looked of the colour of a white greene.” This
was opposite Manhattan Island about two leagues below what is probably
‘Fort Washington Point; it was probably, therefore, the Castle Point
(Hoboken) serpentine. This would show that the emery was brought
3“The third voyage of Master Henry Hudson,’ New York Historical Society Collec-
tions, (1), I, 143. 1809.
14 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
aboard about 54 miles (by the river route) north of this, or possibly a few
miles north of Peekskill.
W. W. Mather,* in 1848, described the rocks not as a series but merely
under the lithologic types of Westchester and Putnam Counties. Under
the caption “Sienite,” he states that this rock forms the east bank of the
Hudson River below Peekskill and is found in many of the hills southeast
of Peekskill. It is valuable and a durable building stone, although rather
hard to dress. It changes east of Verplanck to a black hornblende rock,
which may contain iron. Pits have been sunk for coal in this rock but of
course without success. Under “hornblende rocks,” he merely mentions
the dikes and stringers in the limestone at Verplanck. He evidently con-
siders the rocks adventitious occurrences of a syenitic type, making no
mention of the hypersthene, olivine, etc. and no suggestions as to their
origin. ;
Herman Credner,® in 1865, made the earliest identification of the
hypersthene which exists in many of these rocks. After describing it
briefly, he states that there is a gradual transition of the hypersthene rock
into syenite and hornblende schist. His work, however, was hasty and
cursory and unsupplemented by the microscope; and, since syenite is rare
in the district and hornblende schist unknown, his conclusions may be >
disregarded.
James D. Dana, in 1880, described these rocks in connection with his
work on the limestone belts of Westchester County, being the first geolo-
gist to recognize them as genetically related and to study them as a whole.
In his first paper,® he describes the rocks, classifying them as chrysolitic
and non-chrysolitic, and subdividing further into hornblendic, hypers-
thenic, augitic and biotitic rocks. He then discusses their origin. Since
they occur on Verplanck Point as dikes and stringers in the limestone and
schist, showing contact effects, he is led to believe that at one time they
had been molten, or at least plastic. From the considerable number of
schist and limestone inclusions in the western part of the district, which
generally lie approximately conformable to the strike of the main sur-
rounding areas of these rocks, he concludes that the Cortlandt Series is a
mass of old sediment, worked over by pressure and great heat ; these inclu-
sions would then be merely cases of unobliterated bedding. He finally
discusses the very sudden minor variations in the igneous rocks (which
are most frequent on Montrose Point) and believes that these also demand
* Geology of New York, pt. I, Geology of the First District, p. 528. 1843.
5“Geognostische Skizze der Umgegend von New York,”’ Zeit. der deut. geol. Gesell-
schaft, XVII, 390. 1865.
6 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 194. 1880.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 15
this explanation, arguing that sediment may change suddenly in composi-
tion but that igneous flows are constant over large areas. For the source
of the heat, he postulates extreme local metamorphism of some kind.
In his second paper,’ he reviews the above arguments and proceeds to
the question of the origin and nature of the sediments. The rocks are so
very different in composition from the surrounding sedimentary rocks
that some peculiar local development must be postulated. There are
three hypotheses: (1) the material may have been contributed by the
Archean Highlands as detritus, or (2) as detritus supplemented by in-
gredients from the ocean, or (3) it may have been originally volcanic
ashes. While expressing no definite opinion, Dana appears to favor the
last theory, since successive outbursts might be very different in composi-
tion and yet come to rest in close juxtaposition. He suggests that the
voleanic source lay in the present bed of the Hudson, between Verplanck
and Montrose Points.
In his third paper,® he describes the phenomena exposed by the (then)
new railroad cut through Stony Point, which he considers entirely indica-
tive of the true igneous nature of the more basic members of the series at
least. He abandons, of course, all of the above theories; and this affords
an excellent example of the frankness, honesty and sincerity which char-
acterizes his hfe and work.
George H. Williams, at about this time, started a minute petrographic
study of the various types in the district, Dana having called his attention
to the wealth of variation exhibited. He did not, however, publish his
first paper until 1886.9 After reviewing Dana’s work, he announces his
intention of describing the types petrographically, beginning with the
most basic; then the contact metamorphism in the schist around the bor-
ders ; and finally of giving his theoretical conclusions and generalizations.
Starting with peridotite, he describes hornblende peridotite, devoting con-
siderable time to the schiller structure so often found in all the rocks of
the series, and then augite peridotite (picrite), giving an analysis of the
latter. He takes up each mineral, discussing its general habit and its
special peculiarities in these rocks, and often drawing valuable and schol-
arly comparisons with its occurrences abroad.
His second paper?® is on the norites, which, he says, are by far the most
abundant type in the district and cover the whole township east of the
™*Origin of the Rocks of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXII, 103.
1881.
8 “Note on the Cortlandt and Stony Point Hornblendie and Augitic Rock,” Amer. Jour.
Sei., (3), XXVIII, 384. 1884.
9 ““Peridotites of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (8), XXXI, 26. 1886.
10 “‘Norites of the Cortlandt Series,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXIII, 135, 191. 1887.
16 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES .
railroad. A glance at the map suffices to show the incompleteness of his
knowledge as regards the distribution. He discusses first norite proper ;
then hornblende norite, mica norite, augite norite and finally pyroxenite.
Under mica norite, he describes the “Butler Section,” a cliff in which
norite proper, augite norite and other rocks are arranged in layers. He
ascribes it to ordinary metamorphism. This and similar cases have been
described by the present writer’ and will be discussed in the paper here
contributed. Williams states also in this paper that the emery is a segre-
gation in the norite and discusses in this connection the composition of
the ore as compared with that of Ronsperg, Bohemia. In a later note,*
he gives an analysis of the orthoclase of these rocks, which removes the
suspicion that it may be merely unstriated plagioclase.
Williams’s third paper?’ is on the gabbros and diorites. He states that
the gabbro is a rather rare rock; but adds that it always shows metamor-
phism and always occurs adjoining the limestone, therefrom deducing the
fact that it is a hybrid formed by the action of the norite magma on this
latter rock. He divides the diorites into hornblende and mica diorite.
Under the caption hornblende diorite, he describes in turn brown horn-
blende diorite, hornblendite, green hornblende diorite and mica horn-
blende diorite. He subdivides mica diorite into mica diorite proper,
hornblende mica diorite, hypersthene mica diorite and quartz mica diorite.
In concluding, he states that the series is due to long-continued igneous
action, different types being successively produced which broke through
those already solidified, the more acid types apparently appearing last.
This concludes his petrographic study, and notwithstanding the incom-
pleteness of his knowledge of the distribution and extent of the types, his
work stands as a well-rounded and scholarly investigation. His nomen-
clature is particularly felicitous; in a district of such multifarious differ-
entiations, the free use of mineral prefixes is preferable to the adoption
of a number of new terms. It is greatly to be regretted that Professor
Williams’s untimely death prevented the further prosecution of his work
in the district; a complete study of the magmatic differentiation in the
Cortlandt Series would have been indeed valuable from a petrologist of
his experience and perspicacity.
Consonant with his original plan, having completed his study of the
igneous rocks themselves, he describes their effect on the surrounding
u “Original Gneissoid Structure in the Cortlandt Series,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (4), XXXI,
123: AOE
122 Op. cit., p. 243.
13 ““Gabbros and Diorites of the Cortlandt Series,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXV, 438.
1888.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 17
rocks.1* He here states that the emery may be referred with certainty to
contact action on pre-existent material, apparently abandoning his former
view. In studying the other contact effects, he concentrated on several
linear sections, in the first two of which he describes the succession from
ordinary mica schist to the same rock carrying sillimanite, then to a rock
composed of sillimanite, mica and garnet, and finally to a garnetiferous
mica diorite. Analyses show that the change in the schist is in the direc-
tion of an increased alumina and iron content as the massive rocks are
approached. In the last section of the massive rocks on the limestone, he
finds that lime-bearing hornblende and pyroxene are formed along the
contact. He finally compares the effects here with those in several Euro-
pean localities, showing that a larger number of contact minerals is found
in the Cortlandt than anywhere else. The contact effects were thus shown
to be well developed, a point which will be reverted to in the discussion of
the genesis of the emery.
James F. Kemp,’® in 1888, described the Rosetown extension of the
series; he had also been over the main area under the guidance of Pro-
fessor Williams. This smaller body les about a mile west of Stony Point
and is itself about three quarters of a square mile in extent. It is sur-
rounded by gneiss and encloses a small patch of marble. The rocks them-
selves are all diorites, no hypersthene or olivine having been found in
them. Green augite occasionally assumes importance, but in the main it
is subordinate to the brown and green hornblende. Emery, similar to
that found in the main area, oecurs in these rocks. There is very notice-
able contact action along the borders, and numerous dikes radiate out
into the surrounding rocks. Six analyses are given in connection with
the petrographic description, three of the rocks and three of isolated
minerals.
William H. Hobbs'® has described the Connecticut extensions of the
series in an article which unfortunately is not particularly well known.
Two areas were found by him in the crystalline upland of western Con-
necticut, which resemble the original Cortlandt area both in the abun-
dance of norites and in the elaborate magmatic differentiation; these
constitute the northeasterly extension of the Cortlandt.
The Prospect Hill area, which is the larger and more important of the
two, covers about 40 square miles in the township of Litchfield, although
144“‘Contact Metamorphism produced in the adjoining Mica Schist and Limestone by
the Rocks of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 254. 1888.
15“QOn the Rosetown Extension of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (3),
XXXVI, 247. 1888.
16 Festschrift zum siebzigsten Geburtstage von Harry Rosenbusch, p. 25, Stuttgart.
1906.
18 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
most of the types are found in a small patch about two miles square at
Prospect Hill itself. The igneous rocks are included in highly metamor-
phosed gneiss, quartzite and schist of pre-Cambrian and early Paleozoic
age, so that they are probably post-Ordovician. Along the border, there is
generally a mosaic of block faults. The rocks may carry considerable
percentages of pyrrhotite and chalcopyrite, which are exploited in many
prospect holes known locally as “nickel mines.” Hobbs describes the
rocks as varieties of the following types: gabbroitic. noritic, olivine-
hypersthene gabbroitic, dioritic, peridotitic, pyroxenitic and grano-dio-
ritic. Although his system of nomenclature differs somewhat from that
followed in the present paper, it seems that all of these types are counter-
parts of those found in thé main area. The most salient points of differ-
ence are the abundance of somewhat more basic plagioclase and of chal-
copyrite and pyrrhotite, with the absence of emery, in the Connecticut
areas. Five complete and valuable analyses are given, and the differentia-
tion is very suggestively summarized in a series of Brégger diagrams, In
the smaller, New Fairfield, area, the rocks are all of a dioritic nature,
resembling in this respect the Rosetown, N. J., extension.
From the description given, it is evident that the larger area at least
would warrant close study ; it is to be regretted that the boundaries of the
main districts, and the approximate distribution of the many interesting
types described, have not been more thoroughly worked out.
Charles P. Berkey,** in connection with an exhaustive study of the
geology of the Highlands and the region to’the south, has materially
added to our knowledge of the Cortlandt Series. He has been the first
geologist to map the boundaries; the writer has, of course, gone over the
same ground in connection with this present study, and the results are
entirely concordant. To Dr. Berkey also belongs the credit for the recog-
nition of the acid extreme of the series; the large granite area to the
northeast of the main body was overlooked by both Dana and Williams.
As will be shown later, there is every reason for considering this an inte-
gral part of the series; and if this be so, it completes the line of differen-
tiation from the most acid to the most basic, being thus an important
consideration from a theoretical standpoint. The writer is under great
obligation to Dr. Berkey for this as yet unpublished information.
This, then, constitutes the whole of the work done on the Cortlandt
Series. As will be seen, some of it has been superficial, some ill-directed
and some disproportionately minute. Kemp’s work on the Rosetown
17 “Structural and stratigraphic features of the basal gneisses of the Highlands,” Bull.
N. Y¥. State Museum, 107 (Geology 12). 1907. This paper is the first in connection
with this study and is not concerned with the Cortlandt Series.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES. 19
extension is complete in itself, as is that of Hobbs on the Connecticut
areas ; but as for the main area, the most recent work done on it—that of
Berkey on the boundaries—is what should have been the earliest. Owing
to this somewhat unfortunate reversal, there are several erroneous concep-
tions extant concerning the series; and the writer, while not pretending
to the experience of Dana or the erudition of Williams, hopes in the fol-
lowing pages to give a correct general notion of the rocks as a whole, leay-
ing to later investigators that part of the more specialized work which is
yet undone.
CORRELATION
The correlation of the series is, like that of many such igneous masses,
open to considerable speculation. Evidence of its age with respect to the
surrounding rocks is indubitable; in a number of places, marked contact
action is shown, and on Verplanck’s Point especially a number of igneous
dikes are intruded into the schist and limestone, so that the Cortlandt
series is unquestionably younger. ‘The lower limit, then, is dependent on
the age of the Manhattan schist and the associated Inwood limestone.
There is, however, considerable difference of opinion as regards the
correlation of these rocks. A. C. Spencer’® and his associates regard them
as the metamorphosed equivalents of the Cambrian and Ordovician, which
occur in an unaltered condition north of the Highlands. C. P. Berkey,?®
on the other hand, who has been mapping the Tarrytown and West Point
Quadrangles in the Highlands of New York, finds that the Manhattan
schist and Inwood limestone are separated by unconformities from both
the basement gneiss series below and the Poughquag quartzite above, this
latter representing the base of the Paleozoic. The schist and limestone
are therefore pre-Cambrian.
The Cortlandt Series has been intruded into these rocks and is there-
fore at least later than pre-Cambrian time. Moreover, since the schist
and limestone were strongly metamorphosed, probably in the Green Moun-
tain upheaval, the series must be post-Ordovician. There is no criterion,
however, by which we can fix the upper limit. Van Hise and Leith?°
make the following rather cryptic remark: “The rocks of the Cortlandt
Series (the clastics) of the original Taconic area and of the upper series
of the Adirondacks are of the same age, 1. e., Taconic, or Lower Cam-
18 A, C. SPENCER summarizes his own work and that of W. S. Bayley in New Jersey,
and the work of E. C. Eckel and F. J. H. Merrill in New York, in Bulletin 360, U. S.
G. S., “Precambrian Geology of North America,’ by Van Hise and Leith, p. 634. 1909.
12 Op. cit., pp. 361-378.
2 Op. cit., p. 319.
20) ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
brian.” The writer is not aware of any clastics in the Cortlandt Series.
nor does there seem to be any justification for calling the series Lower
Cambrian. There is a general lithologic similarity with the upper series
of the Adirondacks, but the almost entire absence of metamorphism in the
Cortlandt Series, coupled with the surprising freshness of the olivine
present, are rather strong indications of a considerably later date. The
Triassic trap of New Jersey is so entirely different in structure that the
Cortlandt Series has probably no relationship with it: and from the litho-
logic character of later igneous masses and from the fact that no meta-
morphism has taken place in the East since the Permian, it is practically
certain that the series is not post-Permian. Jkemp’s study of the Rose-
town extension fully confirms this view; he finds** that the rocks here cut
the (Cambrian) Tompkin’s Cove limestone but have not disturbed the
Triassic sandstones. Hobbs’s work in Connecticut is also entirely con-
cordant. The whole expanse of the Paleozoic is, however, open; and
while nothing can be definitely said, it is the writer’s opinion that the
Cortlandt Series is younger than is generally supposed, more probably
late Paleozoic than early Cambrian.
PETROLOGY
In the following descriptions of the various types, the rocks will be con-
sidered in the order of their acidity, and frequent reference will be made
to the large geological map. In the case of the common rock minerals, at
least, an effort has been made to condense as far as possible the mass of
data which has accumulated from the description of the 260 slides exam-
ined and to render the optical descriptions reasonably brief and succinct.
In every case, the fullest description of the various minerals is given
under the important rocks in which they are the most abundant or of
which they are the most typical. Williams, in the papers cited above, has
sometimes given fuller and more minute optical discussions of the min-
erals than is here considered necessary.
PLUTONIC ROCKS
Granite
The granite member of the series lies to the northeast of the main body
and extends from south of the Crompond Road northward to Lake Mohe-
gan. It covers an area of about 3% miles, and throughout its extent it
appears to be very uniform in texture and composition. The exact bor-
2 Op. cit., p. 253.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 21
ders of the area are not, however, susceptible of close determination; a
heavy blanket of drift covers the district and obscures the geology. Out-
crops are few and are generally considerably altered, except when the rock
is artificially exposed. The land surface is on the whole rather flat for a
rock of this character, as compared to the hilly topography southward ;
this may be due to the fact that it lies in the lee of the Highlands, which
would eause an undue accumulation of till at this point, fading away to
the south. The granite is surrounded in general by mica schist, but to
the northwest lies an area of pinkish granitic gneiss, related to the typical
Highland gneisses.
As stated above, the credit for the recognition of this rock as part of
the Cortlandt series belongs to Dr. Berkey. He has as yet published
only a short note on the subject.2* Dana does not mention this area at
all; and since he apparently guided Williams over the country, the latter
likewise overlooked it. Closer work on the geology, however, reveals its
unmistakable relationship with the neighboring basic rocks. Its entire
lack of (megascopic) metamorphism separates it sharply from the sur-
rounding schists and gneisses and places its age as approximately the same
as that of the rocks to the south. It has undergone about the same de-
gree of weathering as have the basic rocks. Furthermore the latter are
frequently penetrated by aplite and pegmatite dikes, which are closely
akin to the granite; these are especially abundant in the northern part of
the basic area. There are, however, apparently no areas of granite in the
latter district ; the acidic flow seems to have been more sharply separated
than the various intermediate and basic facies of the magma. The pene-
tration of the basic rocks by the acidic dikes would seem to indicate that
the acid extreme of the series is the youngest; the chronological and
chemical relations of the various members will, however, be more fully
discussed at the end of the petrographical descriptions.
In the hand specimen, the granite is practically white when fresh,
being made up almost entirely of quartz and feldspar, with very subor-
dinate amounts of muscovite and biotite. The rock is generally weath-
ered at the surface to a faint dirty brownish color, owing to the formation
of epidote. The grain is medium, and the rock is very firm. A number
of specimens were taken from the surface outcrops; several from the
quarries, and one from a diamond drill boring at the 200 ft. level. The
thin sections show that the rock is remarkably uniform in composition,
Quartz, in large angular grains, constitutes in general about one-half the
rock. It shows numerous rehealed cracks but few inclusions. The feld-
2 “The acid extreme of the Cortlandt Series,’ Science, XXVIII, 575. 1908.
92 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
spar, which makes up perhaps two fifths, is generally orthoclase, with
varying amounts of microcline and plagioclase. The extinction angles
of the latter show it to be albite and oligoclase. In all of the sections
examined, the feldspar was considerably altered to kaolin, this being
much more striking than in the other members of the series. Epidote
also occasionally forms in small amount through the feldspar. In the
four thin sections of granite from the quarries, the alteration of the
plagioclase was especially apparent, as was also the case in the rock from
the drill core; in the surface specimens, however, the orthoclase seems to
be the more kaolinized. Several cases of zonal alteration in orthoclase
were noticed. Muscovite occurs in typical habit; the grains vary consid-
erably in size but are seldom as large as the quartzes. It is altered only
in the surface specimens; in these, it is hydrated and appears to yield
damourite. It is usually much more abundant than the biotite. The
latter is seldom entirely fresh and is often altered to chlorite. Horn-
blende is rare, and when found is generally altered. Magnetite is pres-
ent in very small quantity; apatite and zircon are practically lacking.
In the diamond drill hole above referred to, which was sunk to 425 feet
for water at a point half a mile east of Jacob’s Hill, the ordinary white
granite was first encountered ; this changed gradually to a somewhat finer
grained bluish gray-white granite carrying a larger percentage of quartz.
Through this, several streaks of a basic hornblendic segregation, a foot
or so across, were found.
At several points, the granite is quarried as a building stone. The
three cuts to the northeast are known as the Mohegan Quarry, the one
to the south as the Peekskill or Cornell. The latter is the largest; from
it was taken the rock out of which the bulk of the Cornell Dam across
the Croton River was constructed. The granite from the Mohegan
quarry is used as the chief building stone in the Cathedral of St. John
the Divine, in New York City, which when completed will be the fourth
church in size in the world. The stone has also been employed in several
other edifices in the city. While the alteration of the granite is consider-
able, as above described, it is not serious in character; and the rock com-
mends itself on account of the paucity of the dark minerals. The altera-
tion of the small amount of biotite has proceeded as far as it is likely
to; the muscovite and orthoclase are fairly stable minerals; and the
plagioclase is not abundant, while the large amount of quartz insures
the rock against serious alteration. Pyrite and other notably deleterious
constituents are entirely lacking. The rock is firm and easily worked,
although the abundance of joints of all sizes militates against the ex-
traction of large blocks. The actual amount of granite taken out varies,
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 93
of course, with the demand, but it probably greatly exceeds in value the
emery mined to the south.
Syenite.
Syenite constitutes a member whose areal importance is small and
whose existence even is not well defined. Three small patches were
found, two on the borders and one in the interior of the district. The
patch to the north lies between biotite norite and Manhattan schist, as
does also the small area on the southern border; the interior patch is sur-
rounded by hornblende norite.
In all of these areas, the rock is heavy and dark gray, appearing much
more basic than is actually the case. The rock in the northern patch is
very fine grained and micaceous (biotitic), although the mica has no
regular orientation. Some of the feldspar is evidently glassy oligoclase,
while much of it is faintly pinkish. The thin section confirms these ob-
servations; the feldspar is about half oligoclase, slightly kaolinized, and
half orthoclase in larger and more irregular grains, somewhat more
altered than the triclinic feldspar. Slight recrystallization and wavy ex-
tinction are apparent. Several small grains of quartz, giving unmistaka-
ble interference figures, and evidently original, are present. Biotite,
typically developed, is practically the only dark mineral to be seen; green
augite is present in very small quantity. Apatite is abundant in fairly
large crystals, and ilmenite is present in small grains.
In the southern patch, the rock is also fine grained, gray and mica-
ceous. The specimen sectioned was taken from a small quarry at the
juncture of the two roads and looks entirely fresh. In thin section, it
resembles the rock described above, except that the orthoclase is much
more abundant and that there is more quartz. The triclinic feldspar is
oligoclase, as above. There is also a moderate amount of deep green
hornblende and a little pyrite. The amount of alteration, however, is
surprising: the feldspar is somewhat sericitized, and there is a moderate
amount of chlorite and epidote and considerable calcite in small irregular
patches. This rock is evidently much like the rest, although it is a more
typical syenite.
In the interior patch, the rock is similar to the other megascopically,
except that there is less biotite. In thin section, it appears that the
orthoclase is predominant over the oligoclase but that what quartz there
is is secondary. Hornblende is the chief ferromagnesian mineral, but
alteration to scaly chlorite, starting from the center of the crystal, is very
common. The biotite is typical but somewhat altered and is usually
found clustering around the hornblende laths. Pyrrhotite is present in
small quantity and magnetite, ilmenite and apatite in moderate amount.
24. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The syenites are thus a fairly well distinguished group, although that
of the northern area is related to the gabbros and that of the interior is
almost a monzonite. It differs from them chiefly in the prominence of
the orthoclase and in the considerable amount of apatite, this mineral
being present in very small quantity in the typical Cortlandt monzonitie
diorites. There is little of interest about this area, but the location of
the other two between mica schist and biotite norite is very suggestive,
taking into account the similarity between these two widely separated
areas. A discussion of the possibilities of contact action must be reserved
for another portion of this paper, but it may be noted here that if it be
possible for the molten norite magma to act upon the mica schist to form
a rock of normal igneous composition, this third rock would probably be
approximately syenitic, both in chemistry and in mineralogy. No analysis
of the syenite was made; but the analyses of biotite norite and of mica
schist, given below,”* may be compared. Williams** suggested the same
idea with reference to the gabbros, supposing that they always appeared
between limestone and norite. His premises are not altogether correct,
but the general idea can scarcely escape one who has worked on these
rocks.
Sodalite Syenite
Sodalite syenite was found in only one place, and then in a very small
place. It is interesting chiefly from a theoretical standpoint, as the only
representative in the series of the feldspathoid group. Its field relations
are somewhat peculiar. It is located at the north end of the road, imme-
diately east of Lake Meahach, on the contact with the inclusion of quartz
schist found at that place. Starting from the south, we have the sodalite
syenite (whose exact extent is indeterminable, but probably small), then
the schist, then a light colored augite monzonite in a strip about five feet
across, following by schist again. This is cut about 20 feet farther by a
much altered minette dike, three feet wide; beyond this the rock is
largely covered, and the exact contact of the schist on the north is hid-
den. It is thus impossible to say whether the sodalite syenite is a thin
contact strip surrounding the schist or not, although it is certain that it
does occur on the southern border. The significance of the augite mon-
zonite is difficult to perceive; it is not a dike and is therefore probably a
tongue of the country igneous rock projecting into the schist and partly
altered by it.
See pages 61 and 65.
% Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXV, 440. 1888.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 25
The sodalite syenite is a very fine grained black rock, in which biotite
is the only mineral visible. It is somewhat brecciated and is considerably
altered. Under the microscope, the biotite is seen to be subordinate in
amount to a green hornblende, the crystals of which are often dislocated
across the cleavage, leaving cracks filled with an isotropic substance.
There is ‘little orthoclase, moderately altered, and no plagioclase. The
sodalite is fairly abundant, and is typically developed, in rounded iso-
tropic grains, n< 1.54. It has none of the structures of analcite, and
the latter moreover could hardly form in so acid a rock and one in which
the orthoclase is so slightly altered. Somewhat more abundant than the
sodalite is a mineral which seems difficult of identification. It occurs in
grains which are often hexagonal, having a relief of about 1.54 and a
medium (second order) birefringence. It is biaxial positive. Its hex-
agonal outline would suggest some derivative of nephelite, which would
be expected in this association, but it is not cancrinite or any of the other
common alteration products. Thomsonite usually occurs in a more
fibrous form, although except for this, the characters correspond rather
closely. The exact determination of this mineral, however, would hardly
affect the name given the rock, which stands as another suggestive occur-
rence of a zone on the border of the mica schist.
Diorite
The diorites are more important in the western part of the district,
where they cover an area of about two miles. Since Dana and Williams
worked chiefly in this section, the diorites appeared more important to
them than they really are, for, except for this area, they appear only as
small isolated patches. here is one at Pleasantside and another about
half a mile southeast of that place; three along the southern border of
the series, and a confused mass on Montrose Point. On Stony Point,
across the river, they are found. There is also a garnetiferous phase a
mile and a half east of Pleasantside associated with the emery; and dio-
rites, often very micaceous, constitute the immediate wall rock in several
of the emery cuttings on the hill just east-northeast of that village.
As stated above, Williams subdivides the diorites entirely on the basis
of their dark minerals, arriving thereby at brown and green hornblende
diorites, mica-hornblende diorite and mica diorite. He states in this
connection that the brown hornblende diorites tend to pass into norites
and pyroxenites, while those with green hornblende show aspecial affin-
ity for the mica-bearing rocks. These observations are quite correct ;
there is every gradation from a diorite whose sole ferromagnesian mineral
26 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
is green hornblende, to one which carried biotite alone, and in the field,
moreover, the two types are very intimately related. The whole of the
large area of diorite is of this type, except in two places along the contact
of the diorites with the pyroxenites, where the hornblende is brown, the
rock carrying biotite as usual. All of the smaller areas of diorite carry
green hornblende excepting two,—the patch just southeast of Pleasant-
side, which appears to grade into the associated hornblende norite, and
the northern part of the area southeast of Salt Hill, which appears to be
closely associated with the neighboring biotite augite norite, both carry
the brownish variety. This latter patch, however, shows green horn-
blende along its southern margin. Willams’s conception of the affinities
of these two main types, derived from the study of a small portion of the
district, appears to hold therefore for the whole series.
On Montrose Point, the brown hornblende is most plentiful, both in
the hornblende pyroxenites shown on the map and in associated diorites
which are not mapped. The extraordinary complexity of the rocks on
Montrose Point makes the geology impossible of adequate representation,
and it was deemed advisable, therefore, to map merely the most abundant
rock, the pyroxenites. To quote from Williams:*° “These rocks (horn-
blendites) have a glistering black color and are most intimately asso-
ciated with the norites, hyperites, diorites and pyroxenites which also
occur there. No more complicated interpenetration of eruptive rock-
types could possibly be imagined than is displayed at this locality—every
rock includes and forms dikes in every other; and at the same time, every .
type passes by gradual changes in its mineralogical composition into
every other one.” It is here, then, that the brown hornblende is best
developed; and in this wonderfully complicated net-work of rocks, it
grades on the one hand into a biotite augite norite and on the other into
hornblendite and hornblende pyroxenite. In the latter rock, it is espe-
cially well developed and often ar gieedanes basaltic hornblende in color,
birefringence and relief.
An attempt was made by the writer to classify the diorites on the basis
of their feldspar, into monzonites and diorites. In most of the diorites,
the unstriated feldspar constitutes from one third to two thirds of the
whole. Williams states that on a number of tests made on the feldspar,
however, the specific gravity ran from 2.648 to 2.67, which would show
it to be plagioclase of the oligoclase-andesine series. Moreover, the re-
casting of the subjoined analysis of diorite shows that all of the potash
must be in the biotite, although the rock would be called a monzonite,
2 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXV, 441. 1888
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES OY
if all of the unstriated feldspar were considered orthoclase. The peri-
cline twinning is usually, of course, very faint, and much of the osten-
sible orthoclase is probably plagioclase twinned according to this law.
While this analysis shows an exceptionally low percentage of silica,?° it
indicates that the identification of the orthoclase must be attended with
great care and that a subdivision by this criterion would be very hazard-
ous. At the same time, microperthite was noticed in one slide and quartz
in another, so that orthoclase is probably often present.
The diorites in the hand specimen vary greatly in appearance. They
are generally of medium grain, although they vai,;.from almost felsitie
to an extremely coarse rock at Crugers in which the »ornblendes are six
inches long. The transitions in texture are very sudden, although there
appears to be no concomitant change in composition. The feldspar is
usually white, and the rock is then distinguishable in the field, but it is
often a dark gray. The hornblendes are occasionally in slender laths,
though usually in poorly defined grains.
The microscopic features have already been largely covered. The
characteristics of the feldspar have been noted; the plagioclase varies
from oligoclase to andesine, although it may be labradorite when the rock
carries hypersthene. ‘The hornblende is usually green with strong ple-
ochroism: X olive green, Y brownish green, Z brownish yellow, though
X may occasionally become bluish green. It is rarely in laths and never
so when it is of the brown variety. The green variety especially often
carries delicate parallel inclusions, presumably of ilmenite, which re-
sembles somewhat the partings of diallage or enstatite. It alters to chlo-
rite and epidote, and in one instance secondary biotite seemed to have
been formed. The biotite is usually of a deep brown color, apparently
high in iron and showing excellent pleochroism. It may be almost want-
ing and may again almost replace the hornblende. In basal section, it is
nearly opaque. The optical angle is extremely small. It is usually asso-
ciated closely with the hornblende, and they appear to have been crystal-
lized simultaneously. Epidote, apparently original, was found in one
slide as figured by Williams.?7 Quartz is rare but occasionally occurs in
small grains. Magnetite and ilmenite, this last usually the more abun-
dant, occur in ordinary quantity, and pyrite and pyrrhotite are not
rare. Apatite, while sometimes abundant in large crystals, is usually
notably less than in the norites. Garnets are abundant in the locality
noted above.
26 WILLIAMS (Op. cit., p. 444) states that an average of four silica determinations was
53.94 per cent. The particular rock analyzed by the writer is probably abnormally basie,
although, under the microscope, it appeared quite typical.
2 Op. cit., p. 445.
98 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
The chief transition of the diorites is marked by the entrance of hyper-
sthene and enstatite, which leads to the hornblende norites with the de-
crease of biotite and to gabbro and biotite augite norite, with the entrance
of augite. The latter, however, is rare, and in only a few of the diorites
was either of these minerals noticed. In one case, an approach to a
diabasic texture was observed, but this reversal of the normal order is
uncommon.
The alteration of the diorites is a very salient characteristic. Aside
from the ordinary weathering to chlorite, kaolin and epidote, sericite was
noticed in several specimens along the schist contact at the north end of
Lake Meahach. In these rocks, moreover, and in those taken from simi-
lar positions, a very perceptible amount of strain was noticed. The feld-
spars showed pronounced mortar structure and wavy extinction, and the
biotite was twisted and bent. The same phenomena are apparent in less
development in most of the diorite slides examined; either because of
their location, or on account of an inherent weakness in the rock itself,
the metamorphism of this type is more evident than it is in the case of
any other member of the series.
Gabbro
Gabbro is somewhat akin to the last mentioned type, but unlike the
diorite it is areally unimportant. Only one important area was found,
situated on the northern border just to the east of the syenite area there
and lying between the biotite augite norite and the mica schist. Its posi-
tion is thus analogous to that of the syenite, the accompanying norite here
carrying augite, whereas that which adjoined the syenite carried merely
biotite. Moreover, the syenite carries a small quantity of augite, which,
with other characters emphasized below, would seem to indicate its close
genetic relationship with this gabbro. The syenite and gabbro very pos-
sibly adjoin ; but since no outcrops are available for a space of half a mile
between them, it was deemed best to map them as found.
The rock of this area is dark gray and micaceous, closely resembling
the syenite, although the short stout augites may be distinguished on close
examination. The grain is medium fine and the rock quite fresh, al-
though well jointed. In thin section, it appears that the plagioclase is a
basic andesine, but that nearly a third of the feldspar is unstriated and in
rounded irregular grains, indicating orthoclase. The biotite is abundant
and characteristic, with pleochroism from golden yellow to brownish
black. The augite is green, non-pleochroic, and shows extinction angles
from 45° to 50°. In basal section, it shows cleavages at 89° and gives a
good positive axial bar. Only one grain of hypersthene is visible. Apa-
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 29
tite is not very abundant. Several small grains of what seemed to be
quartz were seen.
A small area of a very simple gabbro lies in the extreme southeastern
corner of the district, where it is intimately associated with diorite and
biotite augite norite. The gabbro phase is composed entirely of augite
and feldspar. This rock, or more probably a mixture of the three, was
used for the basement work of the Cornell Dam across the Croton River,
but while the crushing strength was all that could be desired, the abun-
dance of chloritized joints was found to affect seriously the value of the
large blocks required, so that the engineers were finally forced to employ
the granite described above. A large quarry, however, was opened, and
most of it still remains above the level of the lake.
Another type of gabbro is found, however, which is very different. It
occurs in two localities adjoining schist inclusions; one at the north end
of Lake Meahach and the other just west of Montrose. In the field, it
closely resembles limestone, being gray and homogeneous in appearance
and weathering in layers. Under the microscope, it appears that the
rock is made up chiefly of two minerals, feldspar and augite. The latter
is brownish but is non-pleochroic and otherwise typical. Biotite, apatite,
ilmenite and titanite are present in small amount.
The most extraordinary feature of the rock is the amount of shearing
which it has undergone, which far exceeds anything noted elsewhere in
the series. The augite is distributed in bands, in some of which the min-
eral is actually granulated, and these surround “augen” of broken augite
and feldspar. This lenticular effect is visible in the specimen, especially
when polished. The whole rock resembles a badly crushed gneiss, rather
than any of the other members of the Cortlandt Series, and it may pos-
sibly represent one of the inclusions of Highland gneiss which are found
elsewhere in the district. Since, however, it seems to be associated with
the schist inclusion, it is probably a true igneous rock, from the strained
and crushed zone which might be expected to border such a foreign mass,
and movement of the latter just before the consolidation of the igneous
rock may have contributed to this extraordinary crushing.
Norite
The norites are perhaps a trifle more abundant than any other group,
although they do not, as Williams and Dana supposed, constitute the
great bulk of the series. The general norite magma exhibits several
facies, which are distinct rock types and which yet often pass into one
another by insensible gradations. That the classification made upon a
30 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
petrographical basis is not academic is evidenced by the areal distribu-
tion—the various types fall naturally into distinct areas. Their general
distribution is suggestive, for although occasional isolated patches occur,
practically the whole of the norite magma, in its various ramifications, is
confined to the central part of the Cortlandt area, being flanked on the |
west by diorites and pyroxenites and on the east by the latter. At the
north and south, they are often separated from the mica schist by sye-
nites, diorites and gabbro; and if the boundary could be accurately traced,
it is very possible that these or similar rocks would be found continuously
along the margin. .
True norite, which is composed merely of hypersthene and feldspar,
occupies a very peculiar position in the series. It does not appear on the
map, since it never covers an appreciable area; it occurs always as inclu-
sions in the other members of the norite family and generally, if not
always, in those containing biotite. These inclusions are sometimes
streaks and sometimes rounded flow-like patches, and this imparts a very
peculiar appearance to the norites, especially in the northwestern corner
of the area. The inclusions vary in size from a few inches to possibly
forty or fifty feet across, though the smaller ones are the most common.
Absolutely pure specimens are rare, inclusions in which augite and biotite
appear in insignificant amount being the general thing. This pure norite
is found frequently in the district between Spitzenberg Hill and Peeks-
kill, especially along the post-road to the west; at Pleasantside again it is
well developed, and striking cases were also found (see Plate IV, fig. 2)
in the woods a mile south of Spitzenberg. It may occur anywhere in the
biotite-bearing norites, however, and the above cases are merely a few
examples.
The rock is easy to distinguish in the field, since it is always fine
grained. Its color is usually pale pink, owing to the amount of plagio-
clase present, and scattered through this are the black hypersthenes. As
the grain grows coarser, a little biotite and augite may enter, and the
rock conceivably grades into the more complex and coarser norites.
Under the microscope, it appears that the pink color of the plagioclase
is due to the presence of a fine reddish dust, which Williams has figured
and discussed at some length.?* Under a high power, this dust resolves
itself into plates, rods and globulites, presumably of hematite. The
plates may be hexagonal, rectangular or irregular, and they vary in size
up to .01 by .04 mm. The rods are often arranged in rows, forming a
kind of discontinuous needle, but these exhibit no parallelism to any
2 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXIII, 141. 1887.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 31
structure of the feldspar. The globulites are extremely small and are
scattered promiscuously over the crystal, except at the border and on the
margins of the larger inclusions (7. e., the rods and plates, or crystals of:
magnetite) ; and this clear margin moreover varies directly as the size of
the inclusion. This would indicate that they represent the form in
which the iron of the rock first crystallized, many of them combining
later to form the larger inclusions. The inclusions may be gray in color,
then imparting a dark gray color to the feldspar, and they may be so
plentiful that the mineral even in thin section is gray. They are de-
scribed here at some length, because this reddish dust is very character-
istic of the plagioclase in all of the norites and separates it sharply from
that in the gabbros, diorites, syenites and granites. The feldspar in this
rock is usually in a mosaic of small grains, the lamellz of the plagioclase
occasionally showing strain. The variety is usually andesine, as deter-
mined optically (angles 18°-20° on sections perpendicular to (010) and
by specific gravity (2.674, according to Williams). The presence in con-
siderable amount of orthoclase is attested by the analysis and by specific
gravity determination, but the proportion varies greatly in different
specimens. Carlsbad twinning and zonal growth have been noticed.
A description of the hypersthene had best be reserved, since in the pure
norite it is not altogether typical. The pleochroism is generally some-
what fainter than usual, being from pink to light green. The crystals
are usually small and arranged in clusters, and inclusions are few or
wanting altogether. Magnetite and ilmenite are usually present in
smaller amount than in the other norites. Apatite is fairly well devel-
oped. Williams also mentions garnet and pleonaste in specimens collected
at an emery cutting, but these minerals are associates of the ore and are
usually not found elsewhere. A peculiar variety of this rock, in which
the hypersthene has a rather remarkable habit, is found only at the emery
mines and will be described below.
Biotite Norite
Biotite norite is one of the three more important members of the
norite family, covering perhaps three and one-quarter square miles. It
occurs in two large areas and at least three small ones. In the area back
of Montrose Point, a number of small emery pits have been opened. This
patch may possibly be connected with the larger one to the east of the
railroad. One of the other areas is in biotite augite norite in the south
central part of the district and the other in pyroxenite in the extreme
eastern end. It is thus always associated with the other norites, as stated
32 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
A
above, and shows particular relationship with the biotite augite variety.
Williams records it from only one place (along the road to Montrose
Point), which is so small an area that it cannot be mapped.
In the hand specimen, the biotite is, of course, distinguishable, but
these rocks cannot be told from those which carry also augite. The
feldspar often imparts a dark pink color to the rock, but it is as often a
dark gray. The grain is medium, being never very fine or very coarse.
A faint gneissoid structure is occasionally apparent, but the rock is gen-
erally quite massive.
Under the microscope, the feldspar resembles that described under
norite proper. The reddish dust is usually, but not always, visible. The
andesine carries it most frequently; when the plagioclase becomes labra-
dorite, the inclusions are more grayish. The lamelle are sometimes bent
or broken by strain, and secondary twinning is also sometimes induced,
but such a degree of metamorphism is rare. The orthoclase may be al-
most entirely wanting, or it may again make up one third of the feldspar.
It sometimes becomes quite gray from inclusions.
The biotite is present in typical habit; it seems to be a somewhat less
ferriferous variety than is characteristic of the diorites, and the axial
angle is larger. Its pleochroism is X golden yellow, Y dark brown, Z
brownish or greenish black. Rarely the colors are lighter than this. The
biotite is an especially delicate indicator of the amount of strain which
the rock has undergone, but, as stated above, any marked amount is rare.
The hypersthene is, of course, the essential constituent of the whole
norite group. It usually occurs in stout, rounded prisms, which are idio-
morphic unless the ferromagnesian minerals are unduly crowded. In the
finest grained rocks, the crystals are small and often clustered together,
and even in the coarser varieties, the hypersthene is sometimes present in
large aggregates of small irregular grains. Sometimes there is a ten-
dency for the ends to fray out, as it were, and alteration then begins at
this point. The depth of color and pleochroism vary directly with the
amount of iron. Enstatite rarely occurs in the norites; bronzite, with a
fains pleochroism, is more common; but hypersthene, of varying degrees
of pleochroism, color and relief, is the typical orthorhombic pyroxene.
X varies from deep red to reddish yellow or pink; Y from yellowish
brown to dirty yellow or pale yellow, and Z from bright to pale green.
Extinction is, of course, parallel. In basal section, it shows the charac-
teristic crossed prismatic cleavages parallel to (110) ; the pleochroism is
then rather faint, but the figure of the obtuse bisectrix distinguishes the
mineral from monoclinic pyroxene. The fine parting of hypersthene
parallel to (010) is usually well developed, and the characteristic ilmenite
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 33
inclusions are oriented with respect to this. These inclusions are prac-
tically always visible with the high power objective, and they often be-
come very large. They are usually reddish and are seldom opaque, al-
though when abundant they may almost obscure the pleochroism of the
mineral. By reflected light, they exhibit an excellent metallic luster,
resembling that of phosphor-bronze. They are in many cases recti-tri-
angular in shape, but sometimes four-sided and often irregular. Altera-
tion of the hypersthene is fairly common, usually to bastite, which is
then geometrically oriented on the altered pyroxene. Alteration may
begin at the ends, or the bastite may be flecked over the surface of the
erystal. Its color is yellowish green, and it practically lacks pleochroism.
Uralite may occasionally form on the hypersthene; it is distinguished
from the bastite by its pleochroism, deeper color and more fibrous habit.
The opaque mineral in these rocks is chiefly ilmenite, in large irregular
masses, magnetite being usually markedly subordinate. Pyrite is not
uncommon, but pyrrhotite is rare. Apatite occurs in all quantities,
usually in small, well defined rods, but sometimes in large crystals, sev-
eral millimeters long. The crystals show a sharp hexagonal outline in
cross section, with frequently a member of fine parallel rod-like inclu-
sions—so fine in fact that they resemble the parting which is sometimes
developed in corundum parallel (1011). The figure is the same in the
two minerals, and the relief and birefringence seem to be higher in these
apatites than usual. In one roek in which the identity of the mineral
was doubtful, a test for phosphoric anhydride was made, but the high
percentage (2.45) removed all suspicion of its being corundum. ‘This
latter mineral was not noticed in any of the normal igneous rocks of the
series.
In several slides, hornblende (usually light brown) was present in sub-
ordinate quantity, marking a passage to the biotite hornblende norites.
Augite may also enter, to indicate the transitional phase to the biotite
augite norites, but biotite norite appears to be a fairly constant type.
Biotite Augite Norite (Hyperite)
Biotite augite norite is the most important of all the norites, and from
its central position it gives the impression of being the fundamental
norite magma. There are three large areas, two of which are probably
connected as mapped; two smaller ones, one on the west border and the
other on the eastern, and a third located in the pyroxenite area. It also
frequently occurs in the complex on Montrose Point, associated chiefly
with the pyroxenites. Williams’s specimens are taken mostly from this
34 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
locality, although he mentions the western portions of both of the other
areas.
This rock closely resembles the biotite norites, being medium grained
and either dark pink or dark gray. One or two light pink specimens
have been taken, but this variety is uncommon. ‘The rock seldom shows
any metamorphism.
The feldspar is identical with that in the biotite norites, the orthoclase
being present in about the same quantity. The plagioclase is usually
andesine, but in one of the light pink specimens mentioned above, it was
oligoclase, and when the rock is dark gray it may be labradorite. ‘The
hypersthene and biotite occur as described under biotite norite. Green
augite is the other essential mineral in this rock, and it appears to be
closely related to the hypersthene. In shape, the crystals resemble each
other strongly, and the augite often carries inclusions identical with those
occurring in the hypersthene. These are clustered in the center of the
crystal and are often so abundant as to render it dark reddish brown, but
the margin usually is free and retains its clear green color. The color
is about that of the Z ray of the orthorhombic variety. In many cases,
an intimate intergrowth of augite and hypersthene was observed, a patch
of pleochroic hypersthene appearing in an augite crystal, with the cleay-
age and inclusions coincident. The augite may, of course, be distin-
guished by its lack of pleochroism, its extinction angles of 40°-50°, its
higher birefringence and its interference figure in basal section. Both
simple and polysynthetic twinning were occasionally noticed in the same
region, although these are both more common in the pyroxenites. Altera-
tion is similar to that of the hypersthene, except that chlorite and horn-
blende are the common products.
The ferromagnesian minerals constitute in typical specimens from
one-third to one-half the rock, but their mutual proportions vary consid-
erably. The hypersthene makes up usually about one-half, with the bio-
tite and augite in subecual amounts; frequently, however, these will ex-
ceed the hypersthene in quantity. Original hornblende is rather rare.
The apatite may become very abundant in this rock; in one case, the
little rods were so plentiful in the orthoclase as to constitute one-third
or more of its bulk. Ilmenite is much more abundant than magnetite,
and pyrite and pyrrhotite are not uncommon.
The order of crystallization of the ferromagnesian minerals is some-
times hypersthene, augite and biotite, and sometimes hypersthene and
augite, and then biotite. The orthoclase usually crystallizes last of all.
Williams does not recognize this member as a distinct variety; he groups
all of the augite norites together. That the subdivision is a rational one,
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 35
however, is indicated by its areal distribution; and, as remarked above,
it seems to be at once the most common and the most resistant member
of the norite family. It is itself a transition phase from biotite norite
to augite norite; it rarely shows relations with other types.
Quartz Norite
The remarkable rock, quartz norite, was found in only one area, at the
extreme southern point of the series, where it lies between biotite norite
and mica schist. This and similar quartz-bearing rocks were also found
in the emery mines, but the peculiar conditions which undoubtedly gov-
erned the formation of these deposits tend to discredit the occurrence of
such rocks over larger areas, and they will therefore be described in the
economic section of this article. The patch in question might perhaps
be relegated to the same category, as purely a contact development; but
since there is no emery present, and since quartz is known to occur in
other gabbros as a result of purely igneous”® action, it is thought best to
notice it here.
The rock in hand specimen is of a basic, micaceous, brownish gray ap-
pearance. In the slide, the feldspar is seen to make up about one-third
‘of the rock, and about one fifth of it is unstriated. It is distinctly gray
from inclusions and shows somewhat wavy extinction. In the case of
the plagioclase, the twinning is often irregular. The quartz is present in
‘considerable quantity and appears to be undoubtedly original. It is in
fairly large grains, which fill the interstices between the other minerals.
It is often cracked, and these cracks are only occasionally rehealed. The
hypersthene constitutes about one-quarter of the rock. Its color is deep
and its pleochroism strong, and it carries numerous inclusions. It is
altering to bastite and apparently to hornblende also, in places. Only a
few grains of the typical green augite were noticed. The biotite makes
up about one-quarter of the rock; it is typical and somewhat altered, so
that it has a greenish tint. The hornblende is largely secondary, but one
or two (deep green) pieces may be original. Apatite is abundant, and
there is considerable ilmenite and pyrite. Chlorite, bastite, hornblende
and kaolin are the alteration products.
The rock has undergone a small amount of shearing, but the alteration
is probably largely superficial. It appears to the writer that this rock is
2 J. P. IppiInGs, “Origin of Primary Quartz in Basalt,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI,
208. 1888. This paper deals with a somewhat different rock, but quartz norite itself
has been described by TELLPR and vON JOHN, “‘Beitrage zur Kenntniss der dioritischen
-Gesteine von Klausen in Siidtirol,’’ Jahrb. der k. k. geol. Reichsanstalt, XXXII, 589-684.
1882.
36 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
due to a reaction between the mica schist and the biotite norite, although
it is, of course, impossible to explain why the same conditions should have
given rise to the syenite to the west of it or the diorite to the east. That
the quartz in the rock of this little border patch is entirely adventitious
is quite improbable; its rather frequent occurrence in the rocks asso-
ciated with the emery would indicate that certain peculiar conditions
are requisite for its formation and that these conditions had been satis-
fied here.
Augite Norite
Augite norite is a basic and comparatively unimportant facies of the
biotite augite norite magma, having been found in two small patches on
the borders of the latter area and as streaks in pyroxenite on Montrose
Point. The smallest is at Montrose; the other, about half a mile east
of Pleasantside. Its position would thus seem to indicate that it is
merely a local segregation, derived by the loss of biotite. In the hand
specimen, it resembles hornblende norite most closely, since there is no
biotite. The rock is compact, dark gray and of medium grain. Under
the microscope, there is little of note. In the patch at Montrose, there
is a trace of biotite, while the augite and hypersthene are subequal in
amount. There is a remarkable development of apatite in this rock,
sharply crystallized in very large grains. In the rock from the other
patch, there is no biotite; the hypersthene is somewhat less in amount
than the augite, and both are characterized by such an abundance of
inclusions as renders them almost opaque. Bastite, chlorite, epidote
and kaolin are the well-developed alteration products. The streaks on
Montrose Point are similar to the last, except that the plagioclase is
more acid (approaching oligoclase) and the orthoclase abundant, being
about one-third of the feldspar. The hypersthene is light in color and
in pleochroism and is often in small elongated grains. The augite is in
larger crystals, with numerous black inclusions, and there are a few
grains of brown hornblende.
Hornblende Norite
Hornblende norite is the third important member of the norite group.
The bulk of it occurs in the large area to the southwest of Pleasantside;
the rest in a small patch half a mile to the southeast. The former is
entirely surrounded by norites, while the latter is on the edge of the
norite district.
The rock in the hand specimen can usually be identified as a norite by
the pink or (when altered) brownish color of the feldspar. The absence
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 37
of biotite in a norite may generally be taken to indicate this variety.
The identification of the hornblende in the presence of hypersthene is
difficult, owing to the peculiar luster of the latter on cleavages. Occa-
sionally, however, the hornblende occurs in slender black rods, whose
long axes are roughly parallel, when it is unmistakable.
In thin section, the feldspar resembles that of the other norites. The
plagioclase is usually a trifle more basic than in the others, being gener-
ally either a basic andesine or a labradorite. In one case, microperthite
was found, but in another, the plagioclase was almost bytownite. The
orthoclase is perhaps less abundant in hornblende norite, though almost
always present. The hypersthene is usually deep in color and pleochro-
ism. The hornblende seldom resembles that of the diorites, being gener-
ally coarser and of the brownish variety. The greenish tint, is usually
present, however, though faint. The pleochroism is good: X dark
brownish green, Y dark brown, and Z yellow, with the usual absorption
formula. The alteration is to chlorite. Biotite and augite are not in-
frequently present in relatively small amount. Apatite is often found
in great abundance, size and perfection, and ilmenite is also common in
large irregular masses. ‘Titanite is rarely present in moderate amounts.
The order of crystallization exhibited in this rock is often peculiar.
In many cases, the hypersthene, biotite, augite and even plagioclase seem
to have preceded the amphibole, which then occurs in large irregular
plates containing all of the other minerals excepting orthoclase. The
structure then approaches the poikilitic, this term having been coined by
Williams in fact to describe a similar feature in the hornblende of the
hornblende pyroxenites of Stony Point.*° In other cases, the plagio-
clases are outlined by irregular streaks of ilmenite, so that in two respects
a somewhat extraordinary reversal seems to have taken place.
From the frequent presence of augite and biotite in small amounts,
the hornblende norite seems to have its most pronounced relationship
with biotite augite norite. It is, however, most frequently in contact
with this rock. A larger increment of biotite than is usually seen re.
sults in the less common biotite hornblende norite. In the smaller area,
however, it appears to grade into the diorite by loss of hypersthene, the
variety of hornblende being the same in both rocks.
Biotite Hornblende Norite
An area of hornblende norite which carries biotite in addition, hes
just southwest of Dickerson Hill. It may be placed in the same cate-
%0 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXI, 30. 1886.
38 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
gory as the augite norite, both being derived by subordinate change from
a much more important variety. The rock, however, is important as the
connecting link between the norites and the diorites; it finds a further
transitional phase in some of the latter, which carry hypersthene or
enstatite.
The rock is the customary dark gray and is of medium grain. The
feldspar usually constitutes two thirds or more of the rock. It is chiefly
labradorite, there being little unstriated feldspar present. The hypers-
thene is a little more abundant than either the biotite or the hornblende.
The latter mineral is of the brown variety. Apatite is generally abun-
dant, and ilmenite is present in the ordinary amount and habit. Magne-
tite and pyrite are not abundant.
Olivine Augite Norite
Olivine augite norite, which is the most basic of all the norites, has
been found in only one small area, half a mile south of Pleasantside.
It is situated on the border of the norite district, where it adjoins the
pyroxenites. No olivine was noticed in them at this point, although it
may be occasionally present. The rock is evidently a local basic segre-
gation of the biotite norite member.
The feldspar constitutes about three fourths of the rock and is almost
entirely plagioclase, of the andesine-labradorite series. Of the dark
minerals, green augite is somewhat the most abundant; it is occasionally
intergrown with the hypersthene and always contains the olivine. The
latter may be in large masses, or again it occurs in small grains. It is
always strongly cracked, but it is less altered than would be expected.
What alteration there is has formed chiefly antigorite; there is little
separation of magnetite. This makes up about one fourth of the ferro-
magnesian minerals, and the hypersthene, which has begun to alter to
bastite, nearly one third. There is a little biotite, generally in small
flakes. Ilmenite, magnetite and apatite are not abundant.
Hornblendite
Hornblendite is not common, being known in four small areas only.
One is located at the northern end of Lake Meahach, another a mile
south of Montrose; these are both in the main diorite area, and there is
little question as to their derivation from the diorites by local segrega-
tion, due to loss of feldspar. The others are in the pyroxenite district,
located respectively about a mile east and half a mile west of Dickerson
Hill. The latter appears to be an altered pyroxenite, the hornblende
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 39
having been derived by paramorphism from augite. In the former area,
the coarse green hornblendes often contain patches of altered but still
recognizable augite, and these are undoubtedly secondary; but some of
the hornblende may well be original. If this be so, the primary rock
was a hornblende pyroxenite. Finally, hornblendite occurs in the net-
work on Montrose Point, apparently there also derived by paramorphism
from pre-existing pyroxenites. These two modes of origin thus appear
to have both been operative in the formation of the hornblendites.
The rocks are easily recognizable in the hand specimen; they are
usually medium coarse in grain and glistening black in color, with prac-
tically no white minerals. In the rock of the first patch referred to (at
Lake Meahach), there is a little feldspar present, less than one-fifth of
the rock; a small proportion of it is unstriated. The hornblende consti-
tutes the great bulk of the specimen; it is pleochroic from yellow to dark
brownish green in some cases, while in others it is distinctly brown,
with a very small extinction angle. These two varieties may occur to-
gether in a single specimen. Sometimes the magnetite inclusions become
so abundant, especially in the green variety, that all light is shut off ex-
cept at the margin of the crystal. Hypersthene may be present in small
amount and biotite in larger quantity. The grain of the rock in this
area changes very suddenly from coarse to unusually fine.
In the area south of Montrose, the rock is similar to the above. The
hornblende is always brownish green, with extinction averaging about
20°. Biotite is a trifle more abundant and occurs as aggregates of crys-
tals in the hornblende. Irregular masses of pyrite and pyrrhotite are
common. Calcite has developed to some extent.
In the more westerly of the two other areas, the rock is much the
same, but the brown hornblende is apparently pseudomorphic after au-
gite, and traces of the latter may still be seen. There is a moderate
amount of biotite and several distinct alteration products, such as chlo-
rite, calcite and quartz. There is no feldspar.
The structure in the easternmost area has been described; the horn-
blende is sometimes in large coarse green crystals, and sometimes in a
confused lighter green mass, which is partly chlorite. The remnants of
the augite may still be seen.
The process of paramorphism is thus clearly indicated, and there can be
no doubt that this is the common mode of origin of the hornblendites.
In the two areas in the diorite, this is by no means impossible, since
pyroxenite is apt to occur around inclusions in the main body of igneous
rocks, and these two patches are both near inclusions. There is shown,
however, in the writer’s suite of specimens from this district, a fairly
40 ANNALS NEW YORK ACAD#MY OF SCIENCES.
complete gradation from a very feldspathic diorite to one in which the
feldspar is distinctly subordinate to the ferromagnesian minerals; the
hornblendites, moreover, resemble diorites in their sudden changes in
grain, so that on the whole these two areas may best be regarded as basic
segregations.
Pyroxenite
Pyroxenites form the most basic group found in the Cortlandt area,
with the exception of an occasional specimen in which olivine runs over
one-third and which may thus be classed as peridotite. Williams classifies
all rocks containing olivine as peridotite and devotes the whole of his first
paper to this group; most of them are considered by the present writer
under the heading “Olivine Pyroxenite,” below. The hornblende pyrox-
enites form a distinct group which Williams does not consider at all,
per se. He merely mentions, moreover, the pyroxenites proper, which, as
will be seen from the map, constitute nearly one-fourth of the whole
series, and are thus the most important single rock type of all. They
may be considered first.
Under this head are included all those rocks which consist almost en-
tirely of pyroxene, whether it be monoclinic or orthorhombic. As a
matter of fact, nearly all of them contain both of these minerals, and only
occasionally would there be any warrant for calling a-specimen augite
rock or hypersthenite. Enstatite is quite common, moreover, and in one
case what is probably hedenbergite was found, so that a multiplicity of
names may be avoided by considering the pyroxenites as one group; and
the field distribution seems to indicate that this is a rational procedure.
The pyroxenites may be conveniently described under two heads, accord-
ing as the color of the monoclinic pyroxene in thin section is pink or
white, or green.
White pyroxenite, in which the augite is a light pinkish or greenish
white, is by far the commoner variety. It occurs as mapped on Montrose
Point (although the numerous other rocks which interpenetrate there are
not indicated) and constitutes the bulk of the large area to the east. The
patches of pyroxenite at Buchanan and just west and south of Montrose
are also of this variety,** and it was only in the first two of these that the
pinkish augite was noticed. By the entrance of olivine, it becomes the
olivine pyroxenite of the series; and it may be noted here that while the
areas in which the olivine is segregated are probably fairly definite, they
are at the same time probably not as well defined as depicted on the map.
%. The “fine black rock’”’ which Dana describes as usually associated with the ‘limestone
areas” is merely a fine pyroxenite.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 41
All of the important emery developments are located in the eastern
pyroxenite area, although a local development of a more acid rock often
constitutes the immediate wall rock.
These rocks cannot be distinguished megascopically from those carrying
small amounts of olivine, but their general identity as pyroxenites is at
once apparent. When fairly fresh, they are dull black; upon moderate
alteration, they assume, in many cases, a reddish brown color, and
strangely enough when badly altered, they become gray and look like an
entirely fresh rock. The reddish rock is common in the region around
Salt and Dickerson Hills; the gray, farther to the east. They always
retain their toughness, but the rock, especially when it contains olivine,
will often disintegrate under the hammer, rather than break. That the
rock is the most resistant in the series is evidenced by the fact that the
two highest hills in the county (Dickerson and Salt Hills) are composed
of it. Very perfect jointing is often developed in the pyroxenite. The
grain varies greatly but is generally medium fine. In the district just
west of Dickerson Hill, however, it becomes very coarse, containing crys-
tals of hypersthene and diallage one inch or more long and frequently
masses as large as one’s fist; and this coarse facies occurs in other places
also.
Under the microscope, it is seen that the bulk of the rock is generally
made up of a light colored pyroxene, which is probably augite (fassaite).
It is a uniform light greenish gray in color, with extinction of 42°-45°
in the vertical zone (in diopside Zac= 38°). The alteration, moreover,
is usually to antigorite or to brown hornblende or chlorite, so that too
much FeO is indicated for a diopside. Furthermore, the analyses indi-
cate a mineral carrying 2 to 4 per cent. Al,0,, so that it seems to be an
augite. The mineral sometimes occurs in idiomorphic grains, but it is
ordinarily in an entirely allotriomorphic condition. The grains are some-
times clear and coarse, and sometimes exhibit the fine parting of diallage
(generally parallel to 100) in great perfection. They often carry a
notable amount of fine black rod-like inclusions, which are very different
from the inclusions in the green augite of the norites, although occa-
sionally the latter are found and constitute a typical diallage. Simple
and polysynthetic twinning are common, and the latter especially reaches
a high degree of perfection in these rocks. The other and much less
common variety is similar in every respect excepting color; this is a
light brownish pink, with very faint pleochroism. Its color is very pos-
sibly due to TiO,, but the rock containing this mineral appears to be
intimately associated with the normal variety. The alteration of the
augite is almost always perceptible and often far advanced; the common
49 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
products being antigorite and brown hornblende, or more rarely chlorite.
The light green antigorite forms in a confused fibrous mass over the
original mineral, the alteration starting from the border of the crystal.
The antigorite may form in considerable amount before the polarization
of the augite is destroyed. The brown hornblende forms in sharply de-
fined masses along the cleavage rocks, in strong contrast to the antigorite.
Calcite and quartz are accessory products.
The orthorhombic pyroxene in these rocks is less ferriferous than in the
norites. Hypersthene in rather small rounded grains set in the augite,
and less altered than that mineral, is nearly always present. Its color and
pleochroism are usually not strong, however, and it grades into bronzite
and enstatite by a loss of iron and a concomitant decrease in refringence
and birefringence and in the optic angle about Z. These colorless varie-
ties are difficult of distinction from the white augite in plane polarized
light, but under crossed nicols, of course, the orthorhombic symmetry
becomes evident. Like the augite, the enstatite is usually (but not al-
ways) allotriomorphic. Fine parting is generally well developed, and
the characteristic small inclusions, regularly arranged, are common.
The rock is usually at least half made up of the augite, although the
proportions of the monoclinic and orthorhombic pyroxenes vary greatly.
Sometimes an almost pure enstatolite will be developed; pure augite rock
is known, but hypersthenite is rare. The most common type consists of
augite to the extent of from one half to two thirds, with hypersthene and
enstatite—the latter usually the more abundant—for the other chief con-
stituent. Hornblende in small quantity, and generally basaltic, is very
common, especially in the Montrose Point area. Biotite is rarely present.
Traces of feldspar, chiefly unstriated, are not uncommon. Apatite is
practically absent. The chief ore is pyrrhotite; pyrite and chalcopyrite
are less common; ilmenite and magnetite are always present, usually in
small quantity, and chromite is known.
Green pyroxenite was found in only one patch, where it adjoins and
probably surrounds a limestone inclusion. It is located on the post-road
between Montrose and Buchanan. The available outcrops were all very
near the contact, the rock being greenish black and felsitic. Under the
microscope, it appears that the great bulk of the rock is composed of an
apple-green pyroxene in small crowded grains. The extinction angles run
from 30°-38°. In basal section a somewhat eccentric bisectrix figure is
obtained. The refringence is a trifle higher than usual in a pyroxenite,
and the birefringence lower. Pleochroism is more distinct in some grains
than in others, though it is nearly always visible; when most distinct X is
pale brownish, Y pale green and Z apple green, or X may be pale green.
ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 43
Some of the larger grains show almost colorless centers. The cleavage is
always coarse, and there is little suggestion of a diallage parting ; in basal
section, the cleavages intersect at 87°. p > v. It appears from these
characters that the mineral is a member of the diopside series, probably
salite or hedenbergite, or possibly (from the pleochroism) a lime dial-
lage. Titanite is scattered through the rock rather plentifully in small
wedge-shaped grains. Very small grains of what is probably wernerite
are not uncommon, and there is a very little quartz. Opaque minerals
are almost lacking.
The peculiar combination of minerals in this rock indicates that its
relation with the associated limestone is very close. All of them, except
the very small amount of quartz, are lime minerals, and all of them may
be contact minerals. There is little doubt that the rock represents a clear
case of contact between limestone and probably diorite; and similar,
though entirely abnormal, mixtures are not uncommon in the district and
will be described below.
Hornblende Pyroxenite
Pyroxenites containing sufficient amounts of hornblende to place them
in this class are most common on Montrose Point, although two other
small areas exist: one just south of Salt Hill, and the other two miles
north of the first. Williams describes this class only in their peridotitic
phase ; they are then most abundant on Stony Point, though known in the
extreme eastern end of the main area. The hornblende pyroxenites have
originated in all the cases examined by local increase of hornblende in the
typical pyroxenite described above, although conceivably a partial para-
morphism of the pyroxene would give rise to a similar rock.
These rocks cannot be distinguished in the field unless, as is often the
case, the hornblende occurs in very large individuals with the other min-
erals imbedded in it. This is the type development of the poikilitic struc-
ture which led Williams to coin the term. The hornblendes may reach
three or four inches in width, and their glistening black surfaces, inter-
rupted by small included grains, is an unmistakable feature. On Mon-
trose Point, however, this structure is often lacking entirely, the horn-
blende having crystallized simultaneously with the other minerals.
Under the microscope, the proportions of the various minerals are seen
to vary considerably, according to the degree of completeness which the
segregation of hornblende has attained. The typical greenish gray augite
is always present and may constitute as much as two thirds of the rock.
Hypersthene, often in the beautifully pleochroic clear rounded grains,
44 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and enstatite are present as stated under pyroxenite. Small amounts of
olivine may be present, but if at all important the rock is classified as
olivine pyroxenite. Calcite, quartz, chlorite, antigorite and hornblende
may occur as alteration products; and in one more acid variety, contain-
ing some feldspar, zoisite was found, typically developed. The horn-
blende is the essential constituent in this class, making up from one third
to two thirds of the rock, and yet it seems to differ in the various patches.
. It is usually of the basaltic variety, rich brown in color, and pleochroic
from dark to light brown. The refringence and birefringence are higher
than in the green variety, and the extinction angle is smaller. It is this
variety that usually gives rise to the poikilitic structure; it seems gen-
erally to have crystallized last. In one specimen, the hornblende was
apparently basaltic but had become a pale brown, and the crystals were
often decolorized in the center. Again it may be of the coarse greenish
brown variety which is characteristic of the hornblende norites, so that the
hornblende pyroxenites do not seem to be a very well defined member of
the series.
Olivine Pyroxenite
Olivine pyroxenite forms the last class of any importance; rocks in
which the olivine runs over one third and which are then classed as perido-
tites, are rare. They seem to occur, moreover, in the centers of the areas
of olivine pyroxenite; and since they merely mark the culmination of the
segregational process which has led to the formation of these areas, it was
thought unnecessary to differentiate them on the map. As stated above,
the areas occupied by the chrysolitic rocks are rather vaguely defined, and
owing to the difficulty of distinguishing these rocks in the field, their
extent on the map is only as close an approximation as could be attained
by collecting and sectioning a large number of specimens.
The weathering of the olivine rocks is beautifully shown in the two
eastern areas. The decay of the olivine causes a disintegration of the rock
into a coarse red sand, whose fragments are the grains of augite and
hypersthene. This is much prized as road metal, and it is used exten-
sively through the eastern part of the district. It is in effect a fine, re-
sistant, homogeneous gravel, found ready crushed and sifted, and is excel-
lent as a road covering. It is not, however, of like benefit to the farmer,
being too ferriferous to be fertile. On the hills, it favors especially a
peculiar flora, with an abundance of such trees as cedar and hemlock.
The topography of this region is rather striking, there being numerous
rounded hillocks, whose shapes are due to the melting away of the rock
masses which compose them. These ledges when artificially exposed show
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 45
their peculiar softened shape, with rounded masses often projecting high
above the general level of the rock. This is well shown at Chase Corners,
just northwest of Dickerson Hill, as pictured in Plate III, fig. 1; the
effect is rather striking, when it is recalled that the other rocks of the
series are usually found planed smooth by glacial action.
As above stated, these rocks resemble in general aspect the pyroxenites,
although closer examination may reveal the small yellowish green grains
of olivine. It is only in thin section, however, that the rock may be ac-
curately studied. The proportions of augite (usually the gray variety,
but occasionally the pink), enstatite and hypersthene vary as recorded
under the pyroxenites; almost pure olivine-augite rocks and olivine-
hypersthenites are known. MHornblende, usually basaltic, is a fairly con-
stant component, though it seldom occurs in important amount. The
olivine is present in amounts varying from one-fifth to one-third of the
rock. It occurs in typical grains, usually rounded, but sometimes ex-
hibiting a distinct crystal outline. Usually besides these large grains
(which may reach 3 mm. in size), there are numerous little ones scattered
throughout the augite. The mineral is colorless but often carries magne-
tite inclusions in the form of minute rods; this feature is, however, better
developed in the peridotites of Stony Point. The alteration is exhibited
in all stages. Sometimes the mineral is nearly all serpentinized, with
only occasional little bullets of olivine remaining, while again it may be
almost perfectly fresh, even when strongly cracked, and when the augite
shows distinct alteration. The characteristic mesh structure is always
developed on alteration. The product is, of course, serpentine. Antig-
orite is the most common variety, chrysotile is somewhat more rare and
bowlingite less frequent. Magnetite separates out in varying quantity.
According to Williams, whenever the mineral comes in contact with feld-
spar a diopside-actinolite reaction-rim is formed, such as he has figured ;**
but feldspar has not been found in contact with the olivine in the rocks
of the main area, so that this effect is not a common one. A similar
phenomenon, between olivine and biotite, is described and figured below.
Peridotite
Peridotites are merely exceptionally basic phases of the rock last de-
scribed; and their relations to that type have already been discussed.
They do not differ in any respect except the proportion of olivine; this
mineral, however, in several cases constituted about three fifths of the
rock, and in one instance was almost unaltered, though badly cracked.
% Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXI, 35. 1886.
46 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES .
These cases were all found in the two eastern areas, although less pro-
nounced ones occur in the Montrose Point district. All of these rocks
would be classed by Williams as augite peridotites (picrites) which he
thought occurred in the highest development on Montrose Point. He
describes at considerable length another group from Stony Point, how-
ever, which is.not typically represented in the main area—the hornblende
peridotites. The nearest approach to these rocks is to be found in the
hornblende pyroxenite area on the south side of Montrose Point; but
these contain olivine to the extent of more than one-third only exception-
ally. Oddly enough, however, Williams, who, after all, studied only a
small part of the whole area, felt that they were so important a member
of the Cortlandt Series that he proposed the name “Cortlandtite” for
them, and rocks consisting of olivine
and hornblende are now widely
known by this name.
A rather extraordinary rock, some-
what analogous to the so-called cort-
landite, does, however, occur in a
small patch on the extreme eastern
edge of the series. This in the hand
specimen exhibits the poikilitic
structure par excellence, but biotite,
instead of hornblende, is the host.
This occurs in individuals often sey-
eral inches across (although by rea-
son of the abundance of the included
minerals, it makes up somewhat less
than one-third of the rock), and under the microscope it is extraor-
dinary for the abundance of its inclusions. These are of a sharp,
brownish black substance, probably magnetite, and are so abundant in
the center of the grain as to render it opaque, but the periphery and a
margin around each included olivine is entirely clear. On the extreme
edge of the biotite in the latter case, however, there is a narrow band of
magnetite grains, and surrounding, or nearly surrounding, the olivine is
a wider zone of pale green pyroxene in rectangular blocks (fig. 1). This
appears to be a reaction rim, although the pyroxene zone is not entirely
universal. Basaltic hornblende, without inclusions, is fairly abundant,
and hypersthene and enstatite make up nearly one-third of the rock.
The olivine is also present in about this amount; white augite is almost
lacking. Alteration is apparent, but is not severe.
As the culmination of the basic development along this line, we have
Fig.1. Poikilitic Relation of Biotite
and Olivine in Peridotite. Sl. 166
ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 47
several occurrences of serpentine. These are probably generally, if not
always, dikes and they will be described under that head. They always
occur in the pyroxenite area, however, and may represent local segrega-
tions of olivine. They would thus once have been dunites, since only
serpentine, showing mesh-structure, is contained in them. If they are
genetically related to the peridotites, however, it is difficult to under-
stand their complete alteration; and while their field relations cannot be
definitely established, they may be provisionally considered as dikes.
DIKE ROCKS
Dikes are fairly common through the district and are usually small ;
and the following list is therefore probably by no means complete. Aside
from those within the area itself, an excellent development of chiefly
basic varieties occurs on Verplanck Point, where the dikes ramify into
the limestone and schist. The abundance of pegmatite dikes in the north-
ern part of the district has already been remarked. The complex of rocks
on Montrose Point, in which, as Williams says, “each rock includes and
forms dikes in every other” is interpreted as a case of true differentiation,
rather than as a network of dikes; and the rocks have therefore been
considered above. A careful study of the dikes of the series with regard
to their mutual time relations would probably be of great value in indi-
cating the relations of the plutonic types; for if the dikes had followed
the laws which govern their successive differentiation in other districts,
it might be inferred that the plutonics had done the same.
A plite
The aplite dikes are usually small and not especially common. They
occur chiefly north of Pleasantside. They are, of course, fme grained and
consist of muscovite, orthoclase and quartz, with small amounts of plagio-
clase and biotite and with zircon and magnetite as the common acces-
sories. They are, perhaps, slightly more acidic than the granites, but
their composition does not differ greatly from the latter.
Pegmatite
Pegmatite is probably the most common dike rock of all. It was no-
ticed especially in narrow veins or dikes in many of the more northerly
emery cuttings. The pegmatitic structure is generally well developed, and
the component minerals are as usual. The largest and most striking
occurrence of the rock appears about 200 feet south of Montrose station,
48 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
where a large irregular mass outcrops on the west side of the railroad.
Its relations are rather obscure, and its size if fully exposed would prob-
ably be about 60 to 80 feet, but there can be little doubt as to its identity
as a dike. Occasional blotches of a fine grained gray substance are in-
cluded in it. The true pegmatitic structure is not well shown, this name
being applied because of the coarseness of its texture. About 30 feet to
the south lies one of the schist inclusions described below; between the
two the country rock (biotite augite norite) is altered to a diorite, some-
what gneissoid, but this is probably due to the schist rather than the
pegmatite.
Dacite Porphyry
The very remarkable rock, dacite porphyry, is known from only one
locality, viz., about 300 feet up the hill east of Montrose station. It out-
crops in the gutter of the road for about ten feet (though it may be traced
for 75 feet), and this outcrop is about three feet wide. By differential
weathering, it projects about three feet above the ground, and its jointing
and its white color, combined with its odd position, cause it to look at a
glance exactly like a stone wall. In thin section, the rock is seen to be
composed of a moderate number of large idiomorphic feldspars set in a
mosaic of quartz and feldspar grains. The phenocrysts are almost never
striated, but Williams** states that all of the feldspar of the rock has a
specific gravity of 2.63-2.67, so that it must be oligoclase and andesine.
The phenocrysts never show resorption, but usually exhibit beautiful
zonal growth. The quartz is all in the groundmass, and some of the
small feldspars are striated and seem to be oligoclase. Biotite, hornblende
and muscovite, some of the latter probably damourite, but not all, occur
in rather small quantity. In the groundmass, the grains often appear to
be interlocked, as though the rock were a kind of augen gneiss, but the
perfect outlines of the phenocrysts and the distribution of the muscovite,
as well as the field relations, preclude this.
Dioritic and Gabbroic Dikes
Various types of the dioritic lamprophyres constitute by far the most
common group of dike rocks. They are especially abundant on Verplanck
Point, although found quite abundantly elsewhere, especially through the
southern part of the district. The different types, of course, exhibit no
preference for any particular plutonic rock. Only in the limestone on
83 WILLIAMS Calls this rock a bed of porphyritic quartz mica diorite, (Amer. Jour. Sci.,
(3), XXXV, 446. 1888.) and Dana a granitoid micaceous quartzite (Idem, XX, 218).
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 49
Verplanck Point was any contact metamorphism observed: here the dikes
are gabbroic (camptonite), and cause the formation of diopside, actino-
lite or hornblende and pleonaste in the limestone. Only occasionally is a
typical minette, vogesite or kersantite found; usually the orthoclase and
plagioclase, and the biotite and hornblende, are subequal in amount,
Green augite has been found only in the dikes on Verplanck Point, where
they radiate into the limestone; these, however, are typical camptonites.
Furthermore, there is seldom any serious alteration, such as is described
by Rosenbusch in the type lamprophyres, although this is a less essential
feature. Minette has not been found typically developed: the usual
variety is a basic one and might almost as well be called either of the
following. Vogesite is quite typically developed in a number of places;
the orthoclase constitutes two thirds or more of the feldspar, and horn-
blende, which is usually greenish brown, though sometimes green, is dis-
tinctly predominant over the biotite. Augite, however, has been seldom
found in them. Kersantites, though not typical, are found abundantly
on Verplanck Point, and also on Montrose and Stony Points. They are
merely fine grained mica diorites with considerable hornblende. Camp-
tonite occurs on Verplanck Point, as stated above. The classification of
these rocks according to Rosenbusch is thus a difficult matter, and they
had best, perhaps, be regarded as dioritic and gabbroic dikes.
Hornblendite
Only two dikes of hornblendite were found, one on Verplanck Point,
in limestone, and the other in one of the emery pits on the hill east of
Pleasantside, in diorite. In both cases, the rock was composed almost
entirely of bright green hornblende, with a very subordinate amount of
biotite. Apatite, which is ever-present in the diorite dikes, is practically
lacking.
Serpentine (Peridotite)
Three outcrops of serpentine (peridotite) were found, one two miles
east of Montrose, another four, and the third about half a mile farther.
The first is in hornblende norite; the others in olivine pyroxenite. The
first and last are undoubtedly dikes, the former three feet wide and the
latter about ten feet. The second outcrops on an old log road southeast of
Dickerson Hill, and its relations cannot be definitely determined. If a
dike, it must be at least twenty feet wide. In all three cases, the rock is
greenish black, fairly soft and strongly jointed. In the first case, the
structure of the serpentine is hard to work out. There are traces of
50 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
typical mesh-structure, though most of it has neither the antigorite nor
the bastite habit. It most resembles the former, however, and a hypers-
thenite dike so completely altered would be a curiosity. There is also a
small amount of sericite, quartz and biotite. In the other cases, the
typical antigorite or mesh-structure, indicating the former presence of
olivine, permeates the whole rock. Traces of altered white augite are
still visible; but the rock was evidently almost entirely olivine. In all
three cases, a considerable amount of magnetite is present.
ABNORMAL CONTACT ROCKS
The true igneous character of the series is proved by the frequent
presence of contact action. This usually occurs along its borders, but
several very peculiar and abnormal developments are to be found within
the area itself which can only be explained by considering them as due to
the contact action on the inclusions which are fairly common in the
western part of the area.
Williams* has given such a minute description of what seems to be the
characteristic type of border contact action that it would be superfluous
to describe in detail the work which the writer has done along the same
line. The general result seems always to be that the mica schist increases
in alumina content as the massive rocks are approached; and this is
attended by the formation of such aluminous minerals as staurolite,
sillimanite, cyanite and garnet. A very striking feature, and one whose
importance will be emphasized later, is the great increase in the amount
of biotite, which at a point ten yards from the contact at Crugers consti-
tutes the bulk of the schist; and magnetite is thickly scattered through
the mica. Contained in the diorite itself at this point are numerous small
schist inclusions, and these in like manner furnish excellent opportunity
for the study of contact action. They are largely changed to pleonaste
and corundum in some cases; in others to quartz; in others to staurolite
and green mica. The first case resembles the emery from the mines very
closely.
Along the limestone contact, which exists only on Stony Point and at
Verplanck, contact action of a different kind has taken place. The com-
mon minerals developed are usually pale green amphibole and pyroxene ;
more rarely titanite, zoisite and scapolite are formed (these last were
observed on Stony Point). Similar effects have been recorded by Kemp
from the Rosetown area,** where the limestone contact is especially well
shown.
% Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 254. 1888.
= Op. cit., p. 252.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 51
The writer has observed several other instances, however, which would
seem to merit description. The pale-green pyroxenite recorded above, .
occurring on the border of a limestone inclusion, is undoubtedly a contact
facies, and may be recalled in this connection.
Wernerite Schist
Wernerite schist is found in a small patch at the cross-roads on Mon-
trose Point, lying in the pyroxenite area. It has been only partly ex-
posed by the excavation of an old clay pit at this point, but it probably is
not more than several hundred feet long, extending northeast. In the
field, it is distinctly gneissoid in appearance, the black bands being very
distinct. It is very tough and has been planed off into a series of roches
moutonnées, so that it is hard to sample. Under the microscope, it is
seen to be made up of scapolite, pyroxene, titanite, calcite and pyrite.
The scapolite seems to be wernerite, and the appended analysis as recast
indicates that it is Me, Ma,, which is a very calcareous wernerite. The
mineral gives conclusive tests. It makes up almost three fifths of the
rock. Associated with it is the calcite, which is very subordinate in
amount. The pyroxene is similar to that found in the green pyroxenite
described above, except that the grains are less crowded and have a pris-
matic shape. They are regularly aligned, and impart the gneissoid ap-
pearance to the rock. The pyrite and titanite are very variable in amount,
occasionally becoming quite abundant. Since all of these minerals have
been observed on the limestone contacts, there is little doubt that this
patch represents an entirely absorbed inclusion of limestone. It is pos-
sible, of course, that the limestone is still present, though concealed, but
the rock described exists over a zone 75 feet wide, at least.
Lying between this rock and the pyroxenites, in several places at least,
a typical diorite is to be found.
On Verplanck Point, just west of the brick yards, and about 200 feet
from the schist contact, a pyroxenite exists whose peculiarities might be
taken to indicate a similar history. The rock is very hard and black,
although in thin section a surprising amount of alteration is revealed.
There is considerable pinkish augite in the rock, which appears to have
altered largely to a greenish hornblende. Wernerite is present to the
extent of nearly one third,-in large and small grains.** Calcite is less
abundant, and in part at least, it is derived from the augite. There are
also biotite, apatite and plagioclase in small amounts. Although no
limestone is visible near this rock, the wernerite would point to an in-
cluded patch which had been partly or wholly absorbed.
36. C, CALKINS (Science, XXIX, 946. 1909.) notes the occurrence of “primary”
sscapolite in igneous rock, but also concludes that it is due to the absorption of limestone.
52 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Garnet Rocks
On the southern border of the district, along the road at the foot of
Salt Hill, is found a contact facies of very interesting composition. The
outcrops are badly cracked and jointed, and the rock is friable and stained
brown along these cracks. When fresh, two varieties may be distin-
guished, one pink and the other an ash gray, these two occurring within
30 yards of each other.
The former variety is of about the color of rhodonite; it is fine grained,
but is thickly penetrated by flat gray tremolite rods. Under the micro-
scope the pink mineral, which makes up more than half the rock, is seen
to be garnet. It is practically colorless and always isotropic and is prob-
ably grossularite. The tremolite*’ is typical and constitutes nearly one
third, and quartz makes up the rest. Rutile, in small sharp grains, with
very high relief and birefringence, and a deep yellow color, is quite com-
mon. This rock is thus probably derived from an impure limestone, or
possibly a calcareous schist, and presents an interesting contrast to the
wernerite rock. The abundance of titanic oxide present is a curious
feature in the contact metamorphism of the limestones; either as ilmen-
ite, titanite or rutile, it appears to be always present, whereas iron and
alumina are more typical in the case of the mica schists.
The gray rock in thin section is resolved chiefly into quartz and garnet.
The latter is identical with that in the last, except in its color in mass.
The most interesting and suggestive thing about this rock is the presence
in rather small amount of both corundum and pleonaste; and magnetite
is, moreover, thickly scattered over the slide. Notwithstanding its pro-
pinquity to the previous phase, the aluminous character of its components
seem to indicate derivation from a mica schist rather than a calcareous
rock.
The very abnormal developments which are associated with the emery.
may or may not be contact rocks; they had best be described, therefore,
in conjunction with the emery.
INCLUSIONS
Inclusions** of schist (and occasionally of limestone and gneiss) have
been alluded to frequently in the previous pages; they are quite abundant
37 KHMP mentions an analogous rock from the border of the Rosetown extension, com-
posed entirely of tremolite (Op. cit., p. 252.).
88 Accidental xenoliths of this kind are of wide occurrence in other igneous districts.
They have been exhaustively studied by Lacroix, ‘‘Les Enclaves Des Roches Volcan-
iques,’”’ 1893. The tendency of intruded rocks to carry them is discussed in “Geology of
the Castle Mountain Mining District, Montana,” Bull. U.S. G.S.,139. 1896.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 53
in the district and are of especial interest from the standpoint of contact
action. They were first noticed by Dana, who mapped*® several of the
larger limestone areas in the western part of the district. They appear
to be most frequent in this area; in the region around Salt Hill they
occur less commonly. In the main diorite area, however, they are much
more numerous than is indicated on the map; there are many, especially
near Crugers, that are too small to be shown; and near Salt Hill, they are
too small and their relations too obscure for adequate representation on
the map.
Dana maps three inclusions of limestone in the large diorite area, and
all of these have been found by the writer to be a very quartzose schist,
closely resembling limestone in appearance, but nevertheless of an entirely
different composition. Hither Dana, who was looking for limestone,
mistook its identity on account of its peculiar appearance, or else it does
contain calcareous layers which he happened to find and which the writer
overlooked; but it is certain that it is essentially a quartz schist. It
weathers in layers, however, which also tends to give it the appearance of
limestone. It appears to be chiefly quartz in most places, with some
feldspar and traces of muscovite; but it occasionally contains layers which
are entirely similar to the Manhattan schist. It is usually considerably
decomposed. In one case, it resembled a very fine gneiss, but other parts
of the same inclusion were normal, and it was moreover very similar to
an outcrop of schist on Broadway, the straight road running north from
Verplanck. An outcrop of the schist (see map) is to be seen on the post-
road, a short distance below Montrose, and the cliff behind Mackey’s store
at Buchanan contains two stringers of this rock imbedded in a somewhat
gneissoid diorite, which to the west becomes pyroxenite (Plate IIT, fig. 2).
The inclusions are generally associated with rocks which show more or
less evidence of metamorphism. This is so apparent that these rocks
were first interpreted by the writer as parts of the schistose inclusions
themselves, but their peripheral position would seem to indicate that they
are true igneous rocks which have undergone some shearing; and this is
borne out by the composition, which is that of a mica diorite. The
strongly crushed gabbro is also found on the border of two of these in-
clusions.
The abnormal mineralogy of the schist is peculiar, although there is
little doubt that it is Manhattan schist. The mica has evidently been
largely altered or absorbed by the igneous rocks, leaving a very quartzose
residue ; and it would seem, therefore, that these inclusions may thus en-
% Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 195. 1880. A minute description of a number of inclu-
sions is here given.
54 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
rich the surrounding magma in certain constituents, such as alumina.
It will be recalled that the numerous small schist inclusions—at Crugers,
for example—are also distinctly altered, but often in exactly the opposite
direction, so that magnetite, corundum, biotite, etc., are developed.
Only one inclusion of limestone was found, which was either over-
looked by Dana or else its position on his rough map is not accurate. It
occurs along the post-road a short distance above Montrose, and on the
north the contact with the green pyroxenite described above is visible.
It is about seven hundred feet wide and is a medium grained, thoroughly
crystallized patch of the white Inwood limestone. The wernerite schist
described above may be mentioned in this connection, since its characters
would indicate that it is a thoroughly worked-over inclusion of limestone.
A single inclusion of a rock which appears to be undoubtedly a basal
Highland gneiss was found. It is located on the shore of Lent’s Cove,
and it seems to be only about seventy feet wide and of a slightly greater
length. It is almost entirely feldspar, which is very strongly kaolinized,
but which seems to be albite. There are also streaks of chlorite in the
rock; and the whole has a decidedly gneissoid aspect. It could not be a
dike or a member of the Cortlandt Series; it is probably a xenolith of an
ancient gneiss, although it might also be thought that the igneous rocks
are thin over this area and that this outcrop represents a projection of
the gneiss which underlies the series.
STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY
There is little that might be called structural geology that has not been
already discussed. Jointing usually occurs in these rocks, but always in
moderate development. The weathering of the olivine pyroxenites has
been noticed above, and the only other features of note may be now
briefly considered.
DYNAMIC METAMORPHISM
The amount of shearing undergone by the Cortlandt Series is, as has
been shown, slight but constant. It appears to vary somewhat among
the different members. The granites, although they carry microcline,
show strain in general to a very small degree: It is only occasionally that
the norites exhibit any trace of the mortar structure, bent plagioclase
lamelle, wavy extinction, and twisted biotite that characterize the most
metamorphosed types. In but one or two instances was any crushing
seen in the pyroxenites.
In the diorites and gabbros, however, the case is different. The former
group, as remarked above, shows perceptibly more strain than is to be
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 55
found in the granites, norites or pyroxenites, although at the same time
it is not severe and is apparent in the hand specimen only in exceptional
cases. The gabbros in two cases show a rémarkable degree of crushing,
such as would be characteristic of an augen gneiss, and such as was de-
scribed by Lehman*® in the “Flaser Gabbros” of Saxony.
Both of these cases, however, occur directly on the border of an inclu-
sion; and those of the diorites which show a gneissoid structure are simi-
larly located. Williams has described the crushing which is apparent in
some of the types found in the “Butler Section”; it is here also very
severe microscopically, but this section is located 150 yards west of the
inclusion which runs northwest from near Montrose. In many of these
instances, it is easy to take the strike and dip, but the cases of straining
which were noticed elsewhere were relatively insignificant. It would thus
seem to appear that dynamic metamorphism is usually or always confined
to the borders of foreign inclusions; and if the district had undergone
any amount of regional pressure, it would naturally be concentrated
along the lines of weakness which would develop on the contact. This
is the only explanation that would seem to account for such a localization
of metamorphic effects.
It may be noted in this connection that dynamic action is also very
perceptible at most of the emery developments in the district; it is evi-
denced not only by microscopic and megascopic shearing, but by faulting
and veining.
ORIGINAL GNEISSOID STRUCTURE
Dana** describes in some detail a structure which the present writer
believes to be of an original gneissoid character. As already stated, on
Montrose Point, in particular, several very different kinds of rocks are
associated in the most intricate way, often as successive bands ;*? and
Dana cites one case in which biotite augite norite and olivine pyroxenite
are found in alternate layers of constant grain only three or four inches
wide. There are many other cases of less pronounced character, which
are referred to by both Dana and Williams (e. g., the Butler Section)
and which have been seen by the writer. In another instance, a streak
of the coarse dark pink norite was seen in a cliff of the black pyroxenite ;
the norite was coarser, if anything, than the latter, and was coarse, more-
over, to its very edge, having thus none of the characteristics of a dike.
The analyses of these types show their great chemical differences.
40 Uber die Entsthehung der altkrystallinen Schiefergesteine, p.190. Bonn, 1884.
“1 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 211 et seg. 1880.
42 WILLIAMS refers to these as “‘dikes,’’ but Dana evidently recognized that they were
not of this character.
56 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
In the norite family, however, this structure is commonest and best
developed. As remarked above, it seems to be a general rule that the
finer grained a norite is, the simpler it is, 1. e., a very fine-grained norite
is composed chiefly of feldspar with considerable hypersthene, while the
coarser varieties carry in addition either hornblende, or biotite and augite.
The fine-grained simple norite is never found in large areas, but always
as inclusions in the coarser, and therefore more complex varieties. It
often occurs in biotite norite, for example, as small, rounded flow-like
patches, or again as streaks; or it may be banded with the coarser rock.
In this case, the chemical difference is not so great, as the accompanying
analyses show.
Now, if the simpler norite be not quite so fine grained, it will not be
entirely pure; and this is the case in most places. In Plate IV, fig. 1, the
mass of the rock is a biotite augite norite, while the white streak is
merely a finer and therefore simpler facies, containing only small amounts
of biotite and augite. In one place, it shows an included patch of the
coarser rock. The ledge shown is about 20 feet high. Plate IV, fig. 2,
shows the same thing in better development, so that the rock might easily
be mistaken for a real metamorphic gneiss. A number of other equally
good instances might be shown, for the structure is quite common; but
these suffice to show its general aspect.*
From what has been said above, it is evident that this structure cannot
be due to ordinary shearing, and we are therefore obliged to search for
another explanation.
Eliminating Dana’s idea of worked-over volcanic ashes, and Williams? 8
suggestion of the ordinary regional metamorphism of igneous rocks, we
are thrown back on some force concomitant in its action with the cooling
of the rock. Since the several layers or streaks are always quite different
in mineralogical composition at least and more or less so in chemical, it
is evidently a question of magmatic differentiation. It is inconceivable
that the structure be due to the differentiation of a magma in situ—after
it had reached its present position—since the differentiation is into bands
which bear no definite relation to the borders of the magma; and the
idea of successive intrusions—first of a light band and then of a dark—is
equally inapplicable, since even when there is a sharp line of demarcation
# The classic locality for this structure is on the Isle of Skye, in Tertiary gabbro,
where it was first described as such by GIEKIE and TEALL. (Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., I,
646. 1894.) It has also been described in wonderful development by A. G. HédcsBom,
from the Island of Orné, just south of Stockholm. (‘Zur Petrographie von Orné Huf-
yvud,” Bull. of the Geol. Instit. of Upsala, X, 150.) F. D. ADAms has noted a striking
development of the structure near Montreal, which he will describe in a forthcoming
paper.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 57
separating two bands, the individual grains seem to interlock across the
line. The only remaining hypothesis, therefore, is that of the intrusion
of a molten mass already heterogeneous.
Harker** appears to favor the view that the structure is due to the
approximately simultaneous intrusion of two different magmas, which
would give rise to an interpenetration of the two. This would account
for the banded structure, which always shows evidence of flowage and is
seldom straight and clear cut. The assumption would be then, of course,
that the mass would soon begin to cool and harden while resting quietly,
as otherwise the two magmas might combine to form a third and homo-
geneous one. Harker’s alternative view is that the mass was intruded as
a unit, already heterogeneous, the two different magmas having been
partly mixed before intrusion. Whichever be the correct theory, it is evi-
dent that in the Cortlandt Series the simple norite magma was very small
in comparison with the more complex norite magmas, since the former is
always as included bands in the others, while these latter cover con-
siderable areas.
RELATIONS OF THE TYPES, WITH ANALYSES
From the above description of the more salient characters of the Cort-
landt Series, it appears that we have in it a fairly complete and very
intricate complex, one susceptible 4nd worthy of the most detailed study.
In some places—e. g., Montrose and Stony Points—the complexity of the
mass is bewildering, while again we may have several miles of a fairly
uniform rock. At times, as shown in the original gneissoid structure, the
contacts are sharp and clear, although never showing contact metamor-
phism on each other, while again numerous cases have been noticed of
one rock grading into another. Thus, for example, the biotite norite area
at Lent’s Cove grades into the biotite augite norite to the south by a
perfect series of steps; similarly the augite norite at Montrose. Diorite
becomes hornblendite, and pyroxenite becomes chrysolitic, by imper-
ceptible gradations. Moreover, the different larger groups are similarly
connected ; the diorite just southeast of Pleasantside grades into the ad-
joining hornblende norite, and norite passes into olivine pyroxenite by
way of olivine norite. An infinite number of species might be differen-
tiated within this small area of twenty-five miles; in this paper only the
unavoidable ones have been mentioned. The accompanying diagram
(fig. 2), greatly modified from Williams, is designed to show in a rough
way the relations of the species. The lines connecting the circles indi-
cate the direction in which gradation has been most frequently observed.
“ Natural History of Igneous Rocks, pp. 138 and 341. New York, 1909.
58 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The variation diagram of the series (fig. 3) indicates a rather complex
relationship. The pyroxenites alone, however, are responsible for the
sharp curves; if they be disregarded, the variation curves of the several
oxides will be smooth and simple. This would seem to indicate that the
differentiation which led to the formation of the pyroxenites was of a
Norite
Fig. 2. Diagram of the Relations of the more important Types of the Cort-
landt Series
peculiar character: that either they are derived directly from some other
type, as the norites, or else that the primal parent magma underwent
great changes between the times of intrusion of the pyroxenites and the
other rocks.
An effort has been made to indicate under each type, in a general way,
some of the more suggestive points which the map brings out. Thus the
granites appear to have little connection with the main body, except as
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 59
they all belong to the same series. The norites occupy a central position
in the area, being flanked by diorite and pyroxenite, and often, at least,
protected on the north and south by more acid rocks. The biotite augite
norite magma is the largest and is closely connected with the norite proper
and the biotite norite; while the hornblende norite shows closer affinities
with the diorites. The pyroxenites comprise the eastern third of the
series, and possibly likewise extend to the west, since they are found on
As BCODEFG’ HI K
Fig. 3. Variation Diagram of the Cortlandt Series
A=Diorite; B=MHornblende Norite; C=Biotite Norite; D= Olivine
Pyroxenite; E=—= Pyroxenite; F=—Biotite Augite Norite; G—=Norite; H=
Gabbro; I= Augite Norite; K—Granite. (The rocks of the New Jersey and
Connecticut extensions of the series are not included.)
Montrose Point and again across the river, on Stony Point. They be-
come chrysolitic in apparently irregular patches. Finally, the diorites
occupy an area to the west which contains most of the inclusions of the
district ; and in several places where there is reason to believe that inclu-
sions have existed but have been absorbed, diorite is also found. Gabbro
is found in two cases next to the limestone, and in two others adjoining
schist, while syenite is in an analogous location.
The problem suggested by the location of these last rocks is a difficult
one to solve. According to Harker,** the hybrid formed by the absorption
45 Jour. Geol., VIII, 389-399. 1900. Also Nat. Hist. of Ign. Rocks, Chap. XIV. 1909.
60 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
of a sediment by an igneous rock is always of abnormal composition and
constricted extent and is usually marked by such minerals as sillimanite,
cordierite and wollastonite. By variation diagrams he proves that such a
commingling would give rise to rocks whose composition might be pre-
dicted and which would not even approximate any known igneous flow.
In the Cortlandt Series, we have this latter type well developed in the
instances described; whether a normal igneous rock, such as syenite and
gabbro, may be formed, despite Harker’s arguments, is a question requir-
ing more data. The rocks in question must be analyzed, and the variation
diagrams constructed for them and for the surrounding magmas, before
anything can be definitely said. It is interesting in this connection, how-
ever, to recall Daly’s*® theory of overhead stoping, which postulates exten-
sive assimilation of the blocks which drop into a magma as it ascends.
He has further developed this idea of abyssal assimilation,’ until it re-
sembles the marginal assimilation hypothesis which is supported by many
French geologists.** If something of this kind has actually taken place
in the Cortlandt Series, it is probably a fairly common process, since it
has suggested itself in many parts of the world.*® On the other hand, of
course, the location of these rocks may be merely an accident of intrusion.
Little can be said regarding the mutual relations of the four funda-
mental magmas, since they are not yet sufficiently clear. The volcanic
phase, the first in the normal cycle of igneous activity, is wanting. The
normal order of intrusions in the plutonic phase is that of decreasing
basicity, and this seems to have been followed in the Cortlandt. As al-
ready stated, the granites seem to have been intruded last, both from the
evidence of the acid dikes in the more basic rocks and from their almost
isolated position. The pyroxenites and norites, from their intimate rela-
tion in several places, were probably formed at about the same time,
although not simultaneously, for their association is only local. The
pyroxenites probably preceded the slightly more acid norites but had not
haidened when the latter appeared. At the same time, however, the evi-
dence of the variation diagram, as indicating a much more complex rela-
tionship, must not be lost sight of. The diorites were probably still later.
Here again, however, we are confronted by the suggestion of hybridism in
the occurrence of gradation from hornblende norite into diorite, for ex-
ample, and a further discussion of these problems would be fruitless in
view of the comparative scantiness of our data.
«6“'The Mechanics of Igneous Intrusion,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (4), XV, 269, and XVI,
107. 1903. Also “The Geology of Ascutney Mountain, Vt.,’’ Bull. 209, U.S.G.S. 1903.
47 Amer. Jour. Sci. (4), XXII, p. 195. 1906.
8 See for example ‘Contribution 4 l’etude du granite de Flamanville,” Bull. carte géol.
France. 18938.
See M. WepeER, k. Bayerischen Akad. der Wissenschaften, Dec., 1910.
ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES
—_
. Granite.
He OO bo
. Gabbro,
Rocks, 1908, p. 72, No. 3. Symbol, IT.
. Norite proper, 14 miles S. of Peekskill.
. Granite, Cornell Dam Quarry.
municated by C. P. Berkey. Magmatic symbol, I.
ANALYSES.
Mohegan Quarry. Idem.
S. E. of Salt Hill.
5. 3.4. <Andose.
Lassenose.
Analyst, Elwyn Waller.
4. 2. 4.
61
Privately com-
Lassenose.
(Near Toscanose. )
. Diorite, Buchanan. Analyst, G.S. Rogers. Symbol, III. 6.3.4. Limburgose.
Analyst, H. T. Vulté. J. F. Kemp, Handbook of
5. 8. 3. Shoshonose.
Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
Symbol, II.
. Biotite Norite, 2 miles E. of Montrose Point. Analyst, G. S. Rogers. Symbol,
Il. 5.4.3. Hessose.
7. Biotite Augite Norite, Montrose Point. Analyst, M.S. Munn. J.D. Dana.
Amer. Jour. Sci. (3), XXII, 104. Symbol, II. 5.3.4. Andose.
Hie 7s 3: 4. 5. 6. Uf
SG ae eee 73.54 73.32 | 42.45 54.72 | 51.49 | 46.10 | 55.34
JIAO Senaeeec 15.20 15.01 16.36 WEIS B20S72 18.66 16.37
Ber. 2. 50 AG 3.20 2.08 1.80 3.00 Ary,
1, 0 eee 81 1.19 9.85 6.038 7.28 9.58 7.04
ESO) oa 0 .03 15 oz 5.85 3.82 6.71 5.05
CAO. 38: 1.69 1.35 9.57 | 6.84 6.71 8.26 7.51
INGE O areet : 4.99 4.27 2.61 3.02 | 3.70 2.57 4.06
HO Rea 2.31 S24 2e29 3.01 2.14 1.59 2.03
H,O+..... .06 les SOS Weeds outa ill STON S Jo aces
pee os ee ey od tae (1 Nee NN 10 10 58
OOP Pree otisie te cats alle etessienaiouh = NOME. Pais S315 soy trace NOME. || pee
Seer Bis .08 .06 12 | ea a 2.26 2IB88 NY. seeseae
Re ee Pace clase pce cilh atorcaw Sys ous BAO NS cia cscyate 3 15 OU. Lape Sete
“Ulign saith anes Big cl Gears ao lie Aes ae eee aera ee 202% | on eer
See reer craraitetiievs sviaeis) WAS asectesae tVACE Hers e/aae s sul EDO | iaista carers
CID face lland Ge da DAIS 2 eS aire Cee neon ae | UA VOPR er eer ieee ee
WinOe se oases trace ACER ereey- valet secyei teae = cle rs cortex SL Stes seen ers 40
1 SEO) Been Oeics Roem Cena eee ok) Get Aelia aiec sarc ETACE osu. ae hteey
SIRO) Scope dallopeeeacied ences mCi bars ait vaya eel eae ErACE le ay etre
Sum 99.21 99.67 99 55 99.34 100 72 100.57 99.65
Mopes
18 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. | 7
ae oon SOAS Ae ce ols is obae ave (ae alraeretas [eldewan 2 ath ws ae ak
Od) ae mee oe 8.3 115).(0) ine eee 17.8 10.6 5.0 10.0
Allpite: 3)... 41.9 36.2 22.0 25.2 30.9 21.5 34.1
Anorth 8.3 6.7 24.5 26.1 33.4 34.8 | 20.9
Moscoy 4.9 AG SM Whe Sc 4. OSS ole Rdamee fa efi oe Neale entero emrarmare
Biotite..... oe 4.7 SSSe as cake 4.6 17.0 5.6
Telia teens ots flata cd oles pri Meee Parr ha neeh teh ce PION RPh ent k
Jalili Ooi pel ha Bs Bee or aus © Coal er Dieae| Garner s lth cerns eas
PDS SLY ee ans votes |i a ainda [isis « oo areas orale veretehe « 13.0 10.2 15.9
PONG s-aicycthieveadecr ver Aone hive atdheyanc = [AV Jee Beene, A Ft ty Os Le iTie: | heen ee
ANTHETIN IS A eel Gee othe ae Ges 6 GRO Oe mea Ol Sirk Some eel Gams ohoaal ec ost ea
ic oe 2 | 2 2.6 3.0 1.9 2.6 7
Ilmen...... 2 yy Oita alteetscctetcr eins 4.2 eae ll. cusporesraers
ATTA eA odllG datatoa Gets |6 GE Oo (CHE REA! een ACA eee tb ictoena moe
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
62
Norms.
1 2. 3 4 5. 6. 7
CR Raa ae 32.0 BOLD S|. she'd serste allie s'e/aible bua] ele aie Glee ke [lore eee mie ee cer
Comet iak ie 1.5 Dd Gree Aloe elle aaron se 2B. s.th ae ee een
OPLie 6s se 13.3 21.7 13.3 17.8 12.2 9.5 12.2
BD oie ates 41.9 36.2 7.3 25.2 30.9 21.5 34.1
BN sciccs s\s'3s 8.3 6.7 26.4 26.1 32.5 34.8 20.3
Ie prerparltae darn &5 Gallloincto.om.n.0.5 SiO ys arkieles ere 2 Slee afate oni mies © rel ee
GIS, ie i4is S cuate ee eee elope 14.8 Gis lewens tee 5.0 14.0
10 asa pe Te 7a dal RRO cas te 20.9 13.8 3.0 11.4
Olssas tes eae seen Roars Bt pee ee a 2.9 15.9 5.3
Tiles ec ouherats 7 7 4.6 3.0 2.6 4.4 1.2
Hl Sse IS ta Ae a aes ae NED “tae 4.2 B.S eb see
AD: cece al aaeieines el os eee ore EO eee ite .4 122.5 e eee
8. Biotite Augite Norite, 13 miles S. of Peekskill. Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
Symbol, II. 5.3.4. <Andose.
. Hornblende Norite, } mile N. of Montrose. Analyst, G. S. Rogers. Symbol,
15. 4. 3. -Hessose:
. Pyroxenite, Montrose Point. Analyst, G. S. Rogers. Symbol, IV. 17. 1”. 2.
Hudsonose.*°
11. Olivine Pyroxenite, 3 mile N. of Dickerson Hill. Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
Symbol, IV. 1%. 17.2. Hudsonose.*°
12. Augite Peridotite, Montrose Point. Analyst, W. H. Emerson. G. H.
Williams, Amer. Jour. Sci. (3), XX XI, 40. Symbol, IV. 27.172. X.
13. Wernerite Schist. Montrose Point. Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
8 9. 10. ID 12. 13.
SiQss silos sete | 60.74 45.91 49.95 49.73 47.41 42.96
Gee: eaten 20.30 | 19.83 6.52 4.01 6.39 | 19.49
Re:Or Ssceen ses 1.23 ASIII 1.50 .70 7.06 1.08
BG ORE acta Orel tele 1.27 8.09 10.41 6.66 4.80 4.89
Mp Omri 3.78 5.13 17.02 20.06 15.34 1.50
CaO eran 7.28 9.32 ei 16.71 14.32 19.32
INGORE occ er 3.82 2.78 .98 .63 .69 2.25
KOE Lee & 2.21 1.23 .o2 ol 1.40 26
EOE es ol 40 65 .o9 2.10 1.24
EGO. oe. ae .10 14 16 SOE? cieete ete 06
CO Seat e ne oe heer .04 25 by STi nah eRe Ors. 4.85
DORN lt lee 2.31 2.71 15 "64.0 |e 2 ees 1.72
JEG Tage ee 15 1.03 none O02) Ss), i: steer trace
OUR nad ames an aerotac .08 TORE N oz. oa ss ciao the | ee eRe 31
Diane <a ckowes 12 .30 odull .30 .49 .64
CRO octal ee pus as 01 10 | {TAace:/) liksecee see trace
MTG eo he 3 B17 (iy Pa ae Ph he | Pe hen oe .05
CuO i, eas cs tes Js i- eas Col oan sec teem ert tYACe: 5) sec een Soe
SILLS S O10 mor 99.75 100.03 100.09 100.738 100.00 | 100.62
% The writer ventures to suggest the name Hudsonose for this rock, in view of its
abundance and typical development in the Cortlandt Series, and inasmuch as Cortland-
tose has already been assigned to a type apparently not found in the series.
63
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES
Mopss.
> tonnatHtox
Pee its: jeu Ce we le Wy [voo) > i 4
; atid 2 iii ita i i iaNndiisdtin
s Sy ee ee ee re ke
ONS deme omy eh ccpmian TS. Sieh toe teelte
. C1 bX ONWayialien Gia 80) sO OT i Os 0m 96
N He Ar ee ee ib be SS iais kb e ere tan ae
re eee Kd eles 6 Me wee he ba, «808 ee) ote
AN SMe perimlleNeioy 6G 6 o oO ¢
; is Neon Ne OE et oe le a at
— AYO a bmn ae ea ee ee
—
POON (HOM CAMHMO 7 ttl:
. rk ©1090 CO =H re ai eS le iochage
f= Sar) fon eae a
eee otk
CN heientoy Cer Wohi 2 OU oe on 6
: YAaNCeyes we) UNiGlive | 2 6 Oo 0 9 0 85
o> N oO fad eee ei ele (6 ere pee Ay 8 haw Bie
BEV CN ISN SSCA RE Be ae Ue Gn amet yor a0
2 ONAIGD +00 Natl ie De OMA I nA GPRIOMG
[o a) CA Of . . . . : . R : .
renee eet ast
aie Rene eae ee “LEE so
. s . 5 . s ~~
“ops S5as ca B8aauss
SROBQHAS EE TEAS QEOgS
ele cates kmwabe coach ss
OAdaeHt qtOdes ea nosed
Pyrite...
Norms.
13.
12.
er ee oe 8, a ers
Swe Ow oN Vi Chit metre SC ON
A Ge Oe Ch ed Ce) mec
A OC, Be Re, et PO ahr
ni 6! 0) els ee aye Ve ee
Ue BO eC, i) aT cre
Ok dhe th SPC eT othe OMe
a welaser ep ene) te) we cemuce
Wipe tes yee Xen Wet tevs Ne! 67 fe
IE
10.
rH AIDOMN OR 1
Ve) N
NO
NODDODAOMH :
rio of
CLO a) OMmLnn Lees Cuma)
Th. Oe CRS DF OP Os oO
mie <6) Xe Ne) ee pe = seve Vel nec fel
ee FL Oa: AP te emai maa oS
We te. ale! Me OS Pe) Monee s Se bev
Cette oe Vem th ety gh Ske tv
pee, wt Ge ee
A phpee> ee Ce Ciba) UCase
bat Condber Sel se, 6). el w re 6
Gg i QO wren
Cie Dine 0, See Se Om Ora:
64
14. Spinel Emery, high grade, Buckbee Mine. Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
15. Pure Emery, Dalton Mine.
16. Feldspathic Emery, Salt Hill.
17. Quartz Emery Schist, Salt Hill.
18. Emery. Analyst, T. Egleston.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
p. 197 (No. 1).
19. Idem (No. 4).
20. Idem (No. 7).
Analyst, G. 8. Rogers.
Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
G. H. Williams, A. J.S. (3), XXX@IE
14, 15. 16. 18. 19! 20.
SiOn sere ia $8454, 10.60") ) AVG As a sal cet 25 elle ee
SA Ose we 68.14 59.22 43.72 31.93 37.43 46.53
IRONS Ge oco- 1.438 16.66 13.75 18.19 Al aily/ 32.31
INS OG sooar 16.25 14.02 LOAM, S2AO} es wisstetamia ltr ee ercinreel| ste coeaeete
any Fe ORE Pc = 10.02 3.54 8.59 7.41 7.20 9.43
CaQy. iaks~e trace trace MOB 4") “2iOB Gace aie Sales om dae eile ee eae
NacOP a trace trace BOO Sie oe ROD Weve erst aeral|'s, caste een a fisre eeee
Ow snese trace trace Be | dO ll ieee tas aleee ae nese eee
H,O+ 1.15 2.65 SBD = TW ental ee as ltes cates hee eee
RO snaee SiR .05 S07 NE ALO) ates Set aky sad ricio celts
RI Ok Beer 1.41 3.28 1.43 Wel .65 ol
LENO} dao 06r trace trace trace trace trace trace
Site cere 05 .06 .07 .04 .02 01
Cr Ogee ace 04 trace AG ¥) ~ ¢ GEACE Tie is.:5 5 sic, |lneets 2 oie
MnO cee trace .06 SUE a LOS eee REP es 5 occ
Magnetic
=o Sian a eres Perea, 3 ER 34.200 | 19.81 | 8.98
Siliceous
Bee aoe [eet wa tae Sem, A 6.42 | 1314 | 2.42
SUE eel ee 100.54 100.38 100.51 99.31 99.42 | 100.19
Moves
14. 15. 16.
Oize 1.9 8 3.9 36.7
Orie eles tote several emer cike eee 2.8 Ee)
SAN DIG See Sale aye ene aielllo ake sexta tate 4.7 4.7
PAGVOTUI: S52) sralete craters sivas eocers Be) 10.0 |
SOUT CET 8) RAS acl iaeioenc [es aon'5 9 5 4.9 |
Spinel ..... 75.0 Dili 61.3 24.3
Corundum.. 19.5 45.2 9 5.0
MiGic cus Dal pA ON 8.8 |
Ilmenite... 2.6 6.2 2.6 2.8
51 Probably derived in considerable part from the agate mortar.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES
65
21. Brown Norite, Buckbee Mine. Analyst, G.S. Rogers. Symbol, IV. 11. 1’. 2.
Cookose.
22. Sillimanite Schist, Dalton Mine. Analyst, G. S. Rogers.
23. Manhattan Schist. Composite analysis of five specimens from various points
beyond the borders of the series. Analyst, G. 8. Rogers.
24. Manhattan Schist (least altered), Crugers. Analyst, F. L. Nason. G. H.
Williams (3), XXXVI, p. 259.
25. Manhattan Schist (nearer contact), Crugers. Idem.
26. Manhattan Schist (about 750 feet from contact), Crugers. Idem.
27. Manhattan Schist (on contact), Crugers. Idem.
Pel. pe 23. 24, 25. 26. PA
SION Rasa: 52.27 28.81 57.94 62.98 61.57 55.12 40.16
aN Og efi s 3 6.81 46.95 21.70 16.88 19.53 24.32 29.50
He Owes ae 2.48 10.00 1.57 2.48 5.44 6.13 19.66
IRON Sooaee 10.01 7.40 5.90 5.00 2.61 4.99 5.80
MeO-...3 2: 23.29 2.08 2.49 1.58 1.90 trace trace
CAO Sa sch: 2.04 trace .08 trace trace trace .85
Ine Oana 87 50) 1.74 3.02 3.48 Zeal 1.46
Ke Ope a 25 sath 4.68 7.45 2.14 2.83 1.36
EOS oe 5s 61 .64 OL ThA Ss Buren dka rane tall cera a ea cee es ore Reco
H,O— 14 .07 BAD [tsps oh < ee ee eneh| es feeo aya ver rele ose av oreonl [ioe a mens
CORE eres 13 none TENG Sica lites ct seers cx cvl | atens\ ny esenerli mcr eoe te suki | el ears aaa
ERY OR ers ores 40 2.76 TCD Fe ae a 1.53 ZAG Es ee
lea Or deere trace none trace trace trace trace trace
Sata icteis eve 05 SOFA sll here recite .08 85 1223 .82
CRO, aac 2 22 Eilers crete Hs. S/d Mel tee uthee We allen re to Aes ake etonan
WhiOwog sues trace .29 ola ee eee ee te al leks a Protein (arbre ener IIe ra Ges. c
Sule ee 99.57 100.06 100.26 99.47 99.05 99.79 99.61
Mopes.
Bille i. 2B}
GZ ae cece a | ses Sarena iovel| atershst tts 61 19.2
@Ortheenen HTL 52 0.6
IN SiKE so co oe ies 6.3 14.7
Anorth INE Sia | eetaa wreteye 2.5
Whoa ssllogosde gaclonenede cs 38.5
BIOUILERE al eee atertote al eeterencvekons 14.9
Bronzite... USVEP No eran Oo. | SRDS ee
Cordieriters|acer ae sc ZS) cea
Sillimanite:|2...-...< Sica)” | Roxane
Corundunga eee 15} ae ene
1 ie eer 3.5 14.4 sft
Ilmenite... 8 5.1 1.9
66 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
GEOLOGY OF THE EMERY
Emery has been mined in this district for the last twenty-two years;
and at a previous period, an attempt had been made to use it as an iron
ore, but being so high in alumina, when used by itself, it of course hope-
lessly clogged the furnace which was erected, and the undertaking was
abandoned. Since 1889, however, many thousand tons have been taken
out for use as an abrasive, although the so-called Peekskill emery is the
poorest variety on the market.
Isaac McCoy was the first to mine emery, and on his land, on the central
and southern part of the hill east nortiveast of Pleasantside, is the most
pretentious mine in the district. He worked in a small way himself for a
while and then leased the property to the Tanite Emery Company of
Stroudsburg, Pa., who kept twelve or fifteen men busy at intervals for
about eighteen years. The Blue Corundum Mining Company of Boston,
Mass., has also done work on his property. The Keystone Emery Com-
pany of Frankfort, Pa., started work a little later on the Oscar Dalton
property (on the northeast slope of the hill above mentioned) and on the
land of John H. Buckbee, which is located on a hill a mile southeast of
the last. The work here was later taken over by H. M. Quinn of Phila-
delphia, Pa. The Tanite Company also leased the land of David Chase,
just southwest of Mr. Buckbee’s property. The work done on the deposits
which are found on Dickerson and Salt Hills is mostly of a private nature,
although the Lombard mine was once quite productive; and the same
applies to the small pits which are located in the biotite norite area north-
west of Crugers.
The work on the emery deposits has been so scattered and irregular
that no estimate of the total amount mined can be made. Work is at
present going on in the Dalton pits, in a new cut at the McCoy mine
(Plate V, fig. 1) and in the southeastern area. A thousand tons or more
are lying in the pile at the Dalton property and an equal amount in the
emery yard at the Chase mine. The ore is hauled by teams to Peekskill
and is thence shipped chiefly to Easton, Pa., as the market demands.
Most of the mining is of a very primitive nature, being chiefly open
cutting and stripping; after a small amount of work has been done, the
emery usually pinches out. It occurs chiefly in veins and pockets but at
the Buckbee mine in fairly well-developed lenses. Here more extensive
mining was carried on; tunnels were driven in several places, and a small
. shaft was sunk, but the timbering has given way, and the whole work has
caved in. At the McCoy mine, the largest pit is about 75 feet long by 40
feet wide and is 80 feet deep. The work here was stopped partly on ac-
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 67
count of the water, which fills the pit to a depth of about 30 feet. Just
at this level, two adits have been run, at either end of the pit; one of
these opens a 30-foot pocket of emery, the other merely runs out on the
side of the hill. A derrick was used to raise the ore, which was run down
to the road on cars. This was the only place at which an attempt was
made to use a steam drill, and it proved a nuisance. The usual method
consists of enlarging the cracks in the ore by hand drilling, shaking it up
with dynamite and extracting it with pick and bar.
Williams was the only geologist to discuss the emery in any detail;
Dana*’ only briefly mentions it, since in his time it had not been mined
except for iron. He notes the thin magnetite beds in diorite on Crugers
Point, which Williams has shown to be merely metamorphosed inclusions
of schist,®* and states that the ore is chloritic, whereas Williams®* has
shown in his discussion of the emery that the green mineral is pleonaste.
The latter, in his first description, states that the veins are segregations
in the norite. He describes the ore from a microscopical standpoint,
mentioning the various minerals which the present writer describes below ;
and gives seven analyses of the emery, partly chemical and partly physical,
but makes no mention of the localities from which the specimens were
taken, or what varieties they were, etc. In his paper on contact meta-
morphism, however, he abandons his former view. To quote: “The
isolated inclusions (7. ¢., the metamorphosed schist inclusions at Crugers)
“of spinel and corundum are almost identical with the more extensive de-
posits of the same character occurring near the southern border of the
norite region farther to the east and described at length in a former
paper. Their origin in both cases is without doubt essentially the same.”
It is somewhat unfortunate that his previous view, based on fewer
‘observations, should have found its way into the literature.
J. H. Pratt®* gives a condensed account of Dana’s work and of Wil-
liams’s work on the norites and evidently relies largely on the latter for
his statement that the emery is probably due to segregation in the norite
along the borders of the magma, in a fashion analogous to that of pyrrho-
tite, etc. The fact which sustains this view is given as the “gradual
transition of the spinel, iron ore and emery into the normal norite’—a
fact observed by Williams. He does not appear to have consulted Wil-
liams’s other papers; but from the description of the series given above,
52 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 199-200. 1880.
68 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 261 et seg. 1888.
54 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX XIII, 194-199. 1887.
5 Loc. cit.
58 Corundum and its Occurrence and Distribution in the United States, Bull. 269, U. S.
‘G. S., pp. 41, 93 and 137. 1906.
68 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
it is evident that no broad deductions can safely be made from the study
of one member, aside from the fact that in only one place does the ore
occur in a norite area. F. W. Clarke®* quotes Williams as regarding the
ore as a segregation, as does also J. F. Kemp.°* Lagorio,®°*® however,
refers to the deposits as in contacts, although his reference is to Wil-
liams’s first paper.
PETROGRAPHY OF THE EMERY AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS
Perhaps the description of the several types of occurrence may be
facilitated if the ore and some of the rocks peculiar to the mines are
considered first.
Spinel Emery
In the hand specimen, spinel emery is a heavy black fine grained aggre-
gate, with dark gray crystals of corundum appearing in the best varieties ;
sometimes the corundum is pink
(approaching ruby) and sometimes
blue (approaching sapphire). Un-
less these crystals are large, however,
the amount of the mineral present
cannot be distinguished. ‘The emery
often has an excellent fracture and
closely resembles the Turkish emery.
In thin section, it is seen to consist
of an aggregate of pleonaste, corun-
dum and magnetite. The pleonaste,
except in the highest grade of ore,
constitutes the bulk of the rock. It
Fig. 4. Relations of Spinel, Corundum 1S 10 rich green grains of irregular
and Magnetite in Emery. Sl. 326 — shape, closely crowded. They are, of
course, isotropic and have a high in-
dex of refraction, though the surface appears smooth. They often carry
magnetite inclusions in the form of very fine parallel rods. The corundum
is present in all amounts; it may constitute half the specimen, or it may
be lacking entirely. The grains, which may occasionally reach an inch in
size, are in this variety colorless in thin section. They exhibit a prismatic
shape, which is usually quite sharp and apparently always crystallize
before the spinel. They are always strongly cracked and are often con-
57 Data of Geochemistry, Bull. 330, U.S. G.S., p. 278. 1908.
58 Ore Deposits of the U. S. and Canada, pp. 61 and 173. 1906.
5° Zeit. Kryst. Mineral, vol. 24, p. 288. 1894-95.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 69
siderably altered to a hydrated mica (damourite or margarite), so that
their double refraction is destroyed. They give the usual tests. The
magnetite is in somewhat smaller grains scattered among the spinels, and
it is usually not nearly so abundant. It seems to have crystallized simul-
taneously with the corundum (fig. 4).
Williams mentions an analysis of the spinel “whose results were unfor-
tunately lost,” but from the fact that the analyst remembered that the
MgO ran only about 9 per cent., he concluded that the mineral closely
approached the ferrous aluminate, hercynite. In the analyses (Nos. 14
and 16) of the emery, made by the writer and given above, the spinel was
chemically separated from the magnetite and ilmenite, and the analysis
of the mineral as recast gave the following results:
(14) (16)
INOW spico pbc po0do A OOCUOOOOED ED ODIO COaOOS 64.86 65.19
INXD) 6.650ib000000 00 bo CORO COO ME RCO aE OO ODIOES 21.78 20.78
WIE) pcecedaccos0o cos DObOOUOOUOboeoGnd50 DO 13.36 14.03
From the analyses of pleonaste given in Dana’s Mineralogy, there
appears to be no reason for doubting that the spinel in question is of this
variety, and not a hercynite.
Pure Emery
Pure emery, which has a peculiar reddish black tint, is rare. It has
the fracture and other characteristics of the other variety, but no corun-
dum can be distinguished. In thin section, however, it appears that
corundum is the chief constituent. It occurs in small square grains which
contain reddish brown inclusions in great abundance. These may com-
pletely fill the center of the crystal, or they may form a ring, as is often
observed in leucite. They are probably ilmenite. The corundum is
badly altered in this rock, as shown by the high percentage (2.65) of
water in the subjoined analysis. The magnetite constitutes about one
third of the rock. Spinel rarely occurs; biotite has been noticed in small
amount.
Feldspathic Emery
Feldspathic emery resembles the spinel variety when well developed ;
and a surprising amount of feldspar may be present without being no-
ticeable in the hand specimen. Streaks of almost pure magnetite may
occur in this ore, which was the one formerly mined for iron. In thin
section, the plagioclase is seen to make up from one third to one half of
the rock. It is usually basic, though not always. The corundum is scat-
70 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tered through the rock, usually associated with the more basic minerals ;
it is generally of the typical colorless variety, occurring in medium-sized
idiomorphic crystals. In ore from certain places, however, the corundum
is deep bluish green in color, resembling glaucophane, with strong pleo-
chroism: E light greenish yellow, and O dark greenish blue. It then
occurs in stouter crystals, with less distinct outline. Once recognized as
corundum, it is always unmistakable. Spinel is typical and abundant, as
is also magnetite. Sillimanite, in long blades and in a confused fibrous
mass (fibrolite), is often present.
Quartz-Emery Schist
Quartz-emery schist is most closely associated with the last variety,
which grades into it; it is also, however, found in the spinel emery mines.
It is usually consigned to the dump as too poor in emery. Quartz streaks
run through it in great abundance and give it a distinctly gneissoid ap-
pearance, and it was this resemblance to a schist or gneiss which first
suggested (to Dr. Berkey and the writer independently) that it might
possibly be an altered inclusion. This texture is brought out to a certain
degree in the accompanying photograph of a typical hand specimen
(Plate V, fig. 2). It is much like the feldspathic emery under the micro-
scope, differing chiefly in the abundance of quartz. This is in large inter-
locking grains, and it may compose one third or more of the rock. It
sometimes carries an abundance of rutile inclusions in sharp yellowish
needles. The corundum in this rock is often of the peculiar variety de-
scribed under the last; and the rock may (at the Buckbee mine for ex-
ample) become very sillimanitic.
Besides these distinct varieties of ore, corundum or spinel, or both,
may occur in the wall rocks, such as diorite, norite, etc. In these rocks,
the corundum is usually in more irregular crystals, and the common
colorless variety may show pleochroic blotches of an ultramarine blue.
Norite Proper
While norite proper must bear the same name as that given the more
widely spread variety, it is in reality a somewhat different rock. In the
hand specimen, it usually is of a soft brownish color, being apparently
composed of enstatite and feldspar, with the former generally in excess.
The rock is perfectly massive. In thin section, the dark mineral is seen
to be orthorhombic pyroxene of a peculiar type. It is usually more or
less idiomorphic, occurring in rounded oblong crystals, a habit not seen
in typical norite. The pleochroism is weak (X yellowish pink, Z grayish
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES ral
green), giving the mineral a curious washed-out appearance. The analysis
shows it to contain 11.5 per cent. of FeO, so that it is bronzite. It may
become very abundant, so that the rock is almost a bronzitite, which was
never noticed in the typical norite proper; and magnetite, moreover, is
almost lacking. The writer has three slides containing the contact of this
rock with spinel emery. In every case, the feldspar is continuous over the
line; in two the spinel and magnetite are sharply segregated from the
norite, while in the other the minerals mingle for the space of about 1
mm. The feldspar of the emery is somewhat serictized, and its amount
is surprising, considering the black heavy aspect of the ore. In one of
the slides, a line of spinels diverged from the main mass and ran out over
the norite, crossing the bronzites indiscriminately.
Sillimanitte Schist
Sillimanite schist is usually light gray in the specimen and of a fine,
somewhat fibrous texture. The blades of sillimanite, however, can gen-
erally be distinguished, and they
sometimes reach one half an inch in _ Cordierite
length, or rarely an inch or more.
This rock is extremely tough and so
hard that it will turn a drill at times.
The “ore” from the Dalton property
and from the latest cutting of the
McCoy mine is largely this rock, al-
though it is a poor abrasive, powder-
ing when ground.®® Under the mi-
croscope in typical cases, it is seen
to be made up chiefly of sillimanite.
This is largely fibrolite, with the
blades scattered more or less abun- Fig. 5. Sillimanite Schist. Sl. 304
dantly through it. These latter are
blotched with a fine brown dust in places, and they also carry abundant
magnetite inclusions. Cordierite is almost always present in varying
amount; its biaxial figure and the strongly pleochroic yellow halos which
surround its inclusions serve to distinguish it from quartz. Allanite, in
large brownish prismatic crystals, is often present. It shows parallel
extinction and good pleochroism from yellowish brown to greenish brown,
but the color, pleochroism and birefringence often vary even in one
Sillimanite
4
60 Mr. John H. Buckbee rather aptly characterized this rock to the writer as being
from a practical standpoint, “like gristle-—neither bone nor meat.”
ire ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
crystal. Corundum, in any of the three varieties, may be present, and
garnet (almandite) has been observed. Quartz was found in one instance.
Magnetite and ilmenite are usually abundant.
In the rock just described, the important minerals are of a peculiar
type, but the relation of this abnormal schist to true igneous rocks is indi-
cated by the fact that it often contains hornblende, biotite, hypersthene
and even feldspar, chiefly orthoclase. In fact, a pure sillimanite schist
is more rare than one containing a little biotite or hornblende, and in two
cases a hornblende pyroxenite was found which carried merely subordi-
nate amounts of the sillimanite and its associates.
Other rocks are found associated with the ore, such as quartz gabbro,
etc., which have not been before considered, but their peculiarities’ are
indicated by the names given. The statement that shearing is often
apparent at the mines may be recalled in this connection; in several cases
the wiiter mistook for mica schist rocks which appeared under the
microscope to be diorite and norite, and the schistosity was so striking
that he was led to record the dip and strike. Faulting has also often
been seen, and the ore itself is always at least cracked.
TYPES OF OCCURRENCE
Gradational Type
In the area of biotite norite which lies northwest of Crugers, a number
of small emery pits have been sunk. The ore seems to be widely devel-
oped in this district, but the veins are all small and rapidly pinch out.
The ore is of the spinel emery type; it is sometimes in sharp veins, pet
more often it grades into the quartz-emery schist.
The small pit which offers the best opportunity for study lies 250 feet
due south of the point at which the mica schist inclusion outcrops on the
post-road. In this pit, an unmistakable quartz emery schist with streaks
of coarse red garnet lies to the north, 7. e., nearest the schist inclusion ;
it is adjoined on the south by the remnants of the ore, about two feet in
width. This ends abruptly as far as could be ascertained in the field;
but specimens of the adjoining rock taken one, two and four feet from
the contact were respectively spinel norite with garnet, spinel norite and
norite. This rock was of the ordinary variety described on page 30, with
the spinels merely superposed upon it. This gradation appears to be
the typical association of the emery in this district, although the cuttings
are not confined to this distance from the large schist inclusion. The
ore is important chiefly from a theoretical standpoint; only a very lim-
ited amount has been taken out.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES we
WY
Emery Schist Type
Emery schist is a very common type in the southeastern part of the
Cortlandt area, in the Dickerson and Salt Hill region. The country had
here been widely prospected for iron at the time when it was thought
that the ore was magnetite. The emery has been mined on the roadside,
at the southeast corner of Salt Hill; and it is said to run more or less
continuously over the mountain to the north. Here it appears to trend
more to the east, being mined in several places on the eastern slope of
Dickerson Hill. This seems to be the chief vein, but there are several
other outcrops, some of which are along the border of the district to the
west and east.
In all of the outcrops visited by the writer, the ore is of the same type;
a vein of black emery (which in thin section is seen to be the feldspathic
variety) is bordered on either side by the quartz emery schist. More
often, perhaps, no distinction can be made between the two; the emery
merely becomes quartzose in streaks. Bands of pure quartz a foot or
more across are not uncommon. The quartz streaks are not always
straight; they are often strongly contorted and crumpled. The opening
on the road above referred to is within a hundred feet of the border of
the series, and possibly less; and so closely does the emery in all but
_ color resemble a coarse schist, that it was difficult to decide on its iden-
tity offhand. To the north of this, about a quarter of a mile, is a small
inclusion of mica schist, strike N. 20° E. 80° E.; and 75 yards south of
this outcrop, emery is again taken out. The strike of this inclusion is
very close to the general strike of the schist in this district and also of
the emery schist. The latter varies from N. 35° E. to N. 60° E., but it
generally approximates the former. On the west side of Salt Hill, ore
was found in a tongue of pyroxenite which seemed to be projecting
directly into another inclusion of schist.
The ore of this type, therefore, is sometimes on the border of the
series, near the contact with the mica schist, sometimes near an inclusion
of the same in the igneous rocks, while again, although it shows exactly
the same structure, no association with schist was observed.
Norite Type
Norite and the following type are found chiefly in the northeastern
area, where all of the larger workings are located; but in this area, the
emery is always associated with this peculiar variety of norite, or else as
is indicated below under the following type. The succession and rela-
"4. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tions of the various rocks are, however, much more complicated than in
the previous types, and three varieties may be distinguished.
In one of the Dalton pits, a simple succession from the brown norite
to ore to sillimanite schist was observed. The former is typical; the
latter is coarser than usual, carries some garnet and sometimes shows
crumpling and contortion. ‘The ore varies in width from two to ten
feet and is of the pure variety.
At the Buckbee mine, the underground work is inaccessible, having
all caved; there are two open cuts, however, which seem to indicate the
structure. These are both lenticular in ground plan, curving into the
hill and out again. ‘The ore is an excellent one, being often nearly half
corundum in large gray-brown crystals, and practically fresh and un-
altered. It may at times carry garnet and occasionally pyrite in half
inch crystals. In both of these pits, the wall rock is the brown norite,
which in this case, however, resembles ordinary norite, in thin section,
more closely. It is altered to chlorite in patches. Such of the ore as
has not been taken out occurs in this rock in irregular veins, which often
“break” into pockets. The poorest grades of ore resemble the streaky
quartzose emery, but this in thin section resolves itself into a quartz
sillimanite schist, often garnetiferous. There is a broad irregular band
of coarse pyroxenite running horizontally through the cliff of brown
norite, but it seems to be a local segregation, having nothing to do with
the ore. A vogesite dike appears in both of the pits. The succession
here may or may not be as in the gradational type; it would seem rather
that the sillimanite schist encloses the ore and is itself surrounded by
the norite.
In the two other large pits on the Dalton property, a more complicated
relation exists. The wall rock is a quartz gabbro; this becomes a much
chloritized pyroxenite of the usual type, which passes into brown norite.
The latter is at first chiefly hypersthene, but it becomes feldspathic near
the ore, which is of the pure variety. Sillimanite schist is plentiful; in
one case, it occurs in irregular fine-grained masses on the other side of
the ore, while in the second case, it seems to occur mingled with the ore.
Kssentially the same succession is to be observed in the latest cut of the
McCoy mine. This is about 30 feet wide by 45 feet deep, and 35 feet
high and gives the complete cross section. At a short distance away,
the whole ledge resembles a sandstone with vertical dip, owing to the
regular zones in which the types occur (Plate V, fig. 1). Starting from
the west, the succession is biotite norite (typical), sillimanite schist,
“ore” (sillimanite schist with spinel, very fissile, or “slatey’ as the
miners call it), then the typical sillimanite schist again; this succession
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 5
is then repeated on a smaller scale, with an exceptionally fine grained
biotite norite. This is evidently an apophysis of the larger mass project-
ing into the schist. On the east, the wall rock is a hornblende pyrox-
enite, which seems to be the real country.
Micaceous Type
Two of the three larger pits of the McCoy mine and most of the
smaller prospects scattered over the hill are of micaceous type, in which
a sheared micaceous rock is associated with the ore. The ore from the
large pit of the mine, and the chamber connected with it (described
above), was the best mined anywhere in the district, except possibly
Buckbee’s. Small areas of pink and blue corundum emery were found
in this pit. In the other pits, it is a lower grade of spinel emery, seldom
showing the corundum crystals.
In the large pit, which is about 80 feet deep, of which depth 30 feet is
below water, the sides are not quite vertical, dipping 70°-85° S. This
is most apparent at the eastern end, where the wall rock is very mica-
ceous, dipping as above and striking N. 80° E. At times, it strongly
resembles Manhattan schist; again, the mica may be all biotite, and the
feldspar may diminish until the rock is practically an aggregate of ande-
sine, with less orthoclase and a great amount of biotite. Scattered
through these minerals is abundant spinel, with varying amounts of
corundum. At the west end of the pit, the wall rock is diorite, with
strongly pleochroic hornblende, which is in idiomorphic crystals often
absorbed and embayed and considerably in excess of the biotite. To the
east and south of the mica rock lies a pyroxenite, carrying hornblende
and some biotite; and it may also contain sillimanite and garnet. The
large veins of ore, if not worked out, are below water level and inacces-
sible; but the mica rock carries small veins of spinel emery. Men who
had worked this pit stated that the ore was always found in this black
mica rock, often associated with garnets; that occasionally white mica
was found with it, and that in the ore itself would sometimes be found
little bunches of black mica or green mica (clinochlore ?). On the
dump, a large amount of the quartzose-streaked emery was found, but it
was not observed in place.
About 50 feet to the east of this pit is the head of a cut extending 300
feet east. It is 30 to 60 feet wide, becoming at its head 50 feet deep.
The wall rock on either side is a typical looking diorite, as in the large
pit. Then, starting from the diorite, comes a rock which entirely resem-
bles a mica schist (N. 80°-90° E., 75°-90° S.), but which proves in thin
6 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
section to be a biotite norite carrying abundant spinel and some corun-
dum. Adjoining it is a poor ore, which is a sillimanite schist. with abun-
dant cordierite. Then comes a brown norite, which is followed by a
good spinel emery; and hornblende pyroxenite separates this from the
diorite. This is, however, an ideal cross-section, found only in one
place; in other places, the succession is less regular and often repeats
itself. In a 40-foot cut to the northeast, the structure is exactly the
same, except that the spinel norite is replaced by spinel diorite, as in the
large pit, and that the brown norite is lacking.
In these three pits of the McCoy mine, then, the ore occurs in a
schistose, spinel-bearing micaceous rock, either diorite or norite, and is
associated with sillimanite schist and hornblende pyroxenite.
The Chase mine, which is the last to be described, appears to be similar
in structure to these; but garnets in great abundance are found there.
he ore occurs in a ledge, flanked on one side by a corundum-bearing
sillimanite schist, which at times becomes very coarse; and on the other
by a very biotitic rock, similar to that in the large pit of the McCoy mine,
except that it carries corundum in irregular masses instead of spinel.
In irregular association with the ore occurs a feldspathic rock contain-
ing abundant garnets. From a rotten zone in this rock, well-formed
trapezohedrons one and a half inches in diameter can be readily ex-
tracted. This rock in thin section is seen to be chiefly a basic altered
feldspar, with a little biotite, spinel and corundum and the large garnets.
It may occur in the ore in irregular masses, but is chiefly separate. In
the ore itself, garnet occurs abundantly, both as crystals and as rounded
flow-like masses, often four or five inches across. The ore is somewhat
peculiar aside from this, being more than half corundum in fairly fresh
white crystals; for the rest, it is made up of spinel, magnetite, allanite
end garnet. This is a high grade ore, but it is injured by the abundance
of brittle garnet and allanite. Around the cutting for a few hundred
feet, a very garnetiferous rock extends, whose dark mineral is probably
an altered hornblende, constituting a diorite. The true country rock is,
however, a pyroxenite, which varies an indicated on the map.
The foregoing description of the emery deposits may be epitomized as
follows:
1. The ore usually occurs in a region in which mica schist inclusions
are abundant and often within a hundred feet or so of such an inclusion;
and the largest mines (McCoy, Dalton, etc.) are within 1000 feet of the
border of the Cortlandt Series.
2. The ore is always in sharply defined veins, pockets or lenses, but its
constituents often occur disseminated through the rocks immediately
adjacent.
ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES vara
3. The ore is immediately associated with abnormal rocks, containing
sillimanite, cordierite, garnet, quartz or allanite, which are found no-
where else in the area, except around certain schist inclusions near
Crugers; or more rarely, it adjoins rocks which are normal except for
the spinel scattered through them. There is often a great abundance of
biotite around the ore, which is also characteristic of these inclusions.
4, These rocks often exhibit evidences of shearing, faulting and crack-
ing, which is rare in other parts of the district, except around schist
inclusions.
ORIGIN
In reviewing the possible modes of origin of the emery in the Cort-
landt Series, it appears evident that only two are plausible; the emery
may be pyrogenic, due to magmatic segregation, or due to the absorption
of some of the numerous schist inclusions in the area. The evidence
may perhaps be more effectively weighed if we first briefly consider the
artificial production of corundum and its occurrence in other districts.
Artificial Production of Corundum
Several French geologists have been especially active in the field of
synthetic mineralogy,®* but their results in this connection are of little
importance. Many of them worked with alumina and artificial salts,
-so that their processes find no equivalent in nature; others dissolved
alumina in various melted minerals, adding in some cases a trace of
ammonium fluoride or some similar salt. These last experiments are of
more importance in a geological way, but they appear to have no appli-
cation to the Cortlandt Series.
The only relevant case that the writer has been able to find of the
production of corundum by the simple fusion of a mineral is described
by Vernadsky.®*? He observed the formation of corundum and silli-
manite in a melt of muscovite, in the course of his experiments on the
genesis of sillimanite.®
Probably the most important investigation from a geological point of
view is that undertaken by J. Morozewicz.** Basing his work on the
6 FouguE and L&vy. Synthese des Minéraux et des Roches, Paris. 1882. See also
L. Bourcsors, ‘Reproduction artificielle des minéraux,’’ in Fremy’s Encyclopédie
chimique, II, pt. 3, p. 63.
On the Sillimanite Group, and the Role of Alumina in Silicates. Moscow, p. 83.
1891. (Russian.) He also describes the formation of sillimanite from clay in “Sur la
reproduction de la Sillimanite,’’ Bull. Soc. france. de minéral., p. 256. 1890.
* Corundum is commercially manufactured by the Norton Emery Company at Niagara
Falls by the fusion of bauxite, previously rendered anhydrous by thorough heating.
& “Experiment. Untersuchungen itiber d. Bildung d. Mineralien im Magma.”’ Tscher-
mak’s mineral. und petrog. Mittheil., XVIII, pp. 1-90 and 105-240. 1898.
738 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
principles of Vogt and Lagorio, he rejected the French synthetic methods
as unnatural and studied the deposition of corundum in the melts of a
large glass factory, where he could control his temperatures up to
2100° C. His melts varied in size up to one hundred pounds or more.
They were made up, sometimes of the pure salts and sometimes of pow-
dered minerals, to approximate the composition of certain natural erup-
tive rocks. They were contained in clay crucibles, whose position in the
furnace might be varied according to the degree of heat desired. A point
often overlooked in connection with this investigation, and one which he
states to be its most serious defect,®° is that 30 per cent. of his melts
were spoiled because they attacked the clay crucibles. Melts high in
magnesia with low alumina and alkalis, were especially prone to this,
deriving alumina from the crucible to form spinel, while those rich in
lime, alumina and alkalis had no effect at the highest heat. The results
of this well-known study prove that the role of alumina in a magma is
entirely analogous to that of silica; if it be saturated with respect to
alumina, corundum will separate out just as quartz does in a granite.
An alumino-silicate magma is saturated when it has the general compo-
sition MeO, m Al,0O,, n SiO, (Me—K,, Na,, Ca, and n=2 — 13)
and m is more than one. If silica is also in excess. (over 13), sillimanite
is formed. If magnesia and iron are present in excess, they will form
spinel; or if silica is also in excess, cordierite will separate. The sepa-
ration of corundum from a magma, therefore, is governed by definite
laws; and minerals, moreover, which have previously been thought of as
due to contact action are thus shown to be pyrogenic under certain
conditions.
Morozewicz in a previous paper® had shown that alumina will readily
dissolve in a molten magma whose composition approximates that of
basic magnesian rocks, and that on cooling, the excess alumina separates
out as corundum and spinel.
Corundum may, therefore, be formed by the action of “agents miné-
ralisateurs” on alumina, or by the fusion of certain aluminous minerals,
or by the solution of alumina to supersaturation in molten magmas.
Origin of Corundum in Other Localities
Since the emery of the Cortlandt Series is always in igneous rock,
only a few similar occurrences of corundum in other localities will be
noticed.*”
& Op. cit., p. 18.
% Zeitsch. fur Krystall., XXIV, 281. 1895. See also LaGorio, idem. p. 285.
87 For a full discussion, see J. H. Pratt, Bull. 269, U.S. G.S., pp. 71-96. 1906.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 79
Corundum is found in North Carolina in peridotite segregated at the
contact of the igneous rock with gneiss. There is a sharp contact with
the gneiss, but the corundum grades into the peridotite. Pratt®* he-
lieves that it separated out of the magma as an original constituent, ac-
cording to the laws cited above, and segregated at the border in a fashion
analogous to that of pyrrhotite or ilmenite. The earlier writers,®? how-
ever, believe that it is due to contact action on the gneiss. Corundum
is also found in plumasite in Plumas County, California, and there is
no doubt that it is an original pyrogenic constituent.”°
Corundum has been found on the contact of granite and clay slate on
Dartmoor in Devonshire, apparently due to contact action," and at con-
tacts between granite and micaceous quartzite near Morlaix, France,
having the same origin and associated with sillimanite and andalusite,
spinel, etc.*?
Corundum in sapphire crystals has been found in a monchiquite dike at
Yogo, Montana. The rock is too low in alumina, however, for it to have
separated out as an original constituent, and it is probably due to inclu-
sions of argillaceous sediment derived from the underlying rocks.7* Co-
rundum and zircon found in basalt and other basic rocks in Haute Loire”
are thought also to be due to the destruction of gneiss inclusions.
Corundum, then, in igneous rocks, may be due to magmatic segregation,
or to contact action, or to the absorption of aluminous inclusions.
Evidence as to Its Formation in the Cortlandt Series
It has been shown above that the emery in the Cortlandt Series is often
streaky in appearance; usually associated with inclusions of mica schist
or found near the borders of the area but not on them; immediately asso-
ciated with sillimanite rocks and other abnormal varieties; showing no
marked preference for any country rock as previously supposed, though
found most generally in pyroxenite, and often associated with rocks which
have undergone metamorphic action. Spinel and corundum may be scat-
tered through the adjoining rocks for a few yards or less whether it be
an abnormal rock or a normal igneous flow.
688 Tdem, p. 81.
6 See for example T. M. Chatard, Bull. 42, U.S. G.S., p. 45. 1887.
7 Bull. 269, U.S. G.S., p. 94. 1906.
71K. Busz, Geol. Mag., p. 492. 1896.
72 A, K. COOMARA—SWAMy, Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., LVII, 185. 1901.
737,. V. Pirsson, “Petrography of the Igneous Rocks of the Little Belt Mountains,”
Montana, 20th Ann. Rep. U. 8. G.S., pt. 3, p. 554. 1900.
74 A, Lacroix, “Sur l’origine du zircon et du corindon de la Haute Loire,” Bull. Soc.
franc. de minéral., p. 100. 1890.
80 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The Theory of Magmatic Segregation
That magmatic segregation is possible is proved by the experiments of
Morozewicz, who has shown that corundum may separate out of a super-
saturated magma and that the associated minerals, which were formerly
supposed to be due in every case to contact action, may have a similar
origin. If it has so formed, we should expect it to show probably a close
association with the border of the igneous area, as in the case of the Caro-
lina peridotite, simce such an abundance of early-crystallizing minerals
would be carried to the borders by convection currents, or by some process
akin to Soret’s principle. It shows a rather close association, in some
cases occurring practically on the border, while the most important, mine
is located within a thousand feet of it. Other occurrences are, however, a
mile or more removed. ‘The ore is disseminated to a certain degree
through the surrounding rocks, which are sometimes otherwise normal
and sometimes extraordinary aggregates of the minerals which have been
shown to be associated with pyrogenic corundum under certain conditions.
Moreover, the magnetite which is associated so plentifully with the ore is
known to be in other localities a basic segregation,”® although in such cases
it is usually highly titaniferous. It is possible, therefore, that the ore
has separated out of the magma as an original pyrogenic constituent.
There are certain phenomena, however, which this hypothesis does not
account for. If the emery shows any preference for the borders, as in the
case of the Carolina peridotite, it should show a distinct preference, occur-
ring directly on the borders as a sharp contact but grading into the
igneous rock. In no case, however, was it observed directly on the border
or even on the margin of an inclusion. Moreover, in none of the cases of
pyrogenic corundum cited by either Morozewicz™® or Lagorio™ is magnet-
ite a very important constituent; certainly in none does it occur in excess
of the corundum. Basic segregations of magnetite, furthermore, are
usually very titaniferous,* while in the Cortlandt Series, the average of
Ti0, in the four different emery analyses is 1.90 per cent, while in seven
analyses of the important igneous rocks of the district, the average is 2.15
per cent., running much the lowest in the pyroxenites. Nor does this
theory explain the dynamic action which is so evident at the mines and
almost confined to them; nor the streaked appearance of the ore in a very
7% See for a summary Kemp’s Ore Deposits of the U. S., p. 171, ete. 1906.
7 Min. pet. Mitth., XVIII, 212-219. 1898.
7 Zeit. Kryst. Min., XXIV, 285. 1895.
7 Thus, for example, the ore from the classic locality for this process, Taberg, is
almost an ilmenite; similarly the Cumberlandite of Rhode Island, the titaniferous mag-
netites of the Adirondacks, ete.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 81
important variety, unless indeed flowage after the separation of the emery
is postulated. Finally, the abundant garnets found at the Chase mine
are not explained, nor the biotite at the McCoy and Chase mines; nor is
the association of the emery with quartz accounted for. It would be diffi-
cult to explain how corundum could separate in the presence of quartz,
since according to Morozewicz the two would combine to form sillimanite.
Theory of the Absorption of Sedimentary Material
The possibility of the effectiveness of the absorption of sedimentary
material is evidenced by the fact cited above from Morozewicz, viz., clay
crucibles are attacked at a high temperature by melts rich in MgO and
poor in Al,O, and alkalis, such as pyroxenite. If this could take place at
2100° C. with a low pressure, it appears certain that a molten magma of
such composition could readily attack a more or less attenuated inclusion
of mica schist; and the abundance of these inclusions in the district has
already been shown.”® Lacroix,®® moreover, states the following general
rule: “Si l’enclave différe beaucoup de la roche eruptive par sa teneur en
silice, elle est facilement detruite et l’on n’en trouve plus, en général, que
des traces.” This principle had been applied by him in Haute Loire and
by Pirsson at Yogo, Montana.
In such a case, the process would involve the separation of a small mass
of aluminous sediment and its more or less complete absorption by the
subterranean magma. This would give rise to a local enrichment in
alumina, which would then be deposited according to the laws enunciated
by Morozewicz. The theory thus involves certain features of both mag-
matic segregation and contact action, but it is essentially neither; nor
does it involve the old view which Morozewicz and Lagorio have shown to
be false, that corundum is infusible in a magma and that it merely repre-
sents the unattacked portions of the xenolith. The occurrence is taken by
the writer to be a strong confirmation of the laboratory experiments of
these geologists, rather than to oppose them.
The accompanying analysis of mica schist was made with a view to de-
termining the extent to which this rock could have contributed alumina.
The percentage found (21.70) is only slightly above that in the norites;
pure norite (which is chiefly feldspar) reaches 20.72 per cent., being the
highest. The pyroxenites in which the ore is generally found run about
7JIn this connection, also, the limestone inclusions of the district, altered to lime
pyroxenite in one case, wernerite schist in another and a garnet-tremolite rock in a third,
may be recalled as indicating the capability of the igneous rock to absorb and work over
an included mass. The fact that most of the inclusions of schist practically lack mica,
which must have been absorbed by the magma, may also be recalled.
8 Op. cit., p. 101.
82 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
four to six per cent. The specimens of schist analyzed had undergone
little or no contact action; but it will be recalled that at Crugers, for
example, the schist shows a steady increase in alumina as the igneous rock
is approached, until on the contact the per cent. is 29.50, as shown by
Williams’s analyses. The same, moreover, holds with regard to iron; the
unaffected schist runs 7 or 8 per cent., but at the contact shows 25 per |
cent. Even at a point 700 yards from the contact, the schist runs 24.32
per cent. in Al,O, and 11.12 per cent. FeO and Fe,0,. The reason* for
this increase is a question beyond the province of this paper; the fact
remains that the mica schist in contact with the igneous rock is abund-
antly able to contribute alumina and iron and that even the unaltered
schist is much higher in alumina than the most common country rock of
the emery. The silica of the schist presumably goes to form the quartz
streaks so generally found with the emery. That the emery may be formed
by the absorption of schist is also indicated by its occurrences in the cliff
of diorite at Crugers. As described above, every gradation, from the
unaltered mica schist to one composed chiefly of quartz, biotite, magnetite,
sillimanite, garnet, etc., at the contact and so to the inclusions in the
igneous rock itself, composed of magnetite, spinel and corundum, may be
traced. These thin lenses of magnetite and spinel are so completely
changed that they were once mined for iron. Moreover, pleonaste was
found in the garnet rock from the contact at Salt Hill; and it was found
in one case in an igneous dike cutting limestone.
The sillimanite, etc., with which the emery is associated, may, accord-
ing to Morozewicz, be found when the ore is pyrogenic, although N. H.
and A. N. Winchell state that sillimanite “in igneous rocks occurs only
as a result of absorption of foreign material.” *? It is at least certain that
it occurs abundantly on the borders of the district, where it can only be
due to contact action. Garnet, which is also found as a reaction mineral,
is a similar case. The great abundance of biotite in some of the mines is
paralleled by its abundance at the Crugers contact, and the green mica
which is said to occur sometimes in the emery is also found by Williams
in certain inclusions and identified by him as margarite. Quartz is com-
mon on the contact and also constitutes the bulk of some of the inclusions
at Crugers ; its association with the emery is thus paralleled, whereas it is
apparently not known in association with true pyrogenic corundum.
If this theory be correct, anything like a sharp contact of the emery or
its associates with the mica schist would not be expected, nor, in fact,
81 There seems to be no warrant for thinking that the igneous rock could have con-
tributed this iron and alumina, as is often the case in garnet zones in limestone.
82 Optical Mineralogy, N. Y., p. 363. 1909.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 83
would the mineral be looked for directly on the contact. It is evident
that if the emery is the result of the absorption of the schist, larger masses
of the latter might be looked for in the neighborhood, but if the inclusion
were small and therefore easily assimilated, they would, of course, not be
found. Thus, in some cases we find inclusions of schist near the emery,
but never to the writer’s knowledge nearer than 200 feet; and often they
are lacking.
The resemblance of the Salt Hill types of ore to a black quartzose
schist has already been remarked upon, and the rough approximation of
its strike to that of the schist has also been noticed. In the light of the
foregoing facts, it would appear that these occurrences are merely par-
tially assimilated inclusions of schist entirely analogous to those so well
exposed at Crugers; whereas when the schist is quite absorbed, a much
more complex aggregation of minerals results, containing no quartz except
in a similar streaky mass at the borders. In the case of the emery pit in
the biotite norite area north of Crugers, where the spinel grades into the
surrounding rock, this gradation may be thought of as a quick lessening
of the effects produced by the absorption of the schist, 7. e., the enrich-
ment in alumina is naturally merely a local development, although at the
same time it can have nothing like a sharp contact. This same statement,
of course, applies to similar cases at the other mines. Reference to
Morozewicz’s paper, summarized above, will furnish the conditions under
which the several minerals must have formed.
It must not be supposed, however, that anything like a simple direct
linear variation exists between the schist and any of the igneous rocks; a
segregational process of some kind must be postulated, for even a richly
aluminous schist could not form as a direct hybrid a rock carrying the 59
per cent. of Al,O, found in the richest emery. Or, since at times the
schist retains something of its form and is evidently not entirely absorbed,
it may be supposed that the hybrid formed contains the schist constitu-
ents in greater quantity than those of the igneous rock. The variation
diagram as constructed between mica schist and quartz emery schist and
a typical norite shows a distinct approach to linear variation, but if
pyroxenite be used instead of norite, the curves are often sharp; and it is
evident that more analyses must be made before the crude process out-
lined above can be reduced to an exact determination.
The final point to be considered—the dynamic action at the mines—is
one whose significance is not clear. The fact remains that similar effects
are common, though not universal, around the schist inclusions of the
district, thus emphasizing a further similarity. It was suggested above
by the writer that it might be due to shearing along zones of weakness in
84 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the area, which would naturally occur chiefly along the borders of foreign
inclusions and conceivably in places where these inclusions had been
absorbed. In the case of the mines, it is also possible that the schistose
rock is an altered inclusion of the schist itself; but the entire absence of
quartz and muscovite and the presence at times of such minerals as
hypersthene tend to refute this view. Finally, it is possible that these
rocks may be inclusions of Highland gneiss; but if they were, their action
on the igneous rocks would be undoubtedly similar to that of the schist,
and, moreover, their associations indicate that they are not foreign masses.
This completes what the writer has to say concerning the origin of the
emery. From the points brought out, it is evident that the ore has in
most cases at least been formed by the action of the igneous rock upon
included material, thus giving rise to a magma supersaturated with re-
spect to iron and alumina; and out of this the corundum and its asso-
ciates crystallized according to the laws formulated by Morozewicz. The
evidence, while sufficient to justify a fairly positive statement, is, of
course, not entirely satisfactory, and the process is not as simple as indi-
cated. ‘There seem to be no definite objections to this theory, however,
while those which confront that of magmatic segregation either through
the mass or at the cooler borders, appear to be insuperable. It might
also be suggested that the highly aluminous Hudson River slates, which
probably once covered the district, furnished the alumina, but no trace
of them has been found in the field. There are inclusions of schist in
the diorite area which are generally associated with a fine black pyrox-
enite, but around which no emery has been found to the writer’s knowl-
edge; although the farmers, judging from its toughness and color, be-
lieve that it is “full of emery.” If it does not contain emery in any
place—except possibly the very narrow zone almost on the contact, which
we would expect by analogy from the effects at Crugers—it merely in-
dicates that these inclusions were particularly quartzose and compact and
retained their identity to an exceptional degree. As implied above, it is
not the large, well defined inclusions from which we would expect emery
to be derived, but rather the smaller fragments torn from these inclu-
sions and probably entirely absorbed.
From this fact, it is evident that little can be predicted concerning
the probable extension of the emery. While pyroxenite, being low in
Al,O, and high in MgO, may readily attack the schist, the usual associa-
tion of the ore with this rock is not an essential limitation; and its rela-
tions to the borders of the area are vague and irregular. Possibly, a
study of the mica schist at the borders nearest the mines might throw
light on the particular variety of schist most susceptible of absorption,
but this question has not been investigated by the writer.
ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 85
The technology of corundum is discussed by J. H. Pratt.’* From the
composition of the Cortlandt emery as described above, it is evident that
it is low grade ore. The presence of spinel, sillimanite, garnet, feldspar,
quartz, etc., greatly lowers its cutting efficiency and materially affects its
toughness. At the same time, the presence of spinel, which is 8 in hard-
ness, would not interfere with the manufacture of a vitrified emery
wheel; and for many purposes where extreme hardness is not required,
the spinel emery furnishes a convenient transition between garnet and
true emery. The unsuccessful attempt to smelt the more ferriferous
varieties for iron has been noted above. Even earlier than this, it had
been suggested*®* that the ore might be used as a refractory lining for the
puddling furnace, open hearth and Bessemer converter, as well as an
aluminous flux in the blast furnace in admixture with a siliceous stock,
but apparently these sugestions have not proved practicable.
SUMMARY
The Cortlandt Series is an igneous complex situated just southeast of
Peekskill, N. Y., and is about 28 square miles in extent. Its correlation
cannot be definitely settled, although it is probably late Paleozoic. The
rocks have been described by J. D. Dana and G. H. Williams, the former
attacking them from the standpoint of genesis, and the latter treating
them rather as an aggregation of petrographic types. In the present
paper, they are treated more from a geological standpoint, the differen-
tiations made in the various broad types being directly proportionate to
their areal importance. Reference to the appended map will impart the
distribution and extent of the varieties determined, and on page 58 is
given a diagram which indicates the most salient relations between the
several types. The various differentiations of the norite magma are
most centrally located; they are flanked on both sides by pyroxenites
which extend to the west, and an unknown distance under the river, pos-
sibly as far as Stony Point, where they again outcrop. Between the
norites and the western area of the pyroxenites lies a diorite area. The
granites are more isolated, though unquestionably part of the series.
The most basic members at least grade into one another in many cases,
while at times, sharp contacts have been found. The analyses of the
more important types indicate an unmistakable serial relationship,
although complicated by the entrance of the pyroxenites. It is probable
that the latter were intruded first, followed closely by the norites, so that
8 Bull. 269, U.S. G.S., p. 159. 1906.
% J. P. KIMBALL, Amer. Chemist, IV, 321. 1874. This paper contains four analyses of
the emery.
86 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
sometimes these varieties are found banded together in flow-like masses.
The diorites must have come next, since the granites were evidently the
last to form.
Dikes are abundant throughout the series and vary. in composition
from pegmatite to peridotite.
Many inclusions of schist, and some of limestone and gneiss, are found
in the district. These are most prominent in the large diorite area and
in the district near Salt Hill. At times, they have been absorbed by the
molten magma, giving rise to very abnormal rocks. Contact metamor-
phism is also apparent around them, and on the borders of the series in
places, developing in the schist an abundance of biotite, quartz, mag-
vetite and many aluminous minerals; and in the limestone wernerite,
diopside and other lime compounds.
Dynamic metamorphism is indicated by all of these rocks to a slight
though constant degree; but this metamorphism sometimes .assumes very
marked proportions around the foreign inclusions in the district and in
places from which the emery has been mined.
The economic geology is confined chiefly to granite quarrying and
emery mining. The emery has been generally considered as an example
of magmatic segregation, but more detailed work would seem to indicate
that it is due to the absorption of sedimentary xenoliths. This would
give rise to a magma supersaturated with respect to iron and alumina,
from which emery would separate out according to the laws formulated
by Morozewicz. This view of the origin of the emery is supported by
its frequent, somewhat remote association with visible inclusions of
schist ; by its association with exactly the same suite of minerals as those
developed on the borders of the district and in certain inclusions whose
relations are unmistakable, and by its frequent occurrence banded with
quartz, sometimes contorted and resembling exactly a black quartz schist.
PLATH III
PYROXENITE AND DIORITE
Fig. 1. Rounded form of olivine pyroxenite outcrop at Chase Corners, caused
by the weathering of the olivine. This rock is never found in roches
moutonnées, as are the other rocks of the series
Fig. 2. Stringers of Quartz Schist in Diorite, Buchanan
*.
peear S08 Coen. rile, ache
~_
#
-_
ee ire vies tie Toucst tecke
B45 ce Spr fre wen? . Hes tag .
Mea is Stic,”
Pee <2 D- Bye <eet AArscay Tie The. “aera
eee Fe tg sort xe
Bf tery a MR epe9d woh gt, Sieh: Snr eee
Be Saeie sing, Sa ore nat eine en te nee
polka Naeioe year Saleh Eis Pein: ; ot a
— 23 at pas, = 4 FZ Tix 1%. Rei
vA ae 3 ah on oohtsh. on ae ”
Bed eed trons ue Sad paieredes ae ie ne
eee aH. ofi.sF ee 5 sSpsgundas 2
a eS Det) ee pape indestet. wees
Se WEES oy tee as; ry this. ciate :
_ SS ees Pree wi The Canieievinial f
ee eS € Tey: tas puesto
ih a
Psy Be) eats. “tee = = a b Sa Pes . ‘he whey) ee
<i Sotets Srp oor hd = ils Poavtegion: are viable” aru
Raa 8S gee ee See sivite’ “sce or
emer iieas . 45h hese aw Tecate: ais ofr inte i
,. <>
es
ine ages
ater) : ber SRK . ae eS
ke < M4
¥~
7
= a
~_ - ‘
. ~ = : -
‘ .
ey - =— .
> : i rs ¥
- . = ;
— ad 4 a
‘ .
- M4 73
» « *
é - “
pa '
P dy
Ge
es Py a
, ee
4 4 . To
3 —> -
¥ rs aA ol
wg are oF
} oh a eat 2:
L
AcAD. §
¥-
N.
ANNALS
1
Fic.
ars
PLATE IV
GNEISSOID STRUCTURE
Vig. 1. Original Gneissoid Structure, on road near Pleasantside
Wig. 2. Original Gneissoid Structure, one mile south of Spitzenberg Hill
ae .P, ¥e py - t
PLATE V
MCCOY MINE AND SCHIST
Fig. 1. The latest cutting in the McCoy Mine, showing the emery banded with
sillimanite schist
Fig. 2. Quartz Hmery Schist, Salt Hill, showing the streaked appearance of
this low grade ore
+
: i
bye ‘Syatoetent
ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOLUME XXI, PLATE V
_ PLATE VI
: =
“GEOLOGICAL MAP OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES ses
ae
ee
+i
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyczum or Natura History, 1817-1876)
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. :
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contains the
scientific contributions and reports of researches, eee with the records
of meetings and similar matter.
A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year
and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles
composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and
are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of
the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus-
trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the
Academy. ‘The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has
been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at
irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to
monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume
I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs,
etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued.
All. publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The
Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of
any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to _
THE LIBRARIAN,
New York Academy of Sciences,
care of
American Museum of Natural History,
New York, N. Y.
fi ae eT
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. XXI, pp. 87-117, pll. VII-IX
Editor, EpmMunpD OTIs HovrEy
THE INFLUENCE OF HEREDITY AND OF
ENVIRONMENT IN DETERMINING THE
COAT COLORS IN MICE
BY
T. H. Morgan
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
5 Jury, 1911:
\
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or Natura History, 1817-1876)
OFFICERS, 1911
President—Franz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—GrorcE F. Kunz, Frepertc A. Lucas,
R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL
Recording Secretary—EDMUND OtT1s Hovey, American Museum
Corresponding Secretary—HeEnny EK. Crampton, American Museum
Treasurer—EMERSON McMItirn, 40 Wall Street
Inbrarian—RatpuH W. Towser, American Museum
SHCTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
~
Chairman—GuorceE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—CuHar es P. BerKey, Columbia. University
SHCTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—F reveric A. Lucas, Brooklyn Museum
Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University ~
Secretary—Epwarp J. THarouer, Teachers’ College
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chatrman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University
Secretary—FReEDERIC LyMaNn WELLS, Columbia University
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West
Jeet
iis Fore LA.
[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XXI, pp. 87-117, pll. VII-IX. 5 July, 1911.]
THE INFLUENCE OF HEREDITY AND OF ENVIRONMENT
IN DETERMINING THE COAT COLORS IN MICE
By T. H. Morean
CONTENTS
Page
Mini tO TUNE TIO MEL ee toler wiaetotehadacalel < havelaloie sok ous s'6.«,5,/02)6' a's oe een: feels 'e evareter neato te 88
Crosses between a wild sport of Mus musculus and domesticated varieties. 88
Deseription of the wild sport. :......... cece ccc ceccces wide Giatetee ares ' 8&9
Crosses between the wild sport and domesticated races with uniform
COO dace od AA OB eae a ator: BP REET M. Sat iocattaleto ed Sheiaiesd aie at's che Seheeienene 90
Crosses between the sport and yellow mice...................... 90
Crosses between the sport and gray mice................-...-20- 92
Crosses between the sport and black mice...............-.-2+--0- 92
Crosses between the sport and chocolate mice.................-4. 92
Crosses between the sport and albinos. ..............00-00+20s00 93
Crosses between F,, hybrid sports and yellows........-.....-... 93
@rassestpeiweenr +, By BEIGMSDOTES a:- 10 <1s << « 3) <teae «, re syn ssa eerie 93
New type of gray with a yellow belly. ............s0.cccscceec cr cceseree 93
Crossing extracted gray and black to test the hypothesis of alternate domi-
MPTICC Ge FECOSSIOM sete hci a ye aietge lee teyers: aie) cree lov'oree 6)'3 6, 3.6% ja 0. 0 0.6) she eee aan 94
Crosses between the spotted and the uniform coat...............--.0++00. 95
Influence of the spotted coat on the white belly of the sport.............. 98
Crosses between the black spotted waltzer and mice with chocolate coat... 100
PAGAN Cie WALLACE? arverets cieteta sielateisin eto scaleial Co occ! <) a: << sree © biavaieve, oe otever euatdyelah amare 102
Are black and chocolate different pigments or stages in the development of
BHCESATHE ISITE itetet aie a sloetak ey ctoldvets sitiaersisin le. so clsiels lege eleys 6 alate tian everatenstene 103
PAU TENE (CA EAV\ CRCOLOLS wets ich eke o areiis. ore tcicayraiie: Slslie: aie sys “008 fee, er eriere,oie ish dabetelobeleas 104
OUTED aoa are ycrtete crc CU beter eid ci aiela lore! cicvers ave laiele 0.6 /¢\ se 'wrerete aiieledo ls atataenet 4 104
Crosses between black and white spotted waltzers and yellows............ 105
ATI DUVE- COOLS VOCS POM belecys istsisia ss «c's. «(= /fsle,c eles) = dvale/a ale) gheld ahelquciotete, diarels 106
The influence of the environment on the color of Peromyscus leucopus am-
TOOUTNB B58 Gime Se ctery LOM Ot OTE COED O Cr SE Coan oer, F 106
SSEBEE AR CONGIUI SION caicha's ete tha cic ce 6) ois. 0's ais) ode erate ee erevetia, a ehelefete ehaterarelsvaieia'e he 108
The ticked or gray as a unit character. ...........cc-csees aie ld vmilaiela 108
ERNE AS SOG ELOMM TV IONESIS: (4°5.5° 5 a: is: S:0,070)))svalelal age aleietere ctagcla ee eunteve Cateye 111
Unit characters and factors in Mendelian inheritance................ 114
EAA STDS UPS Cp aT Pam boost oh aS yo SERRA a Shsisare. 5) o: Siaca’ Grats, dom coeee aie RC aleseeh chee alae cio ate Rue nla iy
LIBR,
NEW y
BOTAN.
GaRD:
88 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
INTRODUCTION
During three years I have carried out some experiments in heredity
with mice. My intention was to familiarize myself at first hand with the
process of Mendelian inheritance, and for this purpose few groups of
animals offer as many advantages as do the races of domesticated mice,
not only because of the ease and rapidity with which they breed in con-
finement, but also because the relation of the colors has been more fully
exploited here than in any other group. The varieties of color also offer
an extended field for study. In the course of the work, some crucial
experiments bearing on the theory of inheritance of coat color in mice
were made, and these are given in the following pages. The discovery
of a wild sport of the house mouse led to a study of its inheritance when
crossed with domesticated varieties, and the more interesting results of
these crosses are here given. Incidentally, I describe some experiments
bearing on the theory of the inheritance of acquired characters as tested
by artificial waltzers; a few cases of asymmetrical eye color are also de-
scribed, and their meaning considered. The occurrence of a second wild
sport is briefly mentioned. I have ventured to offer some suggestions
concerning the factors involved in heredity of coat color in mice. In 1908
I brought forward a tentative hypothesis to account for the segregation of
characters in Mendelian inheritance, and I pointed out at the time how
this hypothesis might be tested. This test I have now completed, and the
evidence that shows that it must be abandoned is here offered for the first
time.
CROSSES BETWEEN A WILD Sport oF Mus MUSCULUS AND DOMESTICATED
VARIETIES
DESCRIPTION OF THE WILD SPORT
- Although many “sports” of wild species have been recorded, there are
few cases describing their inheritance when bred either to the typical wild
forms from which they arise or to domesticated races of the same species,
when such exist. In the summer of 1907, I caught in a house at Woods
Hole, Mass., a house mouse, Mus musculus, that had a pure white belly,
chestnut sides and dark gray back. The mouse had come in from outside,
since the house was new and had been closed all winter. Later, I caught
two more such mice and, in the same closet, another typical house mouse.
In the neighborhood, I have caught a few other white-bellied mice. They
must be, therefore, not uncommon in the locality. In 1908, I had sent to
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 89
me from Iowa some mice caught in the fields, which were supposed to be
Peromyscus because of the white belly. These were the same sports that I
had obtained in Woods Hole. I have also found in the collection of house
mice at the American Museum of Natural History in New York a few
skins with the characteristic white belly. The sport must be, therefore,
wide-spread. Since it appears to be found less often in the cities than in
the country, it may possibly be a variety that occurs most often in the
fields, or the conditions there may be more favorable for the appearance
of the sport; and since, as will be shown below, it is a dominant type, it
may ‘in time spread and supplant the ordinary gray-bellied house mouse.
Cuénot has recorded the appearance of this or of a similar sport in his
domesticated races, but whether it arose there as a sport or was already
present in some of the stock he used (in the yellow, for example) cannot
be determined from his data. The sport resembles in all respects the
house mouse except in color. The hair under the chin, neck and belly is
pure white, the white extending to the flanks. Each hair has a dark base,
t. e., it is “ticked” and differs in this respect from the white spots seen in
varieties of domesticated mice. This difference shows that the new sport
has not arisen from escaped spotted mice. A narrow yellow band extends
along the flanks between the fore and hind legs. The yellow band is
strongly marked off from the white below, but less so from the gray of
the sides above. The rest of the body is gray, but in most of my speci-
mens, the gray is somewhat darker than that of the ordinary gray house
mouse. Under the microscope, the hairs of the yellow flank are seen to
have a yellow tip and a black base. The gray back also contains some
hairs with a yellow tip and a black base, also hairs entirely black, while
other hairs have a brown tip and a yellow mid-band. The white hairs of
the belly have a white tip and a black base, while the ventral gray hairs
of the gray-bellied mice have black extending nearly to the tip. The tip is
yellow or nearly colorless. Even here, however, one meets with hairs that
are yellow all the way to the base.
There are no intergrades between the white-bellied and the gray-bellied
mice. There has never been any doubt concerning the nature of the
several hundreds of mice descended from the wild sport that I have ob-
tained. On the other hand, it should be stated that there is a wide range
of fluctuation of the color of the ventral surface in the house mouse.
Individuals are not uncommon that show a distinctly paler belly, but
these belong to the conimon type, and since these lighter forms do not
intergrade with the white-bellied sports or produce them, they rank with
the common type with gray belly.
Cages containing the original wild sports and their offspring have been
90 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
maintained for three years. They have produced but few young, behaving
in this respect like the ordinary house mouse when confined in a small
cage. The males have, however, crossed freely with domesticated races
and this happens also in the case of the house mouse. In most cases, my
sports were bred to gray and produced white-bellied and gray-bellied
young. In a few cases, the white-bellied forms when bred to each other
produced white-bellied and gray-bellied offspring. On the other hand,
two gray-bellied mice of this strain produce only gray-bellied young.
These facts show that the white belly is dominant to the gray belly.
CROSSES BETWEEN THE SPORT AND DOMESTICATED RACES WITH UNIFORM
COAT
The sports have been crossed with all of the ordinary varieties of
domesticated mouse. The results in the first generation are shown in the
following table, in a generalized statement.
Gray white-belicd by yellow = yellow, and gray with white belly.
“ gray with gray belly = gray with white belly.
black = gray with white belly.
chocolate = gray with white belly.
white = gray with white belly.
“ “ “ if 4
oe ce ce (<9
Like the wild gray mouse, the sport is dominant to all other colors
except yellow. The sport, moreover, transmits its entire coat pattern
when it dominates, and even when it becomes recessive in the yellow cross,
the coat pattern reappears in the next generation.
We may now proceed to examine in detail the crosses summarized in
the above table.
Crosses between the Sport and Yellow Mice
Six litters were obtained from male grays with white belly and yellow
females, consisting of fourteen yellows and eleven grays. Of the grays six
were recorded with white bellies, one with a gray belly, four not recorded
for ventral color. Assuming that half of the yellow gametes bear yellow
and half any other color, or colors, the results accord with theory. This
cross was of particular interest because by it I wished to test whether
yellow is allelomorphic to the other colors—gray, black and chocolate. If
the yellow-bearing gametes bear only yellow, then all the F, yellows from
a cross with gray should produce, when inbred, only yellows and grays as
three to one (or two to one). If, on the other hand, yellow stands alone
and is allelomorphic to its absence, then the offspring of the F, yellows
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 91
might contain other colors than yellow and gray. Owing to the sterility
of the yellows, I have had poor success with this cross. Three litters
only of the F, yellow by yellow were obtained. They gave ten yellows and
two grays with white belly. In another case yellows were paired with
grays with gray belly (from Iowa). Two of the yellows that resulted
from the cross produced five yellows, five grays with gray belly and two
cinnamon agoutis. In all therefore the F, yellows have given fifteen
yellows and nine grays.
These results, while not so extensive as I should wish, indicate that the
yellow-bearing germ-cell is pure for yellow in the sense that yellow is
allelomorphic to gray. In other words, yellow has for its allelomorph in
the hybrid with gray the combination of yellow-black-*chocolate that
stands for gray. Whether chocolate and black are separate factors, or
whether black is a development through chocolate, and if so whether an
independent factor (not contained in the complex) brings about this
change need not be discussed now, but will be examined later. Whichever
of these views seems more satisfactory, the results of this experiment, as
far as they go, show that the yellow-bearing germ-cell is pure for that
color factor. The numbers are not large enough perhaps to put the
matter beyond question. As far as they go, however, they indicate that
the yellow gametes of the yellow mice carry only yellow, and that gray
(and perhaps chocolate too) is allelomorphic to yellow. I lack the evi-
dence to show the nature of the yellow pigment in mice, whether it is a
lipochrome, as commonly assumed, or belongs to the melanin series. I
must rest my case on the experimental evidence that seems to show that
yellow is the allelomorph of gray (1. e., of the colors that go to make up
the gray). Since yellows may carry other colors latent, gray as well as
chocolate or black, but only gray (black-yellow-chocolate) when gray has
been introduced as such, either the ticking factor is a separate factor, or
else some special combination (union) of black, chocolate and yellow
exists which when present will give the ticked or barred condition to the
hair. It may seem more probable that the barring factor is a separate
factor that behaves independently of the other factors and when present
produces its effect, except when dominated by the yellow factor. That
this factor may act with chocolate and black alone without yellow is indi-
cated below in the black-chocolate mice out of gray parents.
The F, white-bellied mice were crossed extensively with mice of other
colors, and they produced white-bellied grays and other colors according
to expectation. Gray bellies also appeared among the progeny when yel-
lows were used, which is explained on the ground that the yellow mice
1The presence of black in this combination will be considered later.
92 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
carried the combination for gray belly. That yellow mice may have intro-
duced into their composition the factor for white belly also is shown by
the F, yellow crosses; also by an experiment in which one of these F, yel-
lows bred to black produced some gray mice with white bellies.
I hoped to find out whether yellow mice bearing this factor for white
belly have themselves in consequence a white belly, but owing to the
great variability of yellows in this regard, I can make no positive state-
ments. Most of my yellow mice have a lighter belly. I have seen some
with a pure white belly superficially like those of the sport, but I have not
tested them. In some of them, the hair was yellow proximally and white
at the tips, suggesting possibly the presence of the ticking factor. I have
also had yellows whose ventral surface was as yellow as the rest of the
pelage. :
Two of the F, gray, gray belly, were crossed with ordinary yellows and
gave some gray, gray belly, descendants; none with white bellies.
Crosses between the Sport and Gray Mice
As stated, the wild sports that I obtained seemed to be heterozygous,
since they produced both white-bellied and gray-bellied offspring. Sports
V and VI, for instance, gave three gray, white-bellied, and one gray,
gray-bellied young. Sport V crossed to a wild gray gave two gray, white-
bellied and two gray, gray-bellied young. Sport I crossed to a pure race
of extracted gray dominants gave four gray, white-bellied and one gray,
gray-bellied young. One of the F, grays with gray belly, crossed to an
extracted dominant gray, gave six grays with gray belly.
I have produced races of gray with white belly that breed true to this
condition.
Crosses between the Sport and Black Mice
Sport III bred to a pure black female gave one gray with gray belly
and two grays with white belly. Sport I (or F, ?) to black gave two grays,
gray belly and one gray, white belly. Sport III, bred to spotted black
gave four grays with white belly and one gray with gray belly. These
results show again that the wild sports were heterozygous. When an F,
gray with gray belly was bred to black there were produced three grays
with gray belly and one black.
Crosses between the Sport and Chocolate Mice
Sport I crossed with a chocolate female gave five grays with white
bellies. Sport V bred to chocolate gave three grays with white belly and
two grays with gray belly.
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 93
Crosses between the Sport and Albinos
Sport I bred to a white female gave three grays with white belly and five
grays with gray belly in one litter; and in a second litter, one gray with
white belly and one gray with gray belly. Sport III bred to a white
female gave four grays with white belly and one gray with gray belly.
In all, therefore, there were eight grays with white belly, and seven
grays with gray belly, which is approximate equality and confirms the
view that the sports used were heterozygous. None of the whites used
appear to have contained yellow.
Crosses between F,, Hybrid Sports and Yellows
One of the hybrid white-bellied mice (F,) crossed to yellow gave four
yellows, two grays with white belly, three grays with gray belly, one black
and two whites. One of the hybrid grays with gray belly crossed with
yellow gave two grays with gray belly, one golden agouti and two yellows.
Crosses between F,, Hybrid Sports
Two hybrid grays with white belly, bred together, gave three grays with
white belly. They may appear to have been pure, but the number of
young is too small to make this certain. One hybrid gray with gray
belly, bred to gray with white belly, gave three grays with gray belly and
one golden agouti with gray belly.
New Type oF GRAY WITH A YELLOW BELLY
As ordinary gray mice grow older, the hair on the ventral surface often
becomes yellowish. In some of the many offspring descended from
crosses between the wild sports and domesticated mice, individuals have
appeared again and again with the whole ventral surface distinctly yel-
lowish in color. Some of those with deeper color have been paired and a
race produced most members of which have a deep yellow belly replacing
the white belly in the sport. This color is not due to age, for while it is
true that it often becomes yellower as the mice grow older, I have found
young mice, three weeks old, with a distinct yellow belly.
Under the microscope, the yellow hairs of the belly are seen to have a
yellow outer end and a black inner part. The hair may be said to be
ticked with yellow and black.
The introduction of yellow into the white belly suggests the possibility
that the yellow is the result of crosses with ordinary yellows, but I can
94 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
find no records in my notes that show this to be the case. The color has
appeared sporadically and does not appear to come through the yellows
of the yellow crosses that have yielded relatively few mice compared with
other combinations. Moreover, if the result had been due to yellow, we
would expect it to appear only in the mice directly derived from yellow
crosses, but this is not apparent.
Crossinc EXTRACTED GRAY AND BLACK TO TEST THE HYPOTHESIS OF
ALTERNATE DOMINANCE AND RECESSION
In order to account for the two kinds of germ cells produced for each
pair of characters by Mendelian hybrids, I suggested in 1905 that if
instead of treating the question of segregation as the result of the sepa-
ration of material factors, we treat the process as due to alternate domi-
nance and recession of the paired characters in the gametes, we arrive at
the same end results, viz., the formation of three classes of individuals in
the second generation. This was an attempt to give a dynamic conception
of the process of segregation instead of the conventional idea of separation
of material particles as the basis of Mendelian inheritance. I advanced
this view primarily to escape Cuénot’s hypothesis for the inheritance of
yellow which called in the aid of selective fertilization. Cuénot assumed
that a yellow-bearing sperm never fertilized an egg bearing this same
factor for yellow, hence all yellow mice arise through the union of two
germ-cells only one of which carries the factor for yellow. Selective fer-
tilization seemed to me highly improbable in itself, and if true in general
for other characters it would lead to all sorts of irregularities in Men-
delian inheritance. It now appears that the particular ratio of three to
one, given by Cuénot? as the probable ratio for yellow in the second
generation, is in reality a ratio of two to one, as Castle and Little have
recently pointed out, so that the grounds for the original assumption by
Cuénot fall to the ground. I pointed out at the same time certain logical
consequences that followed, if my argument for alternate dominance and
recession were valid, and I set to work to put the hypothesis to the test
of fact.
The example that I used in my paper to illustrate the hypothesis of
alternate dominance and recession, namely, the inheritance of albinism
versus pigmented coat, was unfortunate, since it is generally conceded now
that albinism is not due to the absence of the color determiner (gray or
black, etc.), but to the absence of another factor, the color producer. It
2 Cuénot discussed also the possibility of the two to one ratio.
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 95
is incontestible that this latter conception of albinism is better in accord
with the facts.
The hypothetical interpretation that I offered involved primarily the
idea, as stated above, that segregation may be a dynamic function of
division in the germ-cells in exactly the same sense that specification of
the cells to produce the organs and tissues of the embryo takes place dur-
ing embryonic development. In this process, the results of experimental
embryology had seemed to show that specification (segregation during
cleavage) is not due to a separation of particles of chromatin, but to the
dynamic action of the cells on each other at the time of or just before the
division stages. Such a conception of embryonic segregation is still held
by most embryologists, and I am still of the opinion, that if this is true
for the ontogeny, it is true for the segregation that takes place in the
formation of the gametes. My hypothesis was complicated, however, by
the further supposition that such a dynamic segregation in the gametes
carries with it the idea of impurity of the gametes in the sense that it
allows as a possibility that the extracted recessive may under certain con-
ditions give rise to the dominant, and conversely that the dominant may at
times produce the recessive type. One especial condition that I assumed
to call forth the latent character in the recessive form was the process of
hybridization. I pointed out how this interpretation could be tested and
its truth or falsity established. If, for example, we cross an extracted
dominant gray mouse (one that has had white in its ancestry) with a
pure black mouse, the offspring in the first generation should all be gray;
but if the presence of the black can call forth the latent white condition,
some white mice should appear in subsequent generations of the gray
hybrids.
The gray mouse used in my experiment was from a race of extracted
dominants that produced only grays. The black mouse was given to me
by B. B. Horton, and was from black stock that he had formed which gave
only blacks. In the first generation grays only were produced. These
inbred produced grays and blacks. The third and fourth generation of
some of these mice were bred in several combinations and continued to
produce only grays and blacks (Plate VIII, figs. 2,3). It is evident that
the hypothesis failed when tested and must therefore be abandoned.
CROSSES BETWEEN THE SPOTTED AND THE UNIFORM CoAT
The experiment was undertaken originally to examine the inheritance
of spotted coat versus uniform coat. Owing to the difficulties in obtain-
ing crosses in large numbers between waltzers and other races, this side
96 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
of the experiment has not yielded as extensive results as I had hoped for.
In conformity with the statement of Cuénot, I found that when the
spotted mice (waltzers) were crossed with races having a uniform coat all
the mice in the first generation were uniform. In the second generation
(F,) both uniform and spotted coats appeared, the former in excess.
Cuénot gave the usual Mendelian ratio 3 :1 for this generation. I have
found difficulty in deciding how to classify the spotted mice, for they
range from those spotted like the original waltzers to those with only a
few white hairs on the belly or even at the tip of the tail. It is apparent
that, if the original coat characteristic of the spotted waltzers be taken as
the recessive character, this particular coat or its equivalent in spottedness
reappears in much less than one fourth of the second generation. I chose
a race of waltzers obtained from Prof. .R. M. Yerkes that had a known
history. This race has not, it is true, a fixed spotted pattern, but within
certain limits the amount of white to black is fairly constant. In marked
contrast to this condition is the series of forms in the F, generation that
range, as stated, from the uniform coat to the original spotted condition.
It is perfectly evident that, as a result of crossing, the uniform coat has
encroached on the spotted coat, so that the latter now has a far greater
range in one direction than before. In a word, the spotted coat in the F,
generation more often approaches the uniform coat than does the original
race. It is clear therefore to my mind that the relation of spotted coat to
uniform is far more complicated than the Mendelian ratio requires and
that hybridizing introduces a new factor or modifies the old one. The
spotted coat may in fact be said to have been contaminated by the cross,
so that in most cases segregation, if the process can be said in fact to be
one of segregation, is less complete than before.
The problem of the spotted coat is one that has not been clearly brought
into line with other interpretations applied to Mendelian inheritance in
mice. For instance, if, as Cuénot has suggested, the albino condition is
due to the loss of a color producer (C), then this factor must be absent
from the white regions of the spotted skin, yet the factor must be present
in other parts of the body of the same spotted animal that produces color.
Hence both the color producer and the color determiner must have been
present in the fertilized egg. It does not seem to me to render the diffi-
culty any less by introducing a spotting factor, unless its mode of action
can be made to conform to the physiological action involved to explain
the presence or the absence of color in other races, for there can be little
doubt that the physiological process that produces yellow, gray, black or
chocolate spots is the same as that producing the same colors in the
uniform coat. On the other hand, it is evident that spotted mice are
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE Ov
different from mice with uniform coat on the one hand and from albinos
on the other, and that they carry something that causes spotting, however
variable, to reappear in the second generation. It is well known that
crossing spotted animals to albinos does not increase the amount of white
in the spotted coat. On the contrary, if the albino is derived from a
colored race with a uniform coat, the first generation may be uniform and
the second variable to the same extent as though a uniform coat had been
used. It is clear that the albino condition is not related as such to the
spotted condition. The paradox seems to me to find its solution in the as-
sumption that the spotted coat is not segregated from the uniform coat as
a “unit character” in the germ cell, but that it represents a process which
occurs in the early cleavage of the egg when the A factor is separated
in certain cells from the C factor. In other words, some of the cells lose
the C factor and the regions derived from these cells are therefore white.
The well-known variability of the coat pattern that has been so difficult
to fix as such can be explained in this way, owing to the irregularities in
the process that leads to the loss of C, or to subsequent shifting of the
cells. Three corollaries follow from such an assumption: First, that there
is no “spotting factor” as such that segregates in the germ cells of the
hybrid animal. All the germ cells contain the factor for color producing
and color determining—the loss comes later in the ontogeny. It is this
tendency to separate late that is inherited, and I have no objection to
calling such a tendency a spotting factor, provided that we do not confuse
its method of action with what occurs in ordinary segregation.
A second corollary is that the tendency to dissociate in the cleavage
stages may also be supposed to occur in the hybrid of the first generation,
but, since the other factor*® that stands for uniform coat (1. e., no disso-
ciation) is also present, the separation may not normally be evident, al-
though in rats, as I have pointed out, even in the first generation the
occurrence of dissociation is manifest in certain parts of the body.
A third corollary also follows. Since crossing spotted and uniform coats
leads to a production in the F, generation of a long series of intermediate
forms, we must infer that the tendency to dissociate has been modified by
crossing with the uniform coat. It has become modified in the sense that
it is often shifted to a later stage in the cleavage, hence the great varia-
bility observed in the second or F, generation. Cuénot and, later, Castle
have shown that the spotted condition may be gradually shifted in the
direction of selection. Cuénot showed by continued selection of
lighter colored mice (i. e., spotted mice with more white) that the char-
8 The doubleness of each factor makes such an assumption possible.
98 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
acter of the coat shifted in later generations in the direction of selection ;
and Castle has shown for rats similar shifting by selecting the darker
coat pattern. If my interpretation is correct selection here affects the
stage at which the “segregation” occurs in development. The cause of
this shifting must still obviously go back to some change in the germ cells,
but the change so brought about does not, from this point of view, cause
a change in the character of the coat carried by the germ cells, but a
change in the factor that determines when the segregation takes place in
the cleavage of the egg.
The uniform coat appears to bear the same relation to the spotted coat
that the uniformly colored hairs (yellow, black, chocolate or white) bear
to the gray or ticked hairs. From this point of view the “ticking factor”
has the same theoretical value as the “spotted factor.” It is, of course, a
fiction to assume that all the hairs of a gray mouse are alike and consist
of the three bands—black, yellow, chocolate—in the same relation. A
casual examination of the hair under the microscope will suffice to show
the wide range of variability that exists and the numerous departures
from this rule. The variability is almost as great as that shown by the
spotted coat. Nevertheless, in a general way, most hairs of the body may
be said to conform to this scheme.
I have met with this same problem in certain mutations in Drosophila.
In one case, a heterozygous fly had one white eye and one red one. Here
the separation must have occurred after the egg had been fertilized. The
tendency was not inherited. The point will be discussed below. On two
occasions, I have had a heterozygous fly that had one normal wing and
one small “proportionate” wing. These flies when bred to males of the
race with proportionate wings (the recessive) have produced both long-
and short-winged individuals, showing the heterozygous nature of the
original asymmetrical fly. I then crossed again the long and short flies
to bring about the same heterozygous combination, in the hope that the
“asymmetrical factor’ would come to light again, but of several hundred
offspring not one was asymmetrical.
INFLUENCE OF THE SPOTTED COAT ON THE WHITE BELLY OF THE SPORT
The wild sport was crossed on several occasions with spotted mice. The
hybrids were gray mice with white or gray bellies. The former when
inbred produced some spotted mice with white bellies. An examination
of these mice showed that whenever a white spot extended into the region
of the white belly, the black at the base of the hair that is present, as
stated, in the ordinary white belly is absent. In other words, the spot
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 99
affects the “white” belly-hair in exactly the same way as it affects the hair
elsewhere—all color is lost.
As is known, the spotted condition affects all mice of whatsoever color,
whether yellow, gray, black or chocolate, in the same way. If a yellow-
spotted mouse is crossed to a mouse with uniform coat of gray, black or
chocolate the spotting disappears in the first generation and the uniform
coat is yellow in some of the offspring. If these yellows are inbred, the
spotting recurs, not only in some of the yellow offspring but in the other
colors as well. The spotted condition is not therefore associated with any
peculiar color, but affects all equally and can be transferred from one to
the other as stated above. If we interpreted the absence of color in the
spotted white areas as due to a factor that suppresses color in these parts,
it would follow that it affects yellow in the same sense in which it affects
black and chocolate, and the ticked condition of the gray also. On such
a view we might argue logically that yellow belongs to the same series as
the other colors, since it is suppressed by the same factor. Furthermore,
if, as is generally believed, the spotted condition is due to the loss of the
color producer, so that the color determiner can no longer act to make the
color, then we are equally led to the conclusion that the color producer
for yellow is the same as that for the other colors—a conclusion of some
general importance.
Returning to the change in the white hair of the belly of the sport,
when a white spot crosses the white belly, it is evident that the effect is
due to the loss of the color producer, so that the hair is white to its base.
This view is, of course, in line with the interpretation of the white belly
as a ticked region.
This leads to a consideration of the ticking or barring factor. Obvi-
ously it is the same sort of thing as the spotting factor, only it appears in
each hair instead of in different regions of the body. If we push our
hypothesis to its logical limits, we must conclude that when the cells that
form the hair are laid down, during the earlier divisions of the cell (or
cells) from which each hair arises, there occurs a series of losses in the
different cells, so that the terminal cell and its descendants have lost the
determiners for yellow and black, leaving chocolate, the next cell or cells
lose the determiners for chocolate and black leaving yellow, and the last
cell of the chain retains only the black determiner. Similarly in the
white belly, the outer cells of the follicle have lost the color determiner
either for yellow or black, or the color producer, while the basal cells re-
tain the determiner for black as well as the producer. Since yellow may
appear in the yellow-bellied race in the outer ends of the hair it appears
simpler to suppose that it is the color determiner that is lost.
100 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
CROSSES BETWEEN THE BLACK SPOTTED WALTZER AND MICE WITH
CHOCOLATE CoAT
In a litter of mice from a chocolate female and a male black and white
waltzer, there were present young mice that are described in my notes as
gray. At that time, I was perfectly familiar with the different coat colors
of mice, yet I did not hesitate to describe the color as gray, although
aware that gray could not, theoretically, arise in this way. As the mice
Fie. 1
FIG. 2
Crosses between Black-spotted Waltzer and Chocolate-colored Mice.
grew older, they became spotted with black (like the mice of Plate VII,
figs. 3, 4), and later entirely black. I thought therefore that I had prob-
ably made a mistake in my determination of the color of the young mice,
but such mice have later appeared not infrequently in the offspring of such
crosses (see Text-figures 1 and 2), and a study of their hair has shown that
there are some grounds at least for confusing their color with gray. The
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 101
gray-looking black-chocolate mice often show a stratification of these
colors in many of the hairs. The outer end is chocolate and the base
black. The yellow band of the gray mouse alone is missing. In other
words, the ticking factor has reappeared and affects the distribution of
the only two colors present, namely, black and chocolate. The mice may
be said to be “grays without yellow.” On the other hand, these mice
often turn into black mice, often in spots, so that some of the curious pat-
terns shown in Plate VII, figs. 2, 3, 4, appear temporarily at least. These
patterns usually last several weeks or months and then generally change
to a uniform coat or to a different arrangement of the color area. Con-
versely these same or other mice often change from a uniform color to
a black-chocolate spotted animal. The condition of the animal—its
“Hhysiological state’—induced by change in the environment at the time
of moulting, is probably the cause of these differences. It seems probable
that the “ticking factor” is able to assert itself only when the conditions
are of a particular kind.
When the hair of these mice is studied under the microscope, a very
complicated series of relations becomes manifest. Many of the hairs are
ticked as described, but to various degrees; others may be uniformly
black, etc. Among the mice that have originated through crosses between
strong and dilute races, I have often met with color changes in the coat,
often local, sometimes general, that are related in some way to the pres-
ence of the two factors, that stand for dilute and strong color (Plate VII,
fig. 1). Gray mice may at times also show areas of lighter and darker
color, and these may come and go with each molt (Plate VIII, figs. 1, 2).
When examined under the microscope, the light hairs show a lessening
of the pigment granules in different regions, a lessening that is a charac-
teristic feature of the so-called dilute condition. Here again we can only
refer these effects to the conditions, often transitory, that affect the
heterozygous animals. This variability raises the question as to whether
the ticking factor is in reality present in the “waltzer-chocolate” hybrids.
May not the result be expressed in terms of strong and dilute? I am not
disinclined to such an interpretation, provided that black and chocolate
bear this relation to each other. This question will also be deferred for
treatment to the final conclusions, but one further question may be briefly
mentioned here. The supposed origin in China of the waltzing mice, the
peculiar shape of the head, their size and the proportions of the body
strongly suggest that they belong to a different race (or species?) from
that from which our common domesticated mice have arisen. If this can
be proven, it may be that they have not lost entirely the ticking factor,
but that black is epistatic. By the introduction of chocolate, the possi-
102 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
bility of the ticking expressing itself may be realized, so that the “gray
without yellow” may in reality be a ticked hair, as first suggested.
Although I have made no measurements or weighing, it appears that
the hybrids between the waltzer and common mice are larger than the
waltzer and possibly not as large as our common domesticated races. In
the second generation, I have obtained both large individuals and small
mice, as well as intermediates, the first as large as our common form, the
latter as small as the waltzer. It appears that the size character also
segregates, at least to some extent.
Yerkes has pointed out that the older waltzers are deaf. In order to
study the inheritance of deafness, I tested many of my domesticated races
of mice and found that in them also there is a large percentage of animals
that seem to be entirely deaf. It becomes evident, therefore, that the
problem would be complex, unless races were first produced like the
waltzers that are uniformly deaf, but as I had no such races and did not
succeed in crossing wild mice and waltzers, it does not appear worth while
to give here the result of my observations on my hybrid mice. I hope to
continue this experiment later.
ARTIFICIAL WALTZERS
The curious effect of acetyl-atoxyl on mice has been described by Ehrlich.
It causes them to run about in circles in much the same way as do the
true Japanese waltzing mice. This coincidence in behavior led me to test
whether mice that have been made to waltz by artificial means would
transmit their acquired character.
The injections were made for me by Dr. B. T. Terry, of the Rockefeller
Institute for Medical Research, and I am greatly indebted to him for the
time and skill expended in producing these waltzers. In some cases, one
injection sufficed to brmg on in a few days the circus movements; in
others, two or three doses were necessary, and some mice failed entirely to
become waltzers. In one case, the mouse was pregnant and the injection
caused abortion of two of her young, but the rest of the litter developed
to full term. None of these waltzed later.
I have made a number of pairings between the artificial waltzers and
normal mice. None of the offspring waltzed, but since the waltzing of
waltzing mice is recessive, this might be expected to occur even if the
habit is inherited. Therefore I inbred these F, mice, but obtained only
normal mice. In two or three cases, I have had young from a pair that
were both waltzers. None of these or their progeny waltzed. I conclude,
therefore, that so far as the evidence goes, the acquired character is not
transmitted. Although the results were negative, nevertheless the evi-
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 103
dence seems peculiarly significant because of the occurrence of a race of
domesticated mice that breeds true to this character. The test is even
more significant, when we recall that the waltzing habit when induced
artificially seems to be permanent. I have kept artificial waltzers for
more than a year and at the end of that time they waltzed as well as at
first. It seems probable, therefore, that the drug has caused a permanent
change in the animal, and since it is known to produce degeneration of
certain nerve fibres in man, it seems not unlikely that the effects in mice
are of the same nature. Yet, despite the permanency of the effect, the
acquired character is not transmitted through the germ cells.
Dr. Terry has also produced for me a number of waltzing rats by
means of larger doses of atoxyl. Unfortunately, none of these have bred
when both parents were waltzers.
ARE BLACK AND CHOCOLATE DIFFERENT PIGMENTS oR STAGES IN THE
DEVELOPMENT OF THE SAME PIGMENT?
There are two methods of treating the colors black and chocolate in
mice. They are generally considered to be different unit characters and
the product of different factors, but I have found some evidence that indi-
cates that these two pigments may be intimately related, and I suggest
that they may represent different developmental stages of the same
process. From this standpoint, black is a further development of the
same chemical process that produces chocolate, and since pure black and
pure chocolate races exist, there must be some special condition or factor
that leads to the further development of chocolate to make a black mouse.
Let us represent this higher stage by the symbol M. A black mouse is,
therefore, Ch Ch MM, and its gametes are Ch M and Ch M. A chocolate
mouse is Ch Ch. When black is mated to chocolate, the hybrid is Ch Ch
M, which gives in the next generation three blacks to one chocolate.
Similarly when chocolate Ch Ch is crossed to gray (Y Ch) M, the first
generation will be gray, and the second will contain gray. (including cin-
namon agouti), black and chocolate in the proportion 12 : 3:1.
The dilute colors, blue (or dilute black) and silver fawn (or dilute
chocolate) require special consideration. Dilute black is not chocolate,
as Cuénot supposed, but the dilute effect is due to the sparseness of the
black granules. Similarly dilute chocolate owes its peculiarity to the
fewness of the chocolate granules, rather than to their weakening. The
experiments of Miss F. M. Durham show that the factor producing
sparseness in black produces the same effect in chocolate. This factor, S,
is not to be confused with the factor M that transforms chocolate to a
higher stage—i. e., into black. When dilute black is crossed with choco-
104 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
late, the offspring are black. This result is obvious on the explanation
here offered; for the factor that produces the abundant development of
the granules is supplied by the chocolate mouse, while the color of the
granules is determined by the dilute black parent. Such an interpreta-
tion is, as far as I can see, completely in accord with the facts, and I
venture to think that it offers some advantages over the schemata so far
offered, in that the peculiar relation between black and chocolate in
heterozygous black becomes more intelligible. In these mice, most of the
pigment is carried on to its higher stages, .viz., black, some remaining,
however, at the lower stage; and the extent to which the process is car-
ried out depends on the physiological condition of the mouse at the time
when the hair is laid down.
ASYMMETRICAL EYE Coors
In the winter of 1907, I procured from Dr. H. L. Wood, of Groton,
Conn., a dilute colored mouse that had one pink eye and one black eye.
The same condition reappeared again in one of my own mice, probably
related to Dr. Wood’s. It is known that angora cats often have one blue
eye and one green one, and that coach dogs and other races, and man also,
sometimes have eyes of different colors, but I do not know of any other
records where one eye is black and the other pink (albino). The mouse
belonged to a strain of colored mice with pink eyes that Dr. Wood had
imported from England. Some of the mice were spotted with white,
which may enter also into the problem. I bred this mouse to other black-
eyed mice of the same stock, but obtained no asymmetrical offspring,
either in the first or in subsequent progeny. The condition appears, there-
fore, not to be inherited in the ordinary sense, but to be rather what I
have called an ontogenetic process of segregation which takes place for
this combination only rarely. Nevertheless, the phenomenon rests on the
same basis as that for the spotted condition in general, but in this instance
it is not fixed and appears only sporadically. I have had one other mouse,
as stated above, with one black eye and one pink eye from related stock,
but in none of its progeny did the condition reappear. In another com-
bination, I have found one mouse with one pink eye and one ruby eye.
The mouse itself was chocolate.
DILUTE GRAYS
In the course of the large number of crosses that I have made between
different races of domestic mice, there have been produced some dilute
forms of gray. I mention these facts here not only to put on record the
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 105
production of such forms, but also to show that, being aware of their
occurrence, I have been less liable to confuse the unusual colors that I
have described—such, for instance, as the black-chocolate that simulates
gray.
The lighter races were made by crossing dilute chocolates with cinna-
mon agoutis and then extracting, or by crossing light black with cinna-
mon agoutis and extracting. In the former case, some of the F, mice
were extremely pale, and the chocolate band appeared to be dilute. In
the latter case, one might expect to obtain some mice in which both the
black band and the chocolate band were dilute. In fact, I have had sev-
eral kinds or at least colors of dilute mice with ticked hair, but I hesitate
to class them under these two groups without further anid more careful
examination, because these dilute forms appear to be variable and the
color of the coat may change with every moult. One of these changing
coats is shown in Plate VIII, fig. 2, where the combination gives a re-
markable contrast.
CROSSES BETWEEN BLACK AND WHITE SPOTTED WALTZERS AND YELLOWS
In order to test in another way whether the yellow gametes of yellow
mice carry the factor for other colors than yellow, I crossed a yellow
with a black and white waltzer of known pedigree that carried only black.
Two yellow mice from this cross were inbred and produced a litter con-
taining yellows, blacks and chocolates. I concluded that the yellow
gametes may carry in addition to yellow the factor for chocolate. Cuénot
objected to this conclusion, on the ground that my original yellow con-
tained the diluting factor, which, according to his view, changes black to
chocolate. Cuénot’s objection will not hold for two reasons. First, be-
cause chocolate is not due to the diluting factor for black, since Miss
Durham has shown that the dilute form of black is not chocolate, but
dilute black or blue. Second, because if the diluting factor were present,
the later generations of these mice should make evident its prsence,
which was not the case. Nevertheless, I now believe that Cuénot’s objec-
tion holds good in principle... If, as I have attempted to show, black is a
higher development of chocolate, the black waltzer must have contained
in duplex this factor that changes chocolate to black, and his spermatozoa
must have contained this factor only in the simplex condition. The yel-
low mouse in question must not have contained this factor, hence the
yellow offspring (F,) contained it only in simplex form. It will be
present or absent, therefore, in their gametes. Those containing it, and
the factor also for chocolate, will give black; those without it will give
106 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
chocolates. The result can therefore be brought into line with those of
the gray-yellow crosses, but only if we treat chocolate and black in the
way here suggested.
A MAUVE-COLORED WILD SPorT
Through the kindness of L. C. Bragg, I obtained the skin of a mouse
caught in Colorado far removed from any possible source of contamina-
tion with domesticated races. Several of these mice were caught in the
same locality and were kept alive by Mr. Bragg for some time. All at-
tempts to procure others have so far failed. The color of the sport is so
peculiar that I believe it worth while to record it here, for we know very
little concerning the origin of the domesticated races of colored mice or
of sports of the house mouse. The general color of the mouse is yellowish
brown or mauve. A microscopic examination of the hair of the back or
sides shows the presence of black pigment granules in the proximal half
of each hair, and yellow pigment in the outer part, except at the tip,
which is colorless. In addition, some of the large hairs contain black
pigment nearly to their tips. Comparison with the hair of the ordinary
house mouse shows that the base of the hair of the mauve mouse is much
less black than is the ordinary hair, and that the yellow brown pigment is
identical with that in the yellow band of the gray mouse. The mauve
mouse appears, therefore, to owe its color to the loss of chocolate, and
perhaps to a lightening of the black color at the same time; but the latter
effect may be due to the absence of chocolate in the black portion, where
it appears to be mixed with black in the ordinary mouse.
THE INFLUENCE OF THE ENVIRONMENT ON THE COLOR OF PEROMYSCUS
LEUCOPUS AMMODYTES
The intergradations between many of the species of Peromyscus has
made their identification and classification difficult. The occurrence of
intergrades in regions of overlap may be explained either as the result of
interbreeding of the more typical forms found elsewhere or as the effects
of the environment. Both of these questions might be studied, I thought,
by breeding the mice in confinement. In the winter of 1907, and during
1908-9, I kept several species of Peromyscus in the laboratory—species
from the Eastern States, from Florida, Texas, California, Colorado,
Indiana, Ohio and elsewhere. The results have been meager because in
most cases the mice failed to breed, both when like was bred to like and
when different species were kept together. In the summer of 1908 and
again in 1909, I collected the local races of Peromyscus found on Mono-
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 107
moy Island and on Marthas Vineyard. Experience had taught better
methods of keeping the mice, so that I have been able to rear these types
in confinement and have obtained crosses between them. The results of
these crosses may be described at another time; here I wish to record cer-
tain facts connected with a change of color in confinement. The change
in color has been more marked in the Monomoy variety than in any other
form. This species lives on the sand hills of the small island of Monomoy
off the southern coast of Massachusetts. In its natural habitat this variety
is in general much lighter than the mainland form. The white hairs of
the belly are white to the base, while in the mainland type, P. novebora-
censis, the inner end of each hair is dark. There is a good deal of varia-
tion in the degree of lightness of the upper surface of different individ-
uals, which Bangs suggests is the result of mixing caused by occasional
migrations, when the island has been for a time connected with the main-
land. Some of the specimens that I have collected and have obtained
alive from Monomoy are as dark above as the mainland form, while
others are quite pale. Similarly, in the laboratory, great variation in
color in these Monomoy mice exists, and the mice have shown themselves
more susceptible to change than the other species and varieties kept
under similar conditions. The most extreme change is shown in Plate
IX, fig. 2. For comparison, one of the lighter individuals found in
nature is also figured (Plate IX, fig. 1). The modified form has lost
even the light gray color of the island type, except for a patch on each
side of the body and another on the head, and has assumed a pale bluish-
pink color that is well shown without exaggeration in the figures. When
seen with other mice this mouse looks almost white. A microscopic ex-
amination of the light hairs shows that the outer two thirds of the hair
from the middle of the back is entirely devoid of pigment, but near the
base of the hair some black pigment is present. The color of the mouse
is due, therefore, to the darker base showing through the clear outer ends
of the hairs. The effect, as stated, is to give a faint bluish-pink color to
the mouse, when seen from above or from the sides.
The stock in which this mouse appeared came from Monomoy in the
summer of 1909. It was kept in a large cage in the attic of the labora-
tory throughout the winter and in an upper room in the laboratory for a
part of the summer of 1910. The mouse was found in the condition
figured at the end of the summer and has remained in the same condition
for six months. The cage in which it was kept had produced young mice
in the spring which had not been removed, and, as I was absent during
the summer, I can not state whether this particular individual was one
of the original mice from Monomoy or one of their young that had be-
108 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
come full grown. Several other mice in the same cage showed a similar
change, but none so great as this one. The others showed patches of
lighter color and these may disappear again after several months or new
patches may appear. Similar effects, though not so great, have also been
seen in the mainland forms kept under the same conditions and also in
some of the mice from Marthas Vineyard. Other species also kept in
confinement have shown similar lightening of the coat color. Osgood‘
states for Peromyscus leucopus noveboracensis that the coat is being con-
tinually moulted or “changed,” although it appears to be entirely renewed
only once a year. The changes in color that come and go are undoubtedly
connected with the partial moulting of the individual, and it seems rea-
sonable to suppose that they are expressions of the physiological condition
of the animal at the time of moult.
The important question as to which factor or factors in the environment
is responsible for the changes in color here recorded can not, I regret, be
given. Light seems to be excluded, since the animals are crepuscular, and
the room in which they were kept was lighted by a window, so that in
this regard the conditions were not very different from those in nature.
Food or temperature or humidity might be supposed to be the factors
that are probably involved. The food was varied, but contained less
green food than the animals generally obtain. The temperature was
much higher on the average than that to which the animals are normally
exposed. The air of the attic was extremely dry, yet it is to be remem-—
bered that this lighter-colored race has arisen on an island where the
moisture is extremely high, so that if there is any relation between the
color and the environment, we should expect dryness to produce the re-
verse effect. Until control experiments can be carried out, it will be best
not to assign the change to any one of these possible agents.
How far these changes may be carried in later generations remains
also to be shown. It is, however, sufficiently obvious that, if changes as
great as these may take place, the results of crossing different species in
confinement must be carefully controlled by studies of the influences of
the confinement itself.
GENERAL CONCLUSIONS
THE TICKED OR GRAY HAIR AS A “UNIT CHARACTER”
Under the microscope, the hair of the common gray mouse is found to
contain three pigments, black at the base, yellow in the middle and brown
(or chocolate) at the tip. This banded condition is obviously like that
4Revision of the mice of the American genus Peromyscus. North American Fauna,
No. 28. 1909.
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 109
seen in many animals in which the tip of the hair or feather or scale is
brightly colored and the base dark or black. Obviously the peculiar fea-
ture of such structures is the stratification of the color bands. The cells
first formed in the follicle must produce one color, then another, and later
a third. The possibility of producing all three must be present at the
beginning, and a “morphogenetic factor’ of some sort determines the
activity that leads in turn to the formation of one after the other of these
colors. It must be at once granted that we know no more of the nature
of such a factor than we do of the differentiation that appears in the
development of any of the characters of the embryo. To ascribe it to a
“ticking factor” is no more than to describe the phenomenon in general
terms, since we know nothing of the method of action of such a factor.
The fact that the ticking factor may be carried by the yellow mice that
also carry black or chocolate (or both) and yet not come to expression is
one of the peculiar features of the yellow inheritance.
That the development of the ticked coat is a specific element in heredity
can not be doubted, and, admitting the purely symbolic nature of its
representation, I see no objection to calling it in the ordinary sense a unit
character.° It is interesting to see how it has been treated in Mendelian
literature.
Cuénot uses the letter G as a symbol for gray and treats it as allelo-
morphic to the other colors—yellow, black or chocolate. Its presence pro-
duces a gray mouse, which in his formulas is never treated on the presence
and absence theory, but always as allelomorphic to yellow or black or
chocolate. Yet for its expression the presence of all these three pigments
must occur. It is in fact a bundle of these three pigments with the added
condition of their stratification. There is obviously an obscurity here,
unless the group of colors that stand for ticking is inherited as a unit in
allelomorphic relation to either of the three colors considered by them-
selves.
Bateson’s symbolism for gray in mice is GBChC, to which yellow
must, I believe, be added, giving YG@BChC. Miss Durham omits the C
unit and makes Ch its equivalent, or at least suggests such a possibility.
In these formule, G is called the gray determiner which is equivalent to
ticking. Bateson adds, “The important question, what the effect of the
gray determiner, for example, actually is, remains undecided.” Bateson
represents the black mouse as C g BCh and chocolate as CgbCh. In
these formulz small g and b stand for the absence of the gray and the
black determiners.
°*This statement leaves open the nature of the factor that produces such a “unit
character.”
110 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Two questions arise in this connection. The determiner for chocolate
is not represented in the presence or absence scheme, since it has never
been found absent—+. e., no white mice have been recorded from which
all determiners are absent. Such a mouse would be represented by C gb
ch. Why, it may be asked, is chocolate excluded from the presence or
absence relation? If the chocolate determiner is equivalent to the color
producer C, then it too might be absent from some albinos (or from all) ;
yet it can be shown that albinos that do not carry other factors carry
chocolate, which is contradictory to the assumption. It may be claimed,
however, that the chocolate factor has never dropped out in the past;
hence its presence in all mice and hence the impossibility of treating it
on the presence or absence scheme. Such an interpretation is logical at
least.
In treating the heredity of color in guinea-pigs and rabbits, Castle
considers gray as the result of the presence of a ticking factor. In these
rodents the gray or agouti may be produced by crossing a black and a
red (yellow) individual. Only certain blacks and reds give the result.
Castle concludes that some blacks and some reds contain the ticking fac-
tor. So long as only one color is present, either black or red, the action of
the ticking factor is rendered impossible, since it takes at least two factors
to produce the stratified layers. Hence a black animal with the ticking
factor is still black, and so is a red only red, but when combined, the
presence of red and black and the ticking factor gives again the agouti;
but it is not clear why a black animal with the ticking factor should not
have the outer ends of the hair (where the red lies in the ticked hair)
colorless and the base black. This condition actually exists in the white
belly of my wild sports. On the other hand, yellow mice do carry the
ticking factor, and yet the hair is uniformly or at least continuously
colored yellow, although here too some of my yellow mice with white
bellies have a white tip and a yellow base to each hair. If the red guinea-
pig is equivalent to the yellow mouse, it may be that the ticking factor
can be carried by this type alone and not by the blacks. This view would
make the two groups conform, but Castle’s evidence seems to show that a
yellow that gives agouti with one black may not do so with another. If
his cases are sufficiently numerous to show that this is not an accidental
result owing to his reds being heterozygous for G, then the suggestion
here offered is unavailing.
In mice, I have found clear evidence that black and chocolate may be
stratified to produce a resemblance to gray. Such cases clearly show that
in these animals the factor for ticking may be present and effective in
the absence of yellow. To prove that this is due to a true ticking com-
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 1h
parable to that of the wild gray mouse, such mice should be crossed to a
yellow strain that contains no ticking factor and gives rise to some gray
mice. This test I have been unable as yet to apply.
Castle has also suggested that melanistic forms of gray animals arise
through the loss of the ticking factor. In consequence, the colors are not
laid down seriatim and the darkest color becoming epistatic gives the
black color to the hair. The implication is that the yellow and the choco-
late are still present but obscured by black. By a further loss of black
the chocolate stains the hair and a chocolate animal results. Two diffi-
culties with reference to this view suggest themselves. It is assumed that
the loss of the ticking factor will lead to the uniform spread of the other
colors, but this is not self-evident or proven. I have tested a few black
mice and found no yellow present.
Secondly, yellow itself may completely color the hair in a yellow
mouse that carries black or chocolate, and these latter pigments may even
‘sparsely develop. It might seem, therefore, that it is the yellow that
must disappear to produce a black mouse, and this, in fact, seems to be
realized in the black-chocolate ticked mouse that I have described. If
the ticking factor were then lost, pure black might result. It is possible
that black mice may have originated in this way; but even were this true,
it still remains not clear why the black should then spread into the choco-
late region of the hair. Moreover, the sudden appearance of black animals
in nature without an intermediate black-chocolate condition indicates that
the transfer takes place at one step. These considerations seem to me to
show that our assumptions are still too crude to offer a reasonable inter-
pretation of the facts in hand.
THE ASSOCIATION HYPOTHESIS
If we suppose that black, chocolate and yellow and the ticking factor
are carried by a common carrier in the gray mice, and that black is borne
by a different (7. ¢., not homologous) carrier in the black mouse, and
chocolate by a third carrier in the chocolate mouse, we can not give a
consistent hypothesis for the inheritance of these colors. For example,
when gray is crossed with black, the presence of the triune body gives
gray in the first generation. In the gametes of the gray hybrid, the gray
carrier finds no mate on the hypotheses. Its allelomorph is therefore its
absence. Similarly the black carrier has no allelomorph. The gametes
will then be GB, GO, BO,00. There would result twelve grays, three
blacks, one white; but white mice do not result, as I have shown, from
this combination. Moreover, they would contain no color determiner ;
and we know of no such mice.
ARO ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
It seems more reasonable, therefore, to assume that, if the three colors
are combined in a single carrier, it may have lost successively one after
another of its components as the black and chocolates arise. If we
assume that by the dropping out of the yellow and the ticking factor a
black mouse results, then gray would remain allelomorphic to black,
since the material body carries one or the other. This is so far consistent
with the results; but on the same hypothesis, chocolate is due to loss of
black in the black mouse. If, then, gray is crossed to chocolate, not only.
should grays result in the F, generation, but only grays and chocolates in
the second generation ; yet Miss Durham has shown that grays, blacks and
chocolates appear, which is inconsistent with the hypothesis. If, how-
ever, black and chocolate are stages in the development of the same sub-
stance, and the stage reached depends on another factor not present in
the common carrier, but in another one, then the situation is clearer.
Chocolate must be supposed to arise from black by the loss of this factor
M, and since the factor is present in gray, then when gray is crossed to
chocolate, the determiner for black is present as simplex, 7. e., once only.
Its allelomorph is its absence. The formula for gray* would be (Y, Ch)
M, and that for chocolate Ch. The formula for the hybrid will be, there-
fore, (Y Ch) MCh. The allelomorphs are a a, and the gam-
etes (Y Ch) M, (Y Ch) O, Ch M, Ch O. Two such mice crossed will
give twelve grays (including three cinnamon agoutis), three blacks and
one chocolate, as the following table shows :
Y Ch M Y Ch M Y Ch M Y Ch M
Y Ch M YiChi@ Ch M Ch O
gray gray * gray gray
Y ChO Y Ch O Y ChoO Yih O
Y ChM Y ChoO Ch M Ch O
gray cin.-agouti gray cin.-agouti
Ch M Ch M Ch M Ch M
Y ChM Y Cho Ch M Ch O
gray gray black black
Ch O Ch O Ch O Ch O
Y ChM Y ChoO Ch M Ch O
gray cin.-agouti black chocolate
6 Omitting the ticking factor from (Y Ch).
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 113
In the same way, the cross between yellow and gray would be repre-
sented as follows: If the yellow gamete is represented by Y and the
gray gamete by (Y Ch) M, the resulting yellow mice would have the
formula Y, (Y Ch), M; and its gametes would be Y, (Y Ch), M, and
no Mor O. The allelomorphs are then oe oh, -
ing gametes would be Y M, Y O, (YCh) M (Y Ch) O. The following
table gives the composition of the resulting hybrids. There result twelve
yellows to four grays. Now if the pure yellow combinations do not de-
velop, as Castle suggests, viz: YO YO, YO YM (twice), YM YM,
there will be left eight yellows and four grays, or 2: 1.
; and the result-
eM YM Y Ch M Y Ch O
YM WO WORE YM
yellow yellow yellow yellow
YO VEO ¥ O VEO
ye A wo Y ChM Y ChoO
yellow yellow yellow yellow
Y Ch M Y Ch M Y Ch M Y Ch M
YM Ae @ Y ChM ¥ Chg
yellow yellow gray gray
Y Cho Y ChoO Y¥ ChO ¥-Chr@
Yo Mi YO Y Ch M Y ChoO
yellow yellow gray cin,-agouti
L
The “presence and absence” theory has been extensively used by modern
writers on Mendelian inheritance. Bateson states that it gives consistent
results in all cases so far studied, and he seems inclined, with some reser-
vations, to adopt it as a method applicable to Mendelian treatment in
general. Its usefulness and even necessity is apparent for many cases ;
but it does not seem to me, therefore, that it is advisable to extend it to all
cases. If, as I have suggested, certain mutations result by or through the
loss from certain material bodies that ordinarily carry a group of such
bodies (such as gray, for example), the allelomorphs of the original body
will be the new body, lacking the particular factor in question, and not
the absence of the original body as a whole. The hypothesis of presence
and absence appears originally to have been invented to explain the gray
chocolate cross in mice. I have tried to show how the facts may be ex-
plained in a somewhat different way, so that the original combination for
gray is allelomorphic with the factor for chocolate, while presence and
114 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
absence applies to another factor that concerns the change from chocolate
to black. A combination of the two hypotheses seems to me to be more
useful than the adoption of either alone. Moreover we can see, on the
view of the allelomorphic relation of the factors that I have used here,
why in some cases one and in other cases the other way of expressing the
facts should be used.
UNIT CHARACTERS AND FACTORS IN MENDELIAN INHERITANCE
I understand by the term unit character any particular structure or
function that may appear in heredity independent of other characters.
Such unit characters may in themselves be extremely complex and include
the possibility of further splitting up. By factor I understand somé
special condition in the germ plasm whose presence is necessary for the
development of a particular unit character which in its absence fails to
develop. There is unquestionably a tendency in much of the Mendelian
writing to identify the unit character with one only of the factors whose
presence is necessary for its development. This view seems to be as un-
necessary in the present state of our knowledge as it is unproven by the
evidence at hand. It is this point of view that underlies the entire Weis-
mannian conception of the process of heredity. The acceptance of the
theory of factors does not seem to me to lead necessarily to such a con-
clusion ; for, while a factor may be essential to the development of a par-
ticular part, it may be only one condition, several or many conditions
combining to produce the effect, the absence of any one of them leading to
the same result. Thus, while it may be that a particular chromosome or
a small part of a chromosome is essential for the formation of a unit
character, it may be that all the other chromosomes and all or many of
the elements that constitute the cell also take part in the final elaboration
of the special organ in question. This may represent the extreme case,
and there may be all degrees in which different parts of the cell combine
to produce any given organ. The essential point is that the acceptance
of the factor hypothesis in heredity by no means leads to the conception
of each character being located in a special unit or biophore or pangene in
the egg, for, as I have said, many parts may be equally essential for the
production of every part.
Concerning the mechanism of segregation in the germ-cell we know
very little at present. Many facts seem to point to the conclusion that
the simplest solution of segregation is that a sorting-out of material par-
ticles takes place during those processes that come under the general head
of maturation in the egg or spermatozoon. This sorting process involves
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE 15
the units or factors, and most of those who have written on the subject
give the impression that this sorting involves the actual materials out of
which each character is built up. I do not think that we are justified in
this interpretation of the factor hypothesis, for all the facts can be equally
well explained, if the material particles sorted in maturation represent
only parts of the material basis, whose entire activity is essential for the
formation of parts of the organism. The difference in point of view is,
I believe, fundamental, even if the practical outcome is the same, for our
entire conception of the mechanism of heredity and development is
involved.
On another occasion’ I have discussed the view as to how far the mech-
anism of segregation in the germ cells is comparable to the processes that
take place in the later development of the egg itself, when different re-
gions develop into different parts at the time of the specification of the
organs and tissues. I pointed out that there is a good deal of analogy to
support the view that the two processes are the same. The Weismannian
conception practically identifies the two processes, for the biophores are
supposed to be sorted out in the maturation process in the same way that
they are sorted out as the development of the embryo proceeds.
On the one hand, if the facts lead us to interpret the process of segre-
gation as due directly to a separation during the process of maturation
of material particles (factors) essential for development of particular
organs, on the other hand the facts of experimental embryology and of
regeneration have seemed to experimental embryologists to speak equally
emphatically in favor of the view that the localization factors are essen-
tially different from those assumed for Mendelian segregation.
An examination of the facts of sex-limited inheritance has seemed to
me to show with some probability that the simplest conception of the
mechanism of segregation is that material particles carried in the chro-
mosomes are separated at these divisions and lead to the Mendelian classes
of gametes. I do not deny that the facts may be conceived as due to
other kinds of processes that lead to the formation of two classes of
gametes for each pair of allelomorphs, but when we take into account the
evident random segregation of the factors any other hypothesis than that
based on particulate separation seems to me far more improbable than the
one here suggested. If this is admitted, the next logical step would seem
to require a similar process in development of the embryo. I need only
mention by way of example the occasional appearance in heterozygous
individuals of the dominant and the recessive characters in different parts
7 American Breeders’ Association, V, 1909.
116 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
of the body, as when one eye of a mouse is black and its mate is pink, or
one wing of Drosophila is long and the other short.
It may therefore be worth while, perhaps, to attempt to recast our
conception of development in the light of these facts. Obviously it may
not be necessary to attempt to explain all embryonic phenomena as due
to segregation. There are several facts of experimental embryology that
seem to indicate that there are other relations between the cells that are
important factors in determining their fate, but the essential facts of
specification and differentiation may nevertheless be explained by the par-
ticulate theory. No fact is more evident than that in most cases a region
once determined has lost its power to produce other parts, and this fact
bears a strong resemblance at least to the segregation process in the germ
cells that produce recessive characters.
This argument may seem to lead back to Weismann’s theory of develop-
ment, but it differs from his view in two essential respects: Firstly, it
admits that development involves not only a process of separation of
particles, but that other factors also are involved, especially those that
regulate the symmetry of the body and its parts. Secondly, it does not
look upon the particles of chromatin as each representing a different part
of the body—of its characters, in short—but for the development of
each part certain parts of the complex of particles form the necessary
foundation and for other parts other complexes. The germ material from
this standpoint loses in the course of development now one, now another,
of its materials, and the absence of these materials is responsible for what
each region can produce. Weismann’s view postulates the presence of
particular particles that produce each part. On his view, each part has a
representative in the original germ plasma, while on the view here sug-
gested, most of the entire material is necessary for the development of
each part, but the loss of one or another particle of the chromatic com-
plex turns the developmental processes into different channels. I am
aware that speculation concerning the processes of development and
Mendelian segregation may seem premature at present, but I can not but
think that it may be worth while to attempt to bring under the same
point of view the process of gametic segregation and the processes that
take place in the development of the embryo.
MORGAN, COAT COLORS IN MICE * 117
LITERATURE
ALLEN, G. M. Heredity of coat color in mice. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and
Science, XI. 1904.
Bateson, W. Mendel’s principles of heredity. Cambridge. 1910.
CasTLe, W. EB. Yellow mice and gametic purity. Science, XXIV. 1906.
CASTLE and ALLEN, G. M. The heredity of albinism. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts
and Science, XXXVIII. 1908.
CastTLe, W. E., and C. C. Litrtre. On a modified Mendelian ratio among yel-
low mice. Science, XXXII. 1910.
Cutnot, L. L’hérédité de la pigmentation chez les souris. Arch. de Zool. Exp.
et Gén. 1902, 1903, 1905, 1907.
Sur quelques anomalies apparentes des proportions Mendeliens. Arch.
de Zool. Exp. et Gen. IX. 1908.
Recherches sur l’hybridation. Fourth Inter. Zool. Congress. 1907.
DaRBISHIRE, A. D. Note on the results of crossing Japanese waltzing mice with
European albino races. Biometrika, II. 1902.
Davenport, C. B. Color inheritance in mice. Science, XIX. 1904.
DurHaAm, F. M. A preliminary account of the inheritance of coat-colour in
mice. Report Evolution Committee, IV. 1908.
Note on Melanins. Jour. Physiol., XXXV. 1907.
Hagerpoorn, A. L. Inheritance of yellow color in rodents. University of Cal-
ifornia Publications in Physiology. 1909.
Mendelian inheritance of sex. Archiy. Entw. mech. der Organismen,
XXVIII. 1909.
Morean, T. H. The assumed purity of the germ cells in Mendelian results.
Science, XXII. 1905.
Are the germ cells of Mendelian hybrids pure? Biol. Centralb., XX VI.
1906.
Some experiments in heredity in mice. Science, XXVII. 1908.
Breeding experiments with rats. American Naturalist, XLIII. 1909.
Recent experiments on the inheritance of coat colors in mice. Ameri-
can Naturalist, XLIII. 1909.
What are factors in Mendelian explanations? American Breeders’ As-
sociation, V. 1909.
Chromosomes and heredity. American Naturalist, XLIV. 1910.
Witson, E. B. Mendelian inheritance and the purity of the gametes. Science,
XXIII. 1906.
{
&
td i rH nie i
Fw bs at i!
Bie ent ao if K
Pree eoin
PLATE VII
CHANGES IN COAT COLORS OF MICE
Fig.1. No. SW. A heterozygous mouse showing dilute and chocolate areas.
Fig. 2. No. 32144. A heterozygous black-chocolate mouse showing areas of
black, chocolate and lighter chocolate (mixed).
Vig. 3. No. PC. A heterozygous black-chocolate mouse with “ticked” hair.
Fig.4. No. D'. A black-chocolate heterozygous mouse.
os
SF rR
ao! G0 agore> vacy MLADEN
* > ei : : ;
rs
ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCIENCES VOLUME XXI, PLATE VII
G. Rrecrout, Del.
PLATE VIII
CHANGES IN COAT COLORS OF MICE
Vig.1. No. NMA. A hybrid out of a black-gray (extracted) cross.
Fig. 2. No. AAbb. A heterozygous white-bellied gray showing light gray and
some gray areas.
Fig.3. No. NMA. A heterozygous mouse showing black and gray areas.
lec HIN
es
af
eh
*\*
(iv a
ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCIENCES VOLUME XXI, PLATE VIII
G. Riccroui, Del.
aN
, 9d Te
sere
R:
“IM 30 aaoi6d T4097
- s an
yads
WE
apis OF Beilin
S = , 2 = +
bot Sina t¥ouY edt 101 Ds
al
ehdt
ai Selon
“goat ehilt
euls gobhrode
Be Seles
oie teouin
i ;
ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCIENCES VOLUME XXI, PLATE IX
G. Riccrout, Del.
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum oF NatoraL History, 1817-1876)
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. :
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contains the
scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the records
of meetings and similar matter.
A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year
and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles
composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and
are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of —
the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus-
trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the
Academy. ‘The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has
been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at
irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to
monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume
I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs,
ete. The price is one dollar per part as issued.
All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The
Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of
any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to
THE LIBRARIAN,
New York Academy of Sciences,
care of
American Museum of Natural History,
New York, N. Y.
\
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
: Vol. XXL, pp. 119-156
Editor, EpmMunp Otis Hovry
nS
ON SOME NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF
PENNSYLVANIAN FOSSILS FROM THE
WEWOKA FORMATION OF
OKLAHOMA
“ BY
GEORGE H. GirTy
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
26 Auaust, 1911
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyczeum oF Natural History, 1817-1876)
OFFICERS, 1911
President—FRaAnz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—GurorGE F. Kunz, FrepEric A. Lucas,
: R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL
Recording Secretary—Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum
Corresponding Secretary—Hernnry E. CRAMPTON, American Museum
Treasurer—EMERSON McMILt1n, 40 Wall Street
LAbrarian—RatreH W. Tower, American Museum
—_
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chairman—GeEorGE F, Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—CHARLES P. Berxey, Columbia University
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—F reveric A. Lucas, Brooklyn Museum
Secretary—L. Hussakor, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University
Secretary—Epwarp J. THatcHer, Teachers College
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
* Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortnH, Columbia University
Secretary—FreEpreric Lyman WeE.ts, Columbia University
The sessions of the Academy -are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.
[ANNALS N. Y. Acab. Scr., Vol. XXI, pp. 119-156. 26 August, 1911.]
ON SOME NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF PENNSYL-
VANIAN FOSSILS FROM THE WEWOKA
FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA?
By George H. Girtry
CONTENTS
Page
BNET Rstans CHEN ET EEL CUMP Meares ae ae Tao So fac catia et Renee Castes od cus ciche Snyteare'a) bondi Gl aie anaes oR 119
WESEcrIpPLiONS, Ol Genera “and SpPeCies tel se nse cle a2 s bcls soe sede alt ee eee 740)
JETRORLOVAOY ue RG iches PPD IEE AU LR OT OA 7 Otic CORDIC TOI CRI rock 120
SOMMERS pes ie he setae cohel ai esac Pte Ata) cue eta ew eee bets Lead st avereccslanei aleve. ora, s.e sieeers 121
NE OIGMEC Tea heel ae a ae eee eh iced Ute ne eRe eOW ON EE coche ee oa. valor diotarate Wedber a 122
GMT OO EI abel rem eis te ee ares bone 27d, 6's esac ete) Aros RRP Me es oie shen lt aia c/a eleven ee 122
PACHIINNES Ch Aer eater ter ey ecirae relia th oi ei si'e ccs we grS BUGIS ch ap MARC MP ST AVa neni s atareit eho ein) Sorat lester Mal 123
ES eG IOP OM A Arcee ei imo rehas age svewt iol Seance ucts MIOIIA Te hea oie. cede itll dle} ave on 125
ELC CU OC akeweycre ace Staiioctts os) vere. s wie se Siacdve le ebe euapeene one anata aaiee als aioe tonitiidl slishiots, 131
Ga NODOG aie. ne cletsteyese cists eke.'s.a% e's re" oveloxeretnn sjMeMopetisia yes ohonay ars ius S1.s'a fan ar uate’ 135
CRA SULOROPOUMA RE ers COM Teste eee ane oF Fe Mean ha es area Ohta bese iohie/siacare ovale manna 136
WEAN OPO ere crete ca ew oles bonis) ale ole a ern earn Meine ra ei ctcuats ceva toys: tate 142
CHUTE UCERUR oo Ri ea a a PS a Pk ae Pe eae 154
INTRODUCTION
Geographically the Wewoka formation is typically exposed in the
northwestern portion of the Coalgate and the southwestern portion of
the Wewoka quadrangles of Oklahoma. Lithologically it consists of
alternating bands of sandstone and shale,—four sandstone and three
shale members—and it has a thickness of about 700 feet.2 Geologically
the Wewoka formation is part of the Pennsylvanian series and in the
Oklahoma section hes above a considerable thickness of Pennsylvanian
rocks, but it probably correlates with the lower portion of the Pennsyl-
vanian section of Kansas.
The fauna of the Wewoka formation, so far as known, occurs in the
two lower shales, from which the fossils weather free and for the most
part in an unusually perfect condition of preservation. The fauna is
highly differentiated, comprising not less than 148 species, and it is not
1 Published by permission of the Director of the United States Geological Survey.
2U. S. Geol. Survey, Geol. Atlas, Folio 74. 1901.
(119)
LIBRAR
NEW YO
BOTAN
GARDE
120 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
confined chiefly to the brachiopoda like so many Carboniferous faunas,
but presents all the zodlogical groups in just proportion. ‘The greater
part of the fauna, as one would expect, consists of species already in the
literature, but a considerable number of new forms, both genera and
species, have been obtained. These are described below, but a report con-
taining descriptions and figures of the entire fauna has been completed
and submitted for publication as a bulletin of the United States Geo-
logical Survey.
DESCRIPTIONS OF GENERA AND SPECIES
Protozoa
Fusulina inconspicua sp. nov.
Shell small, sub-cylindrical to somewhat fusiform. The average length is
perhaps 3 mm., with a diameter of about 1 mm., but specimens 5.5 mm. long
are not uncommon. A few have a length of 4 mm., while one example pro-
visionally referred to this species is nearly 5 mm. long and 1.5 mm. in thick-
ness. Different specimens vary appreciably in proportions, some being slender
and others more robust. As is common in this genus, young specimens are
relatively more slender than mature ones. For the most part, this species is
of very regular growth with a sub-cylindrical shape abruptly rounded at the
ends. Some specimens taper more distinctly than others. In general, this
appears to be an immature character, appearing in young shells more than in
mature ones and being retained to a later stage in some than in others.
Initial cell rather large, about .1 mm. in diameter. The largest measured
had a diameter of .11 mm., others .099 mm., still others .084 mm., and others
even smaller. It seems reasonable to infer that the initial cell varies in size
in different specimens, but that the smaller measurements are in many cases
due to the section not passing through its center. The walls are thin, the
septa and outer wall being nearly equal in thickness. The specimens studied
do not show the minute structure. In mature specimens (1 mm. in diameter)
five or even six revolutions of the outer wall can be counted in addition to the
initial cell. In a mature specimen (1 mm. in diameter) some 23 septa occur
in the outer volution, and this appears to be about normal. The specimens
examined may not show this character with accuracy, but the sutures or
superficial lines formed by the septa are indistinct and not depressed. They
are straight or nearly straight at the surface, but a little below, the septa
appear to become strongly plicated.
Height of final chamber about .07 mm. or .08 mm.; thickness of the outer
wall about one third to one fourth as much, or .028 mm. to .02 mm.
This diminutive species, which occurs in great numbers at the one
horizon in the Wewoka formation where it is found at all, is readily dis-
tinguished from all other American species thus far known, by its much
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 1271
smaller size, and from some of them by its elongated and cylindrical
instead of fusiform shape. In size, it resembles the European F’. min-
tma,® but is somewhat larger, more slender in shape, and less fusiform.
The shape is suggestive of I’. lutugint Schellwien* and F. longissima
Moller,® but the size is very much smaller.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla.
Spongie
Wewokella gen. nov.
The general shape of the present form is that of a cylinder with a large
tubular cloaca. No dermal layer has been observed. The walls are rigid and
made up of large spicules interlaced with one another. The typical spicular
element appears to be the tetraxon, but many spicules do not show this shape
and appear to be elongated, irregularly branched and more or less contorted.
In general, however, the trend of the spicules is longitudinal.
The form for which this title is introduced is rare in the Wewoka for-
mation, only two specimens having come to hand. They might perhaps
be referred to the genus Doryderma, were it not for the fact that they
indicate a form which has a large central cloaca instead of a number of
axial canals, and in which the radial canals of Doryderma are also appar-
ently wanting. The general relationships of the type are nevertheless
supposed to be with that genus, which has also been cited from Carbon-
iferous strata.
Type species, Wewokella solida.
Wewokella solida sp. nov.
Sponge body irregularly cylindrical, attaining a diameter of at least 25 mm.
Center occupied by a large tubular cloaca, the walls being about 7 mm. thick
and showing no evidence of being pierced by radial canals. If a dermal layer
was originally present, it has been lost. The walls now are made up of large
spicules, of which the typical shape is probably 4-rayed with one of the rays
more or less elongated. At the same time, some of the rays may be aborted
so that many of the spicules seem to be irregularly branched. They are so
interwoven as to make up a wall of considerable rigidity, to aid in which the
spicules may be partly cemented, although it is doubtful if they anastomose.
The structure, then, while very varied in detail makes on the whole a homo-
geneous wall which apparently is the same on the inside as on the out.
Among the large spicules are other tetraxons of conspicuously smaller size.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla.
3 Paleontographica, vol. 55, p. 167, pl. 13, fig. 23. 1908.
SIGE as Nitite Plo mihs HES. aes Meo. donna.
5 Idem, p. 163, pl. 13, figs. 14-20.
122 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Celenterata
Lophophyllum profundum var. radicosum var. nov.
Associated with individuals having the character of Lophophyllum pro-
fundum, occur other specimens which differ strikingly in the profuse develop-
ment of hollow, spiniform stolons. Correlated with this character are usually
a more rapid expansion, a more irregular growth, a rather straighter shape
and the possession of a thinner, more knife-like pseudo-columella. The stolons
which are usually broken off close to the epitheca, disclosing their tubular
structure, are especially developed in the lower portion of the corallum. It
seems doubtful whether these structures served primarily for support, since
they are found in specimens having an unusually broad and secure attachment
and are absent from others in which the point of attachment is small, and
the anchorage apparently insecure.
The stolons vary from large and very abundant to small and reduced to
only one or two in number. In this way, a gradual transition is effected
between the two forms which in their extreme expressions look very much
unlike each other, while among intermediate and less strongly characterized
specimens, a dividing line can hardly be drawn. The forms with more or less
straight, irregular, rapidly expanding coralla graduate on the one hand into
those with very abundant stolons, and on the other into the narrow. more or
less curved, regular coralla of typical profunduwm. It seems to be true, how-
ever, that the narrow, regular growths seldom exhibit any development of the
root-like process.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Echinodermata
Hydreionocrinus patulus sp. nov.
This species is based on a somewhat imperfect calyx which is distinguished
by its low convexity. The median portion of the under side is strongly con-
cave and the height of the whole is but little greater than the thickness of the
plates. These peculiarities may, however, be somewhat enhanced by com-
pression.
The general shape is pentagonal, with angular notches at the corners and a
wider irregularity at the azygous angle. The plates themselves are thick and
they are highly tumid on the outer side. They tend to recurve near the mar-
gins so that the sutures are not as depressed as the general curvature of the
surface, if continued to the edges, would make them. The plates near their
margins tend to be rather regularly and finely crenulated and the infra-basals
and adjacent portions of the basals are finely granulose. Unless lost through
erosion, these markings do not extend to the other plates.
The infrabasals form a small pentagon of which the radius of the scar of
the stem occupies half the distance from the center to the side. The scar is
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 123
small, crenulated about the circumference, and with a diminutive round axial
canal. The basals are irregularly hexagonal, shaped more like a triangle
with its basal angles truncated. That to the right of the azygous plates is
slightly larger than the others and not symmetrical.
The radials are seven-sided, twice as wide as high, the base of the heptagon
being uppermost and very long. The two apical sides are also long and some-
what concave, while the two lateral sides are short. The two plates near the
azygous group are unsymmetrical, and have the apical sides of unequal
length. Just below the upper margin of each of the radials occurs a short
slit-like excavation. Above this on the broad upper side of the plate, there
is a triangular depression defined by two elevations or ridges which also bend
outward and extend along the outer margin of the upper surface. A some-
what similar triangular excavation marks the inner side of the upper edge
of the thick plate.
The azygous basal is subquadrate, much longer than wide, in reality being
7-sided with a relatively broad base. The sides are formed by a broken line
of which the lower portion is much shorter than the upper. The upper side
is also made by a broken line, the dextral part of which is long and oblique
and the sinistral short, merely truncating the angle which the other would
otherwise make with the left side. This plete is therefore bounded below by
the infrabasal, on the right and left sides by the basal and the radial, and
on the upper side by the two other azygous plates. The second and third
azygous plates are missing from the specimen, as are also the brachials.
Hydreionocrinus patulus resembles H. discoidalis and H. crassidiscus.
From the former it may be distinguished by its larger size, more convex
plates, granulose surface and by the shape and arrangement of the
azygous plates. The azygous basal in the present species is differently
shaped, so that it is in contact at the right with the radial, thus sepa-
rating the second azygous plate from the adjacent basal on that side.
The relationship with crassidiscus is rather more close. The basals
(“subradials”) are however described as all hexagonal, while here they
are five-sided, except the azygous one, which is seven-sided. The azygous
basal does not in crassidiscus reach the second basal “as is usual in this
genus.” Furthermore, in the present species, the second azygous plate
intervenes between the first and the radial to the right.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Annelida
Enchostoma serpuliforme sp. nov.
Attached to a large undetermined Orthoceras are some slender tubular
organisins seeming to belong to the genus Enchostoma. One, from which the
present description is drawn, has a diameter of 1 mm. or less and winds
about on the Orthoceras to a length of almost 140 inm., without appreciably
124 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
inereasing its diameter. Neither the initial point nor the true aperture ap-
pears to be shown. The cross-section must have been nearly circular. The
shell substance, when preserved, is lamellose, phosphatic, of a light bluish
color and in places distinctly nacreous. For the most part, however, the shell
appears to be missing and only the muddy infilling of the tube remains, of a
rusty color and partly with a dark limonitic coating. Where the entire organ-
ism is removed, its place is represented by a groove. As the original test of
the Orthoceras is now absent, this impression naturally occurs on the mold
of the inside and the explanation of the phenomenon is difficult. I think we
can not assume that the organism was originally attached to the inside of the
Orthoceras, because of the septa. It may, however, have been attached to the
outside or have been partly imbedded in the shell, through the gradual solu-
tion of which these external bodies, insoluble under prevailing conditions,
were brought into contact with the mud which filled the interior. This
hypothesis, however, is unsatisfactory, because the specimen is not bent but
broken by the compression which it has suffered, showing a rigid condition
at the time the force was applied.
The shape and phosphatic appearance of this organism are characteristic of
Enchostoma, but such Enchostomas as I have heretofore seen are free and of
larger size. The small size, sessile condition, and probably false appearance
of having been partly imbedded in the shell of its host, are very suggestive of
the organism which I have here called Serpulopsis insita, but none of the
specimens of Serpulopsis shows any evidence of having had a phosphatic shell.
They are also small and very much shorter. The true relationship of this
form and its position in the animal kingdom remain problems as yet unsolved.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Serpulopsis gen. nov.
This name is introduced for some small tubular organisms which enlarge
very gradually and are frequently much contorted during part of their growth.
They have the habit of attachment to other organisms and are more or less
imbedded in the shell of their host. They always keep near the surface, but
are perhaps as seldom completely superficial as they are completely imbedded.
I can scarcely doubt that the fossils.on which this genus is founded
belong to White’s Serpula insita, which, consequently, is taken as the
type.
Serpulopsis is distinguished from Serpula by its burrowing habit,
which is in fact abnormal for the annelids. Even if the excavations
alone and not the tubes which ordinarily occupy them were known, it
would be impossible to refer these structures to the boring sponges which
they somewhat suggest, because of their strictly superficial, linear and
not inosculating character. In some respects, they suggest Rhopalonaria
among the Bryozoa, but, while specimens frequently occur together in
considerable numbers, they appear to form groups of independent indi-
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 125
viduals and not colonies, nor is there any evidence that the individual
tubes were composite. On the whole, therefore, it seems more probable
that this fossil was an abnormal type of annelid.
Type species, Serpulopsis instta.
Conularia crustula var. holdenvillz var. nov.
A few specimens from the Wewoka agreeing in a general way with C. crus-
tula differ in having the sculpture on a much finer scale. Unlike typical
crustula also, these specimens are more or less compressed and distorted, the
other form which aparently had an unusually thick rigid test not having suf-
fered much in that way. About 25 costs occur in a linear distance of 5 mm.,
and thus they are much more closely arranged than in the typical form.
Among the specimens examined this variety is readily distinguished
by its sculpture, the difference being so marked that it seems desirable
to discriminate it as a new variety if not as a new species. It may possi-
bly be a young stage of C. repert, the only other Pennsylvanian Conu-
laria which has been described, although this form tapers more rapidly
than C. repert, which has nearly parallel sides.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Brachiopoda
Reemerella patula sp. nov.
Shell rather small for the genus, rarely exceeding 18 mm. in diameter, though
in one instance reaching nearly 80mm. Shape slightly oval in some specimens,
apparently circular in others.
Convexity of dorsal valve low, regular. Apex small, slightly though con-
spicuously eccentric, situated about two thirds of a radius from the posterior
margin. Outline from the apex to the front slightly curved, so that the shape
is not truly conical, being somewhat inflated in the apical portion.
Curvature of the ventral valve usually compound, more or less strongly
convex over the posterior portion and more or less strongly concave at the
front and sides. The prominent portion projects above the reflexed rim. The
point of highest convexity is usually well marked and is situated diametri-
cally opposite to that of the dorsal valve, or about two thirds of a radius for-
ward from the posterior margin. On the slope posterior to the point of
greatest elevation the pedicle fissure is situated. It is a conspicuous feature,
rather long and narrow, with strongly introverted sides. It extends in mature
shells from the point of greatest elevation half way to the posterior margin
and is surrounded without interruptions by the characteristic sculpture.
The sculpture, as usual, consists of narrow, sharply raised concentric lirse
with considerably wider, flattened interspaces, which are also finely striated.
The lirzee are somewhat irregular and are probably stronger and more persist-
126 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
‘ent on the ventral than on the dorsal valve, on which they are often ev2nescent
about the margins for a greater or less distance. ‘They vary considerably in
different specimens, being more closely arranged in some than in others,
occurring from nine to eleven in 8mm. They also vary on the same specimen
in proportion to their distance from the apex, and are more crowded on the
posterior than on the anterior side; consequently, the measurement given
above is a relative one, representing the condition toward the front in well-
grown specimens, Exfoliation obliterates much of the concentric marking and
instead often brings to view fine radial lines and striw, probably due to setze
which projected from the margin of the shell.
On the interior, the dorsal valve has a short septum passing longitudinally
through the apex, and extending farther on the anterior than the posterior side
of it. There are also two symmetrical ridges, straight, parallel and close
together for some distance anterior to the apex, rapidly diverging and ‘some-
what curved near it, so as partly to surround it. Between the straight ex-
tended anterior portion of these arms there is a medium groove which extends
backward and graduates into the septum, which has depressed sides. The
eurved arm-like markings probably represent the boundary of a line of muscu-
lar attachment. In one specimen these lines are, near the apex, distinctly
expanded into oval areas, one on each side, each of which is separated by an
oblique line of division into two scars. These areas, without much question,
are the loci of pairs of muscles.
The internal markings of the dorsal valve described above are conspic-
uous on most of the specimens examined, which are usually preserved as
internal molds. They vary in detail in different examples. This pecu-
liar structure seems to be identical with that upon which Hall and Clarke
based the subgenus Remerella, and while there may be a little doubt as
to whether it is really of subgeneric value, it will, together with the con-
figuration, readily distinguish this form from other Pennsylvanian dis-
cinoids. Some specimens, especially if incompletely exfoliated, fail to
show this structure, however.
Remerella patula is rather abundant in the Wewoka formation and
usually occurs as dissociated valves in small concretions. Occasionally,
however, the two valves are found in conjunction, though usually more
or less displaced.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Streptorhynchus oklahome sp. nov.
There are in the Wewoka collection two specimens which appear to belong to
the genus Streptorhynchus. They are preserved as internal molds and show
dental callosities in the ventral valve without any trace of a septum. In the
dorsal valve, the socket plates are fairly well developed and one specimen has
a low dorsal septum. In point of convexity the dorsal valve is only gently
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 127
convex, the ventral rather high and more or less contorted. The shell con-
tracts at the hinge, the area being moderately high and strongly inclined back-
ward. The sculpture consists of fine, regular, subequal lirze (in one specimen
more or less distinctly alternating). In the type specimen the lire are equal
over the median portion and separated by intervals slightly greater than their
own width. Here they occur ten in 5 mm. Toward the sides they are rather
more distantly spaced and are alternating.
The rarity of this genus in our Pennsylvanian rocks constitutes an
@ priori argument against these specimens belonging to Streptorhynchus.
On the other hand, it is difficult to understand how the process of fossili-
zation, while permitting the dental callosities to be preserved, could oblit-
erate all trace of the septum.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla.
Chonetes granulifer var. armatus var. nov.
The fossils included under this title occur associated with C. mesolobus var.
decipiens, and with the more closely related C. granulifer. They are of small
size, 15mm. being the maximum width observed, of moderate convexity where
not compressed, subquadrate shape, rather prominent beak, and faint though
distinct insinuation. About seven cardinal spines occur on each side of the
beak.
The surface is marked by obsolescent lirze and by numerous small though
prominent spines.
This variety is distinguished from C. granulifer by the smaller and
less projecting beak, the nearly obsolete liration, and the number and
prominence of the spines, although the latter character may be to some
extent the result of preservation. With the evidence at hand, however,
I would not feel justified in regarding these shells as true representatives
of C. granulifer.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla.
Chonetes mesolobus var. decipiens var. nov.
1899. Chonetes mesolobus. Girty, U. S. Geol. Survey, Nineteenth Ann. Rept.,
pt. 3, p. 576.
Upper Coal Measures: Atoka quadrangle, Oklahoma.
1903. Chonetes mesolobus. Girty, U. S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 16, p. 357,
pl. 1, figs. 20-28.
Hermosa formation: San Juan region, Colo.
Rico formation: San Juan region, Colo.
Maroon formation: Crested Butte district, Colo.
Carboniferous: Grand River region, Colo.
This form differs from typical C. mesolobus in having a smooth instead of
striated surface. Though I was at first disposed to describe it as a new species
128 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
rather than a new variety, the lower taxonomic rank is probably more in ac-
cordance with the facts. ;
The peculiar configuration of C. mesolobus is known to everyone. The
typical form is described as possessing fine, radiating strie. Some well-
preserved specimens from Ohio show this feature very clearly. The liree
are fine and moderately strong and they give rise to a large number of
minute spines, a feature not mentioned by Norwood and Pratten, though
it is perhaps represented by one of their figures. Mr. Beede® also ap-
pears to record it when he describes the surface as “coarsely punctate.”
He may, however, be referring to another and an altogether different
feature, to more numerous perforations, which occur between the lire
instead of on them and which project as rows of spinules or pustules on
the inside of the shell. These are best shown on exfoliated specimens or
internal molds. The external feature to which I refer above has, also,
when the shell is worn, the appearance of puncte, but when better pre-
served, the puncte show projecting edges as of downward pointing spines,
very similar to the minute spines which are found on many orthoids.
The variety which is the subject of this account has the characteristic
configuration of C. mesolobus, but the surface is entirely without radia-
ting sculpture, marked only on the best specimens by fine growth lines.
The absence of radial striation is not due to erosion or any circumstance
of fossilization, for it is a persistent feature shown by an extensive series
of specimens from many localities. Furthermore, the radial markings
could hardly have been lost, when the more delicate growth lines had
been retained.
In characteristic specimens, this difference is so strongly marked that
one would be led to refer the two forms to altogether different groups,
and as already noted, I was at first disposed to regard them as distinct
species. When large series of specimens from different horizons are ex-
amined, however, individuals more or less intermediate in character are
found. That is, associated with the smooth variety are occasional shells
which show faint yet unmistakable traces of radial sculpture. Such
specimens must be carefully examined, however, to determine whether
this character is not adventitious, for under exfoliation the rows of in-
ternal spinules which have oblique pores connecting with them form
little grooves and produce fine, more or less regular radiating markings.
The shells belonging to the smooth variety rarely show traces of the
spines found on the other. Except for occasional incremental lines the
surface usually appears to be quite featureless.
®§ University Geol. Sury. of Kansas, Rept., vol. VI, p. 71. 1900.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 129
C. mesolobus var. decipiens is very abundant in the Wewoka forma-
tion. It is also abundant in some of the earlier Pennsylvanian deposits
of the Kansas section at about the horizon of the Parsons formation.
In the literature, no citation can definitely be included in the synonymy
except my own identifications of specimens obtained in Oklahoma and
in Colorado. I remarked in that connection that the Colorado specimens
were characteristic in every way, but I had for comparison not typical,
striated CO. mesolobus, but specimens of the present variety.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Chonetes mesolobus var. euampygus var. nov.
Considerable variation is shown by shells of the mesolobus group in the
strength with which the characteristic lobation is developed. In some of the
larger individuals especially, it can hardly be distinguished at all, and when,
as is usually (?) the case, such specimens belong to the smooth or decipiens
type, they simulate C. geinitzianus very closely. It is at least possible that
C. geinitzianus may have had this derivation, though one would have said @
priori that such phylogeny was of all the least probable.
It is probably true as a general statement, though not without exceptions,
that the strength of the lobation varies inversely as the size of the individual.
There is at all events a group of shells which stand out strongly and distinctly
by reason of their small size and deep lobation. That they are mature shells
is indicated by their strong convexity and by the fact that young individuals
of the larger form would be more faintly lobed. Though they intergrade with
the larger. less strongly lobate shells through larger examples which have an
almost equal strength of lobation, they form a distinct, and as a rule an
easily discriminated group which sometimes occurs alone to the exciusion of
the typical variety. In sculpture, these shells seem to be allied to the variety
decipiens. They are usuaily unstriated, but show traces of strive more fre-
quently than decipiens. Seldom, if ever, is the striation as strong as in well-
characterized specimens of C. mesolobus Ss. Ss.
None of the specimens referred here exceeds 10 mm. in width, and the average
is nearer 7 mm.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Productus insinuatus sp. nov.
1892. Productus equicostatus. Haiti and CLARKE, Geol. Surv. New York, Pal.,
vol. 8, pt. 1, pl. 17 A, figs. 22, 28.
Coal Measures: Nebraska.
1892. Productus equicostatus. Hatt and CLARKE, State Geologist New York.
: Eleventh Ann. Rept., for 1891, pl. 22, figs. 11, 12.
Coal Measures: Nebraska.
130 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
1894. Productus wquicostatus. TIALL and CLARKE, “Introduction to Study of
Brachiopoda,” pt. 1, pl. 22, figs. 11, 12. 5
Coal Measures: Nebraska.
1900. Productus cora var. americanus. BErEDE, Uniy. Geol. Surv. Kansas, Rept.,
VOL Gp: Ciguple lilo:
Upper and Lower Coal Measures: Kansas City, Eudora, Anderson Co.,
Ixansas.
1906. Productus cora var. americanus. \VYoooRuFF, Nebraska Geol. Surv., Rept.,
WAGE AS lis A emery jolly alle ties 2p
Carboniferous: Louisville. Nebraska.
Shell of the cora type, rather large, widest at the hinge, more or less strongly
transverse. In the immature condition, this form closely resembles P. cora
itself, being strongly convex and more nearly quadrate. In the later stages,
the growth is more spreading, especially at the sides, and the margins are
flatter. Two varieties can be distinguished, one which is narrow and more
highly arched and the other transverse and less convex. In the mature condi-
tion, also, the ventral valve becomes elevated and angular along the median
line. Correlated with this character is an inflection of the anterior margin
making a deep sinus in the outline. <A sinus or depression in the shell itself is
naturally absent.
The surface is marked by fine, even, rigid, rounded coste having the
peculiarities of those of ?. cora. As in that species, the cost bifurcate freely
and sometimes this takes place simultaneously all around a shell, so that for a
time the striation is much finer about its margin than over the earlier portion.
In connection with the carina, the costze in the immediate neighborhood fre-
quently bend inward toward the median line which in some cases appears to
have been without coste. A few large plications are found at the sides near
the hinge, but they seldom pass entirely across the shell. They are apt to be
more persistent on the dorsal valve, however, than on the ventral. Spines are
scattered over the surface of the ventral valve, but they are usually small, not
causing nodes on the costs, and they are liable to be overlooked when broken
off. They appear to be few in number. <A row of larger ones is developed
along the cardinal line.
As the synonymy shows, this species has several times appeared in the
literature under the title of Productus wquicostatus, but a careful reading
of Shumard’s description leaves little doubt that P. wquicostatus was a
different species and one more closely similar to P. cora itself.
Horizon and locality: Found in the Wewoka formation, but the type
specimens are from Kansas.
Pugnax osagensis var. percostata var. nov.
This form is more abundant in the Wewoka formation than the typical
variety. In a general way, the specimens referred here agree with P. osagensis,
the only difference of importance being the more numerous plications which
are also smaller and more angular. Of these there are usually fivé fairly
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA Sit
strong on each side, but there may be four or six. Three is the usual number
for the fold, but four and even five occur in rare instances. Individuals with
three mesial plications and four laterals, especially when one or two of the
latter are immature or imperfectly developed, might equally well be placed
under P. osagensis itself. Apparently this variety has been referred by
authors to osagensis unqualifiedly, but I believe it can be distinguished to
advantage.
This form resembles P. osagensis var. occidentalis, which is, however,
a much larger species, with on the whole, more numerous mesial plica-
tions, and it occurs in very different faunal associations.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla.
Pelecypoda
Nucula wewokana sp. nov.
Shell small, triangular; width slightly, though distinctly, greater than the
height. Beaks set well toward the posterior end, toward which they more or
less distinctly point. The convexity is high. The cardinal and posterior ends
are abruptly flattened or depressed into a usually well-defined escutcheon and
lunule. The ventral border is regularly rounded. The anterior and cardinal
lines are straight or gently convex according as the lunule and escutcheon are
flat or project somewhat from the abrupt infolding of the shell along the two
edges. The anterior end is strongly rounded; the posterior is subangular.
The surface is finely, sharply and regularly striated.
This species is related to V. parva McChesney, with which, in fact, I at
first identified it. It differs, to judge by the figures of McChesney and
of Meek and Worthen, in being less transverse and in having the shell at
the posterior or shorter end less strongly projecting. N. wewokana is
also very similar in outline to NV. pulchella Beede and Rogers, but N. pul-
chella is said not to have a distinct lunule and the posterior end seems to
be abruptly truncated. In the present species, the shell projects a little,
so that the outline at this end is usually gently convex and formed by the
edge of the shell, whereas in NV. pulchella, it is straight and formed by
the angle of flexure, which either overarches the margin or is coincident
with it when viewed from above.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Anthraconeilo subgen. nov.
The shells included under this title are rather large, strongly transverse, very
inequilateral, considerably produced anteriorly. The beaks point toward the
shorter side. Shell closed all around. Dentition taxcdont with a great many
132 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
small teeth on the anterior side and a few large teeth on the posterior.
Chondrophore probably present but not observed. Anterior and posterior scars
large. Probably two other smaller scars are situated near the hinge, one in
front of and the other behind the beak, between it and the anterior and pos-
terior scars. Pallial line apparently entire or with only an obscure sinus.’
Sculpture consisting of fine regular concentric striz.
This type in general appearance is intermediate between Nucula and
Leda. From Nucula it differs in its transverse shape and produced an-
terior extremity. From Leda it differs in having the beak directed toward
the short side, which is probably posterior as in Nucula. The muscle
scars seem to be much as I have observed them in Leda bellistrista, but
there is no oblique internal ridge crossing the umbonal region, ‘and the
arrangement of the teeth, chiefly to one side of the beak, is another con-
spicuous difference. This type also much resembles Paleonetlo, from
which it differs in lacking an external ligament and being without the
sinus, developed in the inferior contour and in the lines of sculpture.
The latest species which can with safety be referred to Paleoneilo occur
in the early Mississippian. Anthraconeilo differs from Yoldia in not
gaping behind and in having the beak directed toward the shorter side.
In addition to the type species described beyond as Anthraconeilo taf-
fiana, there can probably be transferred to this group three species at
present included under Yoldia, viz: Y. carbonaria, Y. knoxensis and
Y. oweni. The two latter differ from Yoldia and agree with Anthraco-
neilo in having the beaks turned toward the short side of the shell, and
their inclusion in the latter is regarded as probably correct. 'The case of
Y. carbonaria is more doubtful, since it seems presumptuous to suppose
that so excellent a conchologist as Meek would assign to Yoldia a shell in
which the beaks pointed toward the short side, whereas, if they point
toward the long side, Y. carbonaria is clearly not a representative of
Anthraconeilo. Even if the beaks point toward the long side, however,
I should somewhat doubt the correctness of his reference to Yoldia, on
account of the convexity of the shell and the prominence of the beaks.
Type species, Anthraconetlo taffiana.
Anthraconeilo taffiana sp. nov.
Shell rather large, transverse. Width nearly twice the height. Shape
subelliptical. Posterior end strongly and symmetrically rounded. Dorsal
border long, rectilinear. Ventral border convex, more strongly curved toward
the posterior end, subrectilinear anteriorly. Anterior end produced, more or
7If a sinus is really present, the orientation here employed should be reversed; the
long side is posterior and the beaks point forward, toward the short side.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 133
less symmetrical, somewhat truncated at the narrow extremity. Greatest
height about one third the shell length in front of the posterior margin. Con-
vexity rather high. chiefly situated in the posterior third of the shell; com-
pressed anteriorly, somewhat compressed near the posterior margin as well.
Beak small, strongly incurved, pointing toward the short end of the shell.
Surface not well shown, often apparently smooth. A few examples are
marked by regular, closely arranged concentric strive, and many show more
prominent irregularities of growth.
The dentition consists of about six large posterior teeth and about 30 small
anterior teeth. An interval beneath the beak is probably occupied by a num-
ber of additional teeth of small size.
There is the usual complement of large muscle scars, one anterior and one
posterior, situated near the dorsal border. Apparently a small elongate scar
occurs between the anterior adductor and the beak, close to the cardinal line.
Possibly a corresponding scar occurs also between the beak and the posterior
adductor. This arrangement is, therefore, very much as I haye observed it in
Leda bellistriata, but of the Curved oblique internal ridge in the umbonal
region with its attachment (?) scar, no equivalent structure has been observed
in the present form. The shell is considerably thickened between the beak and
the large posterior adductor, however, causing a deep excavation in internal
molds, sharply defining the anterior boundary of the scar. The pallial line
appears to be entire, or with a faint deflection in the anterior portion. It has
not been clearly seen in that portion.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Nuculopsis gen. nov.
The present genus is based upon Nuweula ventricosa of Hall and it is distin-
guished from Nucula primarily because, though the beaks point toward the
short side of the shell, that side is not posterior but anterior. The determina-
tion of this fact rests upon the occurrence of a ligamental groove or area along
the hinge margin on the long side of the shell. Though varying in the dis-
tinctness with which it is shown, traces of this structure can be observed in
nearly all the large number of specimens examined. It is, therefore, a real
and persistent character of the species and is hardly open to any other inter-
pretation than that which I have put upon it. The existence of this structure
then, which has no homologue in Nucula, and its almost definitive importance
in determining the long side instead of the short side of the shell as posterior,
constitute the most important differences from that genus.
The shape is elliptical rather than triangular and the long side is rather
produced for Nucula itself. The beaks are conspicuously turned toward the
shorter side. The typical species has a distinct, though ill-defined and narrow,
constriction near the anterior extremity. The lunule and escutcheon are poorly
defined. The surface is generally almost smooth. On the interior, there are
the usual large posterior and anterior adductors, in addition to which, between
those sears and the beaks, a third and fourth pair of muscular imprints can be
seen. The dentition consists of a continuous series of taxodont denticles not
134 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
apparently interrupted by a chondrophore. The anterior teeth are few and
large, the posterior teeth numerous and diminishing in size toward the beak,
where they seem to end abruptly against the large anterior teeth. A chondro-
phore is almost certainly present, but, unlike the structure of living shells, it
seems to be situated within and below the row of cardinal teeth without ex-
tending to the beak and forming an interruption to them. This cannot. how-
ever, be positively asserted as a fact.
Type species, Nucula ventricosa Hall.
Limatula ? fasciculata sp. nov.
Shell of medium size, elongate, slightly oblique. Hinge line short. Anterior
and posterior outlines probably nearly straight above but becoming more and
more strongly curved below, where they merge with the (probably) regularly
rounded ventral outline. The convexity is strong with a high urea, so that a
section cut longitudinally through the two valves would be wedge shaped. On
the anterior side the shell descends steeply and abruptly making a rounded
angle with the median portion. The posterior side seems to fall away in a
low regular flexure.
The surface is marked by regularly arranged cost or groups of coste.
Toward the anterior side, the coste are single with relatively wide interspaces.
In the median and posterior regions, the costz are in groups of three or some-
times two, having their tops about on a level, and, in this case, the dividing
strive are essentially equal in width to the groups of cost. The anterior side,
from the angulation to the margin, is smooth. Very likely, the costz die out
toward the posterior side also.
The area is somewhat imperfectly shown by one of the two specimens ob-
tained. It appears to be high and resupinate, so that the beak overhangs the
hinge line and it is also rather concave. It is marked by several strong, broad,
transverse furrows, but shows no definite pit for a resilium, though, owing to
the projecting state of the beak and the concavity of the area, there seems to
be an ill-defined hollow under the beak which is rather longitudinal than
transverse to the area.
If Hind’s Paleolima is a valid genus, the present species would be
called Paleolima fasciculata, for its characters, so far as observed, are
consistent with Paleolima, but if that genus is to be divided into sub-
genera along the same lines as the living Lima, this species would prob-
ably belong in a group as yet unnamed. For the present, however, I am
not recognizing Paleolima as distinct from Lima, so that the generic
designation to be used is probably Zimatula, which is distingmished by
being smooth laterally.and by having the valves not gaping. The former
character seems to be possessed by the L. fasciculata, but the latter can
not be determined, as we have only dissociated valves. The only other
American species referred to this subgenus is the Guadalupian form
LTimatula striaticostata. By a clerical error L. striaticostata was de-
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 135
scribed under the genus Limatulina, but as the genus was ascribed to
Wood instead of de Koninck, the group which I had in mind is apparent.
The form is clearly not a Limatulina and the proper title is Limatula
striaticostata. It differs from the species under consideration in being
much smaller, more oblique, and in having different surface ornamenta-
tion.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Scaphopoda
Dentalium semicostatum sp. nov.
This type is represented by two fragments, which, so far as shown, indicate
a straight or gently curved, slowly enlarging conical shell. The cross section
is distinctly elliptical, having in the larger fragment a diameter of 7mm. in
one direction and 6mm. in the other. The test is thick and marked by rather
fine, rounded, wavy, longitudinal cost, separated by linear strive. These mark-
ings are confined to one side of the shell, and about four or five occur in 1 mm.
There are also transverse constrictions and incremental lines which have an
oblique direction to the axis. The obliquity of these markings is in the direc-
tion of the long axis of the section, so that their most distal points occur down
one of the narrow sides of the shell, and the most proximal down the other.
The costs also are confined to one of the narrow sides, and they occur on that
on which the transverse striw# are farthest from the apex.
This shell is somewhat similar to D. mexicanum. It has, however,
slightly finer coste at a considerably larger size, and these are restricted
to one side of the shell.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Dentalium indianum sp. nov.
Shell rather small, gradually tapering, very slightly curved. Section circu-
lar or obscurely elliptical. Surface marked by numerous thin, sharply ele-
yated, longitudinal costz which are separated by intervals of about double
their own width. The number of cost can not be counted with accuracy, but
it is not far from 42. There appear to be also fine, transverse, crenulating
striae.
This form stands nearest to D. mexicanum by reason of its numerous
fine costa. These are, however, more numerous and are separated by
relatively wider intervals, while the shell itself is gently curved instead
of being straight, as in the western form.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
136 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Gastropoda
Orestes subgen. nov.
This name is introduced for a group of pleurotomarioid shells which have
a shape generally conical or slightly turreted with a gently convex basal por-
tion. The band is not very strikingly defined and has a peripheral position
distinctly below the middle of the whorl. The upper surface is in general
flattened and oblique, with the zone which lies just below the suture more or
less prominent and marked by nodes. The sculpture consists of fine, decus-
sating, revolving and transverse lire. The slit band is relatively broad and
carries one or more revolving lire which are sometimes nodulose and occa-
sionally conceal to a greater or less degree the structural character of this
part of the shell. The slit has not been observed in any of the specimens
seen, but it was probably short. The umbilicus was apparently closed, but a
reflexed portion of the lower part of the outer lip produces a small excavation
which resembles a minute umbilical opening.
The inner lip is without a callosity. In fact, the mantle seems to have had
the power to resorb the shell on the inner side of the aperture, so that this
portion of the preceding volution is smooth and slightly depressed below the
external ornamented areas. This has been observed in many specimens and
is surely not an accidental character.
In one extreme, these shells suggest Huconospira, from which they
differ in their less regular, conical shape, and in the development of
nodes below the suture and of revolving lire in the slit band. They sug-
gest also Phanerotrema, but have a more conical shape with a slit band
at once broader, less defined, marked by distinctive sculpture and situated
not near the middle of the peritreme, but well below. Worthenia is in
some respects the most nearly related group, at least in the ornamented
character of the slit band. Worthenia has the band above the middle
rather than below, narrow instead of broad, and with the lunules in the
band much more prominent than the revolving lire (in Orestes the
lunules are hardly more than lamellose growth lines), and it has a more
turreted, less conical shape to the whole. It is doubtful if any of the
groups mentioned have the peculiar eroded or resorbed character of the
inner side of the aperture.
Orestes, then, is referred to a subgeneric position under Worthenia,
although its relationship to Phanerotrema is also obvious. The generic
name is introduced in honor of Orestes St. John, one of the early paleon-
tologists of the United States and one of the early geological explorers of
Oklahoma.
Type species, Orestes nodosus.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 137
Orestes nodosus sp. nov.
Shell small, irregularly conical. Diameter of last whorl about equal to the
greatest height, sometimes less. Height of last volution about equal to the
height of the spire above. Volutions angular, most prominent below the
middle. Spire somewhat turreted. Umbilicus apparently closed, but with
the lower lip folded backward upon itself so as to produce a small pit or false
umbilicus. Suture considerably depressed. The shell projects strongly from
the suture, then bends downward and is flat or concave below to the first
earina. Thus the upper third of the upper surface forms a sort of spiral
ridge just below the suture. The lateral surface is about one third as broad
as the upper surface. It consists of two rather thick, rounded carine guard-
ing between them a relatively broad concave channel in which the band is
situated. The upper carina is better defined than the other, but does not
project quite as far. The lower surface is nearly horizontal, gently convex,
more tumid near the umbilicus. The swollen band below the suture is marked
by a row of distantly arranged nodes which appear to be independent of the
superficial sculpture.
The surface is crossed by regular and nearly equal revolving and transverse
lire of which the former are heavier and dominant, while the latter are
more closely arranged. The upper surface carries about five (four to six)
revolving lines, arranged at regular and distant intervals. The upper one is
situated on the subsutural prominence. An additional lira is occasionally
developed just above the latter, which gives the nodes a somewhat elongated
double-topped appearance. The upper of the two carine bounding the slit is
a similar revolving lira of somewhat larger size and so is the lower one. Just
within these two lire are two small edges which define the true limits of the
slit band. The band is medially traversed by another fine, revolving thread,
or rarely by three. The lower carina carries about two fairly heavy lire.
while the lower surface is crossed by about twelve others, some of which may
be fine, and alternating with those of larger size. They are heavier and more
crowded than the lirze above. The transverse lirze, doubtless following the
outline of the aperture, bend strongly backward, being convex near the suture
and straightened or gently concave near the band. Over the latter, they are
deeply concave, producing fine, regular, closely arranged crenulations or
Junules. On the under side, they run obliquely backward with a strong convex
turn on the lower carina. For most of the distance, they are thus nearly
straight. In the region of the suture, they seem to be fine, irregular and
crowded, passing just below the nodose zone into regular, rather distant lire
which give a finely nodose appearance to the upper carina and generally tend
to produce little prominences where they cross the reyolving lire. Even
below the nodose zone, fine, intermediate, incremental lines are more or less
conspicuous. The transverse lirze do not produce crenulations on the project-
ing edges of the band, but they have this effect to a greater or less extent on
the revolving line or lines which traverse it.
The volutions embrace up to the edge of the band of the preceding one.
They are about five in number.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
138 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Bellerophon crassus var. wewokanus var. nov.
The fossils under consideration are all of small size. They can be de-
scribed most advantageously by comparing them with Bellerophon crassus, to
which they are clearly very closely related. For this purpose, it will be best
to use the figures and description given by Meek and Worthen, not only be-
cause they are the authentic ones, but because although B. crassus has ap-
peared in the literature not infrequently, the citations have seldom been based
on the observation of good and characteristic specimens. The most essential
difference shown by the Wewoka specimens is that the umbilicus instead of
being partly open, is so solidly closed that there must have been a continuous
imperforate columella. The size is very much smaller; the shape of the aper-
ture more transverse, and the band possibly more elevated.
It may be that these differences are due to stage of growth, but shells
which I am referring to B. crassus as representing a young condition are
quite different. From these the Wewoka fossils differ in the following
particulars. The volutions are relatively narrower; the slit band is
broader and more prominent; the umbilici are more completely closed ;
the sculpture, instead of consisting of rather regular, transverse imbrica-
tions, is made up of fine, incremental lines which, at irregular intervals,
become fasiculate, forming small angular coste or incipient plications.
I may add that the fissure as shown on one of the Wewoka specimens
is rather deep, but I am not sure that this feature may not have been ex-
aggerated by erosion of the projecting band. Furthermore, on the best
specimens, the callosity of the inner lip appears to be imperfectly de-
veloped.
It is possible that this may prove to be the same as B. incomptus, but
after comparing my specimens with Gurley’s types, which I have had the
privilege of examining, thanks to the courtesy of the Walker Museum of
Chicago University, I am disposed to think that they are different. The
differences appear to me to be those already mentioned as existing between
the var. wewokanus and young B. crassus.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Pharkidonotus subgen. nov.
The very extensive and varied series of shells which in the course of time
had been grouped under Montfort’s genus Bellerophon have of recent years
been distributed among a number of genera and subgenera. Waagen has very*
properly restricted the genus Bellerophon to types having a rather narrow,
well-developed slit band, moderately deep fissure, a strong callosity on the
inner lip, and sculpture consisting only of more or less strong growth lines.8
8 W. Waagen, Geol. Surv. India, Mem., Ser. 13, Salt Range Foss., vol. 1, p. 180. 1887.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 139
Our well-known Pennsylvanian species B. crassws and also the Upper Missis-
sippian B. sublevis are therefore typical Bellerophons.
We have in our Pennsylvanian faunas a species, or perhaps a series of
mutations, which presents well-marked differences from the characters pos-
sessed by typical Bellerophon, so that a subgeneric separation is justified, if
not demanded. The dorsum is elevated into a prominent nodose carina on
which traces of a slit band seldom remain. Many specimens therefore appear
to lack such a structure altogether and to be related to the Indian Warthia
and Mogulia. Some specimens retain unmistakable traces of a band, how-
ever, and there can be little doubt that this structure is a normal feature of
this type. That it is obliterated so often is probably due to its prominent
position and also perhaps to the tumid condition of the median line of the
dorsum.
From Bellerophon this type also differs in the development of coarse, heavy,
angular, transverse plications, quite distinct from the growth lines, which are
not conspicuous, these plications being also in some cases strengthened at two
series of points, one on each of the sides, so as to form more or less promi-
nent nodes (connected in some cases by revolving ridges). The linear arrange-
ment of these nodes produces two carinze additional to the median one which
is the locus of the slit band.
Type species, Bellerophon percarinatus.
Meekospira peracuta var. choctawensis var. nov.
This fossil is very abundant in the Wewoka formation and shows certain
variations, some of which are probably adventitious. It has an acutely conical
form with a very elongate spire and a narrow spiral angle. The sides are
usually flat with the suture only slightly depressed, but not infrequently the
sides of the spire are more undulating and the suture deeper. This is per-
haps due to variation in curve of the outer surface of the whorl. In the one
case the convexity is more regular; in the other, the upper surface of the
volution is flattened and the greatest convexity well below the middle, where
it is overlain by the succeeding whorl. The rate of increase seems to be
accelerated somewhat toward maturity, so that the sides of the spire are
slightly concave. As a result, when the apex of specimens is broken away,
which very often happens, the frustum remaining appears to have a wider
spiral angle than was really the case. In comparing these with more perfect
specimens, one is somewhat surprised to find that they may belong to the
typical variety, as well as to find what a large number of volutions is present
when the apex is complete, the number being proportionately much greater
toward the top. On the side of a specimen 14 mm. long, parts of nine volutions
appear and as the apex is broken, there must have been one or two more. A
full-sized specimen about 30 mm. long shows parts of ten volutions with an
apical break which may possibly account for two more. The number of com-
plete volutions in a mature specimen is probably eleven and possibly twelve.
The callus is a very distinct character in well-preserved specimens, extend-
ing half way or a little less than half way up the inner lip. It is formed by
a slight backward flexure on itself of the outer lip as it passes up the axis
and is there gradually lost in the aperture.
140 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
In its specific characters this species is intermediate between Meeko-
spira peracuta and Bulimorpha nitidula, and it does not exactly agree
with either species. According to Meek and Worthen, these types show
the following differences: B. nitidula has a lower spire with fewer volu-
tions and broader spiral angle; it is smaller, and the volutions are more
rounded with more deeply depressed sutures.
The present form seems almost invariably to have a slightly broader
spiral angle than M. peracuta, though a certain amount of variation is
not absent. The agreement in this respect is then distinctly with B. niti-
dula. As for the convexity of the volutions, some specimens resemble
peracuta and others nitidula; but few, perhaps none, are quite as strongly
convex as in Meek and Worthen’s figures of the latter species. In fact, one
of their figures shows this character more strongly than the other, though
both are drawn from the same specimen. The number of volutions is
more like peracuta, which is said to have 13, than nitidula, which is
said to have 8 or 8.5. The size is that of nitidula. none of the speci-
mens attaining to the length of WM. peracuta. In the most essential re-
spect, the callus and reflexed lip, the Wewoka form agrees with I. pera-
cuta and differs from B. nitidula, and, if this character is regarded as of
generic importance, there can be no question about associating it with any
species but M. peracuta. Ulrich seems inclined to associate B. nitidula
and B. inornata with M. peracuta in his genus Meekospira, but the callus,
which is such a marked feature of W/. peracuta, must be a generic charac-
ter, or its absence from the two other species accidental. This assump-
tion seems unwarranted, and I am referring those two species to another
genus than Meekospira, in which, of course, the present form must be
included. Though closely related to M. peracuta, I can hardly place it
in the same species, because of its broader spiral angle and smaller size.
Most of the specimens referred to this species are almost absolutely
smooth, having but very obscure growth lines. Those from one or two
localities, however, are regularly marked by more or less strong incre-
mental lines, some of which are prominent and lend an irregularly and
intermittently corrugated appearance where most strongly developed.
Some of these shells, furthermore, show slight modifications of curvature
in the outer surface of the volution, which gives the spire a slightly dif-
ferent outline from the normal. In others, however, the shape of the
whorl section is entirely normal, so that no persistent difference can be
pointed out, save in the increased development of the strie of growth.
It-is possible that these sculptured specimens should be regarded as a
separate variety, but the differences observed hardly seem to justify the
distinction.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 141
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Ianthinopsis gouldiana sp. nov.
Shell rather large, subovate; length a little less than 1.5 times the greatest
width. Aperture about three fourths the entire height; spire about one eighth
of the whole. Volutions four or five, rather inflated, especially above, so that
the upper surface of the volution appears flattened and not strongly oblique
to the horizontal. Aperture fusiform, more than twice as long as wide.
Surface smooth but marked on the more gibbous portion with a few (four
or five) rather coarse but faint revolving striz. Axis solid.
The affinities of this type, represented as it is by only one specimen, are
much in doubt. If it were not for the sculpture and for the shape with
the most prominent part of the volutions so high up, this shell might be
placed under Spherodoma in the same series with 8. intercalaris and
S. primigenia. The striation, though faint, is unmistakably visible in a
good light, but it can only be seen in the region of the aperture. The
shape has doubtless been somewhat modified by compression, but not suffi-
ciently to have produced the present result from a shell originally having
the proportions of either of the species named.
On the assumption that the peculiarities presented by this form are in-
herent, it may be compared with the singular species described by Meek
and Worthen under the name Pleurotomaria ? tumida. While clearly
distinct from P. ? tumida, the resemblance in a general way is so strik-
ing that it would appear to be ultraconservative not to conclude that it
is a generically related species. ‘The most important difference of a
fundamental kind is found in the statement by Meek that the columella
of the Illinois form is perforated (?), while that of the Wewoka shell is
certainly solid.
Meek had not observed the presence of a slit band in P. (?) tumida,
and justly remarked that that species differs materially in outline from
the usual form of Plewrotomaria. Suspecting that it was a representa-
tive of a new genus, he provisionally proposed the name Ianthinopsis.
I am ready, without having determined the absence of a slit band, to
accept I. tumida as representing a new generic type, and I am employing
Tanthinopsts for the type specimen and for the Oklahoma shell also.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
142 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Cephalopoda
Orthoceras tuba sp. nov.
Orthoceratoid shells are abundant in the Wewoka formation and many of
them possess the singular feature of accelerated expansion, so that they flare
conspicuously at the larger end, and, if the tendency were carried out to a
high degree, the complete shell would have a trumpet-shape, a configuration
which many of them even now suggest. This peculiarity, however, is mani-
fested in shells of very various sizes and presumably corresponding ages, and
it is found in both the chamber of habitation and in the septate portion.
Both hypotheses—that the flaring condition is a feature of maturity (which
is the natural supposition) and that it is the normal shape at all stages, the
expanded portion being resorbed so that the shell is regularly conical except
toward the aperture—are repugnant to the fact that the flaring portion is
sometimes septate. On the former hypothesis, furthermore, we must also
infer that the mature condition is in some specimens enormously accelerated
or retarded.
Correlated with the peculiarity above described is found a relatively rapid
rate of expansion, giving the regular portion of the cone a rather strong
taper. The siphuncle is conspicuously excentric, though this character has
been seen in only a few individuals which at the same time have the trumpet-
shape in a conspicuous degree. The septation is rather frequent, about 4.5
to 5 chambers occurring within the distance of a diameter.
None of the shells having the characters enumerated possesses the
peculiar secondary deposits of Pseudorthoceras. Indeed, they have the
chambers filled with ochreous clay, and it is difficult to understand how
this condition came about when the partitions are still retained. Possi-
bly the fine mud permeated the chambers through the siphuncle, which
seems seldom to be preserved in the specimens examined. For the most
part, these are internal molds, but in some instances they retain a sub-
stantial outer investment.
With typical O. tuba I am provisionally including a group of specimens
which do not show the expanded aperture, but have a similarly excentric
siphuncle and similarly frequent partitions. They vary much in size and
some of them are much larger than some of those which show the acceler-
ated expansion, but in view of the extreme variation in size of the speci-
mens possessing the latter character, it seems that this fact alone can
hardly be regarded as forbidding their union under a single species. This,
of course, would only be done on the hypothesis, either that the trumpet
shape was not a character of importance, or that these specimens, all of
which are naturally now imperfect, possessed it or would have possessed
it in the complete and mature condition.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 143
=0)
I am inclined to believe that this peculiarity of configuration is not so
much a specific character as that it is either generic or else of no fixed
value at all, but I feel that its significance is too little understood to
warrant establishing a new genus on the evidence in hand.
It is with extreme rarity that shells of this group are found in a com-
plete condition, and all of those examined are pretty clearly imperfect at
one or both ends. A few give evidence of having been broken before
fossilization. The evidence referred to consists of the occurrence of small
Reemerellas apparently in their original position of attachment upon the
septa, where, of course, they could not possibly have penetrated if the
shell had not been a fragment during the life of the brachiopod.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Pseudorthoceras gen. nov.
Shells small (?), straight, gradually tapering. Siphuncle nearly central,
small, but considerably expanded between the septa, without, however, be-
coming nummuloidal. Septa simple. Funnels apparently very short and
thick. Chambers partly occupied by secondary deposits which accumulated,
not about the funnels and siphuncle, but about the walls. In the type species,
the deposits fill about half of each chamber, thinnest toward the aperture and
thickest toward the apex, and diminishing irregularly so that the outline is
shaped like an incomplete letter S. The deposit appears to be more or less
vesicular, perhaps as the result of weathering. Shells which are not broken
at the apex do not taper to a point, but are obliquely truncated.
This type is rather clearly not a representative of true Orthoceras, nor
have I been able to find a genus with which it can be assembled. Indeed,
it is not certain that it can be included among the Orthoceratide, though
it is for the present referred to that family. The most diagnostic feat-
ures are probably the enlarged siphuncle and more especially the second-
ary deposits accumulated not axially, but circumferentially. In this item
lies the main difference from Orthoceras, for in that genus, and indeed in
that family, the secondary deposits are rather sparingly developed and
they are accumulated about the funnels, not about the outer wall.
Type species, Pseudorthoceras knoxense McChesney.
Pseudorthoceras seminolense sp. nov.
Three specimens in the collection appear to belong to Pseudorthoceras by
reason of their central siphuncle and chambers partly filled by secondary
deposits and at the same time to differ from P. knoaense in being very much
larger. These large specimens have about 3.5 chambers to a diameter and so
do not differ essentially from the smaller species. One of the specimens is
144 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
compressed and seems to show a structure down one side suggesting a marginal
siphuncle.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Protocycloceras ? rushense var. crebricinctum var. nov.
Two specimens, though resembling P. ? rushense, are distinguished by having
the annulations more closely arranged and somewhat alternating. The cross-
section is elliptical as in that species, but there is an acceleration of expansion
which produces a flaring shape toward the aperture. The recurrence of this
latter character, which is found to a marked degree in one of the species of
Orthoceras, is noteworthy and seems to bring its importance somewhat into
doubt. Its significance is entirely unknown.
One of the specimens shows the surface to be marked by fine, subequal,
somewhat wavy, thread-like, transverse lire.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Coloceras liratum sp. nov.
Shell small, the largest specimen seen measuring 34mm. in the plane of
revolution. Shape subglobose. Cross-section sublunate, somewhat gibbous at
the sides. Surface rather regularly curved over the venter and sides, abruptly
rounded inward at the umbilicus, forming two not very well-defined umbilical
zones, the direction of which is nearly horizontal. At maturity, the section is
about twice as wide as high. In mature specimens, the median line of the
venter is broadly and faintly impressed. The rate of increase is rapid and the
depressed zone narrow, considerably less than one half the width of the pre-
ceding whorl. The umbilicus is rather small and deep.
The surface is marked at the sides by fine revolving lire, separated by wide,
flat interspaces. These extend from the umbilical zone over the subangular
shoulder onto the extreme sides of the venter. The revolving lirz are crossed
in some cases by much more closely arranged transverse ones which make fine
crenulations as they surmount them. The entire surface of the immature
stages seems to be thus cancellated, but only a band on the sides of the mature
shell, while on the oldest specimens and some others, the transverse markings
eannot be seen. The ventral surface is crossed by fine, incremental striex,
which indicate a deep, subangular V-shaped sinus, whose sides are nearly
straight over the median portion but curve gracefully outward with increasing
rapidity toward the sides. In one specimen, the strive are so arranged that
every seventh or eighth is stronger than the others, which cross the slightly
elevated spaces between in crowded though regular order.
The septa are rather far apart, about 6mm. along the median line in a
mature specimen. They are nearly straight except for a slight sinuosity across
the venter caused by the shallow ventral lobe and a pair of obscure saddles.
The siphuncle appears to be situated below the center (dorsad) but it is not
well shown.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 145
This species is related to C. globulare. It appears to be a more slender
form (though specimens vary somewhat in this), with more distant septa
which show a slight lobe instead of a slight saddle on the ventral surface.
The sculpture of C. globulare is not known, so that additional differences
may be discovered when those data are determined for it.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Coloceras liratum var. obsoletum var. nov.
Associated in most cases with C. liratum are specimens which show certain
differences, the most constant of which is perhaps the absence of lirze on the
umbilical zone. Correlated with this character the curvature at the sides is
more regular, so that the umbilical zones themselves are less well defined. The
incremental markings are perhaps stronger, or at least more regularly pre-
served. Some of the specimens are rather narrow but not all. At the same
time, since the sculpture on typical liratwm might easily be obscured, it is
possible that some specimens of the latter may be included here. The siphuncle
of this species seems to be ventrad or at least central, while that of liratum
is or appears to be dorsad, but this feature is rarely shown and in the case of
liratum not well shown by my specimens.
There seems to be a varietal or even a specific difference here, but my
material is not sufficiently good to show the degree of difference or the
constancy of it from C. liratum, or whether possibly the shells subsumed
under this title are in every case conspecific.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Metacoceras cornutum sp. nov.
This species is founded on a fragment which must have had a diameter of
70 mm. exclusive of the chamber of habitation, no portion of which is retained.
The whorl section is subquadrate, distinctly wider than high. The height is
23mm. and the width 29mm. The ventral surface is gently convex, more
nearly flat on the shell itself than on the internal mold. The sides, exclusive
of the prominent tubercles, are nearly flat and parallel. The lower portion
of the whorl is tripartite, consisting of an impressed zone about 12mm. wide
and two umbilical zones, each about Smm. wide. The umbilical shoulder is
abrupt and angular, the angle being somewhat greater than a right angle. The
ventrolateral shoulder is also angular and furnished with large, prominent,
compressed nodes. They project outward and slightly upward and are flat-
tened on the upper surface, more convex on the lower. Those on one side
alternate with those on the other and in the same row they occur on about
every other chamber.
The septa are about 6.5 mm. apart, measured along the median line of the
venter, and the sutures are rather strongly bent. There is a broad, deep
146 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ventral lobe almost angular at the middle in some sutures, a broad, moderately
deep lateral lobe, the point of greatest convexity being below or interior to the
middle, and a gently curved internal or dorsal lobe across the impressed zone.
Abruptly rounded saddles occupy the ventrolateral angles and a broad saddle
flattened across the middle, each of the umbilical zones. Each of the latter,
however, may be regarded as composed of two obscure saddles, one on the
umbilical shoulder and one on the angle of the impressed zone with a scarcely
perceptible lobe between.
The sculpture is not well shown. On the ventrolateral angles and tubercles
it consists of regular, strong, sharp, transverse lire, which are deeply curved,
suggesting a broad, deep hyponomic sinus.
The test appears to be considerably thickened at the ventrolateral angles so
that the internal mold differs appreciably from the perfect shell, the shell
being flatter across the ventral surface, with the sides more convergent toward
the umbilicus, and with the tubercles very much more produced. Indeed, on
the internal mold, the tubercles are not at all prominent.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, We-
woka quadrangle, Okla.
Metacoceras cornutum var. sinuosum var. nov.
A single fragmentary specimen which retains the shell is all that represents
this variety. It is smaller than the original species and with a less transverse
cross-section. The nodes are rounded instead of compressed and extend part
way down the sides as low, broad, obscure plications which fall far short of
the umbilical shoulder. The latter is regularly rounded and although strongly
turned, not angulated. The ventral surface is marked by two obscure sulci
with a gentle convexity between. The tubercles appear to be nearly opposite.
The surface is almost smooth, the incremental lines being obscure except on
the tubercles, where they develop into regular, fine, though sharp lire. They
make a deep sinus on the ventral surface, are nearly straight and gently
sloped backward at the sides, with a gradual change of the direction at the um-
bilical shoulder, beyond which on the umbilical zone they are gently concave.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Metacoceras cornutum var. carinatum var. nov.
This variety is represented by two fragments which apparently show the
chamber of habitation, but do not retain the septa. They are partly testifer-
ous and partly exfoliated.
The variety carinatum is distinguished from either of the preceding by its
more rapid expansion and more transverse shape, in which it exceeds even the
original species itself. The sides are in consequence relatively very narrow.
The tubercles are rounded as in the variety sinuosum, but owing to the short-
ness of the sides they make more prominent plications. The ventral surface is
rather strongly rounded and without sulci. The umbilical shoulder is very
angular and extended into a crest or carina,—in which a marked difference is
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 147
shown from the variety sinuoswmn, though possibly not from M. cornutum
itself. The growth lines indicate the presence of a deep hyponomic sinus.
It may be that these shells represent a young stage of cornutum (though
hardly of the variety sinwosum), but they present too important differ-
ences (the rapid expansion, greater breadth and differently shaped tuber-
cles) to make it safe to assume this relationship without more evidence.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Metacoceras cornutum var. multituberculatum var. nov.
This variety is founded on a crushed specimen which presents the difference
from all the others that the tubercles are smaller and more closely arranged.
They appear to be somewhat compressed rather than rounded. The umbilical
shoulder is subangular without the crest of carinatum, but more rounded than
sinuosum. The height between the ventrolateral and umbilical angles is about
10 mm. ; the width across the venter (tubercles included), about 15 mm.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla.
Metacoceras perelegans sp. nov.
Shell rather small, so far as known not exceeding 31mm. in diameter.
Cross-section of mature whorls hexagonal, transverse; width about 20 mm.;
_height about 12 mm.; width of lateral zone 7 mm.; of umbilical zone 6 mm.; of
impressed zone 8mm.; of ventral zone, including tubercles, 17 mm. Ventral
surface gently convex, flattened or slightly depressed along the center, gently
upturned at the edges, owing to the tubercles. Lateral zone nearly flat except
for the tubercles, the projection of which gives it a gently concave shape.
Umbilical zone nearly flat. The lateral zone slopes gently outward from above
and the umbilical zone strongly inward. In the youthful stages, the dimen-
sions are increasingly transverse and the shape more nearly elliptical, with an
angular periphery a little above the middle and with the usual recurved dorsal
zone. This change in shape is effected (when considered in reverse order) by
an increased inward slope of the umbilical zone and a corresponding loss of
the umbilical shoulder. Both the ventrolateral and the umbilical shoulders,
however, are more or less distinguished by an angulation.
The sculpture of the youthful stages is incompletely known, but the sides of
the youngest example seen are marked by fine, even, transverse, rounded
strigz, separated by narrow, sharp lire. Later, the flattened sides are marked
by strong, regular plications, the folds being angular and the furrows between
relatively broad and rounded. On these are superposed strong, incremental
strive, much less distinct in the furrows than on the crests between them. The
pile thus gradually formed tend to become more prominent at the ends, de-
veloping little nodes in which they terminate, the nodes appearing at an early
stage and more strongly at the outer than the inner ends. “At maturity the
connecting ridges gradually fail of development, leaving the two rows of
148 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
nodes, the larger and more prominent along the ventrolateral shoulder, the
smaller and less prominent on the umbilical shoulder. Both these loci are
well defined and more or less strongly angular during the periods of adoles-
cence and maturity.
The sculpture at maturity consists of very obscure incremental lines which
tend to become sharp lirz on the tubercles, and they show a deep sinus over
the ventral surface.
The septa are not well exhibited by my specimens, though this is a fairly
common fossil in the Wewoka fauna. In a mature example, they are 3.5 mm.
apart along the middle of the venter, and the suture is very nearly straight,
depressed, however, into a shallow ventral lobe and with very obscure saddles
on the ventrolateral shoulders. In this region, the suture is liable to be more
or less deflected by the pilz, which are not developed exactly with regard to
the septa. In some cases the nodes occur on the septa ; in others between them,
and there are about three nodes to four septa. In a young specimen which
probably belongs to this species, there is a suggestion of a very small, pointed
dorsal lobe, somewhat as in the genus Hndolobus. The siphuncle appears to be
central or somewhat below the center.
I know of no American nautiloid which this species so much resembles
as that which Hyatt described as Temnochetlus crassum. The whorl sec-
tion of perelegans is more transverse and somewhat differently shaped,
with distinct umbilical shoulders. The pile have nodes at both ends in-
stead of near the ventral surface only, and at maturity they disappear,
leaving only the two rows of nodes.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Metacoceras sculptile sp. nov.
Shell rather large, attaining a diameter of 67mm., discoidal, with large
umbilici, 31 mm. across at the diameter named.
Whorl section modified hexagonal, consisting of a relatively narrow ventral
surface, two broad lateral surfaces, two umbilical zones and an impressed
zone, all narrow. ‘The ventrolateral and umbilical angles are distinct and
only slightly rounded. The ventral surface is marked by two shallow sulci
situated close to the margins, on either side of which the shell rises slightly
into a gently convex median portion and gently elevated ventrolateral angles.
The sides are flattened and slope distinctly outward from above to the um-
bilical shoulder. There, with an abrupt subangular change of direction, they
are withdrawn inward and somewhat downward to a rather deeply concave
impressed zone. Greatest height of the final volution 31 mm.; greatest width
(at the umbilical shoulder) 25 mm.; width of ventral surface 15 mm.; width of
lateral surface 24 mm.; width of umbilical zone 8.5 mm.; width of impressed
zone 9.5 mm.
The sculpture seems to consist of fine, even strie, which follow the lines of
growth, leaving between them sharp, strong, angular lire. This sculpture,
however, is more or less concealed in our specimens by a thin, even, super-
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 149
ficial deposit, whether intrinsic or extrinsic I am unable to determine. This
makes the surface look either smooth or, as the sculpture shows through,
marked by obscure lines of increase. The lire, which seem to strengthen and
coarsen as they cross the ventrolateral shoulders, form a deep sinus on the
venter. On the sides the direction is sigmoidal, convex above and concave
below ; similarly on the umbilical zone, save that the concave portion, which is
below, is very slightly developed. When mature, the ventrolateral shoulders
are marked by small, rather indistinct nodes.
Suture not known.
This species is of the type of M. walcotli and M. hayt. From both spe-
cies it seems to differ in having the height proportionately less in com-
parison with the width; in having the sides contract toward the venter ;
in having the umbilical zones more nearly horizontal and the umbilical
shoulders perhaps a little more angular. The nodes along the ventro-
lateral angles appear to be smaller and less distinct than in J/. hayi,
while the sculptured surface of M. sculptile is not recorded for either
species.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Cyrtoceras peculiare sp. nov.
Shell rather small, expanding with extreme rapidity. Apical angle about
60°. Axis nearly, if not quite, straight. The rate of expansion is so great
that unless the shell grew to a very large size, the curvature of the axis would
hardly be preceptible. The sides, therefore, appear to be nearly straight, but
that on which the expansion is least rapid may probably be regarded as the
dorsal and the other as the ventral side. The siphuncle then is strongly dorsad.
The cross-section would be broadly oval, contracting toward the dorsal side,
which is somewhat flattened. Only five chambers are preserved, the oldest
being about three times as high as the others. The prolongation of the cham-
bers is so rapid on the ventral side that in the internal mold they make step-
like projections. The sutures are nearly direct, but are more or less distinctly
sinuated, with gentle lobes on the dorsal, ventral and lateral surfaces, and
equally faint saddles between.
The extremely rapid expansion of this species distinguishes it from the
few Carboniferous representatives of the genus known in North America.
It is, however, very doubtful whether this is a true representative of
Cyrtoceras, a question which can be raised with equal propriety regarding
the other American Carboniferous species referred to the genus.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Gastrioceras venatum sp. nov.
Shell small, attaining a diameter of 18 mm., compressed globose. Umbilici
rather large and open. Whorl section lunate, somewhat tumid at the sides
with an ill-defined umbilical shoulder.
150 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Sculpture consisting of angular pile or plications at the sides with relatively
broad, rounded interspaces. The pile are short and divide irregularly into
three or four branches of inferior size and prominence. Similar small plica-
tions are developed simultaneously in the sulci between the pil, all of which
become crowded and finer, so that the venter is crossed by regularly arranged,
moderately coarse and strong striz which form a rather broad, deep sinus as
they cross to the other side.
The suture is rather simple. The siphonal saddle is small and indented on
top. The remaining lobes and saddles are rounded. The first lateral saddle
is rather broad and symmetrical; the second, still broader and very unsym-
metrical, the outer side being straighter and more extended than the inner.
The two lobes are symmetrical. The first is very small, narrower than the
siphonal saddle. The second is fully twice as large as the first and somewhat
more spreading. j
This species resembles the few Gastriocerata described from the Carbon-
iferous of America which have plicated sides, but the plications in this
case are finer and branching in a rather unusual manner. The suture is
also distinctive in that the lobes are rounded instead of angular. In some
respects the characters shown by this species suggest that it is an imma-
ture stage, but some fifteen specimens have been examined, all of which
are of small and more or less uniform size.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Gastrioceras hyattianum sp. nov.
Shell subspherical with relatively wide umbilici when young; compressed
globose with relatively narrow umbilici when mature; attaining a rather
large size, the largest example having a diameter in the plane of revolution of
65mm. and being about 37 mm. thick at the widest part of the final volution.
Umbilical shoulder angular and more or less carinated at all stages, except
perhaps when very immature. Cross-section broadly lunate in the young and
narrowly lunate in the mature condition. In the latter, the curve of the venter
and sides (which are not differentiated) is parabolic, gradually expanding
toward the umbilicus and much more strongly curved above than at the sides.
In this condition the whorls are deeply embracing. Specimens of nearly the
same size seem to vary considerably in thickness, some being more discoidal,
others more globose. The chamber of habitation is long, one volution or pos-
sibly more.
The surface when very young is probably cancellated with fine transverse
lire and fine revolving ones. In an early mature condition, the strength of
the liration seems to have diminished considerably. The transverse lirz are
finer but persistent, while the revolving lirze become restricted to the umbilical
surface and the sides of the ventrolateral surface, the major portion of the
venter showing only transverse markings. These have a more or less sinuous
course with a gentle saddle in the center and obscure lobes toward the sides.
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 151
When mature, the shell seems to have been perfectly smooth, without lirz of
either sort, except possibly a few revolving ones on the umbilical shoulder.
My specimens do not show this sculpture, except here and there, and the fore-
going statements are based on scattered observations and not on any one
specimen, still less on a series of specimens showing consecutive changes.
The suture (observed on a shell in an early mature stage) shows a high,
narrow ventral saddle, indented on top, and two rounded lateral saddles, the
first of which is relatively narrow and symmetrical and the other broad and
unsymmetrical. Both are considerably higher than the ventral saddie. The
two lobes are tongue-shaped, the inner one being narrow and the outer broad
and unsymmetrical. A third, broad, tongue-shaped lobe, smaller than the
others, is found on the umbilical zone.
This species closely resembles Gastrioceras occidentale, the only positive
difference of any moment suggested by the description and figures being
that the umbilical shoulder of the latter is obscurely crenulated or sub-
nodose. As neither the suture nor the sculpture are known, however,
adequate grounds for comparison are wanting.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Gastrioceras angulatum sp. nov.
Shell of medium size, subglobose. The largest specimen has a diameter of
32mm. Cross-section trapezoidal, much wider than high. Umbilical shoulders
very angular. Umbilicus wide and deep. Ventral surface broadly rounded,
more or less parallel to the impressed zone. Constrictions about five to a
volution, gently curved across the venter with the convex side forward. A
typical specimen has a diameter of 30mm. with an umbilicus 16mm. wide.
The thickness at the widest part of the final volution is 25mm. The height of
the final volution is 7 mm., the width of the impressed zone 17.5 mm. A
small specimen having a diameter of 15 mm. is composed of seven volutions.
The surface over the venter appears to be smooth when the shell is mature.
The region of the umbilical shoulder, however, is marked by moderately coarse,
revolving lire, crossed by about equally coarse transverse lire. This cancel-
lated area appears to be narrow and to extend to or just beyond the umbilical
shoulder, leaving the umbilical zone smooth. Doubtless in the younger stages,
the whole surface was cancellated, though this fact is not shown by my speci-
mens. In the later stages also, the transverse cancellating lirsze appear to be
absent, leaving only a few revolving ones on the umbilical shoulder.
The suture is not well shown by my specimens. There is a narrow, bifid
siphonal saddle with sigmoidal sides. The first lobe is extraordinarily narrow,
not so wide as the siphonal saddle and less than half as wide as the second
lobe. Both the lobes are tongue shaped. The saddles are rounded, the first a
little broader than the second, and they are considerably higher than the
siphonal saddle. The umbilical shoulder passes through the outer side of the
second saddle and doubtless a third tongue-shaped lobe is situated on the
152 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
umbilical zone. The internal sutures consist of three tongue-shaped lobes of
very nearly equal size and shape, two rounded saddles, also nearly equal, and
half of two others, one at either margin, each being interrupted by the limit of
the depressed zone.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Dimorphoceras lenticulare sp. nov.
This species is known only from one or two fragments but the characters
shown are sufficient for a fairly complete description.
The shape is discoidal, much thicker at the umbilicus than at the venter.
The size indicated is about 40 mm. in diameter and about 13 mm. in thickness.
As only the septate portion is known, complete specimens must have been con-
siderably larger. The umbilicus was small and the shell highly involute. The
shape of the whorl section is somewhat triangular, slightly higher than
broad. The sides are gently convex, strongly and regularly contracting to the
ventral surface, which is narrow and sharply rounded. Probably, there was a
more or less distinct umbilical shoulder and a narrow umbilical zone.
There is a broad, rounded ventral saddle with a median notch. The lateral
sutures consist of two parts, that toward the umbilicus having large turns and
that toward the venter having small ones. The small folds, which comprise
two lobes and a saddle, can be thought of as a large lobe codrdinate with those
toward the umbilicus, which has been divided by a median saddle. The three
plications thus formed are nearly equal, but the first lobe and the saddle are
rounded, while the second lobe is tongue-shaped. The saddle is a little nar-
rower than the two lobes, and the second lobe projects a little farther back-
ward than the first. The remainder of the suture consists of high angular
plications, a saddle and a lobe, together with the major part of another saddle,
all of which probably comes within the limits of the visible suture when fully
exposed. These lobes and saddles are asymmetrical and have more or less
sigmoidal sides. They are so arranged that the point of the lateral lobe is
almost in contact with the outer side of the preceding lobe somewhat less than
half-way up. The final saddle is broad, rounded and asymmetrical.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Dimorphoceras oklahome sp. nov.
Shell lenticular in shape, thick in the middle, thin at the edges. Diameter
50 mm., thickness 20 mm. Highly involute with small umbilici (about
5mm.). The whorl! section is more or less triangular, with gently convex, con-
verging sides, and narrow, strongly rounded venter. Umbilical shoulder dis-
tinct; umbilical zone narrow.
Ventral saddle rather narrow, indented on top. The two small ventral lobes
are pointed and tongue shaped, the first one short, the second long and narrow.
The saddle between them is rounded. There is not much difference between
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 153
these four lobes and saddles in the matter of width. If anything, the ventral
saddle and the small lateral saddle are a little wider than the two lobes. The
large lateral saddle and lobe are about equal, moderately narrow, with some-
what sigmoidal sides. The suture seems to form part of another large,
rounded asymmetrical saddle. Only part of the outer limb of this is retained
on the only specimen found, but probably the remainder appeared on the con-
fines of the visible suture not exposed in the type.
‘This species is most closely related to D. lenticulare, from which it has
been discriminated because of the suture. The differences manifested in
this feature can hardly be ascribed to difference in age, because the two
type specimens must have been nearly of a size and presumably at a corre-
sponding stage of development. The differences noted are the narrower
ventral saddle, the pointed instead of rounded shape of the first small
lobe, and the much elongated shape of the second. The outer sides of the
first large lobe are also more approximate. D. oklahoma differs from
D. texanum in about the same characters as those pointed out for D. len-
ticulare, but is rather more closely related. This is shown, for instance,
in the first small lobe, which is pointed in oklahome and texanum, but
rounded in lenticulare.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
Gonioloboceras welleri var. gracile var. nov.
This species attains a diameter of 53 mm. in a fragment entirely septate.
The type specimen, however, has a diameter of 48 mm., with a thickness
through the center of 14 mm. The umbilici are small, only 3 mm. wide, and
the whorls highly involute. The sides are gently convex, contracting to a
very narrow venter marked by a revolving channel guarded by two thin,
angular ridges. In the early stages the shell is less compressed and the venter
less distinctly channeled. When still younger, the venter was probably rounded,
but the two carinz with their inclosed groove are largely a development of
the test and do not show clearly on the internal mold. The surface appears
to be marked by obscure, incremental lirz, the direction of which indicates
a deep, broad, hyponomie sinus.
The suture consists of two lobes and two saddles on each side, together with
a high, broad, siphonal saddle. This is rounded, but with a notch (?) on the
median line. The latter feature is not clear. The suture lines bend sharply
backward near the middle, but in most specimens they appear to be discon-
nected. In one, however, they appear to connect into a small V-shaped re-
entrant angle. The second saddle is broad and unsymmetrical. The first
saddle and the two adjacent lobes are very nearly equal, the second lobe being
slightly broader. They are subangular, but not acutely pointed. The sutures
are closely arranged, the inner sides of the first saddles being almost in
contact.
154 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
This form is closely related to G. wellert, but differs in some particulars.
J. P. Smith figures two mature examples of G. welleri, and it is perhaps
desirable to distinguish between the type and the auxiliary specimen. The
type specimen of the variety gracile is a little more compressed than the
specimens of G. welleri, but I am not sure that the difference would be
constant. The venter also seems to be narrower and to show the channeled
condition at a stage when the type of G. welleri was rounded. The
sutures are more closely arranged than in Smith’s second specimen, but
not more so than in his type. This feature is better shown in the former,
from which the detail was drawn, than in the latter. The sides of the
lobes and saddles are more sigmoidal as given by Smith. They are very
nearly a constant distance apart, whereas in the Wewoka form, they are
almost in contact at one point as described above, and the first lobe is
much narrower. These differences are not so marked in the case of the
type specimen, but there the point of the second lobe is nearly in contact
with the inner side of the lobe immediately preceding, an arrangment
quite different from the variety gracile. Furthermore, Smith definitely
states that the ventral saddle in his form is not notched, but has a tongue-
shaped forward extension, whereas the extension in my shell is as cer-
tainly backward.
These differences appear to be rather constant for the material exam-
ined, and it seems unwarranted to consider the Wewoka form as quite
identical with the other.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal-
gate quadrangle, Okla.
Crustacea
Griffithides parvulus sp. noy.
Carapace small, elliptical, length about 2.5 times the width, nearly equally
divided between cephalon, thorax and pygidium. The head, however, even
without the genal angles, is longer than the pygidium.
Cephalon semi-elliptical in shape, considerably wider than long (if the
width is measured from the anterior extremity to the edge of the neck ring),
rather tumid. Genal angles prolonged into spines of undetermined length.
A broad, striated border passes around the are of the cephalic shield, ter-
minating posteriorly in the genal spines. The border is strongly arched or
subangular transversely, so that the outer surface is directed obliquely down-
ward and outward, and the inner surface obliquely downward and inward,
thus causing it to be defined from the inner parts of the cephalon by a deep
sulcus. The sulcus dies down to a depressed line as it passes around the
front of the glabella, and at the same time the direction of the border be-
GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 155
comes so changed that its surface is essentially vertical, and so that the an-
terior outline of the glabella is terminal, when the head is seen from aboye.
Outline of the facial suture very sinuous. The sutures almost come together
at the end of the glabella, diverging strongly as their course is traced back-
ward. At the sulcus which defines the border, they assume an opposite direc-
tion, contracting gently for an equal distance. They make a strong arch
around the palpebral lobes and from the neck furrow pass somewhat obliquely
outward to the articulating margin. Glabella much wider toward the front
than behind, occupying nearly the whole of the cranidium, so that there is little
of the fixed cheek, except the rather small palpebral lobes. The neck furrow
is strong and broad, passing almost directly across the cephalon to the two
sulci defining the border. The neck ring is very broad, oblique, prominent.
much wider than the sort of band with which it is continuous, which is pro-
duced on either side by the neck furrow. The posterior part of the glabella
is subdivided into three knob-like lobes by two oblique furrows cutting off
the corners, so to speak, and a cross furrow connecting these parallel to, and
a little in front of, the neck furrow. These lobes are rounded, and the fur-
rows between coalesce around them into an undefined depressed area. <A par-
tial and indistinct transverse furrow, a little in front, indicates a second
annulation of the glabella. The glabella is tumid, the palpebral lobes and
neck ring very prominent. The large, elliptical, many-faceted eye is strongly
oblique and the free cheek just external to the eye also slopes strongly down-
ward toward the border. A small subangular ridge passes around the outer
margin of the eye.
The somatic segments are 9 in number, with a highly arched axial lobe
which comprises about one third of the entire width. The pleural lobes are
much depressed and defined from the axial portion by sharp sulci. They are
nearly planate over the median portion, but bend strongly and abruptly down-
ward about half way to the extremity. The pleural portion of each segment
is subdivided by a furrow which reaches almost to the axis.
The pygidium is semi-elliptical in outline, broadly rounded posteriorly and
with a broad, smooth, oblique and depressed border which narrows somewhat
anteriorly. The axis is strongly and sharply elevated and defined by well-
marked grooves. It is flattened on top and nearly quadrate in section. The
lateral lobes are moderately inflated, the convexity being irregular, so as to
produce an angulation down the center of each, appearing on the segments
on either side as a row of prominences or nodes. The segmentation of the
pygidium is strong, produced by deep, sharp grooves which do not extend onto
the border nor onto the sides of the pygidium. They produce about 12 axial
rings and about 7 lateral ones.
The surface is marked by granules or small nodes which appear on the
more prominent parts of the surface, on the basal portion of the glabella, on
the crest of the neck ring, along the little ridge under the eyes, and in rows
across the segments of the axis of both thorax and pygidium. The pleural
segments are either without these nodes or have them fewer, smaller and less
conspicuous.
156 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF' SCIENCES
If we except Griffithides sangamonensis, which I believe to be a Phillip-
sia, only two species of Griffithides are known in our American Pennsy}-
vanian, G. ornatus and G. scitulus, and of these only G. ornatus appears
to be marked with nodes like the present form. In many respects G. par-
vulus is very similar to G. ornatus, but aside from being very much
smaller, it presents important and striking differences in the configura-
tion of the basal portion of the glabella.
Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla.
as
ae Dy ot
<a t
oe
ae
pea
.
—
a
~*
*
a —-- eA
-
ee
—
de Relea
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
/
(Lycrum or Naturat History, 1817-1876)
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. :
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the
scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the rec-
ords of meetings and similar matter.
A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year
and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles
composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and
are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of
the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus-
trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the
Academy. ‘The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has
been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at
irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to
monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume
I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs,
etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued.
All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The
Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of
any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to
THE LIBRARIAN,
New York Academy of Sciences,
care of
American Museum of Natural History,
New York, N. Y.
Oy aE meee fis) en
eek wee ; nite
- a I Pe ,, ‘ ; ty ‘
“i
& ;
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. XXI, pp. 157-175
Editor, Ep>mMunp OtT1s Hovey
A LIST OF THE TYPE SPECIES OF THE
GENERA AND SUBGENERA
OF FORMICIDA
BY
Witit1aM Morron WHEELER
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
17 Ocroser, 1911
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817-1876)
OrFicers, 1911
President—FRanz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—GerorcE F. Kunz, Frepertc A. Lucas,
R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL
Recording Secretary—EpMunp Otis Hovey, American Museum
Corresponding Secretary—Henry HE. Crampton, American Museum
Treasurer—EMERSON McMItttn, 40 Wall Street
Inbrarian—RatpexH W. Towser, American Museum
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chatrman—GeEorGE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—Cuar Es P. Berxey, Columbia University
SHCTION OF BIOLOGY
Chatrman—F reveric A. Lucas, American Museum.
Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum
SHCTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University
Secretary—Epwarp J. TuHatcuer, Teachers College
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—R. S. WoopwortnH, Columbia University
Secretary—FREDERIC LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o'clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West}
s
were ww FF
[Annats N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XXI, pp. 157-175. 17 October, 1911]
LIBRARY
A LIST OF THE TYPE SPECIES OF THE GENERA AND NEW YORK
SUBGENERA OF FORMICIDAt! BOTANICA!
GARDEN
By Wiiti1AM Morton WHEELER
(Presented by title before the Academy, 16 October, 1911)
Although at the present time the taxonomy of the Formicide is in
much less confusion than that of many other families of Hymenoptera,
there is nothing to indicate that this fortunate state of affairs will sur-
vive the present generation of conservative myrmecologists. And, as it
is very generally conceded that confusion in taxonomy often arises from
a failure to recognize generic types, it seems advisable to publish a list
of these for the Formicide. This is the more urgent, because Shuckard,
Emery and Bingham are almost the only authors who have expressly
designated type species of these insects. Being as firmly convinced as
Emery and Forel that the subgenus as well as the subspecies and variety
is, at least heuristically, a useful and valid category, I have recognized
the subgeneric types as such in ‘the following list and have not followed
the example of those entomologists who, in similar lists, either ignore the
subgeneric category or throw all or most subgeneric names into the
synonymy. I have verified nearly all the bibliographic references cited
below, but for a few of them from obscure and antiquated sources I have
had to rely on Dalla Torre’s “Catalogus Hymenopterorum.” The list of
genera and subgenera both living and fossil is, I believe, complete up to
June, 1911.
Acamatus Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital. XXVI, p. 184. 1894. (Subgenus of
Eciton.)
Type: Hciton (Acamatus) schmitti Emery (by present designation).
Acanthognathus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXXVII, p. 578. 1887.
Type: Acanthognathus ocellatus Mayr (monobasic).
Acantholepis Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 42. 1861.
Type: Hypoclinea fraucnfeldi Mayr (monobasic).
Acanthomyops Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 699. 1862. (Sub-
genus of Lasius.)
Type: Formica claviyera Roger (by present designation).
Acanthomyrmex Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. France, LXI, p. CCLXXYVI. 1892.
Type: Acanthomyrmea luciole Kmery (designated by Bingham, 1905).
1Contributions from the Hntomological Laboratory of the Bussey Institution, Harvard
University, No. 40.
(157)
158 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Acanthoponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 732. 1862.
Type: Ponera mucronata Roger (by present designation).
Acanthostichus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XX XVII, p. 549. 1887.
Type: Typhlopone serratula IF. Smith (monobasic).
Acrocelia Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver Wien, II, p. 146. 1852. (= Cremasto-
gaster.)
Type: Acrocelia ruficeps Mayr (=Cremastogaster scutellaris Oliv.).
Acromyrmex Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 88. 1865. (Subgenus of
Atta.)
Type: Formica hystrix Latreille (= Formica octospinosa Reich).
Acropyga Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 242. 1862.
Type: Acropyga acutiventris Roger (monobasic).
Acrostigma HMrry. Mem. Accad. Sci. Bologna, (5) I, p. 575. 1891.
Type: Acrostigma mayri Emery (monobasic).
Acrostigma Foret. Rey. Suisse Zool., X, p. 477. 1902. (=Stigmacros; Sub-
genus of Acantholepis.) ;
Type: Acantholepis (Acrostigma)froggatti Forel (first of four species by
present designation ).
Adelomyrmex Emery. Termes. Fiizetek, XX, p. 590. 1987.
Type: Adelomyrmez biroi Emery (monobasic).
Adlerzia Foret. Rev. Suisse Zool., X, p. 445. 1902. (Subgenus of Mono-
morium. )
Type: Monomorium (Adlerzia) froggatti Forel, (monobasic).
4Bnictogiton Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XX XIII, p. 49. 1901.
Type: Ainictogiton fossiceps Emery (monobasic).
4Bnictus SHucKARD. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., V, p. 266. 1840.
Type: Anictus ambiguus Shuckard (designated by Shuckard, 1840).
Aéromyrma TorEL. Grandidier’s Hist. Madagascar, XX, p. 198. 1891.
Type: Aéromyrma nosindambo Forel (monobasic).
Agrecomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXVIII, p. 265. 1910.
Type: Myrmica dwisburgi Mayr (monobasic).
Alaopone HMery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova, XVI, p. 274. 1881. (Sub-
genus of Dorylus.)
Type: Alaopone oberthueri Emery = Dorylus orientalis Westwood (de-
signated by Emery, 1910).?
Alfaria EMrery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XXVIII, p. 9. 1896.
Type: Alfaria simulans Emery (monobasic).
Allomerus Mayr. Verh. zoo]. bot. Ges. Wien, XX VII, p. 873. 1877.
Type: Allomerus decemarticulatus Mayr (by present designation).
Amblyopone EricHson. Arch. f. Naturg., VIII, p. 260. 1841.
Type: Amblyopone australis Erichson (monobasic).
Ancylognathus Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 121. 1831. (= Eciton.)
Type: Ancylognathus lugubris Lund = ? Eciton lugubre F. Smith.
Aneleus Emery. Termes. Fiizetek, XXIII, p. 327. 1900. (Subgenus of
Pheidologeton. )
Type: Solenopsis similis Mayr (monobasic).
1 Ashmead, 1906, gives A. carteri Shuckard as the type, but this is evidently a mis-
print for curtisi, which is a synonym of D. orientalis.
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 159
Anergates ForeL. Denkschr. Schweiz Ges. Naturw., XXVI, pp. 29, 33, 35, 93.
1874.
Type: Myrmica atratula Schenck (monobasic).
Aneuretus HMeRy. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, p. 241. 1893.
Type: Aneuretus simoni Emery (monobasic).
Anochetus Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 538. 1861.
Type: Odontomachus ghilianii Spinola (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Anomma SHuUCKARD. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., V, p. 826. 1840. (Subgenus of
Dorylus.)
Type: Anomma burmeisteri Shuckard = Dorylus nigricans Illiger (desig-
nated by Shuckard, 1840).
Aphenogaster Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, III, p. 107. 1855.
Type: Aphenogaster sardoa Mayr (designated by Bingham, 1905).
Aphomomyrmex HMerRy. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLII, p. 493. 1899.
Type: Aphomonyrmex afer Emery (by present designation).
Apsychomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXVIII, p. 261. 1910.
Type: Apsychomyrmex myops Wheeler (monobasic).
Apterostigma Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., pp. 25 and 111. 1865.
Type: Apterostigma pilosum Mayr (monobasic).
Arotropus PRovANCHER. Natural. Canad., XII, p. 205. 1881. (=WStigma-
tomma.)
Type: Arotropus binodosus Proyancher = Stigmatomma pallipes Halde-
man (monobasic).
Asemorhoptrum Mayr. Hurop. Formicid., p. 71. 1861. (= Stenamma.)
Type: Asemorhoptrum lippulum Mayr = Stenamma westwoodi Westwood
(monobasic).
Atopogyne Foret. Bull. Soc. Vand. Sci. Nat. (5) XLVII, p. 342. 1911. (Sub-
genus of Cremuastoguster. )
Type: Cremastogaster (Atopogyne) hellenica Forel (By present designa-
tion).
Atopomyrmex Ern. ANDRE. Rey. d’Entom., VIII, p. 226. 1889.
Type: Atopomyrmex mocquerysi Ern, André (monobasic).
Atta Fapricius. System. Piez., p. 421. 1804.
Type: Formica cephalotes Linn (first species by present designation).
Attopsis Hrer. Denksch. Schweiz. Ges. Naturw., X, p. 155. 1850.
Type: Attopsis longipennis Heer (first species by present designation).
Azteca Foret. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XV, p. 384. 1878.
Type: Tapinoma instabilis KF. Smith = Liometopum ? canthochrowm Roger
(designated).
Basiceros SCHULZ, nom. nov. for Ceratobasis F. SMITH nom, pre@occ. Spolia.
Hymenopt., p. 156. 1906.
Type: Meranoplus singularis F. Smith (monobasic).
Belonopelta Mayr. Sitzbr. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LXI, p. 394. 1870.
Type: Belonopelta attenuata Mayr (monobasic).
Bondroitia Foret. Bull. Soc. Vand. Sci. Nat. (5) XLVII, p. 3898. 1911. (Sub-
genus of Diplomorium.)
Type: Diplomorium (Bondroitia) luje Forel. (First of two species, by
present designation.)
160 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Bothriomyrmex HmMery. Ann. Mus. Zool. Univ. Napoli, V, p. 117. 1865 (1869). —
Type: Bothriomyrmex costae Emery = Tapinoma meridionale Roger (mono-
basic).
Bothroponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 717. 1862. (Sub-
genus of Pachycondyla).
Type: Ponera pumicosa Roger (designated by Emery, 1901).
Brachymyrmex Mayr. Ann. Soc., Nat. Modena, III, p. 163. 1868.
Type: Brachymyrmex patayonicus Mayr (monobasic).
Brachyponera Emery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 43. 1901. (Subgenus of
Huponera.)
Type: Ponera sennaarensis Mayr (designated by Emery, 1901).
Bradoponera Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 73. 1868.
Type: Bradoponera meieri Mayr (monobasic).
Calomyrmex HMery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, D: Wi. 895:
Type: Formica levissima F. Smith (by present designation ).
Calyptites Scupprr. Rep. Progr. Geol. Surv. Canada for 1877. DeeniOs
Type: Calyptites antediluviana Scudder (monobasic).
Calyptomyrmex Mery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova, XXV, p. 472. 1887.
Type: Calyptomyrmex beccarii Emery (monobasic).
Campomyrma WHEELER. Science, n. s., XXXIII, p. 860. 1911. (Subgenus of
Myrma.)
Type: Polyrhachis clypeata Mayr (designated by Wheeler, 1911).
Camponotus Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 35. 1861.
Type: Formica ligniperda Latreille (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Camptognatha Westwoop. Griffith. Anim. Kingd., XV, 5, p. 16. 1832.
(= Eciton.)
Type: Formica hamata Fabricius (monobasic).
Cardiocondyla Emery. Ann. Acc. Asp. Nat. Naples, Era 2, II, p. 20. 1869.
Type: Cardiocondyla elegans Wmery (monobasic).
Carebara WrEstwoop, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, p. 86. 1841.
Type: Carebara lignata Westwood (monobasic).
Carebarella Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XXXVII, p. 137. 1905.
Type: Carebarella bicolor Wmery (monobasic).
Cataglyphis Forster. Verh. Naturh. Ver. Preuss. Rheinl., VII. p. 493. 1850.
(Subgenus of Myrmecocystus. )
Type: Formica megalocola Forster (worker); Cataglyphis fairmairi
Forster (male) (mauobasic).
Cataulacus F. SmirH. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, (2) II, p. 225. 1853.
Type: Cataulacus taprobane F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Centromyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XVI, p. 894. 1866.
Type: Centromyrmer bohemanni Mayr (monobasic).
Cephalotes LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Insect., III, p. 387. 1802.
(= Atta.)
Type: Formica cephalotes Linné.
Cephaloxys F. Smiru. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., VIII, p. 76. 1864.
(= Strumigenys. )
Type: Cephalorys capitata F. Smith (monobasic).
Cerapachys F. Smiru. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., II, p. 74. 1857.
Type: Cerapachys antennatus F. Smith (monobasic).
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDEA 161
Ceratobasis Ff. SmirH. Journ. of Entom., I, p. 78. 1861. (= Basiceros.)
Type: Meranoplus singularis F. Smith (monobasic).
Ceratopheidole PERGANDE. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., (2) V, p. 889. 1895. (Sub-
genus of Pheidole.)
Type: Pheidole (Ceratophcidole) granulata Pergande (monobasic).
Champsomyrmex HMery. Ann. Soc. Hnt. France, LX, p. 558, nota. 1891.
Type: Odontomachus coquereli Roger (monobasic).
Cheliomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XX, p. 968. 1870.
Type: Cheliomyrmex nortoni Mayr (monobasic).
Colobopsis MAyr. Europ. Formicid, p. 38. 1861. (Subgenus of Camponotus.)
Type: Formica truncata Spinola.
Condylodon Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 131. 1831. (= Pseudomyrma.)
Type: Condylodon audouini Lund.
Cosmacetes SprnoLaA. Mem. Accad. Torino, (2) XIII, p. 70. 1851.
(= Typhlopone.)
Type: Cosmacetes omalinus Spinola = Typhlopone fulva Westwood.
Cratomyrmex HMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, p. 572. 1892.
Type: Cratomyrmex regalis Emery (monobasic).
Cremastogaster Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 132. 1831.
Type: Formica scutellaris Olivier (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Cryptocerus LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Ins., XIII, p. 260. 1805.
Type: Formica atrata Linné (monobasic).
Cryptopone Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. France, LXI, p. CCLXXYV. 1892.
Type: Amblyopone ? testacea Motschulsky (monobasic).
Ctenopyga ASHMEAD. Canad. Ent., XXXVII, p. 382. 1905.
Type: Ctenopyga townsendi Ashinead (designated by Ashmead, 1905).
Cylindromyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XX, p. 967. 1870.
Type: Cylindromyrmex striatus Mayr (monobasic).
Cyphomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 690. 1862.
Type: Cryptocerus ? rimosus Spinola (by present designation ).
Cysias Emery. Rend. Accad. Sci. Bologna, n. s., VI, p. 24. 1902. (Subgenus
of Cerapachys.)
Type: Cerapachys papuanus Emery (designated by Emery, 1902).
Daceton Perry. Delect. Animal Artic. Brasil, p. 136. 1833.
Type: Formica armigera Latreille (monobasic).
Dacryon Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 421. 1895.
Type: Dacryon omniparens Forel (monobasic).
Decacrema Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIV, p. 18. 1910. (Subgenus of
Cremastogaster. )
Type: Cremastogaster schencki Forel (by present designation).
Decamera Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 166. 1863. (= Myrmelachista.)
Type: Decamera nigella Roger (monobasic).
Dendromyrmex Emery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 772. 1895.
Type: Camponotus chartifex F. Smith (by present designation).
Diacamma Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 718. 1862.
Type: Ponera rugosa Le Guillon (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Dichothorax Emery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 323. 1894. (Sub-
genus of Leptothoraz.)
Type: Leptothorar (Dichothorar) pergandei Emery (first of two species
by present designation).
162 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Dichthadia GrerstAcker. Stettin. Ent. Zeitg., XXIV, p. 693. 1868. (Subgenus
of Dorylus.)
Type: Dichthadia glaberrima Gerstiicker = Dorylus levigatus EF. Smith
(monobasic ).?
Dicroaspis EMrry. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIT, p. 184. 1908.
Type: Dicroaspis cryptocera Wmery (monobasic).
Dilobocondyla Santrscui. Le Naturaliste, XXXII, p. 283. 1910.
Type: Atopomyrimex selebensis Emery (by present designation).
Dimorphomyrmex Hrn. ANDRE. Mem. Soc. Zool. France, V, p. 49. 1892.
Type: Dimorphomyrmez janeti Ern. André (monobasic).
Dinomyrmex ASHMEAD. Canad. HEntom., XXXVII, p. 384. 1905. (—=Cam-
ponotus. )
Type: Formica gigas Latreille (designated by Ashmead, 1905).
Dinoponera RoegEr. Berlin. Wnt. Zeitschr., V, p. 37. 1861.
Type: Ponera grandis Guérin (monobasic).
Diplomorium Mayr. Ann. K. K. Naturhist. Hofmus, XVI, p. 16. 1907.
Type: Diplomorium longipenne Mayr (monobasic).
Diplorhoptrum Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 449. 1855.
(= Solenopsis. )
Type: Formica fugaxr Latreille (monobasic).
Discothyrea Rocrr. Berlin. Wnt. Zeitsehr., VII, p. 176. 1868.
Type: Discothyrea testacea Roger (monobasic).
Doleromyrma Foren. Ann. Mus. Nat. Hungar., V, p. 28. 1907. (Subgenus of
Tapinoma. )
Type: Vapinoma (Doleromyrma) darwiniana Forel (monobasic).
Dolichoderus Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 1380. 1831.
Type: Dolichoderus attelaboides Lund (monobasic).
Dorylus Fasricius. Hnt. Syst., Il, pp. 194 and 365. 1793.
Type: Vespa helvola Linné (designated by Shuckard, 1840).
Dorymyrmex Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 494. 1866.
Type: Formica flavescens Fabricius (monobasic).
Drepanognathus F. SmirH. Catal. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 81. 1858.
Type: Harpegnathus saltator Jerdon (designated by Bingham, 1908).
Echinopla I. Smira. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., 11, p. 79. 1857.
Type: Hehinopla melanarctos F. Smith (first species by present designa-
tion). ’
Eciton LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Ins., IV, p. 130. 1802.
Type: Formica hamata Fabricius (designated by Emery, 1910).
Ecphorella Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIII, p. 65. 1909. (Subgenus of
Tapinoma. )
Type: Hephorella wellmani Forel (monobasic).
Ectatomma I’. Smira. Cat. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 102. 1858.
Type: Formica tuberculata Oliver (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Ectomomyrmex Mayr. Tijdscr. v. Ent, X, p. 83. 1867. (Subgenus of
Pachycondyla. )
Type: Ectomomyrmer javanus Mayr (designated by Bingham, 1903).
4 Not D. furcata, as stated by Ashmead, 1906.
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 163
Electromyrmex WHEELER. Ants, their Struct., Develop. and Behav., p. 164.
1910.
Type: Electromyrmex klebsi Wheeler (monobasic).
Emeryella Foren. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLV, p. 334, 1901.
Type: Emeryella schmitti Forel (monobasic).
Emeryia Foret. C. R. Soc. Ent: Belg., p. CX. 1890. (== Cardiocondyla.)
Type: Emeryia wroughtoni Forel (monobasic).
Engramma Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLIX, p. 180. 1905.
Type: Engramma luje Forel (monobasic).
Enneamerus Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 98. 1868.
Type: Hnneamerus reticulatus Mayr (monobasic).
Ephebomyrmex WHEELER. Psyche, IX, p. 890. 1902. (Subgenus of Pogono-
myrmenx. )
Type: Pogonomyrmex negelii Forel (by present designation).
Epeecus PMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, V, C. R., p. XXLXXVI. 1892; Zool.
Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 272. 1894.
Type: Epecus pergandei Emery (monobasic).
Epipheidole WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XX, p. 14. 1904.
Type: Epipheidole inquilina Wheeler (monobasic).
Epitritus Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., I, p. 136. 1869.
Type: Epitritus argiolus Emery (monobasic).
Epixenus Emery. Deutsch. Ent. Zeitschr., p. 556. 1908.
Type: Epixenus andrei Emery = “abnormal female” of J/onomoriwm
venustum Ern. André (first of two species by present designation ).
Epopostruma Foren. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XX XIX, p. 422. 1895. (Subgenus
of Strumigenys.)
Type: Strumigenys (Epopostruma) quadrispinosa Forel (first of two
species by present designation).
Erebomyrma WHEELER. Biol. Bull., IV, p. 188. 1903.
Type: Hrebomyrma longi Wheeler (monobasic).
Escherichia Foret. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., XXIX, p. 245. 1910.
Type: Escherichia brevirostris Forel (monobasic).
Eumecopone Forri. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 335. 1901. (Subgenus of
Neoponera.)
Type: Neoponera (Euwmecopone)agilis Forel (monobasic).
Euponera Foret. Grandidier’s Hist. Madagascar, XX, p. 126. 1891.
Type: Ponera sikore Forel (monobasic).
Euprenolepis EmMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., L, p. 134. 1906. (Subgenus of
Prenolepis.)
Type: Prenolepis procera Wmery (designated by Emery, 1906).
Eusphinctus Emery. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, p. CCLXXV. 1892. (Subgenus
of Sphinctomyrmez.)
Type: Eusphinctus furcatus Emery (monobasic).
Eutetramorium Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital.. XX XI, p. 281. 1899.
Type: Hutetramorium mocquerysi Emery (first of two species by present
designation).
Forelius Emery. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., XLVI, p. 389. 1888.
Type: Iridomyrmex maccooki Forel (monobasic).
164 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Formica LInN&. System. Nat., Hd. 10, p. 579. 1758.
Type: Formica rufa Linné (designated by Bingham, 1905)..
Formicina SHUCKARD. Swainson & Shuckard’s Hist. Nat. Arrang. of Insects,
p. 172. 1840. (= Formica.)
Type: Formica rufa Linné (by present designation).
Formicoxenus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 418. 1855.
Type: Myrmica nitidula Nylander (monobasic).
Froggattella Foren. Rey. Suisse Zool., X, p. 459. 1902.
Type: Acautholepis kirbyi Lowne = Hypoclinea kirbyi Mayr (monobasic).
Gesomyrmex Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 50. 1868.
Type: Gesomyrmex hornesi Mayr (monobasic).
Gigantiops Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 287. 1862.
Type: Formica destructor Fabricius (monobasic).
Glyptomyrmex Toren. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XX, p. 865. .1884.
(= Myrmicocrypta. )
Type: Glyptomyrmex dilaceratus Forel (monobasic).
Gnamptogenys Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 174. 18638. (Subgenus
of Hetatomma.)
Type: Ectatomma cincinnum Mayr (by present designation).
Goniomma Emery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 298. 1895.
Type: Aphenogaster blanci Hrn. André (monobasic).
Gonicthorax Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XXVIII, p. 26. 1896. (Subgenus
of Leptothora.)
Type: Leptothorax vicinus Mayr (by present designation).
Hagensia Foren. Rey. Suisse Zool., IX, p. 3338. 1901. (Subgenus of Mega-
ponera. )
Type: JZegaloponera (Hagensia) havilandi Forel (monobasic).
Hagiomyrma WHEELER. Science n. s.. XXXIII, p. 860. 1911. (Subsenus of
Myrma.)
Type: Formica anmon Fabricius (designated by Wheeler, 1911).
Hagioxenus Forer. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIV, p. 8. 1910.
Type: Hagiorenus schmitzi Forel (monobasic).
Harpagoxenus ForeL. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg.. XXXVII, p. 167. 1893. Nom.
nov. for Tomognathus Mayr, nom. praocce. 1861.
Type: Tomognathus sublevis Nylander (monobasic).
Harpegnathus Jerpon. Madras Journ. Litt. and Sci., XVII, p. 116. 1851.
(= Drepanognathus. )
Type: Drepanognathus cruentatus Smith = Harpegnathus saltator Jerdon
(by present designation).
Hemioptica Rocrer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 238. 1862. (Subgenus of
Myrima.)
Type: Hemioptica scissa Roger (monobasic).
Heptacondylus F. Smirn. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 141. 1858.
(= Myrmicaria. )
Type: Heptacondylus subcarinatus F. Smith = Myrmica fodiens Jerdon
(first of three species by presert designation).
Heteroponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXXVII, p. 532. 1887.
(= Acanthoponera.)
Type: Heteroponera carinifrons Mayr (monobasic).
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 165
Holcomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXVIII, p. 671. 1878.
(Subgenus of Monomorium.)
Type: Holcomyrmex scabriceps Mayr (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Holcoponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXXVII, p. 540. 1887. (Sub-
genus of Hctatomma.)
Type: Ectatomma (Holcoponera) striatulum Mayr (by present designa-
tion).
Hoplomyrmus GerstAcKer. Monatschr. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 261. 1858.
(= Myrma.)
Type: Hoplomyrmus schistaceus Gersticker (monobasic).
Huberia Foret. C. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CV. 1890.
Type: Tetramorium striatum F. Smith (monobasic).
Hypochira Bucktey. Proc. Ent. Soc. Phila., VI, p. 169, 1866. (= Formica.)
Type: Formica (Hypochira) subspinosa Buckley (monobasic).
Hypoclinea (F6OrsTeR) Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 877. 1855.
(Subgenus of Dolichoderus.)
Type: Formica quadripunctata Linné (second species by present designa-
tion).
Hypopomyrmex. Emery. Mem. Accad. Sci. Bologna, (5) I, p. 574. 1891.
Type: Hypopomyrmex bombiccii Emery (monobasic).
Imhoffia Heer. Verh. Schweiz. Naturf. Ges., p. 78. 1849.
Type: IJmhofia nigra Weer (monobasic).
Iridomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 702. 1862.
Type: Formica detecta F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Ischnomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 788. 1862. (Sub-
genus of Aphmnogaster.)
Type: Myrmica longipes F. Smith (monobasic).
Janetia Foret. Biol. Centr. Amer. Hymen., III, p. 61, nota. 1899. (Subgenus
of Pogonomyrmes. )
Type: Pogonomyrmex (Janetia) mayri Forel (monobasic).
Labidogenys Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 249. 1862. (= Strumigenys.)
Type: Labidogenys lyroessa Roger (monobasic).
Labidus JurtInE. Nouv. Meth. Class Hymén., p. 282. 1807. (Subgenus of
Eciton.)
Type: Labidus latreillei Jarine = male Heiton cecum (Latreille)= Formica
ceca Latreille (designated by Shuckard, 1840).
Lachnomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist... XXVIII, p. 268. 1910.
Type: Lachnomyrmex scrobiculatus Wheeler (monobasic).
Lampromyrmex Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 93. 1868.
Type: Lampromyrmesx gracillimus Mayr (monobasic).
Laparomyrmex Emery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova (2), V, p. 87. 1887.
(= Liomyrme.)
Type: Laparomyrmenx gestroi Emery (monobasic).
Lasiophanes Emery. Act. Soc. Sci. Chili, V, p. 16. 1895. (Subgenus of
Melophorus. )
Type: Formica nigriventris Spinola (by present designation).
Lasius Fapricius. System. Piezat., p. 415. 1804.
Type: Formica nigra Linné (designated by Bingham, 1903).
166 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
bee |e ‘
Leptalea (Kiuc) Ertcuson. Arch. f. Naturg., V, p. 309. 1839. (= Pseudo-
myrma. ) :
Type: Formica gracilis Fabricius (monobasic).
Leptanilla Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., II, p. 196. 1870.
Type: Leptanilla revelieri Emery (monobasic).
Leptogenys Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 41. 1861.
Type: Leptogenys falcigera Roger (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Leptomyrma Morscuutsky. Bull. Soc. Nat. Mose, XXXVI, p. 17. 1868.
(= Pheidole.)
Type: Leptomyrma gracilipes Motschulsky (monobasic).
Leptomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 695. 1862.
Type: Formica erythrocephala Fabricius (monobasic).
Leptothorax Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, V, p. 481. 1855.
Type: Formica acervorum Fabricius (by present designation).
Linepithema Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 496. 1866.
Type: Linepithema fuscum Mayr (monobasic).
Liometopum Mayr.. Europ. Formicid., p. 38. 1861.
' Type: Formica microcephala Panzer (monobasic).
Liomyrmex Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 23. 1865.
Type: Myrmica caca F. Smith (monobasic).
Lioponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXVIII, p. 666. 1878.
Type: Lioponera longitarsus Mayr (monobasic).
Lobopelta Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 733. 1862. (Subgenus of
Leptogenys. )
Type: Ponera diminuta F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Lonchomyrmex Mayr. Jahrb. Geol. Reichsanst. Wien, XVII, p. 61. 1867.
Type: Formica freyeri Heer (monobasic).
Lophomyrmex Emery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova, XXII, p. 114. 1892.
Type: Gcodoma quadrispinosa Jerdon (monobasic).
Lordomyrma Emery. Termes. Fiizetek, XX, p. 591. 1897.
Type: Lordomyrma furcifera Emery (first of two species by present desig-
nation).
Machomyrma Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 425. 1895. (Subgenus
of Liomyrmex.)
Type: Liomyrmex (Machomyrma) dispar Forel (monobasic).
Macromischa Roerr. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 184. 1863.
Type: dJlacromischa purpurata Roger (first species by present designa-
tion).
Manica JurINeE. Nouy. Méth. Class. Hymén., p. 276. 1807. (= Myrmica.)
Type: Formica rubida “Latreille (by present designation).
Martia Foren. Ann. Mus. Nat. Hungarici, V, p. 20. 1907. (Subgenus of
Monomorium. )
Type: Monomoriwn (Martia) vezenyii Forel (monobasic).
Mayria Fore,. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XV, p. 369. 1878.
Type: Mayria madagascariensis Forel (monobasic).
Mayriella Foret. Rey. Suisse Zool., X, p. 452. 1902.
Type: Mayriclla abstinens Forel (monobasic).
Mayromyrmex AsHMrEAD. Canad. Ent., XXXVII, p. 381. 1905. (= Hciton.)
Type: Labidus fargeaui Shuckard = male Heiton quadriglume Haliday
(designated by Ashmead, 1905).
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 167
Megalomyrmex Foret. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XX, p. 56. 1884.
Type: Formica bituberculuta Fabricius (by present designation).
Megaloponera Emery. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, IX, p. 368. 1877.
(= Megaponera. )
Type: Formica fetens Fabricius (monobasic).
Megaponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 734. 1862.
Type: Formica fatens Fabricius (monobasic).
Melissotarsus Emery. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, IX, p. 378. 1877.
Type: Melissotarsus beccarii Emery (monobasic).
Melophorus LussockK. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool., XVIII, p. 51. 1883.
Type: Melophorus bagoti Lubbock (monobasic).
Meranoplus I. SmirH. Trans. Ent. Soe. London, (2) II, p. 224. 1854.
Type: Cryptocerus bicolor Guérin (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Mesoponera HMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 48. 1901. (Subgenus of
Huponera. )
Type: Ponera caffraria F. Smith (designated by Emery, 1901).
Mesoxena F. SmirH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soe. Zool., IV, Suppl., p. 106. 1860.
Type: Mesorena mistura F. Smith (monobasic).
Messor Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIV, C. R., p. LXVIII. 1890.
Type: Formica barbara Linné (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Micromyrma Durour. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, (2) V, p. 60. 1857. (= Tapi-
noma. )
Type: Formica erratica Latreille (monobasic).
Mictoponera Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLY, p. 372. 1901. (Subgenus of
Ectatomma. )
Type: EHctatomma (Mictoponera) diehli Forel (monobasic).
Meellerius ForeL. Ann. Soc. Hnt. Belg., XX XVII, p. 589. 1893. (Subgenus of
Atta.)
Type: Acromyrmex landolti Forel (by present designation).
Monacis Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 233. 1862. (Subgenus of
Dolichoderus.)
Type: Formica bispinosa Oliv. = Formica fungosa Fabr. (by present
designation).
Monocombus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 381. 1855. (= Catagly-
phis.)
Type: Formica viatica Fabricius (monobasic).
Monomorium Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 452. 1855.
Type: Monomorium minutum Mayr (monobasic).
Mycetosoritis WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXIII, p. 714. 1907.
(Subgenus of Atta.)
Type: Atta (Mycetosoritis) hartmani Wheeler (monobasic).
Mychothorax Ruzsky. Formica Imp. Rossici, p. 107. 1905. (= Leptothoraz.)
Type: Formica acervorum Fabricius (first species by present designa-
tion).
Mycocepurus Fore,r. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, IV, p. 369. 1893.
Type: Mycocepurus smithi Forel (by present designation).
Myopias Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 39. 1861.
Type: Myopias amblyops Roger (monobasic).
Myopopene Rocrer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 49. 1861.
Type: Amblyopone castanea F. Smith var. maculata Roger (monobasic).
168 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Myrma Birserc. HEnumer. Insect., p. 104. 1820.
Type: Formica militaris Fabricius (by present designation).
Myrmecia FApricius. System. Piezat., p. 423. 1804.
Type: Formica gulosa Fabricius (by present designation).
Myrmecina Curtis. Brit. Entom., IV, p. 226. 1829.
Type: Myrmecina latreillei Curtis (monobasic).
Myrmecocystus WESMAEL. Bull. Acad. Sci. Brux., V, p. 770. 1838.
Type: Myrmecocystus mericanus Wesmael (monobasic).
Myrmecopsis F. SmirH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc., VIII, p. 68. 1864.
Type: Iyrmecopsis respiciens ¥. Smith (monobasic).
Myrmecorhynchus Hrn. ANpRE. Rey. d’Entom, XV, p. 253. 1896.
Type: Myrmecorhynchus emeryi Wrn. André (monobasic).
Myrmelachista Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 162. 1863.
Type: Myrmelachista kraatzi Roger (monobasic).
Myrmex GUERIN. Iconogr. Regn. Anim., VII, Insect., p. 428. 1845. (= Pseudo-
myrmMad. )
Type: Pseudomyrma (Myrmex) perboscii Guerin.
Myrmica LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Insect., IV, p. 131. 1802.
Type: Formica rubra Linn (by present designation).
Myrmicaria SAUNDERS. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, III, p. 57. 1841.
Type: Myrimicaria brunnea Sanders (monobasic).
Myrmicocrypta F. SmirH. Journ. of Ent., I, p. 75. 1860.
Type: Myrmicocrypta squamosa F. Smith (monobasic).
Myrmoteras Fore,. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXVII, p. 607. 1893.
Type: Myrmoteras binghami Forel (monobasic).
Myrmoxenus Ruzsky. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., XVII, p. 474. 1902.
Type: Myrmorenus gordiagini Ruazsky (monobasic).
Myrmus ScHENcK. Stettin. Ent. Zeitg., XIV, p. 299. 1853. (= Strongylog-
nathus. )
Type: Myrnus emarginatus Schenck = Hciton ? testacewn Schenck
(monobasic).
Mystrium Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 245. 1862.
Type: Mystriwmn mysticum Roger (monobasic).
Neoponera EMeEry. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 40. 1901.
Type: Formica villosa Fabricius (designated by Emery, 1901).
Nesomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXVIII, p. 259. 1910.
Type: Nesomyrmex clavipilis Wheeler (monobasic).
Notoncus Emery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 352. 1895.
Type: Camponotus ectatommoides Forel (monobasic).
Nycteresia Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 21. 1861. (= Ecitton.)
Type: Nycteresia ceca Roger = Formica ceca Vatreille (monobasic).
Nylanderia EuMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., L. p. 134. 1906. (Subgenus of
Prenolepis.)
Type: Prenolepis vividula Nylander (designated by Emery, 1906).
Ochetomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXVII, p. 871. 1877.
Type: Ochetomyrmex semipolitus Mayr (monobasic).
Ocymyrmex Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XVIII, p. 364. 1886.
Type: Ocymyrmex barbiger Emery (monobasic).
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 169
Odontomachus Larremiir. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Insect., 1V, p. 128. 1802.
Type: Formica hamatoda Linné (monobasic).
Odontomyrmex ErRN. ANDRE. Rev. d’Entom., XXIII, p. 207. 1904.
Type: Odontomyrmex quadridentatus Ern, André (monobasic).
Odontoponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 717. 1862.
Type: Ponera denticulata F. Smith = Ponera transversa FP. Smith (mono-
basic).
Ccodoma LATREILLE. Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat., XXIII, p. 50. 1818. (= Atta.)
Type: Formica cephalotes Linné (by present designation).
Ccophthora Herr. Hausameise Madeiras, p. 15. 1852. (= Pheidole.)
Type: @eophthora pusilla Heer = Formica megacephala Fabricius (mono-
basic).
Ccophylla F. SmirH. Journ.-Linn. Soc. Zool., V, p. 101. 1861.
Type: Formica virescens Fabricius (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Oligomyrmex Mayr. Tydscr. v. Hnt., X, p. 110.
Type: Oligomyrmex concinnus Mayr (nonobasic).
Onychomyrmex Hmerry. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXNLX, p. 549. 1895.
Type: Onychomyrmex hedleyi Wmery (monobasic).
Odcereza Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 248. 1862. (Subgenus of Cera-
pachys. )
Type: Odcerwa fragosa Roger (monobasic).
Ophthalmopone Toren. C. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CXII. 1890.
Type: Ophthalmopone vberthoudi Forel (monobasic).
Opisthopsis Emery. Ann. Soc. Hnt. Belg., XXXIX, p. 353. 1895. Vom. nov.
for Myrmecopsis noi. preoce.
Type: Myrmecopsis respiciens EF. Smith (monobasic).
Orectognathus I’. Smiru.: ‘Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., (2) I, p. 227. 1854.
Type: Orectognathus antenmatus F. Smith (monobasic).
Orthonotomyrmex ASHMEAD. Vroc. Wnt. Soc. Wash., VIII, D. 31. 1906. Nov.
nom. for Orthonotus nom. proce. (—=Camponotis.)
Type: Formica sericea Fabricius (designated by Ashmead, 1905).
Orthonotus ASHMEAD. Canad. Ent., XXXVII, p. 384. 1905. Nom. proce.
(= Orthonotomyrmex = Camponotus. )
Type: Formica sericea Fabricius (designated by Ashmead, 1905).
Otomyrmex Foret. Grandidier’s Hist. Madagascar, XX, p. 147. 1891. (Sub-
genus of Cataulacus. )
Type: Cataulacus oberthueri Wmery (monobasic).
Oxygyne Foren. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLV, p. 376. 1901. (Subgenus of
Cremastogaster. )
Type: Cremastogaster (Oxygyne) daisyi Forel (by present desiguation).
Oxyopomyrmex Hrn. ANpDR&. Ann. Soc. Hnt. France, V, p. 72. 1880.
Type: Oxyopomyrmex oculatus Ern. André (monobasic).
Pachycondyla F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 105. 1858.
Type: Formica crassinoda Latreille (designated by Emery, 1901).
Pedalgus Foren. Hscherich’s Termitenleben auf Ceylon, p. 217. 1911.
Type: Pedalgus escherichi Forel (monobasic).
Paltothyreus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 735. 1862.
Type: Formica tarsata Fabricius (monobasic).
170 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Paraponera F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 100. 1858.
Type: Formica clavata Fabricius (monobasic).
Parasyscia EMery. In Ern. André, Spec. Hymén. Europ., II, p. 235. 1882.
(Subgenus of Cerapachys.)
Type: Parasyscia piochardi Emery (monobasic).
Paratrechina MorscHutsky. Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscou, XXXVI, p. 15. 1865.
(= Prenolepis.)
Type: Paratrechina currens Motschulsky = Formica longicornis Latreille
(monobasic).
Pedetes BERNSTEIN. Verh, zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XI, Sitzb., p. 7. 1861.
(= Odontonachus.)
Type: Pedetes macrorhynchus Bernstein (nomen nudum).
Phacota Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 260. 1862.
Type: Phacota sicheli Roger (monobasic).
Phasmomyrmex Sritz. Mittheil. Zool. Mus. Berlin, V, p. 146. 1910. = Cam-
ponotus. )
Type: Phasmomyrmea sericeus Stitz = Camponotus buchneri Forel.
Pheidolacanthinus F. Smiru. Journ.-Linn. Soc. Zool., VIII, p. 75. 1864.
Type: Pheidolacanthinus armatus F. Smith (monobasic).
Pheidole Westwoop. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, p. 87. 1841.
Type: Atta providens Sykes (designated by Bingham, 1905).
Pheidologeton Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 750. 1862.
Type: Pheidole ocellifera F. Smith = Gicodoma diversa Jerdon (desig-
nated by Bingham, 1903).
Phyracaces HMery. Rend. Accad. Sci. Ist. Bologna, n. s., VI, p. 258. 1902.
(Subgenus of Cerapachys.)
Type: Cerapachys mayri Forel (designated by Emery, 1902).
Physatta F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 171. 1858. (= Myrmi-
caria.)
Type: Physatta dromedarius F. Smith = Heptacondylus carinatus F.
Smith (first of four species by present designation).
Plagiolepis Mayr. Hurop. Formicid., p. 42. 1861.
Type: Formica pygmea Latreille (monobasic).
Platythyrea Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 172. 1865.
Type: Pachycondyla punctata F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Plectroctena F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymén. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 102. 1858.
Type: Plectroctena mandibularis F. Smith = Formica caffra (Klug)
Spinola (monobasic).
Podomyrma F. SmiruH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., IIT, p. 185. 1858.
Type: Podomyrma femorata FP. Smith (first species, by present designa-
tion).
Pogonomyrmex Mayr. Annu. Soc. Nat. Modena, III, p. 169. 1868.
Type: Formica badia Latreille (by present designation).
Polyergus LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. Insect., XIII, p. 256. 1805.
Type: Formica rufescens Latreille (monobasic).
Polyrhachis F. SmitH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., II, p. 58. 1858. (Sub-
genus of Myrma.)
Type: Formica bihamata Drury (designated by Smith, 1858).
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDAI 171
Ponera LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. Insect., IV, p. 128. 1802.
Type: Formica coarctata Latreille (monobasic).
Poneropsis Herr. Denkschr. Schweiz. Ges. Naturw., XXII, p. 19. 1867.
Type: Ponera fuliginosa Heer (by present designation).
Prenolepis Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 52. 1861.
Type: Prenolepis imparis Say (designated by Hmery, 1906) .%
Prionogenys HMrRy. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 348. 1895.
Type: Prionogenys podenzanai Emery (monobasic).
Prionomyrmex Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 77. 1868.
Type: Prionomyrmex longiceps Mayr (monobasic).
Prionopelta Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 5038. 1866.
Type: Prionopelta punctulata Mayr (monobasic).
Pristomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot.. Ges. Wien, XVI, p. 903. 1866.
Type: Pristomyrmex pungens Mayr (monobasic).
Probolomyrmex Mayr. Ann. K. K. Naturhist. Hofmus. Wien, XVI, p. 2. 1901.
Type: Probolomyrmex filiformis Mayr (monobasic).
Proceratium Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 171. 1863.
Type: Proceratium silaceum Roger (monobasic).
Procryptocerus HMrErRy. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, XXV, p. 470 nota.
1887.
Type: Meranoplus striatus F. Smith (by present designation).
Proformica Ruzsky. Hore Soc. Ent. Ross., XXXVI, p. 303. 1903. (Subgenus
of Formica.)
Type: Formica nasuta Nylander (by present designation ).
Prolasius ForeL. Mittheil. Schweiz. Ent. Ges., VIII, p. 332. 1892. (Subgenus
of Melophorus.)
Type: Formica advena F. Smith (monobasic).
Propodomyrma WHEELER. Ants, their Struct. Devel. & Behay., p. 163. 1910.
Type: Propodomyrma samlandica Wheeler (monobasic).
Psalidomyrmex HrRn. ANDRE. Rev. d’Ent., VIII, p. 313. 1890.
Type: Psalidomyrmex foveolatus Ern. André (monobasic).
Pseudodichthadia Ern. ANpRE. Suppl. Spéc. Formic. d’Europ., p. 6. 1885.
(= Labidus.)
Type: Pseudodichthadia incerta Krn. André = female Formicu ceca
Latreille (monobasic).
Pseudolasius HMrery. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genov., XXIV, p. 244. 1886.
Type: Fornica familiaris F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903).
Pseudomyrma Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 187. 1831.
Type: Formica gracilis Fabricius.
Pseudoponera HMerRy. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLV, p. 42. 1901. (Subgenus of
Huponera. )
Type: Ponera amblyops Emery (designated by Hmery, 1901).
Pyramica Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 251. 1862. (= Strumigenys.)
Type: Pyramica gundlachi Roger; worker only (monobasic).
Rhinomyrmex Foren. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXX, p. 192. 1886.
Type: Rhinomyrmex klasi Forel (monobasic).
3 Bingham (1903) had previously designated P. nitens Mayr as the type, but this is
merely a European form of P. imparis.
174 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Tetrogmus Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., I, p. 10. 1857. (Subgenus of
Tetramorium.) :
Type: Tetrogmus caldarius Roger = Myrmica simillima (Nylander) F.
Smith (monobasic).
Thaumatomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, MOO jase, asl
Type: Thaumatomyrmer mutilatus Mayr (monobasic).
Tomognathus Mayr. Europ. Formic., p. 56. 1861. (=Harpagorenus. )
Type: Myrmica sublevis Nylander (monobasic).
Trachymyrmex Forrey. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXVII, p. 600. 1892. (Sub-
genus of Atta.)
Type: Atta septentrionalis McCook (by present designation).
Tranopelta Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 514. 1866.
Type: Tranopelta gilva Mayr (monobasic).
Trapeziopelta Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 715. 1862.
Type: Ponera maligna F. Smith (monobasic).
Trichomyrmex Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 19. 1865.
Type: Trichomyrmex rogeri Mayr (monobasic).
Trichoscapa Emery. Ann. Accad. Nat. Napoli, (2) II, p. 24. 1869. (= Strumi-
genys.)
Type: Trichoscapa membranifera Emery (monobasic).
Triglyphothrix Foren. ©. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CVI. 1890.
Type: Triglyphothrix walshi Forel (monobasic).
Trigonogaster ForeL. C. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CIX. 1890.
Type: Triglyphothrix walshi Forel (monobasic).
Turneria Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 419. 1895.
Type: Turneria bidentata Forel (monobasic).
Typhlatta F. Smiru. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., II, p. 79. 1857.
(= Ainictus.)
Type: Typhlatta leviceps F. Smith (monobasic).
Typhlomyrmex Gistrr. Myster. Europ. Insectenwelt, p. 447. 1856.
Type: Myrmica typhlops (nomen nudum).
Typhlomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 736. 1862.
Type: Typhlomyrmex rogenhoferi Mayr (monobasic).
Typhlopone Westwoop. Introd. Mod. Classif. Ins., II, p. 219. 1840. (Sub-
genus of Dorylis.)
Type: Typhlopone fulva Westwood (designated by Emery, 1895).
Vollenhovia Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 21. 1865.
Type: Vollenhovia punctatostriata Mayr (monobasic).
Wasmannia Foret. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, IV, p. 388. 1893.
Type: Tetramorium auropunctatum Roger (first of two species by present
designation).
Wheeleria Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLIX,. p. 171. 1908. (= Wheeieriella.)
Type: Wheeleria santschii Forel (monobasic).
Wheeleriella Foren. Intern. Se. Rev., IV, p. 145. 1907. Nom. nov. for
Wheeleria, nom. proce.
Type: Wheeleria santschii Forel (monobasic).
Xenomyrmex Foren. Bull. Soe. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XX, p. 369. 1884.
Type: Xenomyrmesx stolli Forel (monobasic).
LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 175
Xiphomyrmex Fore,. Mittheil. Schweiz. Wnt. Ges., VII, p. 385. 1887. (Sub-
genus of T'etramoriwm.)
Type: Tetramorium (Xiphomyrmex) kelleri Forel (by present designa-
tion).
Zacryptocerus ASHMEAD,. Canad. HEnt., XXXVII, p. 384. 1905. (=Crypto-
cerus.)
Type: Cryptocerus multistrigus ¥. Smith (designated by Ashmead, but no
such species exists) .*
*TI believe this name must be a clerical error for OC. clypeatus Fabr., as Ashmead some
years ago gave me a specimen of this ant labeled ‘‘Zacryptocerus.”’
rt a ; “a a Ja is ‘ine
eT iagtt haa, rat ea) yet
j ie “fy A
; ; ; ; mavens aie ss,
Wey
=)
¥ Mi ’
Tae
‘ F Vee Wy PA oN ane | ) >a
hs , ' . g - } ~~
Xs , a he
are tye. oF
a
.
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817-1876)
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. :
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the
scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the rec-
ords of meetings and similar matter.
A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year
and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles
composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and
are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of
the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus-
trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the
Academy. The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has
been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at
irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to
monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume
t is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zoélogical Memoirs,
etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued. |
All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The
Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of
any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to
THe LIBRARIAN,
New York Academy of Sciences,
care of
American Museum of Natural History,
New York, N. Y.
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. XXI, pp. 177-183
Editor, EomunD OTIs HovrEy
THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE
BY
FRANz Boas
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
20 Marcu, 1912
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lycrum or NaturaL History, 1817-1876) |
OFFICERS, 1911
President—FRANz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—GrorcE F. Kunz, Freperic A. Lucas,
R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL
Recording Secretary—Epmunpb Otis Hovey, American Museum °
Corresponding Secretary—Heunry E. Crampron, American Museum
Treasurer—Emerson McMiIttrn, 40 Wall Street
Iibrarian—Ratpu W. Tower, American Museum
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chairman—GrorceE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—CuHar es P. BerKEy, Columbia University
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—Freperic A. Lucas, American Museum.
Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University
Secretary—Epwarp J. THatTcHeER, Teachers College
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND. PSYCHOLOGY
‘Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University
Secretary—FREDERIC LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.
1912
JUL S
[Annats N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XX1, pp.177-183. 20 March, 1912.]
THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE.?
By Franz Boas.
LaDIES AND GENTLEMEN:—The custom which demands that your
President address you at the time of the annual meeting—not when the
Academy is in formal session, but when seated around the hospitable
board—lays upon him a difficult duty. You expect from him the best
that he can give in his science; and still what he gives should be appro-
priate to the hour, when in pleasant personal intercourse thoughts find
expression as they arise, and the stimulated imagination carries us away
to more daring flights than those we venture on when our thoughts are
given to serious work. Permit me, therefore, to join in the imaginative
mood and to lay aside the scruples and doubts of the study and to tell
you how in my dreams the stones that we are shaping with arduous labor,
and that may in time form a solid structure, but none of which is finished
as yet, seem to fit together; and let me sketch before your eyes the airy
_ picture of a history of the American race as it appears before me in dim
outlines.
Man had arisen from his animal ancestors. His upright posture, his
large brain, the beginnings of articulate and organized language and, the
use of tools marked the contrast between him and animals. Already a
_ differentiation of human types had set in. From an unknown ancestral
type, that may have been related to the Australoid type, two funda-
mentally distinct forms had developed—the Negroid type and the Mon-
goloid type. The former spread all around the Indian Ocean; the latter
found his habitat in northern and central Asia, and also reached Europe
and the New World. The uniformity of these types ceased with their
wide spread over the continents, and the isolation of small communities.
Bushmen, Negroes and Papuans mark some divergent developments of
- the one type; Americans, East Asiatics and Malays, some of the other.
The development of varieties in each group showed similarities in all
regions where the type occurred. ‘The races located on both sides of the
Pacific Ocean exhibited the tendency to loss of pigmentation of skin, eyes
and hair; to a strong development of the nose, and to a reduction of the
1 Address of the retiring President, read at the annual meeting of the Academy, 18
December, 1911.
(177)
178 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
size of the face. Thus types like the Muropeans, the Ainu of Japan and
some Indian tribes of the Pacific coast exhibit certain striking similari-
ties in form. This tendency to parallel modification of the type indi-
cates early relationship.
After these conditions had developed, one of the last ice ages set in.
The members of the race that lived in America were cut off from their
congeners in the Old World, and during a long period of isolation an
independent development of types occurred. Still the time was not long
enough to wipe out the family resemblance between the Asiatics and
Americans, which persists up to this day; but numerous new lines of
growth developed. The face assumed a distinct form, principally through
the increase of size of the nose and of the cheek-bones. The wide spread
of the race over the whole territory of the two Americas that was free
of ice, and the isolation and small number of individuals in each com-
munity, gave rise to long-continued inbreeding, and, with it, to a sharp
individualization of local types. ‘This was emphasized by the subtle influ-
ences of natural and social environment. With the slow increase in
numbers, these types came into contact; and through mixture and migra-
tion a new distribution of typical forms developed. Thus the American
race came to represent the picture of a rather irregular distribution of
distinct types and colors, spread over the whole continent. The color of
the skin varied from lhght to almost chocolate brown; the form of the
head, from rounded to elongated; the form of the face, from very wide
to rather narrow; the color of the hair, from black to dark brown and
even blond, its form from straight to wavy; the lips were on the whole
moderately full; the nose varied from the eagle nose of the Mississippi
Indian to the concave nose of some South Americans and northwest
Americans. Notwithstanding the wider distribution of these types, each
area presented a fairly homogeneous picture.
Gradually the great ice-cap retired. Communication between America
and Asia became possible, while Europe was cut off by the wide expanse
_ of the Atlantic Ocean. Man followed the ice-cap northward. Members
of the American race crossed over to Asiatic soil and occupied parts of
Siberia, where finally they came into contact with the Asiatic group,
which had also spread northward with the retreat of the ice.
Even at this early time, when the tribes were small in number and
weak, human migration was only halted by impassable barriers; and thus
contact of members of one group with those of another was not rare, and
was always accompanied by the exchange of inventions and other cultural
possessions.
We must revert once more to the earlier period, when man first entered
BOAS, THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE 179
our continent. The step from animal to man had long been made. Man
brought with him a language, the use of fire, the art of making fire, the
use of tools for breaking and cutting and his companionship with the
dog. No other animal had yet become the associate of man. Whether
he was acquainted with the bow and arrow, the lance and other more com-
plex tools, is very doubtful.
What the languages of the earliest Americans may have been we cannot
tell. There is no reason to believe that there was only one language, for
the slow infiltration of scattered communities may have brought groups
possessing entirely different forms of linguistic expression into the conti-
nent. Certain it is, that, when man began to increase in numbers, the
number of languages spoken were legion. Complexity of form charac-
terized all of them. Sprung from the same root, some became so much
differentiated, that their genetic relationship can hardly be recognized.
By mutual influences, the articulations of some were so changed as to
agree with those of their neighbors. Forms of thought as expressed in
one language influenced others, and thus heterogeneous elements were
‘ast in similar forms. As the race increased in numbers, some tribes
became more powerful than others, and in intertribal wars many com-
munities were exterminated. With them died their languages and some-
times also their type, although it is likely that in most cases these persist
in the descendants of captured women. Thus a gradual elimination of
the older stocks occurred, which were replaced by newer dialects of a few
groups in which, for this reason, genetic relationship can still easily be
traced. Only in those regions where no tribe gained the ascendancy does
the old multiplicity of stocks persist. Hence the confusion of languages
in California, in many parts of Central and South America, and the
comparative homogeneity on the Great Plains, on the plateau of Mexico,
and in eastern South America. The diversity of sound and grammatical
form which pertains to the old stocks is so great that it is hardly possible
to find one feature that is common to the languages of America and that
does not belong also to other continents. Certainly all the most promi-
nent characteristics of many American languages are found to the same
extent among the tribes of Siberia.
When the contact between Asia and America was re-established, the
culture of the whole continent was very simple. Some new inventions
had been added to the old stock; weapons had been perfected; the begin-
nings of decorative art had been laid, and the ideas of the race had ad-
vanced in many directions. At this period, the Central Americans made
the important step from the gathering of roots, berries and grains to
the permanent cultivation of plants near their homes. The development
180 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
of the cultivated Indian-corn occurred. With it the food-supply of the
people became more stable, and the population increased at a much more
rapid rate than before. Other plants, like the bean, were taken into cul-
tivation; and the more certain the food-supply, the more rapid became
the increase in population. The process that began in the Old World
with the cultivation of millet and other grains was paralleled here; and
step by step the new art spread over new territories, until it had reached
the area now occupied by the Argentine Republic in the south, and the
Great Lakes in the north. Only the extreme south of South America and
the extreme north and northwest of this continent remained outside of
this zone, partly due to climatic reasons, partly due to their remote geo-
graphical position.
The cultivation of plants and the concurrent increase in population
revolutionized the ethnological conditions of the continent; for, owing to
their large numbers, the agricultural people also gained the ascendancy
over others who did not conform to their habits and remained fewer in
numbers.
About this time, perhaps even before the perfected cultivation of
plants, a marvelous industrial development set in. Basketry, pottery
and weaving were some of the important industries that originated in
this period. It is not likely that their origin can be traced in the same
way to one restricted area, as in the case of the cultivation of Indian
corn, but the many beginnings were more or less moulded in one form,
and cultural stimuli probably flowed in many different directions, giving
rise to technical forms that, notwithstanding their great diversity, bear
the impress of one continental development. Nothing shows this process
of assimilation more impressively than the decorative art of the conti-
nent. Forms exuberantly developed in Mexico or western South America
recur in simpler form in the United States and in the Argentine Repub-
lic—not identical, to be sure, but still betraying their family resem-
blance. The marginal people of the continent alone have learned nothing
of these arts. Pottery reached neither the Pacific Northwest nor the
extreme south of South America, and the art forms of the North Pacific
coast and of the Arctic coast show no affiliation with those of the middle
portions of the continent. These districts remained almost excluded
from the general flow of American culture, as it developed in the agri-
cultural areas of the middle parts of the two Americas. Here we may
perhaps still find something similar to what existed in our continent
before the period of rapid cultural advance set in.
The religious life of the race grew with its other cultural achieve-
ments. A strong ceremonialism pervaded the whole life and attained its
BOAS, THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE 181
culminating point in the most complex and populous communities. The
fundamental ideas were disseminated from tribe to tribe and found an
echo wherever they reached. Thus from many distinct beginnings grew
up a peculiar type of ritualism that preserves a similar character almost
wherever it exists at all. The thinkers among all these tribes were moved
by one fundamental set of ideas, and hence all developed on somewhat
similar lines; but the harder the conditions of life, the less is the number
of independent thinkers, and the diversity and individuality of tribal
ritualism decrease, therefore, as the agricultural resources of the tribes
dwindle. In the extreme Northwest and South, only weak traces of the
modern middle American ceremonialism are to be found.
Thus presents itself to our minds the picture of American civilization
developing in the favored middle parts of the continents and spreading
by a continuous flowing to and fro of ideas and inventions which stimu-
lated continued growth. In contrast to these, the marginal areas of the
extreme South and of the North and Northwest remained in a more
stable condition.
Neither history nor archeology nor ethnology allows us at present to
follow this complex development in any detail. On the contrary, there
seem to be yawning gaps between the various centers that sometimes
seem as though they could not be bridged; and still the conviction grows
stronger and stronger that this whole culture represents as much an
inner unity as that of the Old World.
Somewhat aside from the general current stands eastern South Amer-
ica, which, although not uninfluenced by the stream of Western culture,
followed in a halting way only, and in many respects went its own way.
The isolation of the dense forests, the smallness of the tribes and their
position aside from the great current of events that had their seat in the
plateaus of the West may have contributed to this condition of affairs.
Sufficient vigor, however, existed here to allow an energetic expansion
northward, which built a cultural bridge between the Atlantic slopes
of North and South America that brought about a certain degree of
individualization of the East as compared to the West.
I will not follow the higher civilizations that were built up on the
basis of the Western culture in Mexico, Yucatan and on the western
plateaus of South America. When these civilizations arose, their founda-
tions were probably those that I described before as pertaining to a large
portion of middle America, extending from some parts of the United
States well south into South America. On this basis, however, they built
up a promising structure: they laid the foundation of the sciences, devel-
oped the art of writing, learned how to work precious metals and copper
182 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and advanced in the arts of architecture and engineering. When the
advent of the Spaniards cut short this growth, it had attained a stage
that might easily have led to accelerated advances.
We must now turn to the northern marginal area, which did not take
part to any considerable extent in the cultural work of the people of
middle America. Notwithstanding this, the area was not isolated but
received stimuli from another direction. The Old World lies near at
hand, and from here flowed the sources of new cultural achievements.
As in the New World, the early growth of culture in Central America
had stimulated the neighboring tribes, and as inventions and ideas had
been carried to and fro, so it happened in the Old World. A constant
exchange of cultural achievements may be observed from the coasts of
the Mediterranean Sea to China and Japan. What wonder, then, if the
waves of this movement struck the shores of our world where it is nearest
Asia, not with a strong impact but as the last ripples of the spreading
circle. The Siberians and Americans were closely affiliated before the
introduction of domesticated animals gave a new character to Siberian
life; and at this time the Asiatic house, bow, armor and Asiatic tales
found their way to America and spread over the whole northwestern
portion of the North American continent, reaching even the tribes of
our Western prairies.
The Southern marginal area, the extreme south of South America
and parts of Brazil present a different set of conditions—an_ isolation
that is probably equalled in no other part of the world excepting, per-
haps, Tasmania. Unfortunately, our knowledge of these regions is so
imperfect that almost nothing can be said in regard to the type of cul-
ture of the tribes inhabiting this area. May I point out that here lies
the most important problem for the investigation of the earliest ethnic
history of the American Continent, because here alone may we hope to
recover remains of the earliest types of American mental development ?
The investigation of this problem, of the ethnology of the Fuegians and
Ghes tribes according to modern thorough methods, may therefore ur-
gently be recommended to the Carnegie Institution, that furthers so
many lines of research, or to other institutions that are devoted to the
advancement of knowledge.
Here halts my fancy, which has taken me in rapid flight over thou-
sands of years, over endless changes of types and peoples. I do not ven-
ture to speculate about the question of a cultural relation between the
islands of Polynesia and South America; for the suggestions are too
slight, and the improbability of relations seems at present too great.
BOAS, THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE 183
We may, however, cast a glance at the forms that America presents
when compared to the Old World If our picture contains any truth, the
independence of American achievements from Old World achievements
stands out prominently. The industrial arts were discovered in two large
areas independently—the Afro-Asiatic and the American. ‘They spread
over continents but remained separated until the period of European
colonization. To a great extent, the discoveries made were analogous—
basketry, weaving, pottery, work in metals, agriculture. ‘The important
step that the Asiatic or European hunter made to the domestication of
animals had hardly begun in America, where the Peruvians had developed.
the use of the llama. Much less had the still more far-reaching discovery.
been made of agriculture with the help of animals and the invention of
the wheel. The use of smelted iron for tools was not known. Important
differences may also be traced in fundamental forms of social institu-
tions, arts and religious beliefs. Thus some of the most important
advances of the races of the Old World were not known in America,
although in other respects the work of civilization had far advanced.
In concluding, I beg to remind you once more that the sketch that I
have given, although based on the accumulation of observed data, must
not be taken as more than a lightly woven fabric of hypothesis. At every
step, there are lacunz of our knowledge which our imagination may tem-
porarily bridge to serve as a guide for further inquiries but which have
to be filled by solid, careful work to reach results that will be acceptable
before the forum of science.
_
Or ; au) Tig:
Py
¢ i” d Pi ae "
¥ \ te» ¥
7 rat} a
mae sty a
ro
i : 3 ei | ee Nia
Mp rei ay pat) | ay
Ted oe ie vuRA en
A co SS UA eae ha
ck ae le.
Eat! SP nT pa Ant eae
% rf 1:
; : piae
hh’ Poe ae ae ¥
j y opyh
(Re) anal
is
‘
1
5
‘
\ a
& A
= if
: fd
oy ’
*
ia j
BPs i OM cy
-
Li
r ‘4
} "
j
he gee SY Ads
Sy ;
ee
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
_ (Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817-1876)
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. :
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the
scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the rec-
ords of meetings and similar matter.
A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year
and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles
composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and
are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of
the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus-
trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the
Academy. The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has
been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at
irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to
monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume
I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs,
etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued.
All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The
Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of
any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to
THE LIBRARIAN,
New York Academy of Sciences,
care of
American Museum of Natural History,
New York, N. Y.
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
| Vol. XXI, pp. 185-263
Editor, Epmunp OT1s Hovry
RECORDS OF MEETINGS
CHARTER, CONSTITUTION AND MEMBER-
SHIP IN 1911
OF THE
- NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
WITH INDEX TO VOLUME XxI
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
25 Marca, 1912
.THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyozum oF N ATURAL HIsTorY, 1817-1876)
OFFIcERs, 1911
President—Franz Boas, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—GuorcE F. Kunz, Freperic A. Lucas,
R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL
Recording Secretary—EpMuND Otis Hovey, American Museum
Corresponding Secretary—Henry HE. Crampron, American Museum
Treasurer—EMERSON McMIttiin, 40 Wall Street
Inbrarian—RatpeH W. Tower, American Museum
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chairman—GerorGcE F. Kuwz, 401 Fifth Avenue
Secretary—Cuak.LEs P. BeRKEY, Columbia University
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—FRrevEric A. Lucas, American Museum.
Secretary—L. Hussakor, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University
Secretary—Epwarp J. THATCHER, Pesolin College
SECTION, OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—R. 8S. WoopwortH, Columbia University
Secretary—FREDERIC LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.
Lv tee
wULd
[Annats New YorK ACADEMY OF ScIENCES, Vol. XXI, pp. 185-252.
25 March, 1912.]
LIRR A
NEW YORK
BOTANICAL
GARDEN.
RECORD OF MEETINGS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
January, 1911, to December, 1911.
By Epmunp Oris Hovey, Recording Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
9 JANUARY, 1911.
The Academy met at 8:15 Pp. M. at the American Museum of Natural
History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved.
The following candidates for active membership in the Academy,
recommended by Council, were duly elected:
John P. Haines, 20 Fifth Avenue,
Daniel O. Fearing, Newport, R. I.,
A. O. Garrett, 615 South 9th St., Long Island City,
C. W. Parsons, 30 West 95th Street.
The Recording Secretary announced that Dr. C. B. Davenport had de-
clined to accept the election to Vice-President for 1911, and Dr. F. A.
Lucas had been elected Vice-President of the Academy and Chairman of
the Section of Biology to take his place. He reported further that Dr.
Clark Wissler had been elected Councilor for one year in place of Dr.
Franz Boas and that Professor C. C. Trowbridge had been elected Coun-
cilor for three years in place of Dr. Simon Flexner.
The Academy then adjourned.
EpMuND Otis Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
(185)
186 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
9 JANUARY, 1911.
Section was called to order at 8:25 p. mM., Vice-President George F.
Kunz presiding. About 150 members and visitors were present.
The reading of the minutes was dispensed with, and there being no
special business requiring immediate attention, the meeting was at once
turned over to the following lecturer:
Frank D. Adams, Resutts oF EXPERIMENTS ON THE BEHAVIOR OF
RocKS UNDER PRESSURE.
The Chairman introduced Professor Adams, Dean of Appled Science
and Professor of Geology in McGill University and a corresponding
member of the Academy, who gave a brief résumé of earlier work and
explained the objects sought and difficulties encountered and a most
interesting and instructive account of the methods and results of his own
experiments. At the close of the lecture, Mr. Chambers asked whether
any experiments had been made in the presence of water. Professor
Adams replied that only one sample had been tested in this manner.
The Academy tendered a vote of thanks to Professor Adams for his
lecture.
The meeting then adjourned.
CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
16 JANUARY, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
C. Stuart Gager, Crypromeric INHERITANCE IN ONAGRA.
Roy C. Andrews, Firtp Notrs oN JAPANESE WHALES.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Gager made reference to an abnormal plant of Onagra biennis that
appeared in a pedigreed culture following exposure to radium rays of
the ovule employed in producing the plant. The plant possessed two
primary shoot-systems (rosettes and subsequent cauline stems) of equiva-
lent value but manifesting entirely unlike morphological characters.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 187
Photographs were shown, and various possibilities were suggested as to
the cause or causes of the anomaly. That the effect was due to the ex-
posure to radium rays was held to be possible, though not conclusively
shown. The antecedent history of the plant and the fact that hybrids
between the two unlike halves manifested, in the F, and F, generations,
the characters of only one of the parent shoots, was interpreted to empha-
size the fact, already recognized, that the inheritance of a character and
its expression are two quite different phenomena.
Mr. Andrews gave an account of a recent seven-months’ stay at the
Japanese whaling stations, telling of the methods employed in capturing
and preparing the whales for commercial use; also of new notes on the
habits of finback, blue and sei whales. The latter species, called by the
Japanese “sardine whale,” is referable to Balenoptera arctica Schlegel,
and although it has been taken for a number of years at the Japanese
stations, almost no material relating to it is extant. The species is so
closely allied to Balenoptera borealis Lesson of the Atlantic that further
investigation will probably prove it synonymous. Photographs of the
rare North Pacific blackfish (Globicephalus scammont) and of several
species of dolphins were also shown. It was announced that a new por-
poise of a most peculiar body shape had been secured and would be de-
scribed in a future number of the American Museum Bulletin. The
paper was illustrated with lantern slides.
The Section then adjourned.
L. HussaKkor,
Secretary.
SECTION-OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
23 JANUARY, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
Clifford B. Harmon, ExprertMents IN AVIATION.
Hudson Maxim, PRACTICAL UTILITY OF FLYING MACHINES.
Philip Wilcox, THE ABROPLANE.
James H. Hare, TAKING THE First PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE FLIGHTS
OF THE WricHt BrotHers at Kitty HAwkK,
NortTH CAROLINA.
188 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
The various papers were well illustrated with lantern slides and by
models loaned by the United States Aéronautical Reserve.
The Section then adjourned.
EDWARD J. THATCHER,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
30 JANUARY, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Gen. James Grant Wilson presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
Pliny E. Goddard, THe DisrrRisuTioN AND RELATIONSHIP OF THE
APACHE.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Dr. Goddard emphasized the fact that the Apache are divided into a
oumber of distinct political and dialectic groups; while culturally, there
is a gradual transition as an observer proceeds from east to west from
the life of the buffalo-hunting Plains type into that of the Southwestern
culture as represented by the Pima.
The Section then adjourned.
F. LyMAN WELLS,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
6 Frpruary, 1911.
The Academy met at 8:20 Pp. mM. at the American Museum of Natural
History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved.
The following candidates for membership in the Academy, recom-
mended by Council, were duly elected:
ACTIVE MEMBERSHIP.
Herbert Lang, American Museum of Natural History.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 189
ASSOCIATE MEMBERSHIP.
C. T. Kirk, Normal College,
Miss Evangeline Moon, Normal College.
The Recording Secretary then reported the following deaths:
Sir Francis Galton, an Honorary Member for 1 year,
Hon. J. Hampden Robb, an Active Member for 13 years,
J. J. Higginson, an Honorary Member for 5 years.
The Academy then adjourned.
EpmMtnpb Otis Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
6 Fresruary, 1911.
Section was called to order at 8:25 Pp. mM., Vice-President Kunz pre-
siding. About 60 members and others were in attendance.
The minutes of the previous meeting were read and approved.
A communication was presented from Prof. D. S. Martin on the nam-
ing of two mineral varieties. The first is a variety of muscovite, for
which the name Schernikite is proposed. The other is a variety of meso-
lite, for which the name Winchellite is suggested.
The following titles were presented :
A. A. Julien, THe Evipencr FROM THE PALISADES ON THE GENESIS OF
ANTIGORITE (By title).
G.S. Rogers, GroL.ocy oF THE CORTLANDT SERIES AND ITS EMERY DeE-
posits (By title).
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Dr. Martin, in his paper, said: At the meeting of the New York Mine-
ralogical Club, held at the American Museum of Natural History on
December 14th, 1910, I exhibited certain minerals and proposed therefor
two varietal names as follows:
(1) The fibro-prismatic pink variety of muscovite, identified as such
in composition by Bowman in the Mineralogical Magazine in 1902 but so
remarkably different in its physical characters and entire “habit” that it
is certainly deserving of a varietal name. The mineral occurs freely and
almost exclusively at Haddam Rock, Conn., intergrown with ordinary
muscovite and lepidolite, in the albitic dyke. As the specimens described
and identified by Bowman formed a part of a series of Haddam Rock
minerals presented to Oxford University by a member and ex-president
190 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
of the Mineralogical Club, Mr. Ernest Schernikow, of this city, | propose
for this marked and peculiar variety the name of Schernikite.
(2) The nodular variety of mesolite, generally called Thomsonite,
from Grand Marais, Lake Superior. Professor N. H. Winchell, in several
articles, has shown this mineral to be not Thomsonite at all but a true
mesolite in composition and has urged the use of the latter correct name
instead of the former incorrect one. As it is, however, a distinct variety
peculiar to that locality and considerably used as a “local” gem-stone,
it is entitled to a name as much as lintonite or chlorastrolite, and in
recognition of its identifier, I suggest that of Winchellite.
The evening was then given to the following lecture:
Frank A. Perrett, K. J. C., Tire 1909 Eruprion av TENERIFE AND TILE
GREAT HRUPTION OF ETNA IN MARCH
AND APRIL, 1910.
Mr. Perrett has been for several years a close student of volcanic phe-
nomena. Many excellent lantern illustrations were shown representing
recent activities and conditions investigated by Mr. Perrett. The lecture
was listened to with great interest, and remarks were made by several
members of the Academy. :
The meeting then adjourned.
CHARLES P. BrerKEy,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
13 Fespruary, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
W.D. Matthew, Ciimare snp Evonurtion.
W.K. Gregory, ON tHe Limes or Hryops AND THE ORIGIN OF LimBs
FROM PAIRED FINS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Matthew said in abstract: The thesis of the paper is as follows:
1. Secular climatic change has been an important factor in the evolu-
tion of land vertebrates and the principal known cause of their present ’
distribution.
2. The principal lines of migration in later geological epochs have been
radial from holarctic centers of dispersal.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 191
3. The geographic changes required to explain the past and present
distribution of land vertebrates are not extensive and do not affect the
permanence of the ocean basins as defined by the continental shelf.
4, The theory of alternations of moist and uniform with arid and
zonal climates associated, respectively, with partial submergence and ex-
treme emergence of the continental areas, as elaborated by Chamberlin,
are in exact accord with the apparent course of evolution of land verte-
brates, when interpreted with due allowance for the probable gaps in the
geologic record.
5. The numerous hypothetic land bridges in temperate, tropical and
southern regions, connecting continents now separated by deep oceans,
which have been advocated by various authors, are improbable, incon-
sistent and unnecessary to explain geographic distribution. On the. con-
trary, the known facts point distinctly to the permanency of the deep-
ocean basins during the later epochs of geologic time, to the alternate
connection and separation of the land areas within the line of the conti-
nental shelf and to the continued isolation of those land areas which are
surrounded by deep ocean.
These theories are substantially an adaptation of the conservative
views of Wallace and other zodlogists to the geological theories of Cham-
berlin. They are defended by a consideration (1) of the nature and
extent of the defects in the geological record; (2) of the relations of the
zoological regions to each other and the changes effected by elevation or
submergence of 100 fathoms; (3) of the principles of dispersal of land
animals; (4) of the character of the fauna of oceanic islands (including
Madagascar, Cuba and New Zealand) and the degree of probability which
attaches to accidental transportation as a means of populating them;
(5) of the present and known past distribution of the mammalia, group
by group, in considerable detail; (6) of the distribution of the different
orders of reptilia in a less detailed manner; (7) of the distribution of
birds and fishes, with a few instances from invertebrate distribution which
have been especially urged in support of hypothetical bridges; (8) of the
objections to such bridges and an interpretation of the real significance
of such evidence as has been adduced in support of them.
I believe that the supposed cumulative evidence obtained in various
groups of animals or plants for various continental bridges is due simply
to identical errors in interpretation running through all such instances.
On the other hand, to admit such bridges would seem to involve certain
distribution results, which, in the groups which I have studied, assuredly
do not exist.
192 ANNALS NEW.YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Dr. Gregory said in abstract: In a skeleton of the temnospondylous
amphibian, Hryops megacephaius Cope, from the Permian of Texas,
which is now being mounted in the American Museum, the limbs are of
special interest. Many resemblances to the contemporary reptile Dia-
dectes are seen: in the stout, long coraco-scapula, the short, wide-headed
humerus, with its very wide, prominent and backwardly directed ento-
condyle, in the short fore-arm, in the very heavy, solid pelvis, stout
femur and fully ossified carpus and tarsus. In the character of its limbs,
Eryops was on the whole nearer to Sphenodon than to the Urodeles,
though far more archaic than the former. As shown by the facets, the
humerus and femur were held almost at right angles to the body, the
opposite feet being held very widely apart. |
The generalized character of the limbs of Hryops with respect to those
of higher Tetrapoda invite renewed inquiry into the origin of paired
limbs from fins. The limbs of known branchiosaurs and microsaurs do
not carry us very far back toward any known type of fish fin. In these
orders, the cylindrical shafts of the long bones, with cartilaginous ends,
the cartilaginous carpus and tarsus, the weak shoulder girdle and pelvis
suggest a secondary adaptation to aquatic habits.
From the work of Thacher, Goodrich, Dean, R. C. Osburn and others,
it seems probable that the paired fins of fishes, like the median fins, have
evolved from wide-based fins with serially arranged basal and radial
cartilages. After the formation of the primary shoulder girdle and
pelvis and of the pro-, meso- and metapterygia by fusion and growth
of the basals, the various types of paired fins seen in plagiostomes, chime-
roids, pleuracanths, dipnoans, crossopterygians and actinopterygians seem
to have arisen in each case through the protrusion of the basal cartilages,
differential growth and shifting of the radials, and in some cases (e. @..
pleuracanths, crossopterygians, dipnoans) also through the extension of
the radials around to the post-axial side of the metapterygial axis. If
the Amphibia have descended from forerunners of teleostomous and dip-
noan fishes (as seemed likely), then it was entirely probable that their
paired fins had been transformed into limbs through the extreme pro-
trusion of the proximal cartilages, differential growth and regrouping
of the more distal cartilages, reduction of the dermal rays. This struc-
tural change may well have been in large part effected before the air-
breathing proto-amphibians had left the water, owing to the assumption
of a new function in the paired fins, 7. ¢., pushing against solid objects
such as roots in the stagnant water, instead of merely steering. A study
of the pectoral girdle and fins of Sauripteris, a rhizodont crossopterygian
of the Upper Devonian, in comparison with those of Polypterus and with
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 193
the limbs of primitive amphibians, had suggested the following provis-
ional homologies :
Crossopterygian Tetrapod
“Tnfraclavicle” = Clavicle
“Clavicle” (of Parker) = Scapula
“Supraclavicle” = Cleithrum
“Coracoid” (hypocoracoid) == Coracoid (or precoracoid 7)
“Scapula” (hypercoracoid) == Humerus
Proximal basals —= Radius and ulna
Distal basals = Carpals
Radials —= Metacarpals and phalanges
Dermal rays (derived from = Nails, scales
scales)
The reduction and loss of the post-temporal may have accompanied
the freeing of the shoulder girdle from the skull. These views differ
radically from those of Owen, Parker and Gegenbaur. The paired fins
of Sauripteris were the only ones known that seemed to foreshadow even
in a remote degree the paired limbs of the Tetrapoda. In the pelvic fin
of Husthenopteron, another crossopterygian of the Upper Devonian, dif-
ferential evolution of the basals and radials had brought about certain
remote resemblances to the tetrapod limb. The ilium of tetrapods ap-
peared to be a neomorph.
The Section then adjourned.
L. HussaKkor,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
20 FeBruary, 1911.
By permission of Council, no meeting was held.
EDWARD J. THATCHER,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
2% Frepruary, 1911.
Section met in conjunction with the American Ethnological Associa-
tion at 8:15 Pp. M., Gen. Joseph Grant Wilson presiding.
194 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
Robert H. Lowie, WomeEN’s SocieTIES OF THE MIssoURI VILLAGE
TRIBES. ’
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Dr. Lowie said in abstract: Like the men’s military organizations, the
women’s societies of the Hidatsa and Mandan were arranged in a series
of age-grades, membership in each of which was acquired by collective
purchase. The element of purchase was the determining factor, inas-
much as a woman retained her membership, regardless of age, as long
as it was not purchased of her by some other individual. In several of
the women’s organizations, there was a clearly marked magico-religious
element, which seems to have been lacking in the men’s age-grades.
Thus, the Goose society was associated with the planting of corn, and
the Buffalo women’s society was believed to control the coming of a
buffalo herd.
The Section then adjourned. F. Lyman WELLS,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
6 Marcu, 1911.
The Academy met at 8:17 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural
History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved.
The following candidates for active membership in the Academy,
recommended by Council, were duly elected:
Edwin C. Jameson, 35 West 49th Street,
Frederick G. Agens, Newark, N. J.
The Academy then adjourned. EpMuND Otis Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
6 Marcu, 1911.
The Section met at 8:22 p. m., Vice-President George F. Kunz pre-
siding. Seventeen members and visitors were present.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read, corrected
and approved.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 195
The following programme was then offered:
G. Sherburne Rogers, GroLogy or THE CoRTLANDT SERIES AND ITS
Emery Deposits.
A. W. Grabau, Nortu AMERICAN TPES OF LOWER PALEOZOIC
SEDIMENTATION IN NORTHERN SCOTLAND.
A. A. Julien, THE EVIDENCES FROM THE PALISADES ON THE
GENESIS OF ANTIGORITE. (Read by title.)
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Rogers illustrated his talk on the distribution and structure of
the Cortlandt Series with many lantern slides. Remarks were made by
Professor J. F. Kemp.
Dr. Grabau emphasized the similarity of development in correspond-
ing sections of Europe and America and made some general suggestions
as to former land connections.
The Section then adjourned,
CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
13 Marcu, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding.
The meeting was devoted to the following public lecture:
George A. Soper, Screntiric Aspects oF THE WorK OF THE Merno-
POLITAN SEWERAGE COMMISSION.
Dr. Soper, President of the Metropolitan Sewerage Commission, has
done a great amount of scientific work in connection with the investiga-
tions of the commission upon the pollution of the waters of New York
harbor from various sources. The most interesting features of this work
and its results were dwelt upon in popular manner by the lecturer. The
paper was illustrated with lantern slides.
The Section then adjourned.
L. Hussakor,
Secretary.
196 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
20 Marcu, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The programme for the evening consisted of the following lecture:
G. W. Ritchey, Recent CELESTIAL PHOTOGRAPHS WITH THE 60-INCH
REFLECTOR OF THE Mr. WILSON OBSERVATORY.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Professor Ritchey first of all spoke of the large telescopes of the world
and showed various illustrations of them and photographs obtained. Then
he described the 60-inch reflector, the method of manufacture and the
building of the observatory at Mt. Wilson and showed his wonderful pho-
tographs obtained there.
The Section then adjourned. Epwarp J. THATCHER,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
27 Marcu, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Gen. James Grant Wilson presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
Paul R. Radosavijevich, CrerHatic INpicEs IN RELATION To Sex, AGE
AND SOCIAL CONDITIONS.
Franz Boas, NOTES ON THE INDIAN TRIBES OF MEXICO.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Radosavljevich illustrated his lecture by charts. A discussion, in
which Dr. Fishberg and Professor Boas took part, developed with refer-
ence to the possibility of accuracy in certain measurements taken on
living individuals. Dr. Radosavljevich apologized to Professor Boas for
having unconsciously misrepresented his theories regarding the cephalic
index.
Professor Boas’s talk was based on his recent investigations during a
several months’ sojourn in Mexico.
The Section then adjourned. F. Lyman WELLs,
Secretary.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 197
BUSINESS MEETING.
3 APRIG 1911,
The Academy met at 8:18 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural
History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas.
In the absence of the Recording Secretary, Dr. Charles P. Berkey was
elected Recording Secretary pro tem.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved.
The following candidate for active membership in the Academy,
recommended by Council, was duly elected:
Professor Charles R. Eastman, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa.
The Academy then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Recording Secretary pro tem.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
SVAPRIE, Ott.
Section was called to order by Vice-President G. F. Kunz at 8:23 Pp. M.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was offered:
D. D. Condit, OBSERVATIONS ON VOLCANOES OF GUATEMALA.
George F. Kunz, Tur FINDING OF A GREAT Beryt aT MARAMBAYA.
A.W.Grabau, CLASSIFICATION OF SEAS AND LAKE BasINS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Condit gave an account of explorations made by an expedition of
which he was a member in 1907 and described the principal volcanic
features of the region with the aid of lantern views.
Dr. Kunz showed a full-size drawing of the beryl and described its
character and quality, as follows: Fine minerals have come to us during
the past century or more from the pegmatite rocks of Minas Geraes,
Brazil, notably tourmaline, green, blue, or partly colored, chrysoberyl,
topaz and other minerals, many of which have more or less gem value
when in perfect condition. ‘These have been a continual surprise to the
mineralogists and gem collectors of the world. It is my purpose here to
note the occurrence of one of the most remarkable finds that has ever
been found in this region.
198 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
On the 28th of March, 1910, in a pegmatite vein at Marambaya, a
village in the vicinity of Arassuahy, on the Jequititonha River, in the
State of Minas Geraes, Brazil, there was found a crystal of beryl, the
greatest crystal of precious beryl (aquamarine) ever found. In form, it
was a simple hexagonal pyramid with slight irregularities due to com-
pression, and it terminated with a simple basal plane at both ends.
The crystal weighed 110.5 kilograms, was 48.5 centimeters high and
from 40 to 42 centimeters in its different widths. It was so transparent
that, looking down into the crystal through its basal termination, it
could be seen through from end to end. In color, it was greenish-blue,
absolutely free from included impurities, but it was traversed hy a
number of fractures.
This crystal was found by a Turk, who mined it in what is known as
a primitive mine, at a depth of from five to six meters, and only with the
greatest difficulty was it transported on a canoe to the coast, by way of
the Jequititonha River and then shipped to Bahia, where it is said that
he realized $25,000 for it. It is estimated that this crystal would furnish
at least 200,000 carats of aquamarines of various sizes, although the
entire quantity is not likely to glut the market as it does not represent
over 5 per cent. of the annual yield. It is not of the deepest blue nor
of the deepest green, yet it is an excellent sea color; the quality is ex-
cellent, and more material will be furnished than from any single crystal
of any gem that we have any record of. When values become so great
and buyers so few, commercialism usually asserts itself. In this instance,
it is believed that a net profit of $100,000 will be realized.
Professor Grabau gave an elaborate classification of lake basins with
the aid of a chart prepared for this purpose.
The Section then adjourned.
CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
10 Aprit, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap-
proved.
The following programme was then offered :
Roy C. Andrews, A New AND PECULIAR PORPOISE FROM JAPAN.
J. T. Nichols, OBSERVATIONS ON Brrps AND FIsHES MADE ON AN
EXPEDITION TO FLORIDA WATERS.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 199
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Andrews exhibited photographs and parts of the skeleton of a new
porpoise secured in the summer of 1910, in Rikuzen province, Japan.
This specimen is allied to Phocena dalli True and with that species
forms a distinct group of Phocena-like porpoises which deserves generic
rank. This group resembles Phocena externally but has white side and
ventral areas sharply defined from the black of the upper parts, a falcate
dorsal fin and vertebre numbering 95 or more. The type of the new
genus to which Phocena dalli was referred is the specimen which was
secured in Japan and has been formally described in a Bulletin of the
American Museum of Natural History, now in press. ‘The Japanese
porpoise presents characters, both externally and in the skeleton, which
distinguish it from all other members of the entire family. The caudal
peduncle shows a strongly marked “hump,” and ventrally a prominent
concavity which gives the posterior portion of the body a most extra-
ordinary appearance. The neural spines of the entire vertebral series are
extremely long and slender, reaching a height much greater than in any
other known member of the Delphinide. The transverse processes are
also very long and rod-like. The number of vertebre is 95, approaching
closely P. dalli, which has 97. The scapula is unlike that of any other
member of the family in that its height almost equals its greatest breadth,
and it is in general shape somewhat like that of a Baleen whale. The
specimen is, on the whole, one of the most remarkable members of the
Delphinide that have thus far been discovered.
Mr. Nichols gave an account of a trip through Florida waters on Mr.
Alessandro Fabbri’s yacht 7'ek/a in the interests of the American Mu-
seum’s department of fishes. Attention was called to the abundance of
the white ibis and Louisiana heron, contrasted with the scarcity of
aigrette-bearing herons. After a brief mention of the work and the
results obtained, the balance of fish-life in a fresh-water outlet of the
everglades was compared with the balance of fish-life in the salt water
as at Key West. In the former situations, gar pikes (Lepisosteus) were
abundant, as were various Centrarchids (among them the large-mouthed
bass and blue-gill sunfish) which darted in and out through the little
channels among the weed but which did not drive head first through the
masses of weed as did the leathery-skinned gars, and only made quick
sallies into the shallower and less open waters, where various species of
Peeciliids, especially Gambusia, and Fundulus goodei were tremendously
abundant. ‘lhe surprising freedom from mosquitoes was mentioned,
200 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and it was pointed out how the existing balance of fish-life was favorable
to a great abundance of Gambusia, ete., which might be expected to prey
on mosquito larve. The Centrarchids would be likely to hold in check
a fish like the banded pickerel, which would have followed these small
fishes into the shallows where the Centrarchids did not follow them and
perhaps materially reduce their numbers. The situation here, where
the large primitive gar, the spiny-rayed modern Centrarchids and the
abundant intermediate Peeciliids made up the bulk of the fish population,
was compared with the more complicated marine situation where large
selachians and spiny-rayed basses, snappers, grunts, wrasses, scorpion
fishes, etc., and schooling herrings and anchovies of various sorts in a
way constituted homologous classes. The paper was illustrated with
lantern slides.
The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
17 Apri, 1911.
By permission of Council, no meeting was held.
EpWwarpD J. THATCHER, .
Secretary.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
24 ApRIL, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., in conjunction with the New York Branch
of the American Psychological Association. The afternoon session was
held at the Psychological Laboratory, Columbia University, and the
evening session was held at the American Museum of Natural History.
The following programme was offered:
George R. Montgomery, A SimpLe Meruop ror THE Stupy oF EN-
TOPTIC PHENOMENA.
J.E. Wallace Wallin, Tur PrRererreD LENGTH oF INTERVAL.
E. K. Strong, Jr., SEx AND CLASS DIFFERENCES IN RESPONSE
TO ADVERTISEMENTS.
E. L. Thorndike, THE CURVE OF WORK.
H. L. Hollingworth, THE INFLUENCE OF CAFFEIN ON THE QUALITY
OF SLEEP.
W. P. Montague, Has Psycuotoey Lost Its Mrnp?
I. Woodbridge Riley, THr SpreaD oF CHRISTIAN SCIENCE.
E. W. Scripture, PSYCHANALYSIS AND THE INTERPRETATION OF
DREAMS,
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 201
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Montgomery said in abstract: By using small silver beads strung
on a wire in a spectacle frame to reflect light into the eye, we have a
simple method which has many advantages in the study of entoptic
phenomena. From the standpoint of psychology, perhaps the most im-
portant use of such an instrument is in the study of iris movements.
For some experiments, it is well to cover the frame with a black cloth,
allowing the light to reach the beads through a slit. If three beads are
used, they may be moved back and forth and the intensity of the light
increased or diminished until the middle circle of light thrown upon the
retina is exactly tangent to the other two. Such a contrivance allows a
view of both pupils at the same time. It also allows careful measure-
ment of dilation and contraction and furthermore permits the eye and the
body to take an easy, normal position. The use of a single bead with
two or three sources of light enables one to diversify the intensity of
the circles of light thrown upon different parts of the retina. This is
important in determining the parallax of objects in the eye which throw
the shadows. Combinations are possible with this arrangement and other
experiments, Purkinje’s for instance, and the beads may also be used for
throwing circles of lights from colored globes upon the retina. These
circles may be superposed, the different parts of the retina compared as
to color sensation, the effect of contrast brought out, etc.
Mr. Wallin detailed the experimental results of two simple methods
of investigating the preferred length of auditory intervals; a method of
impression, in which a preference was reached by successive comparisons
of pairs of metronome clicks in a definite order; and a method of ex-
pression, in which the preference for musical tempos was determined by
measuring the durations between the responses (stamps of the foot)
made to musical selections by the gallery patrons in theaters. The re-
sults showed, among other things, that the average interval preference
with metronome clicks corresponded precisely with the average tempo
of the most vigorous responses to musical rhythms (0.51 sec.) ; that the
very general tendency to rhythmize recurrent auditory impressions of
the same intensity (metronome clicks) often rested on an ascertainable
qualitative basis; that the tendency to perceive different lengths of
auditory intervals as indifferent or neutral is infrequent; that instead of
selecting a definite, invariable central tendency in respect to interval
preferences, the subjects can be arranged most naturally into a number
of types (slow, medium, fast, rapid) ; that the absence of a clear, definite
central tendency is due to the fact that the preferences are determined
202 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
by varying factors permanently or temporarily operative (physical pain,
mental disquietude, repose, strain of suspense or expectation, stimulation
to movement, rhythmical tendency, associations, suggestions, preference
for melody, harmony, or rhythm in music, but not musical capacity,
etc.) ; that we can lay down limits within which the preferences for
intervals and musical tempos will most probably come (0.40 to 0.70
sec.) ; and that the vigor of the responses in music varies according as
the time is two-four or three-four, and according to the relative influence
of other factors than that of speed (catchiness or familiarity of the
music, incisiveness of the accent, etc.).
Dr. Strong said in abstract: In an extensive study of the relative
values of the motives, which are used in advertisements, that lead one
to buy toilet soap, a number of interesting facts as to class and sex dif-
ferences were noted. It was found that the order of preference for such
motives as were obtained from fifty college students correlated very
high with similar orders from educated men and from educated women.
In fact, there were no specific differences between such orders. But an
order of preference from a group of one hundred men living in and
about Garrison, N. Y., showed a negative correlation. The striking
point about this latter order, however, was not so much that uneducated
persons do not agree with educated ones with respect to which are the
strong motives, but that they do not agree amongst themselves at all—
their order being little more than a chance order. This is the more
striking when we realize that two groups of educated women correlated
as high as + .93. In this study, it was very clear that women are less
variable in their judgments as to the merit of these motives or appeals
than are men. Not only were the corresponding probable errors of the
medians smaller in almost every case among the women, but the various
sub-groups of women correlated higher with respect to each other than
did the sub-groups of men. Such motives as “beauty” and “for the
baby” ranked higher among the women than among the men, but the
surprising thing here was that the two sexes agreed so closely with
respect to the other motives.
Professor Thorndike reported results of five subjects, each working
eight hours (two hours on each of four days) at adding printed examples,
each of ten one-place numbers. It was found that initial spurt did not
appear at all as a general tendency in all students, or consistently in the
work of any one of them. There was a slight tendency to spurt in the
last five minutes, but this was very slight and by no means consistent
throughout the group, or important in the case of any member of the
group. Warming up was found to play a slight and possibly inap-
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 203
preciable part in the curve of work. The influence of practise and that
of fatigue approximately balanced, so that the general tendency of the
character of the work is not only toward rectilinearity, but also toward
parallelism with the base line.
Dr. Hollingworth said in abstract: Sixteen subjects were given doses
of caffein alkaloid (1-6 grains), at varying times of day, for a period
of a month. Incidentally to a series of mental tests which were con-
tinued throughout this period, each subject recorded the approximate
number of hours’ sleep after each day and graded the quality of the
night’s rest as “better than usual,” “ordinary,” or “worse than usual.”
Adequate control methods were used. Clear individual differences were
shown in the effect of the drug on the quality of sleep—and these dif-
ferences were independent of age, sex and size differences. On the basis
of the squad averages, doses of 1-4 grains do not impair sleep. Doses
larger than these produce sleeplessness. ‘This effect is greatest when the
dose is taken day after day, allowing a cumulative effect. When a single
dose is taken on alternate days, the effect is greatest when the caffein
is taken between meals. ‘’aken with meals, its action is weakened and
retarded. Only in exceptional cases does sleeplessness follow the 1-4
grain dose, and in many cases a 6-grain dose is without effect. The
“approximate number of hours” of sleep does not seem to be modified
by the action of the drug, probably because this matter is controlled by a
more or less artificial schedule.
Dr. Montague said in abstract: The movement to dispense with the
concept of mind or consciousness and to substitute the concept of be-
havior as the sufficient object of psychological study was criticized (1)
on the ground of ambiguity and (2) on the ground of inadequacy.
1. Behavior, as the movement of an organism in response to stimulus,
is ambiguous in that it may mean (a) the intra-neural current from
sensory center to muscle, or (b) the extra-neural motion of the organism
or its members. Behavior in the first sense might conceivably be the
basis of and hence a substitute for consciousness, but it would be visible
to the external observer and therefore relatively useless as an object of
psychological study. Behavior in the second sense is visible to the
observer, and so a useful index of consciousness; but being extra-neural,
it could not possibly be the correlate or basis of the organism’s own ex-
perience. The motor theory of consciousness derives much of its plausi-
bility from an unconscious shifting from one of these meanings of be-
havior to another.
2. But behavior in either or both of these senses is inadequate as a
substitute for or even as a correlate of consciousness, (@) because, unless
204 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
evidence is given for an innervation sense, it can only be the kinesthetic
sensations that result from one’s movement, and never the movement
itself, that one experiences; hence, to reduce consciousness to movement
would be to reduce all sensations to kinesthetic sensations; (b) because
the field of consciousness is infinitely too rich a manifold to be put in
one to one correspondence with any system of mere motions, internal or
external.
Mr. Riley said in abstract: From recent investigations made by Pro-
fessor Joseph Jastrow comparing the results of the Federal Census of
1910 with the number of advertised Christian Science practitioners, there
is shown a three-fold distribution of the sect, chiefly in three pairs of
states: Massachusetts and New York, Illinois and Missouri, Colorado and
California. Here the pathological factor is first in evidence, for the
centers of influence are large cities, with their concomitant nervous dis-
orders, and the health resorts of the mountains and coast. A second
factor is that of free thought, or a liberal attitude toward the uncon-
ventional such as is found in the given states, with their large cities
and their great number of imported foreign faiths. A third factor is
financial, a reaction from overmuch material prosperity and a leaning
towards a somewhat ascetic immaterialism. This leads to the final
factor, the previous idealisms which prepared the soil, such as New
England transcendentalism, with the Emersonian call to the “demon-
stration” of the “spiritual principle,” and the German idealism repre-
sented in the St. Louis School. These four factors apply not only to the
followers of Christian Science, Dut to the founder; and here Eddyism
may be considered not only an afterclap of transcendentalism, but a
recrudescence of Neoplatonism. As in Rome and Alexandria, so in
America, there has arisen a demand for knowledge dependent on “divine”
communications; a denial of sensible existence; a contempt for reason
and physical science, and a destruction of the distinction between sensible
and intelligible. In all this, Christian Science shows itself a recurrent
phase of the larger movement of so-called New Thought, with its oc-
cultism, gnosticism and mysticism. The type of mind to which the
movement appeals is complex—practical and yet uncritical, non-academic
and yet speculative. Such a mind fails to distinguish the fundamental
fallacy of Christian Science—that while it disclaims materialism, it
still reeks with material terms such as “mental offshoots,” “gravitation
Godward,” and the “aroma of Spirit.” In fine, the “divine metaphysics”
bolsters itself up with the latest physical discoveries, such as Hertzian
waves and X-rays, to explain “absent treatment” and silent “demon-
stration.”
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 205
Dr. Scripture said in abstract: Psychanalysis is the term applied to
the line of work originated by Freud, of Vienna. Its chief object is to
get at the facts of the subconscious. One of its most effective methods
is the analysis of dreams. The immediate facts in the dream, the “mani-
fest content,” are derived from the immediately preceding experiences
of life. The “latent content” is deduced from the “manifest content.”
The “latent content” of a dream always consists of a wish or fear. A
child disappointed by the size of some Bantam chickens dreamed that
she had large Cochin Chinas and thus satisfied her wish. A man dreams
that he is bald because he has noticed his hair to be getting thin and
fears that he will become bald. The “manifest content” of the dream is
often symbolic of the “latent content.” After a consultation with his
physician in which the disagreeable experiences of his past life are
discussed, a man dreams of being in a laundry watching the clothes boil
in the tank. His dreams satisfies the wish to see his “dirty linen”
washed clean. A man in financial difficulties dreams of being caught
in a terrific snow-storm. This expresses his fear of being “snowed
under.” By psychanalysis, the physician gets an accurate knowledge of
the patient’s mental make-up; this he can get in no other way. He can
then proceed to correct the various defects of character, such as egotism,
stubbornness, viciousness, bashfuiness, timidity, etc. Psychanalysis is the
only radical cure for hysteria, the phobias and psychasthenia.
The Section then adjourned.
F. Lyman WELLS,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
ieiMays fou.
The Academy met at 8:15 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural
History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved.
There being no business to transact, the Academy then adjourned.
Epmunp Otis Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
a. gan BD
Section was called to order at 8:18 p. M. by Vice-President George F,
Kunz, about 55 members and visitors being present.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
206: ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The following programme was then offered :
E. O. Hovey, THE CoPpPpER QUEEN MINE, BISBEE, ARIZONA.
James G. Manchester, New Discovery oF GEM STONES ON MANHAT-
TAN ISLAND.
J. F. Kemp, THE SARATOGA MINERAL SPRINGS.
A. W. Grabau, SoME SILURIC CoraAL REEFS OF EUROPE.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Hovey exhibited a sketch model of the famous Copper Queen
mine and explained the lines on which the complicated geological features
of the locality were to be graphically represented. Remarks were made
by Professor Kemp and Dr. Berkey.
Mr. Manchester described several localities and showed gem material
from a few of them. Topaz and beryl were especially well developed in
these specimens. Remarks were made by Professor Kemp.
Professor Kemp gave a general explanation of the geology of these
springs, with suggestions of the origin of the gases and salts carried by
them.
Dr. Grabau’s paper was given with lantern illustrations, and compari-
sons were made with certain similar structures in America.
The Section then adjourned.
CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
8 May, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
C.-E. A. Winslow, BAcTrErIA AND DECOMPOSITION IN RELATION TO THE
Pure Foop Law.
L. Hussakof, THE SPOONBILL FISHERY OF THE LOWER MISSISSIPPI.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Winslow discussed certain problems, which have recently
arisen in connection with the application of the pure food laws, concern-
ing the relation between bacterial multiplication and decomposition.
Decomposition, in the ordinary sense of the term, is due to the action of
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 207
certain bacteria on certain substances and the mere number of bacteria,
without distinction as to kinds, bears no relation to it. The best cri-
terion for decomposition would be a chemical test for decomposition
products, but no such test has yet been shown to be of general value.
Dr. Hussakof gave an account of a trip he had recently made to Mis-
sissippi for the purpose of collecting specimens of the paddlefish,
Polyodon spathula, for the preparation of an exhibition group in the
American Museum. This fish is one of the largest and most interesting
found in our fresh waters. It is especially abundant in the lower Mis-
sissippi Valley, where it attains a length of 6 feet and a weight of 160
pounds. Some interesting facts were presented, bearing on its natural
history and its commercial value. Polyodon roe is said to produce the
best caviar in the world. The distribution of Polyodon and of the re-
lated Chinese fish, Psephurus, was discussed.
The paper was illustrated with lantern slides.
The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
15 May, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 Pp. m., Vice-President Campbell presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
William Campbell, Norres on Antrrriction METALS.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Starting with a series of Thormal diagrams for binary alloys, Dr.
Campbell developed certain ternary diagrams and explained many of the
common bearing metals thereby. Then, by means of lantern slides, the
following systems were discussed and their structures shown:
1. Lead antimony tin.
2. Tin antimony copper.
3. Lead tin antimony copper.
4. Zinc-rich alloys such as lumen, ete.
5. Tin-zinc-rich alloys: Parson’s white brass, ete.
Then by way of contrast, numerous alloys rich in copper, with and
without lead, which are used for bearing, were shown and their structures
and properties explained.
The Section then adjourned. Epwarp J. THATCHER,
Secretary.
208 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
oe May. 1911.
By permission of the Council, no meeting was held.
BUSINESS MEETING.
9 OcToBER, 1911.
The Academy met at 8:17 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural
History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President
Boas.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved.
The following candidate for active membership in the Academy, recom-
mended by Council, was duly elected:
Silas C. Wheat, Brooklyn, N. Y.
The Recording Secretary pro tem then reported the following deaths:
Mrs. Esther Herrman, a Patron for 30 years,
Charles H. Senff, a Patron for 16 years,
G. Johnston Stoney, an Honorary Member for 8 years,
A. B. Meyer, a Corresponding Member for 22 years,
Samuel Scudder, a Corresponding Member for 35 years.
The Recording Secretary pro lem reported that invitations had been
received by the Academy to send accredited delegates to centennials and
celebrations of the Natural History Society in Gorlitz, the National
University of Greece, the Sixteenth International Congress of Oriental-
ists and the Eighteenth International Congress of Americanists. Council
will take steps to ascertain whether any foreign or corresponding mem-
bers of the Academy are likely to be present at such celebrations to serve
as accredited delegates.
Council also reported favorable consummation of the negotiations with
the St. Louis Academy of Sciences for the mutual exchange of publica-
tions. Similar arrangements are to be taken up with the California
Academy of Sciences and the Chicago Academy of Sciences.
The Recording Secretary pro tem reported that the President had
appointed a committee consisting of Professors James F. Kemp and
Henry E. Crampton to prepare a suitable minute relative to the recent
decease of Mrs. Esther Herrman, to be spread upon the minutes of the
Academy and to be sent to the relatives of Mrs. Herrman. Professor
Kemp thereupon presented the following minute:
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 209
The death of Mrs. Esther Herrman the past summer has removed from the
circle of the New York Academy of Sciences one of its oldest members and one
of its most generous supporters. Mrs. Herrman was elected in 1881, and has
thus for full thirty years been a member and patron. Thirty years ago, the
Academy was divided into three classes: members, patrons and subscribers to
the building fund. The last named group reminds us of the ambitions which
had been cherished that the Academy should possess its own home. When,
some fifteen years after, the movement under the guidance of the Scientific
Alliance took on new life and vigor, Mrs. Herrman contributed the extremely
generous sum of ten thousand dollars toward the fund. As years followed,
however, it seemed impossible to complete the large sum required, and when
the present close affiliation with the American Museum of Natural History
became established, the need of a permanent meeting place no longer existed.
Mrs. Herrman then permitted the fund to become an endowment whose income
should be applied by the Council of the Academy in the form of grants for
research. In this form, the Esther Herrman fund is administered, and will for
all the future keep the memory of the generous donor ever living in the minds
of our members.
Mrs. Herrman was active in many other good works and societies in the
City. Universally beloved for her great kindness and profoundly esteemed for
the intelligent interest which she took in the various organizations with which
she was connected, she was one of the large-hearted citizens who make up the
best life of the metropolis.
Therefore, be it resolved that this minute be spread upon the records of the
Academy and that the Secretary be instructed to transmit a copy to the family
of Mrs. Herrman.
Vice-President Kunz spoke briefly of the important work performed
by Dr. A. B. Meyer, whose death was reported upon.
The Academy then adjourned.
Henry HK. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary pro tem.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
9 OcToBER, 1911.
Section was called to order at 8:30 Pp. M. by Vice-President George F.
Kunz, twenty members and visitors being present.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap-
proved.
There being no special business, the regular scientific programme as
announced was presented :
D. D. Condit, THE SANDS OF OHIO.
Charles P. Berkey, ProMINENT STRUCTURE OF THE NORTHERN MAr-
GIN OF THE HIGHLANDS.
A, W, Grabau, SomME STRUCTURAL FEATURES OF THE HELDERBERG
FRONT,
210 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Condit’s paper was read by Professor James F. Kemp. A very
large number of sands had been studied by Mr. Condit in considerable
detail, especially for type of grain and range in mineralogic composition.
It seems to establish that sands of the same origin or general source have
definite characteristics which distinguish them from others. Comparison
of these types of sands has led the author to conclude that the very
general absence of certain metamorphic mineral grains, such as garnet,
from the earlier sands may have a deeper significance. He suggests that
their absence may mean that the metamorphic products are of later date.
Remarks were made by Dr. Charles P. Berkey, in which attention was
called to the sweeping nature of the conclusion suggested by Mr. Condit
and pointing out other possible reasons for such widespread failure of the
metamorphic grains.
Dr. George F. Kunz remarked the wide range of specific gravities
represented in the list of minerals determined by Mr. Condit and drew
attention to the differences of behavior that this would bring about in the
processes of assorting and deposition.
Professor A. W. Grabau called special attention to the part of the
paper dealing with size of grains and evidence of their wear and em-
phasized the work of wind in connection with the development of the
great sandstone formations.
Dr. Berkey gave special attention to the results of recent studies in
the Moodna Valley and adjacent ground. The great thrust which passes
through Cornwall on the Hudson was classified, and some of the data
bearing upon its importance and the amount of displacement involved
were given. It is the author’s opinion that a total displacement of 2,000
feet or more is indicated by conditions at this fault. Lantern slides of the
fault were shown. Remarks were made by Professor J. F. Kemp.
Professor Grabau described and illustrated the complex structure in-
cluding faults and folds as recently determined by him in the Helderberg
limestone strata near Catskill. Diagrams showing reconstructions of the
formational positions were shown.
The Section then adjourned.
CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Secretary.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 211
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
16 OctoBErR, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. m., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas pre-
siding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap-
proved.
The meeting was devoted to the following illustrated lecture:
Charles H. Townsend, THe VoyaGe oF THE Albatross TO THE GULF OF
CALIFORNIA.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
In the spring of 1911, the Albatross, under the direction of Dr.
Townsend, Director of the New York Aquarium, made a natural history
survey of the Gulf of California. Much valuable information was ob-
tained bearing on the oceanography and the general biology of this region,
and especially the deep-sea forms. After stating that the American
Museum of Natural History, the New York Zodlogical Society, the New
York Botanical Garden and the United States National Museum codper-
ated in the voyage of the Albatross by special arrangement with the U. 8.
Bureau of Fisheries, Dr. Townsend gave a general account of the work
done. The Albatross sailed from San Diego. Twenty-six hauls of the
dredge were made, the deepest being 1,760 fathoms. Shore work was
carried on at 32 anchorages around the peninsula of Lower California
and at islands in the gulf. Important collections of mammals, birds,
reptiles and plants were made. A special study was made of the fishery
resources of the region. An interesting feature of the expedition was
the rediscovery of the supposed extinct elephant seal, Mirounga. About
100 of these animals were found at Guadeloupe Island, which is unin-
habited. Six yearlings were sent alive to the New York Aquarium, and
three large males and a female were secured for skins and skeletons.
The males were each 16 feet long. Excellent photographs were made.
Among the interesting things obtained by dredging were Harriotta and
Cyema, two deep-sea fishes not previously recorded from the Pacific.
The Section then adjourned.
L. Hussakor,
Secretary.
212 ANNALN NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
23 OctToBER, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
William Campbell, Some RecENT DEVELOPMENTS IN METALLURGY.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Professor Campbell, starting with the definitions of metallurgy and
metallography, first discussed the structure of metals and the effect of
annealing such material as drawn or rolled nickel contrasted with that of
very low carbon steel (Stead’s Brittleness). The modern classification of
alloys, according to solubility in the liquid and solid states, was illustrated
with examples such as monel metal, the brasses, the lead-tin solders and
the lead-antimony group. Changes in the solid state were shown by the
bronzes with Shepherd’s diagram; iron and steel with the various dia-
grams from the Rooseboom-Roberts Austen to Upton; the effect of heat-
treatment, hardening and tempering. The ternary alloys were illustrated
by the white metals, lead tin antimony, tin antimony copper; by German
silver, plastic and phospher bronzes, ete. Finally the work of Friederich
on sulphides and arsenides and of the Geo-Physical Laboratory on sili-
cates was summarized.
The Section then adjourned. Epwarp J. THATCHER,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
30 OcToBER, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Gen. James Wilson Grant presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
Marshall H. Saville, TRAVELS IN THE LAKE REGION OF NORTHERN
Ecuapbor.
The Section then adjourned.
F, LyMan WELLS,
Secretary.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 213
BUSINESS MEETING.
6 NoveMBER, 1911.
The Academy met at 8:25 Pp. M. at the American Museum of Natural
History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President
Boas.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
The Recording Secretary reported the following deaths:
Elliott C. Smith, Active Member for 6 years,
The Recording Secretary also reported the acceptance of an invitation
to participate in and send delegates to the Eighth International Con-
gress of Applied Chemistry.
The Recording Secretary spoke of the desirability of the Academy be-
coming a member of the Seismological Society of America, and on
motion it was voted to refer the matter with approval to the Council for
action.
The Academy then adjourned.
EpMuND Oris Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
6 NovEMBER, 1911.
Section met at 8:35 p. m., Vice-President George F. Kunz presiding,
twenty-five members and visitors being present.
The minutes of the iast meeting of the Section were read and ap-
proved.
The following programme was then offered :
George F. Kunz, ON THE OCCURRENCE OF OPAL IN NORTHERN NEVADA
AND IDAHO.
After the discussion of Dr. Kunz’s paper, several brief accounts of
scientific observations were made by members of the Section. Dr. E. O.
Hovey gave a preliminary note on Meteor Crater, or “Coon Butte,”
Arizona. This was based on a personal visit recently made by Dr.
Hovey. The view that this remarkable depression has been formed by
meteor impact is believed to account for the facts observed on the ground.
Remarks were made by Professor Martin calling attention to Mr. Gil-
bert’s impact theory for the origin of lunar craters also.
944 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Professor Kemp called attention to Mr. Gilbert’s experimental work
on the forms of wounds that can be made by impact of clay pellets
against a clay background.
Yecent discoveries of shell remains buried beneath the drift of Lower
Manhattan Island were noted by Professor J. F. Kemp.
At the close of this scientific programme the required business of the
Section was taken up.
Dr. Hovey nominated and Professor Kemp seconded Professor J. E.
Woodman, of New York University, as chairman of the Section and
Vice-President of the Academy. After the casting of the ballot of the
Section, Professor Woodman was declared the nominee to be recom-
mended to the Council. .
Dr. C. P. Berkey was nominated and elected Secretary of the Section.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Dr. Kunz described the finds of opal and the characteristics of the
gem and showed cut specimens. He said in abstract: For the past
twenty-five years, there have been found over quite a region at the
juncture of southwest Idaho, southeast Oregon and northern Nevada
small specimens of opal as float in various parts of the region. Opals
from Drewsey, Oregon, have been described by the writer and also
specimens from Washington State, the opal being found quite a dis-
tance to the north. In 1889, there was sent to New York a specimen of
opal one inch long, half an inch wide and one-quarter of an inch thick
that was good fire opal: a drift pebble, either out of some gravels or a
river bed. The color was excellent and quite equal to the pale yellow fire
opal from Queretaro, Mexico.
About three years ago, some specimens of opal were found in northern
Nevada, at a point west of the Santa Rosa Mountains. This was of
what is known as the fire-opal variety, not precious opal such as was
found in Washington State; indeed, it rather resembled certain types of
the Mexican opal from the State of Queretaro. Of these Nevada opals,
some represent the absolutely transparent, pellucid type, either with
large flames of color, or else with a smaller harlequin flaking. These
change perceptibly into pale yellow, yellow brown, brown, and sometimes
they are only sub-translucent but with a great play of color which changes
finally into black. A number of shades include a black, strongly re-
sembling the hue of certain types of crude petroleum, or that of the
darker types of Burman or Roumanian amber.
More recently, another locality has been found eight miles from that
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 215
above noted. This has furnished a number of specimens remarkable for
their large flames of red, strongly resembling lumachella marble. A
number of these are lusterless, and many of them are more or less
cracked, partly due to the fact that they have a large water content, and
partly because a number of them have been found very near the surface.
In some respects, the formation resembles the deposit discovered in
White Cliffs, New South Wales, where some of the opals are pseudo-
morphs, being opals after wood or other objects. There was a newer find
in 1911, a limb of a tree measuring fifty centimeters, or nearly two feet,
in length and eight centimeters across; this was entirely changed to
opal; the outer parts were very brilliant, whereas the center was of the
dull, common opal variety. Some of the opals are equal to the finest
Mexican material, the colorless and a number of new varieties.
In nearly every instance, these masses are found in decomposed vol-
canic rock, or in ash that has hardened. Apparently there must have
been a later flow of opaline waters to change them to this form. The
deposit is west of the Santa Rosa Mountains and near the Trout Forest
Range and the Pine Forest Range. Some of the stones cut several years
ago still hold their color, but it is possible that a number of them may
not be of the more durable type. ‘This is the most interesting occurrence
of opal that has yet been noted in the United States. The deposit found
in 1909 was traced to a depth of 16 feet, whereas the opalized tree and
later deposits above mentioned were found at a depth of only two feet.
There have at various times come to me various opal from Lovelock,
in the southern part of Humboldt Co., Nevada, and wood opal from
the northeastern part of Humboldt Co.; also opal in concretionary masses
from Austin in the southeastern corner of Lander County, as well as from
Caldwell, Idaho, Rockville and Score Creek, Owhyhee County, Idaho.
There was opal also from Clover Creek, Lincoln County, in the Snake
River region in the southwestern part of Idaho and from Baker and
Durkee in Oregon, Walla Walla, Douglas County, and Whelan near
Mexico, Idaho, as well as near the Salmon River. This furnished the
finest precious opal that has been found on the continent, the opal oc-
curring as nodules in a very hard trachitic rock resembling the rock in
which the precious opal is found in Hungary. A single stone was worth
one thousand dollars. An impure variety has been found in Dunsmuir,
Siskiyou Co., northern California. Opal is also found in the desert
near Reno, and it is possible that it may be found in many places near
there, both in excellent gem varieties as well as the finer qualities. Re-
marks were made by Professor Martin.
The Section then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Secretary.
216 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
13 NOVEMBER, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
Dr. Frederic A. Lucas was nominated for Vice-President of the Acad-
emy and Chairman of the Section for 1912.
Dr. W. K. Gregory was elected Secretary of the Section for 1912.
The following programme was then offered:
W. K. Gregory, FurRTHER NOTES ON THE EVOLUTION OF PAIRED FINS.
C. William Beebe, Nores ON A PHEASANT EXPEDITION TO ASIA.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Gregory said in abstract: The problem under consideration is a
phase of vertebrate phylogeny and should be studied in connection with
this larger problem. In very early acquiring myotomes, the ancestral
vertebrates gained a means of locomotion, by lateral flexures of the body,
that was more efficient than movement by means of ciliated epidermis.
The earliest vertebrates probably fed on microscopic particles obtained
by ciliary ingestion. ‘The Upper Silurian Birkenia of Traquair ap-
parently had no biting jaws and may have sucked in small food particles,
like the larval lamprey. Well-preserved material showed that none of
the Ostracoderms had cartilage jaws or teeth, but the dermal plaques
around the oral hood sometimes functioned as jaws. ‘Typically carniv-
orous habits, involving true cartilage jaws, true teeth and both paired
and median fins, are first known in the Acanthodian sharks, of the
Upper Silurian and Devonian. In brief, fins of all kinds, conditioned in
their first appearance by the presence of myotomes, were evolved as an
incident in the general transformation of acraniate minute forms, with
ciliary ingestion, into well-cephalized fishes of carnivorous habits. The
speaker reviewed the evidence for the “fin-fold” theory in the different
groups and stated some apparently new objections to the “gill arch”
theory. He cited evidence tending to show that the various paddle-like
types of paired fins with widely protruded basal cartilages had evolved
from fin folds independently in the sharks, Crossopterygians and
Dipnoans.
The paper was illustrated with lantern slides.
Mr. Beebe gave a short talk, illustrated with lantern slides, on the
recent trip which he and Mrs. Beebe made around the world in search of
RECORDS OF MERTINGS 914
material for a monograph of the Phasianide. This expedition was made
under the auspices of the New York Zodlogical Society and at the sug-
gestion and by the financial support of Col. Anthony R. Kuser. In the
short time at his disposal, he was able to touch only upon Ceylon and the
Himalayas. In Ceylon, the junglefowl peculiar to the island and the
India peafowl were studied and their nests and eggs found, and in the
Himalayas every genus of pheasant was investigated, from Genneus
melanonotus at six thousand feet, to /thaginis cruentus at an elevation
of fourteen thousand feet.
The three most important points brought out were the tremendous
economic importance of this grown, our ignorance of their ecology and
the rapidity of their extermination.
The Section then adjourned. L. HussaKor,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
20 NOVEMBER, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap-
proved.
Prof. Charles Lane Poor was nominated for Vice-President of the
Academy and Chairman of the Section for 1912.
Prof. F. M. Pedersen was elected Secretary of the Section for 1912.
The Section then adjourned.
EDWARD J. THATCHER,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND: PSYCHOLOGY.
2% NovEMBER, 1911.
Section met in conjunction with the New York Branch of the Ameri-
can Psychological Association, at 8:15 P. M.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap-
proved.
The following programme was offered:
D. O. Lyon, THE RELATION OF THE QUICKNESS OF LEARNING
TO RETENTIVENESS.
H. L. Hollingsworth, THE AcTION oF PHARMACOLOGICAL AGENTS AS
AN AID IN THE CLASSIFICATION OF MENTAL
PROCESSES,
918 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
8.8. Colvin, INVESTIGATIONS IN PROGRESS IN THE PSYCHO-
LOGICAL LABORATORY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
ILLINOIS.
J. W. Todd, REACTION TO SIMULTANEOUS STIMULI.
D. E. Rice, VisuaL AcuITy UNDER LIGHTS OF DIFFERENT
CoLors.
A.T. Poffenberger, Reaction Time ror DIFFERENT RETINAL AREAS.
R. S. Woodworth, CORRELATIONS OF ASSOCIATION TESTS.
G. C. Meyers, EXPERIMENTS ON INCIDENTAL MEMorY.
The Section then adjourned.
F. Lyman WELLS,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
4 DECEMBER, 1911.
The Academy met at 8:20 p. mM. at the American Museum of Natural
llistory, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President
Boas.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved.
The following candidates for membership in the Academy, recom-
mended by Council, were duly elected:
ActTIvVE MEMBERSHIP.
Dr. Joseph Byrne, 29 West 61st Street,
George Borup, New Haven, Conn.
ASSOCIATE MEMBERSHIP.
C. C. Mook, Metuchen, N. J.
The Academy then adjourned.
EpMuND Ot1s Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND. MINERALOGY.
4. DecEMBER, 1911.
Section met at 8:25 p. M., Vice-President George F. Kunz presiding.
The reading of the minutes of the last meeting of the Section was dis-
pensed. with.
The following programme was then offered:
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 219
H. E. Crampton, GroLocicaL OBSERVATIONS ON THE REGION OF THE
KAITEUR FALLs AND Mt. Roraima, BRITISH GUIANA.
Victor Ziegler, THE SILICEOUS OOLITES or CENTRAL PENNSYLVANIA.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
The expedition described by Professor Crampton was undertaken for
biologic rather than geologic exploration, and a great number of most
interesting geological observations were made and photographs were
shown covering the region seldom reached by white travellers. The gen-
eral structure of the region was explained, and the general physiographic
features were described in a very instructive way. Remarks were made
and questions were asked by Dr. Kunz and Professors Kemp and Wood-
man.
Dr. Ziegler’s paper was read by Dr. Berkey in the absence of the au-
thor. The discussion covered a summary of previous work on siliceous
odlites, their occurrence and distribution, detailed sections of the rock
formations and petrographic descriptions, with microphotographic illus-
trations and a discussion of the origin of the odlites.
The Section then adjourned.
CHARLES P. BERKEY,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
11 December, 1911.
Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved.
The following programme was then offered:
Henry E. Crampton, Explorations IN GUIANA AND BRAZIL.
W. K. Gregory, NoTES ON THE ORIGIN OF PAIRED Limes OF TER-
RESTRIAL VERTEBRATES.
e:
Lane *
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Crampton gave an account of a biological survey he made °
during the past summer from Georgetown, on the coast of British Guiana,
to the mountains of Roraima—the tableland that stands at the junction
of Brazil, Venezuela and British Guiana. The paper was illustrated with
lantern slides.
Dr. Gregory said in abstract: In the problem of the origin of the
Tetrapod limbs, no homological value should be attached to Klaatsch’s
99() ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
comparisons between the pectoral paddles of Polypterus and the fore
limb of Urodeles until the phylogenetic relations of Polypterus to the
Devonian Osteolepida and of the latter to the Amphibia has been evalu-
ated, at least provisionally. Similarly, no homological value should be
attached to the limb-like form and functions of the paddles of Ceratodus
until the relationship of the latter to the Devonian Dipnoans and Osteo-
lepida has been taken into account. That the Dipnoi are related to the
Osteolepida is indicated especially by the agreement in certain histologi-
eal characters of the teeth and scales, in the character of the median and
paired fins, etc. If the Amphibia came off from this Pre-Devonian
Osteolepid-Dipnoan stem, the hiatus in both the geological record and in
the evolutionary sequence is a great one. I feel that there was cumula-
tive evidence for the view that the Amphibia has been derived from fishes
of some sort and more particularly that these fishes possess the following
characters: functional gills and “lungs,” homologous with those of Dipnoi
and Crossopterygii, chondrocranium covered with bones having the same
ultimate derivation as the scales, skull elements very largely correspond-
ing with those of Ganoids but probably independently evolved, opercular
bone reduced or absent, preoperculum giving rise to the true squamosal
of Tetrapods (overlapping the quadrate), hyomandibular large, giving
rise to the columella auris, scales without ganoine, primary shoulder
girdle and pelvis becoming bony, body short, head large depressed, noto-
chord persistent, fore and hind paddles similar in form and function,
median and caudal fin reduced. A detailed comparison of the shoulder
girdle and pectoral paddle of one of the Rhizodonts, the Sauripterus of
Hall, with those of other fishes and Tetrapods leads to the following
provisional comparisons:
Sauripterus Tetrapod
“Infraclavicle” (clavicle of Oegenbaur) Clavicle
“Clavicle” (Cleithrum of Oegenbaur) Cleithrum
Scapulo-coracoid Scapulo-coracoid
Single “basal piece” Humerus
“Basals” collectively Fore arm and carpus
“Radials” collectively Digits
In view of the marked differences, however, in the skull between the
Rhizodonts and the Amphibia, we cannot say whether these resemblances
are convergent or homogenetic. The paper was illustrated with lantern
slides.
The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor,
Secretary.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS Oil
ANNUAL MEETING.
18 December, 1911.
The Academy met for the Annual Meeting on Monday, 18 December,
1911, at the Hotel Endicott, at the close of the annual dinner, Vice-
President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas.
The minutes of the last Annual Meeting, 19 December, 1910, were
read and approved.
Reports were presented by the Corresponding Secretary, the Recording
Secretary, the Librarian and the Editor, all of which, on motion, were
ordered received and placed on file. They are published herewith.
The Treasurer read his detailed report, showing a net cash balance of
$1,356.58 on hand at the close of business, 30 November, 1911. On
motion, this report was received and referred to the Finance Committee
for audit.
The following candidates for honorary membership and fellowship,
recommended by Council, were duly elected :
Honorary MEMBERS.
Prof. Hermann Credner, Geologist, University of Leipzig, Leipzig,
Germany, presented by Prof. J. J. Stevenson.
Prof. Ernst Mach, Physicist, University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria,
presented by Dr. R. H. Lowie.
Prof. Edward B. Poulton, Biologist, University of Oxford, Oxford,
England, presented by Prof. Bashford Dean.
FELLOWS.
Prof. Charles R. Eastman, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Prof. F. M. Pedersen, College of the City of New York, New York.
The Academy then proceeded to the election of officers for the year
1912. The ballots prepared by the Council in accordance with the By-
Laws were distributed. On motion, it was unanimously voted that the
Recording Secretary cast one ballot for the entire list nominated by the
Council. This was done, and they were declared elected, more than the
requisite number of members and fellows entitled to vote being present :
999 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
President, Emerson MoMILLIN.
Vice-Presidents, J. Eomunp WoopMAN (Section of Geology and Miner-
alogy), Freperic A. Lucas (Section of Biology), CHARLES LANE Poor
(Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry), R. 8. WoopwortH
(Section of Anthropology and Psychology).
Corresponding Secretary, Henry KH. CRAMPTON.
Recording Secretary, EpMuND OTIs Hovey.
Treasurer, CHARLES F’. Cox.
Librarian, RaLPH W. Tower.
Editor, Epmunp OT1s Hovey.
Councilors (to serve 3 years), CHARLES P. BeRKEY, CLARK WISSLER.
Finance Committee, Emerson McMittin, F. 8. Len, G. F. Kunz.
At the close of the elections, the Recording Secretary read the address
of the retiring President, Professor Franz Boas, upon “The History of
the American Race.”
After the reading of the presidential address, Mr. George Borup, a
graduate student at Yale University, related a few of his most interesting
experiences in connection with Admiral Peary’s North Polar Expedition
of 1908-1909. At the close of his remarks, Mr. Borup gave a concise and
illuminating résumé of the scientific problems remaining to be studied
in the North, including the actual visiting of Crocker Land, the land
which Peary saw from Grant Land in 1906 but which lay too far to the
westward for him to visit. Mr. Borup’s remarks were illustrated with
lantern slide views.
The Academy then adjourned.
EpmunpD Otis Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.
We have lost by death during the past year the following Honorary
Members :
Sir Francis Galton, elected in 1910,
G. Johnstone Stoney, elected in 1904,
and the following Corresponding Members:
A. B. Meyer, elected in 1890,
Samuel H. Scudder, elected in 1876.
There are at present upon our rolls 47 Honorary Members and 127
Corresponding Members.
Respectfully submitted,
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Corresponding Secretary.
RECORDS OF MEETINGS 223
REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.
During the year 1911, the Academy held 8 business meetings and 27
sectional meetings, at which 61 stated papers were presented on the fol-
lowing subjects :
Geology, 14 papers; Mineralogy, 5 papers; Biology, 14 papers; Anthro-
pology, 3 papers; Ethnology, 2 papers; Psychology, 16 papers; Physics,
6 papers; Chemistry, 1 paper.
Two public lectures have been given at the American Museum to the
members of the Academy and the Affiliated Societies and their friends,
as follows:
“Recent Celestial Photographs with a Sixty-Inch Reflector of the
Mount Wilson Observatory.” By G. W. Ritchie.
“The Depths of the Sea.” By Sir John Murray.
At the present time, the membership of the Academy includes 502
Active Members, 19 of whom are Associate Members, 120 Fellows, 90
Life Members and 11 Patrons. The election of 3 Fellows is pending.
There have been 10 deaths during the year, 26 resignations have become
effective, 7 names have been dropped from the roll on account of non-
payment of dues, 1 name has been transferred to the list of Life Members
and 1 has been transferred to the list of Non-Resident Members. Nine
new members have been elected during the year. As the membership of
the Academy a year ago was 538, there has been a net loss of 36 during
the year 1911. Announcement is made with regret of the loss by death
of the following members:
Bernard G. Amend, Active Member for 45 years,
William G. Davies, Active Member for 35 years,
C. A. Herter, Active Member for 17 years,
Mrs. Esther Herrman, Patron for 30 years,
James J. Higginson, Active Member for 4 years,
John S. Huyler, Active Member for 6 years,
R. P. Lounsberry, Active Member for 6 years,
Col. J. J. MeCook, Life Member for 15 years,
Mrs. A. K. Nimick, Life Member for 4 years,
Hon. J. H. Robb, Active Member for 3 years,
Charles Senff, Patron for 16 years.
W. H. J. Sieberg, Active Member for 34 years,
Elliott C. Smith, Active Member for 4 years,
Miss P. Caroline Swords, Life Member for 1 vear,
A. H. Wellington, Active Member for 4 years,
Rey. J. L. Zabriskie, Active Member for 1 year.
Respectfully submitted, EpMunpD Ot1s Hovey,
Recording Secretary.
294. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.
The library of the New York Academy of Sciences has received during
the year ending December, 1911, through exchange and donation, 375
volumes and 1720 numbers. Important lacune have been received from
the Tiflisser Physikalischen Observatorium, the Provincial Utrechtsch
Genootschap, L’Académie Imperiale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts
de Lyon, the North of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical
Engineers, the Real Academia de Ciencias y Artes de Barcelona, the
Physikalisch-Medicinische Gesellschaft zu Wiirzburg and the Naturhis-
torisk Forening 1 Kjobenhavn. Special acknowledgments are herewith
made to these six institutions for their generosity and assistance in sup-
plying their valuable and much needed publications.
Respectfully submitted, RautpH W. Tower,
Inbrarian.
REPORT OF THE EDITOR.
The Editor reports that during the past fiscal year there were issued
Part III, completing Volume XX, and pages 1-175 of Volume XXI.
Respectfully submitted, EpmunpD Otis Hovey,
Editor.
REPORT OF THE TREASURER.
RECEIPTS.
DECEMBER 1, 1910—NoOVEMBER 30, 1911.
Cashvon hand. December. 1) 1910. c. oe o ecient toc cee sey a $3,259.74
Income from investments:
Interest on mortgages on New York City real estate... $860.00
Interest on railroad and other bonds................ 1,260.00
Interest onubaniabalancesaeene asec 77.08
2,197.08
uife membership feehs 44.0 s coeds 6 ae eres rte oe teks chien arene 100.00
Active membership) duwes, WOON. ye. ei ciee sree cieeeneeshe ene e $45.00
- % MONO 8E/5 Bethe sie oe Aes = 165.00
* $6 NOW esac ta arsisnageiels oc Stee eeeaens 3,255.00
3,465 .00
Associate membership auesy 101 Osis secre cieieeitcreeienine: 6.00
Ce ee (2) [0 Aen en mien Nia A .cla Sick 39.00
45.00
Sales: of publMeations sis OSes Falke eles Ore edt epee etree reieeaveroi ieee 154.24
Subseriptions:toranntiall dimmer ey totic coker toro eee etene ae eee eee 106.00
Totals... of Fe Me Fee ak SERN eee) eee hr $9,327.06
RECORDS OF MEETINGS
DISBURSEMENTS.
DECEMBER 1, 1910—NovEMBER 30, 1911.
iPuplicanonssony account, of Ammals: .....ccccs ce cece sere
ECT CRELOME Ole PESAULLOLUI arene acm ctotors y's sites © sale. e. o1e/e 0 | Sle iane s/oremieie cere ei
RVECOLMIN Se NCCLEbALYASHEXPCNSES). o.6 cic sisrasic'e «6 eieisels s aie parelselid aeisinoen
WVECORMING NeCretaryes: AllOWANCE.. che aw piiec els © oe chee cele clea siete
WMECHUNE COMM CEC Mercreiers toe susr ch = ars (ect stece:Sie-cacs eye 0: bile ele. o owe sues Bul ele
Generale xp NGOS wert eke eet oars) o1cces okenaiaTei\s''s) «etre, eh averse ofele cuetetelere mil
HSther Herrman nesecarchy bund (erants)) .s6. ococ0 sce s «cece ence
PLC AAQUATTEESE © OMIM TELCO sere sc ccs cere Gleam 6 ss1 6s: 6< rare slat oveye aiteeveveratiacrart
PAINT IMEC HINT OFAN) Gg OTY: Seles ain! s cyeiers'e avae dco w » oie’ severe siete clef eran
Purchase of bonds and commission
imterest charzefon! bonds purchased. si.5.. 556.6566 bese as
GASH POMS MATT enarsrssc ate letetate iaretate eiarsicrsrehare ci sieia bo Sos. Sieve. sm she eiave Sela eis
BALANCE SHEET, NOVEMBER 30, 1911.
Investments (cost) ........ $41,656.25 Permanent Fund
Cashvonwhandpeacaceeaces < 1,356.58 Publication Fund
Audubon Fund ..
Esther Herrman Research
IMDWVOl Ss oop noes
John Strong
©/a. she, eset ah wie
a a}m] 0] .em)! s/o, s\ os @) (a ele) 6] 6 6c) ee ae: a ealelalalels
eo) oe)<o («) a.m se
Newberry
HUNG sc esos tr ee
Income Permanent Fund...
Income Audubon Fund.....
Income Esther
VO TUSYO ee elo Se
Income Newberry
$43,012.83
3 JANUARY, 1912.
Examined and found to be correct,
CHARLES F. Cox,
FREDERIC S. LEE,
GEORGE F.. Kunz,
Auditing Committee.
Herrman
ry
IMGs oc
225
$2,045.3
510.
1,000.
1,565.
202.
1,755.
396.
$43,012.
"
iy ; [pai Aaah sl ii apd a LP
Ax eat ai, ane 7
; * 7 ud thee AD iri 1) ee irs? ry
; ess - : Lay “hal
| Pra to ee a, a
SF Ee ees FU oh ites
j ; ie =, » bed eT) *T
¢ »'t 4 am a) id eee re “hls
a fe ul ue, vf
y *s
4 ‘ ae i » 4 MT
( \ 7
eS
4a bby 7
' 4 y ou
} 1
‘ou balsa ’ hie 9
i i j wphy i
rh
5
;
“) ri
me
i
= a Ty.
; .
ny
va
ay Lf «
‘
: ;
{
F
i
(«
4
°
I
7
j
i ; «
t
a , ,
Ge 5
\ A
oh ;
.
THE ORGANIZATION OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES
THE ORIGINAL CHARTER
AN ACT TO INCORPORATE THE
LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK
Passed April 20, 1818
WHEREAS, The members of the Lyceum of Natural History have peti-
tioned for an act of incorporation, and the Legislature, impressed with the
importance of the study of Natural History, as connected with the wants,
the comforts and the happiness of mankind, and conceiving it their duty
to encourage all laudable attempts to promote the progress of science in
this State—therefore,
1. Be it enacted by the People of the State of New York represented in
Senate and Assembly, That Samuel L. Mitchill, Casper W. Eddy, Fred-
erick C. Schaeffer, Nathaniel Paulding, William Cooper, Benjamin P.
Kissam, John Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James
Clements and James Pierce, and such other persons as now are, and may
from time to time become members, shall be, and hereby are constituted a
body corporate and politic, by the name of LycEuM or NaTuraL History
IN THE Crry or New York, and that by that name they shall have per-
petual succession, and shall be persons capable of suing and being sued,
pleaded and being impleaded, answering and being answered unto, de-
fending and being defended, in all courts and places whatsoever ; and may
have a common seal, with power to alter the same from time to time; and
shall be capable of purchasing, taking, holding, and enjoying to them and
their successors, any real estate in fee simple or otherwise, and any goods,
chattels, and personal estate, and of selling, leasing, or otherwise dispos-
ing of said real or personal estate, or any part thereof, at their will and
pleasure: Provided always, that the clear annual value or income of such
real or personal estate shall not exceed the sum of five thousand dollars:
Provided, however, that the funds of the said Corporation shall be used
and appropriated to the promotion of the objects stated in the preamble
to this act, and those only.
2. And be it further enacted, That the said Society shall from time to
time, forever hereafter, have power to make, constitute, ordain, and estab-
lish such by-laws and regulations as they shall judge proper, for the elec-
(297)
998 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tion of their officers; for prescribing their respective functions, and the
mode of discharging the same ; for the admission of new members; for the
government of the officers and members thereof; for collecting annual
contributions from the members towards the funds thereof; for regulat-
ing the times and places of meeting of the said Society; for suspending.
or expelling such members as shall neglect or refuse to comply with the
by-laws or regulations, and for the managing or directing the affairs and
concerns of the said Society: Provided such by-laws and regulations be
not repugnant to the Constitution and laws of this State or of the United
States.
3. And be it further enacted, That the officers of the said Society-shall
consist of a President and two Vice-Presidents, a Corresponding Secre-
tary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer, and five Curators, and such
other officers as the Society may judge necessary; who shall be annually
chosen, and who shall continue in office for one year, or until others be
elected in their stead ; that if the annual election shall not be held at any
of the days for that purpose appointed, it shall be lawful to make such
election at any other day; and that five members of the said Society,
assembling at the place and time designated for that purpose by any by-
law or regulation of the Society, shall constitute a legal meeting thereof.
4. And be it further enacted, That Samuel L. Mitchill shall be the
President; Casper W. Eddy the First Vice-President; Frederick C.
Schaeffer the Second Vice-President; Nathaniel Paulding, Correspond-
ing Secretary; William Cooper, Recording Secretary; Benjamin P. Kis-
sam, Treasurer, and John Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V.
Knevels, James Clements, and James Pierce, Curators; severally to be
the first officers of the said Corporation, who shall hold their respective
offices until the twenty-third day of February next, and until others shall
be chosen in their places.
5. And be tt further enacted, That the present Constitution of the said
Association shall, after passing of this Act, continue to be the Constitu-
tion thereof; and that no alteration shall be made therein, unless by a
vote to that effect of three-fourths of the resident members, and upon the
request in writing of one-third of such resident members, and submitted
at least one month before any vote shall be taken thereupon.
State of New York, Secretary's Office.
I certiry the preceding to be a true copy of an original Act of the
Legislature of this State, on file in this Office.
ARCH’D CAMPBELL,
ALBANY, April 29, 1818, Dep. Sec’y.
ORGANIZATION 229
ORDER OF COURT
ORDER OF THE SUPREME COURT OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK
TO CHANGE THE NAME OF
THE LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE CITY OF
NEW YORK
TO
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
WHEREAS, in pursuance of the vote and proceedings of this Corpora-
tion to change the corporate name thereof from “The Lyceum of Natural
History in the City of New York” to “The New York Academy of Sci-
ences,” which vote and proceedings appear to record, an application has
been made in behalf of said Corporation to the Supreme Court of the
State of New York to iegalize and authorize such change, according to
the statute in such case provided, by Chittenden & Hubbard, acting as
the attorneys of the Corporation, and the said Supreme Court, on the 5th
day of January, 1876, made the following order upon such application in
the premises, viz:
At a special term of the Supreme
Court of the State of New York,
held at the Chambers thereof, in
the County Court House, in the
City of New York, the 5th day
of January, 1876:
Present—Hon. Gro. C. Barrett, Justice.
In the matter of the application of
the Lyceum of Natural History
in the City of New York to au-
thorize it to assume the corporate
name of the New York Academy
of Sciences.
On reading and filing the petition of the Lyceum of Natural History
in the City of New York, duly verified by John S. Newberry, the Presi-
dent and chief officer of said Corporation, to authorize it to assume the
corporate name of the New York Academy of Sciences, duly setting forth
33() ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the grounds of said application, and on reading and filing the affidavit of
Geo. W. Quackenbush, showing that notice of such application had been
duly published for six weeks in the State paper, to wit, The Albany
Evening Journal, and the affidavit of David S. Owen, showing that notice
of such application has also been duly published in the proper newspaper .
of the County of New York, in which county said Corporation had its
business office, to wit, in The Daily Register, by which it appears to my
satisfaction that such notice has been so published, and on reading and
filing the affidavits of Robert H. Browne and J. 8. Newberry, thereunto
annexed, by which it appears to my satisfaction that the application is
made in pursuance of a resolution of the managers of said Corporation to
that end named, and there appearing to me to be no reasonable objection
to said Corporation so changing its name as prayed in said petition: Now
on motion of Grosvenor 8. Hubbard, of Counsel for Petitioner, it is
Ordered, That the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New
York be and is hereby authorized to assume the corporate name of The
New York Academy of Sciences.
Indorsed: Filed January 5, 1876,
A copy. Wo. WaALtLsH, Clerk.
Resolution of THE AcaDrEMyY, accepting the order of the Court, passed
February 21, 1876
And whereas, The order hath been published as therein required, and
all the proceedings necessary to carry out the same have been had, There-
fore:
Resolved, That the foregoing order be and the same is hereby accepted
and adopted by this Corporation, and that in conformity therewith the
corporate name thereof, from and after the adoption of the vote and reso-
lution herein above referred to, be and the same is hereby declared to be
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
AMENDED CHARTER
Marcu 19, 1902
CHAPTER 181 oF THE Laws oF 1902
Aw Acr to amend chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of the laws of
eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled “An act to incorporate the Ly-
ceum of Natural History in the City of New York,” a Corporation now
known as The New York Academy of Sciences and to extend the powers
of said Corporation.
ORGANIZATION 231
(Became a law March 19, 1902, with the approval of the Governor.
Passed, three-fifths being present.)
The People of the State of New York, represented in Senate and As-
sembly, do enact as follows:
Section I. The Corporation incorporated by chapter one hundred
and ninety-seven of the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled
“An act to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of
New York,” and formerly known by that name, but now known as The
New York Academy of Sciences through change of name pursuant to
order made by the supreme court at the city and county of New York, on
January fifth, eighteen hundred and seventy-six, is hereby authorized and
empowered to raise money for, and to erect and maintain, a building in
the city of New York for its use, and in which also at its option other
scientific societies may be admitted and have their headquarters upon
such terms as said Corporation may make with them, portions of which
building may be also rented out by said Corporation for any lawful uses
for the purposes of obtaining income for the maintenance of such build-
ing and for the promotion of the objects of the Corporation ; to establish,
own, equip, and administer a public library, and a museum having es-
pecial reference to scientific subjects; to publish communications, trans-
actions, scientific works, and periodicals; to give scientific instruction by
lectures or otherwise; to encourage the advancement of scientific research
and discovery, by gifts of money, prizes, or other assistance thereto. The
‘building, or rooms, of said Corporation in the City of New York used
exclusively for library or scientific purposes shall be subject to the pro-
visions and be entitled to the benefits of subdivision seven of section four
of chapter nine hundred and eight of the laws of eighteen hundred and
ninety-six, as amended.
Section II. The said Corporation shall from time to time forever
hereafter have power to make, constitute, ordain, and establish such by-
laws and regulations as it shall judge proper for the election of its officers ;
for prescribing their respective functions, and the mode of discharging
the same; for the admission of new members; for the government of offi-
cers and members thereof; for collecting dues and contributions towards
the funds thereof; for regulating the times and places of meeting of said
Corporation ; for suspending or expelling such members as shall neglect
or refuse to comply with the by-laws or regulations, and for managing or.
directing the affairs or concerns of the said Corporation: and may from
time to time alter or modify its constitution, by-laws, rules, and regula-
tions.
939 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Section III. The officers of the said Corporation shall consist of a
president and two or more vice-presidents, a corresponding secretary, a
recording secretary, a treasurer, and such other officers as the Corporation
may judge necessary; who shall be chosen in the manner and for the
terms prescribed by the constitution of the said Corporation.
Section IV. The present constitution of the said Corporation shall,
after the passage of this act, continue to be the constitution thereof until
amended as herein provided. Such constitution as may be adopted by a
vote of not less than three-quarters of such resident members and fellows
of the said New York Academy of Sciences as shall be present at a meet-
ing thereof, called by the Recording Secretary for thet purpose, within
forty days after the passage of this act, by written notice duly mailed,
postage prepaid, and addressed to each fellow and resident member at
least ten days before such meeting, at his last known place of residence,
with street and number when known, which meeting shall be held within
three months after the passage of this act, shall be thereafter the consti-
tution of the said New York Academy of Sciences, subject to alteration
or amendment in the manner provided by such constitution.
Section V. The said Corporation shall have power to consolidate, to
unite, to co-operate, or to ally itself with any other society or association
in the city of New York organized for the promotion of the knowledge or
the study of any science, or of research therein, and for this purpose to
receive, hold, and administer real and personal property for the uses of
such consolidation, union, co-operation, or alliance subject to such terms
and regulations as may be agreed upon with such associations or societies.
Section VI. ‘This act shall take effect immediately.
STATE OF NEW YORK,
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE.
I have compared the preceding with the original law on file in this
office, and do hereby certify that the same is a correct transcript there-
from, and the whole of said original law.
Given under my hand and the seal of office of the Secretary of State,
at the city of Albany, this eighth day of April, in the year one thousand
nine hundred and two.
JoHN T. McDonoueu,
Secretary of State.
ORGANIZATION 933
CONSTITUTION
AporpreD, APRIL 24, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT TIMES
ARTICLE I. The name of this Corporation shall be The New York
Academy of Sciences. Its object shall be the advancement and diffusion
of scientific knowledge, and the center of its activities shall be in the City
of New York.
ARTICLE II. The Academy shall consist of five classes of members,
namely: Active Members, Fellows, Associate Members, Corresponding
Members and Honorary Members. Active Members shall be the members
of the Corporation who live in or near the City of New York, or who,
having removed to a distance, desire to retain their connection with the
Academy. Fellows shall be chosen from the Active Members in virtue of
their scientific attainments. Corresponding and Honorary Members shall
be chosen from among persons who have attained distinction in some
branch of science. The number of Corresponding Members shall not
exceed two hundred, and the number of Honorary Members shall not
exceed fifty.
ArTIcLE III. None but Fellows and Active Members who have paid
their dues up to and including the last fiscal year shall be entitled to vote
or to hold office in the Academy.
ArtIcLE IV. The officers of the Academy shall be a President, as
many Vice-Presidents as there are sections of the Academy, a Correspond-
ing Secretary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer, a Librarian, an Editor,
six elected Councilors and one additional Councilor from each allied
society or association. The annual election shall be held on the third
Monday in December, the officers then chosen to take office at the first
meeting in January following.
There shall also be elected at the same time a Finance Committee of
three.
ARTICLE V. The officers named in Article IV shall constitute a Coun-
cil, which shall be the executive body of the Academy with general control
over its affairs, including the power to fill ad interim any vacancies that
may occur in the offices. Past Presidents of the Academy shall be ez-
officio members of the Council.
ArTICLE VI. Societies organized for the study of any branch of
science may become allied with the New York Academy of Sciences by
consent of the Council. Members of allied societies may become Active
Members of the Academy by paying the Academy’s annual fee, but as
234 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
members of an allied society they shall be Associate Members with the
rights and privileges of other Associate Members, except the receipt of
its publications. Each allied society shall have the right to delegate one
of its members, who is also an Active Member of the Academy, to the
Council of the Academy, and such delegate shall have all the rights and
privileges of other Councilors.
ArticLte VII. The President and Vice-Presidents shall not be eligible
to more than one re-election until three years after retiring from office ;
the Secretaries and Treasurer shall be eligible to re-election without
limitation. The President, Vice-Presidents and Secretaries shall be Fel-
lows. The terms of office of elected Councilors shall be three years, and
these officers shall be so grouped that two, at least one of whom shall be a
Fellow, shall be elected and two retired each year. Councilors shall not
be eligible to re-election until after the expiration of one year.
ArticLe VIII. The election of officers shall be by ballot, and the can-
didates having the greatest number of votes shall be declared duly elected.
ArticLte IX. Ten members, the majority of whom shall be Fellows,
shall form a quorum at any meeting of the Academy at which business is
transacted.
ArticLeE X. The Academy shall establish by-laws, and may amend
them from time to time as therein provided.
ARTICLE XI. This Constitution may be amended by a vote of not less
than three-fourths of the fellows and three-fourths of the active members
present and voting at a regular business meeting of the Academy, pro-
vided that such amendment shall be publicly submitted in writing at the
preceding business meeting, and provided also that the Recording Secre-
tary shall send a notice of the proposed amendment at least ten days
before the meeting, at which a vote shall be taken, to each Fellow and
Active Member entitled to vote.
BY-LAWS
| As ADOPTED, OcTOBER 6, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT TIMES
CuHaApTer I
OFFICERS
1. President. It shall be the duty of the President to preside at the
business and special meetings of the Academy; he shall exercise the cus-
tomary duties of a presiding officer.
2. Vice-Presidents. In the absence of the President, the senior Vice-
President, in order of Fellowship, shall act as the presiding officer,
ORGANIZATION 235
3. Corresponding Secretary. The Corresponding Secretary shall keep
a corrected list of the Honorary and Corresponding Members, their titles
and addresses, and shall conduct all correspondence with them. He shall
make a report at the Annual Meeting.
4. Recording Secretary. The Recording Secretary shall keep the
minutes of the Academy proceedings; he shall have charge of all docu-
ments belonging to the Academy, and of its corporate seal, which he shall
affix and attest as directed by the Council; he shall keep a corrected list
of the Active Members and Fellows, and shall send them announcements
of the Meetings of the Academy ; he shall notify all Members and Fellows
of their election, and committees of their appointment; he shall give
notice to the Treasurer and to the Council of matters requiring their
action, and shall bring before the Academy business presented by the
Council. He shall make a report at the Annual Meeting.
5. Treasurer. The Treasurer shall have charge, under the direction
of the Council, of all moneys belonging to the Academy, and of their
investment. He shall receive all fees, dues and contributions to the
Academy, and any income that may accrue from property or investment ;
he shall report to the Council at its last meeting before the Annual Meet-
ing the names of members in arrears; he shall keep the property of the
Academy insured, and shall pay all debts against the Academy the dis-
charge of which shall be ordered by the Couneil. He shall report to the
Council from time to time the state of the finances, and at the Annual
Meeting shall report to the Academy the receipts and expenditures for
the entire year.
6. ILnbrarian. The Librarian shall have charge of the library, under
the general direction of the Library Committee of the Council, and shall
conduct all correspondence respecting exchanges of the Academy. He
shall make a report on the condition of the hbrary at the Annual Meeting.
7. Hditor. The editor shall have charge of the publications of the
Academy, under the general direction of the Publication Committee of
the Council. He’shall make a report on the condition of the publications
at the Annual Meeting.
CHAPTER II
COUNCIL
1. Meetings. The Council shall meet once a month, or at the call of
the President. It shall have general charge of the affairs of the Academy.
2. Quorum. Five members of the Council shall constitute a quorum.
3. Officers. The President, Vice-Presidents and Recording Secretary
of the Academy shall hold the same offices in the Council.
936 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
4. Committees. The Standing Committees of the Council shall be:
(1) an Executive Committee consisting of the President, Treasurer, and
Recording Secretary; (2) a Committee on Publication; (3) a Committee
on the Library, and such other committees as from time to time shall be
authorized by the Council. The action of these committees shall be sub-
ject to revision by the Council.
CHAPTER IIT
FINANCE COMMITTEE
The Finance Committee of the Academy shall audit the Annual Report
of the Treasurer, and shall report on financial questions whenever called
upon to do so by the Council.
CHAPTER IV
ELECTIONS
1. Actwe Members. (a) Active Members shall be nominated in writ-
ing to the Council by at least two Active Members or Fellows. If ap-
proved by the Council, they may be elected at the succeeding business
meeting.
(b) Any Active Member who, having removed to a distance from the
city of New York, shall nevertheless express a desire to retain his connec-
tion with the Academy, may be placed by vote of the Council on a list of
Non-Resident Members. Such members shall relinquish the full privi-
leges and obligations of Active Members. (Vide Chapters V and X.)
2. Associate Members. Workers in science may be elected to Associate
Membership for a period of two years in the manner prescribed for Active
Members. They shall not have the power to vote and shall not be eligible
to election as Fellows, but may receive the publications. At any time sub-
sequent to their election they may assume the full privileges of Active
Members by paying the dues of such Members.
3. Fellows, Corresponding Members and Honorary Members. Nomi-
nations for Fellows, Corresponding Members and Honorary Members
may be made in writing either to the Recording Secretary or to the
Council at its meeting prior to the Annual Meeting. If approved by the
Council, the nominees shall then be balloted for at the Annual Meeting.
4. Officers. Nominations for Officers, with the exception of Vice-
Presidents, may be sent in writing to the Recording Secretary, with the
name of the proposer, at any time not less than thirty days before the
Annual Meeting. Each section of the Academy shall nominate a candi-
ORGANIZATION 237
date for Vice-President, who, on election, shall be Chairman of the sec-
tion ; the names of such nominees shall be sent to the Recording Secretary
properly certified by the sectional secretaries, not less than thirty days
before the Annual Meeting. The Council shall then prepare a list which
shall be the regular ticket. This list shall be mailed to each Active Mem-
ber and Fellow at least one week before the Annual Meeting. But any
Active Member or Fellow entitled to vote shall be entitled to prepare and
vote another ticket.
CHAPTER V
DUES
1. Dues. The annual dues of Active Members and Fellows shall be
$10, payable in advance at the time of the Annual Meeting; but new
members elected after May 1, shall pay $5 for the remainder of the fiscal
year.
The annual dues of elected Associate Members shall be $3, payable in
advance at the time of the Annual Meeting.
Non-Resident Members shall be exempt from dues, so long as they shall
relinquish the privileges of Active Membership. (Vide Chapter X.)
2. Members in Arrears. If any Active Member or Fellow whose dues
remain unpaid for more than one year, shall neglect or refuse to pay the
same within three months after notification by the Treasurer, his name
may be erased from the rolls by vote of the Council. Upon payment of
his arrears, however, such person may be restored to Active Membership
or Fellowship by vote of the Council.
3. Renewal of Membership. Any Active Member or Fellow who shall
resign because of removal to a distance from the city of New York, or
any Non-Resident Member, may be restored by vote of the Council to
Active Membership or Fellowship at any time upon application.
CHAPTER VI
PATRONS, DONORS AND LIFE MEMBERS
1. Patrons. Any person contributing at one time $1,000 to the general
funds of the Academy shall be a Patron and, on election by the Council,
shall enjoy all the privileges of Active Members.
2. Donors. Any person contributing $50 or more annually to the
general funds of the Academy shall be termed a Donor and, on election
by the Council, shall enjoy all the privileges of an Active Memter.
3. Life Members. Any Active Member or Fellow contributing at one
time $100 to the general funds of the Academy shall be a Life Member
238 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
an | shall thereafter be exempt from annual dues; and any Active Mem-
bes or Fellow who has paid annual dues for twenty-five years or more
may, upon his written request, be made a life member and be exempt
from further payment of dues.
Cuapter VII
SECTIONS
1. Sections. Sections devoted to special branches of Science may he
established or discontinued by the Academy on the recommendation of
the Council. The present sections of the Academy are the Section of
Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry, the Section of Biology, the Section
of Geology and Mineralogy and the Section of Anthropology and Psy-
chology.
2. Organization. Tach section of the Academy shall have a Chairman
and a Secretary, who shall have charge of the meetings of their Section.
The regular election of these officers shall take place at the October or
November meeting of the section, the officers then chosen to take office at
the first meeting in January following.
3. Affiliation. Members of scientific societies affiliated with the
Academy, and members of the Scientific Alliance, or men of science intro-
duced by members of the Academy, may attend the meetings and present
papers under the general regulations of the Academy.
CHapter VIII
MEETINGS
- 1. Business Meetings. Business meetings of the Academy shall be
held on the first Monday of each month from October to May inclusive.
2. Sectional Meetings. Sectional meetings shall be held on Monday
evenings from October to May inclusive, and at such other times as the
Council may determine. The sectional meeting shall follow the business
meeting when both occur on the same evening.
3. Annual Meeting. The Annual Meeting shall be held on the third
Monday in December.
4. Special Meetings. A special meeting may be called by the Council,
provided one week’s notice be sent to each Active Member and Fellow,
stating the object of such meeting.
ORGANIZATION 239
CHAPTER IX
; ORDER OF BUSINESS
1. Business Meetings. The following shall be the order of procedure
at business meetings :
1. Minutes of the previous business meeting.
Report of the Council.
Reports of Committees.
Elections.
5. Other business.
2. Sectional Meetings. The following shall be the order of procedure
at sectional meetings:
1. Minutes of the preceding meeting of the section.
2. Presentation and discussion of papers.
3. Other scientific business.
3. Annual Meetings. The following shall be the order of procedure
at Annual Meetings:
1. Annual reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Recording
Secretary, Treasurer, Librarian, and Editor.
2. Election of Honorary Members, Corresponding Members, and
Fellows.
3. Election of officers for the ensuing year.
4. Annual address of the retiring President.
seme coc oes
CHAPTER X
PUBLICATIONS
1. Publications. The established publications of the Academy shall
be the Annals and the Memoirs. They shall be issued by the Editor
under the supervision of the Committee on Publications.
2. Distribution. One copy of all publications shall be sent to each
Patron, Life Member, Active Member and Fellow; provided, that upon
inquiry by the Editor such Members or Fellows shall signify treir desire
to receive them.
3. Publication Fund. Contributions may be received for the publica-
tion fund, and the income thereof shall be applied toward defraying the
expenses of the scientific publications of the Academy.
240) ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
CHAPTER XI
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. Debts. No debts shall be incurred on behalf of the Academy, unless
authorized by the Council.
2. Bills. All bills submitted to the Council must be certified as to
correctness by the officers incurring them.
3. Investments. All the permanent funds of the Academy shall be
invested in United States or in New York State securities or in first
mortgages on real estate, provided they shall not exceed sixty-five per
cent. of the value of the property, or in first-mortgage bonds of corpora-
tions which have paid dividends continuously on their common stock for
a period of not less than five years. All income from patron’s fees, life-
membership fees and donor’s fees shall be added to the permanent fund.
4. Expulsion, etc. Any Member or Fellow may be censured, sus-
pended or expelled, for violation of the Constitution or By-Laws, or for
any offence deemed sufficient, by a vote of three-fourths of the Members
and three-fourths of the Fellows present at any business meeting, provided
such action shall have been recommended by the Council at a previous
business meeting, and also, that one month’s notice of such recommenda-
tion and of the offence charged shall have been given the Member accused.
5. Changes in By-Laws. No alteration shall be made in these By-
Laws unless it shall have been submitted publicly in writing at a business
meeting, shall have been entered on the Minutes with the names of the
Members or Fellows proposing it, and shall be adopted by two-thirds of
the Members and Fellows present and voting at a subsequent business
meeting.
ELECTED.
1898.
1889.
1907.
1910.
TSOL.
1904.
LOL.
1899.
1876.
1902.
1901.
1876.
1901.
1898.
1909.
1889.
1909.
1894.
So.
1898.
1907.
1896.
1896.
1909.
1876.
1898.
1880.
1900.
Por.
1898.
1908.
1898.
1898.
1900.
- MEMBERSHIP OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
HONORARY MEMBERS
31 DEcEMBER, 1911
ARTHUR AUWERS, Berlin, Germany.
CHARLES Barrois, Lille, France.
Witi1aM Bareson, Cambridge, England.
THEODOR Boveri, Wiirzburg, Germany.
CHARLES VERNON Boys, London, England.
W. C. Broéecer, Christiana, Norway.
HERMANN CREDNER, Leipzig, Germany.
Sir Grorce Howarp Darwin, Cambridge, England.
W. Boyp Dawkins, Manchester, England.
Sir James Dewar, Cambridge, England.
Emit Fiscuer, Berlin, Germany.
Sir ARCHIBALD GEIKIE, Haslemere, Surrey, England.
JAMES GEIKIE, Edinburgh, Scotland.
Sir Davip Giz, London, England.
K. F. G6set, Munich, Germany.
GroRGE LINCOLN GooDALE, Cambridge, Mass.
PAUL VON GROTH, Munich, Germany.
Ernst HAcCKEL, Jena, Germany.
JULIUS HANN, Vienna, Austria.
GrorGcE W. Hit, West Nyack, N. Y.
Sir JosepH D. Hooxer, Kew, England.
Ampsrosius A. W. Huprecut, Utrecht, Netherlands.
Fevix Kuiern, Gottingen, Germany.
ALFRED LaAcrorx, Paris, France.
VIKTOR von Lang, Vienna, Austria.
E. Ray Lanxester, London, England.
Sir Norman Lockyer, London, England.
Franz Leypic. Tauber, Germany.
Ernst Macnu, Vienna, Austria.
Friptyor NANSEN, Christiana, Norway.
WILHELM OstTWALD, Gross-Bothen, Germany.
ALBRECHT PENOK, Berlin, Germany.
WILHELM PFEFFER, Leipzig, Germany.
EDWARD CHARLES PICKERING, Cambridge, Mass.
(241)
242
LECTED.
1900.
i aie
1901.
1899.
1898.
1887.
1887.
1904.
1908.
1896.
1900.
1904,
1907.
ToGo:
1904.
1904.
1883.
1898.
1891.
1890.
1899.
1876.
1899.
1898.
1878.
1867.
1897.
1899:
1874.
1884.
1894.
1874.
1876.
1898.
1876.
1891,
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCLENCES
JuLES Henri Poincare, Paris, France.
EpWARD BAaGNALL Poutron, Oxford, England.
Sir W1LLt1AmM Ramsay, London, England.
Lord RAYLEIGH, Witham, Essex, England.
Hans H. Reuscu, Christiana, Norway.
Sir Henry ENFIELD Roscor, London, England.
HernricH Rosensuscu, Heidelberg, Germany.
KARL VON DEN STEINEN, Berlin, Germany.
EDUARD STRASBURGER, Bonn, Germany.
JosEPH JOHN THOMSON, Cambridge, England.
Epwarp Burnett Ty tor, Oxford, England.
Hueco bE Vries, Amsterdam, Netherlands.
JAMES WarpD, Cambridge, England.
Aucust WEISSMANN, Freiburg, Germany.
WILHELM Wounpt, Leipzig, Germany.
FERDINAND ZIRKEL, Leipzig, Germany.
CORRESPONDING MEMBERS
31 DECEMBER, 1911
CHARLES ConraD Apsortt, Trenton, N. J.
Frank D. Apams, Montreal, Canada.
José G. AGuILerA, Mexico City, Mexico.
WituiAm Dr Wirr ALEXANDER, Honolulu, Hawau.
C. W. ANpbrEws, London, England.
JOHN Howarp APPLETON, Providence, R. I.
J. G. Baker, Kew, England.
Isaac Bactey Batrour, Edinburgh, Scotland.
ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, Washington, D. C.
Epwarp L. BertHoup, Golden, Colo.
HERBERT Bouton, Bristol, England.
G. A. BouLencrer, London, England.
T. S. BRANDEGEE, San Diego, Calif.
JoHN C. BRANNER, Stanford University, Calif.
Bonustay Brauner, Prague, Bohemia.
WILitiAM Brewster, Cambridge, Mass.
TEORGE JARVIS BrusH, New Haven, Conn.
T. C. CHAMBERLIN, Chicago, III.
FRANK WIGGLESWORTH CLARKE, Washington, D. C.
L. Cuerc, Ekaterinburg, Russia.
ELECTED.
1877.
1868.
1876.
1880.
1877.
1895.
1879.
1870.
1885.
1898.
1894.
1899.
1890.
rS99:
1876.
1880.
1869.
1879.
1879.
1885.
1899.
1879.
1870.
1858.
1865.
1888.
1868.
1883.
1869.
1898.
1882.
1867.
1900.
1890.
1896.
1875.
1899,
1876.
1876.
1888.
MEMBERSHIP 243
THEODORE B. Comstock, Los Angeles, Calif.
M. C. Cooxer, London, England.
H. B. CoRNWALL, Princeton, N. J.
CHARLES B. Cory, Boston, Mass.
JOSEPH CRAWFORD, Philadelphia, Pa.
Henry P. CusHine, Cleveland, O.
T. NeLSon DALE, Pittsfield, Mass.
WILLIAM HeEALey Datu, Washington, D. C.
EDWARD SALISBURY Dana, New Haven, Conn.
WituiAM M. Davis, Cambridge, Mass.
RUTHVEN DEANE, Chicago, II.
CHARLES D&PERET, Lyons, France.
ORVILLE A. DersBy, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.
Louris Do.1o, Brussels, Belgium.
Henry W. Exxiorr, Lakewood, O.
JoHN B. Exvxiott, New Orleans, La.
Francis E. ENGELHARDT, Syracuse, N. Y.
HerMAN L& Roy Farrcuitp, Rochester, N. Y.
FRIEDRICH BERNHARD Firtica, Marburg, Germany.
Lazarus Fietcuer, London, England.
EBERHARD FRAAS, Stuttgart, Germany.
REINHOLD FRITZGARTNER, Tegucigalpa, Honduras.
Grove K. GriBert, Washington, D. C.
THEODORE NICHOLAS GILL, Washington, D. C.
CHARLES A. GorssMAN, Amherst, Mass.
FraNK AusTIN GoocH, New Haven, Conn.
C. R. GREENLEAF, San Francisco, Calif.
Marquis ANTONIO DE GreGoRIO, Palermo, Sicily.
R. J. LECHMERE Guppy, Trinidad, British West Indies.
GrorcGE E. Hate, Mt. Wilson, Calif.
Baron Ernst von Hursse-Wartece, Lucerne, Switzerland.
C. H. Hircencocx, Honolulu, H. I.
Witi1am Henry Homes, Washington, D. C.
H. D. Hosxoup, Buenos Ayres, Argentine Republic.
J. P. Ipprnas, Brinklow, Md.
MaAtLverN W. Ites, Dubuque, Ia.
Orro JAcKEL, Greifswald, Germany.
Davip Starr Jorpan, Stanford University, Calif.
Grorce A. Kornta, Houghton, Mich.
Baron R. Kuxt, Tokyo, Japan.
244 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ELECTED.
1876. Joun W. Lanctey, Cleveland, O.
1876. S. A. Latrrmore, Rochester, N. Y.
1894. Wuiti1am Linsey, Princeton, N. J.
1899. ArcHIBALD LiversipcE, London, England.
1876. GkrorGE Mactoski8, Princeton, N. J.
1876. JoHN WILLIAM MALLET, Charlottesville, Va.
1891. CHartes Ripore Mann, Chicago, Ill.
1867. Grorce F. MattHew, St. John, N. B., Canada.
1874. CHARLES JOHNSON Maynarp, West Newton, Mass.
1874. THEODORE LUQUEER MEaD, Oviedo, Fla.
1888. SretTH EK. Meek, Chicago, III.
1892. J. DE MENDIZABAL-TAMBORREL, Mexico City, Mexico.
1874. Criinton Hart Merriam, Washington, D. C.
1898. MANSFIELD MERRIAM, South Bethlehem, Pa.
1878. CHARLES SepGwick Minot, Boston, Mass.
1876. WILLIAM GILBERT MixtTerR, New Haven, Conn.
1890. RicHarD MoLpENKE, Watchung, N. J.
1895. C. Luoyp Moreay, Bristol, England.
1864. Epwarp S. Morse, Salem, Mass.
1898. GrorGE Murray, London, England.
——. Eucen Netto, Giessen, Germany.
1866. ALtFreD Newton, Cambridge, England.
1897. Francis C. NicHotas, New York, N. Y.
1882. Henry ALFRED ALForRD NICHOLLS, Dominica, B. W. I.
1880. Epwarp J. Nouan, Philadelphia, Pa.
1879. Frepertick A. Oper, Hackensack, N. J.
1876. JoHNn M. Orpway, New Orleans, La.
1900. Grorce Howarp ParKker, Cambridge, Mass.
1876. SrepHen F. PeckHam, New York, N. Y.
1877. FrepERICK Primg, Philadelphia, Pa.
1868. RAPHAEL PuMPELLY, Newport, R. I.
1876. B. Avex. RANDALL, Philadelphia, Pa.
1876. Ira Remsen, Baltimore, Md.
1874. Rosert RipGway, Washington, D. C.
1886. Witi1AM L. Ross, Troy, N. Y.
1876. Samue. P. Sapruer, Philadelphia, Pa.
1899. D. Max Scutossrer, Munich, Germany.
1867. PautL ScHwertzer, Columbia, Mo.
1898. W.B. Scort, Princeton, N. J.
1894. W. T. Sepewick, Boston, Mass.
MEMBERSHIP 545
ELECTED.
1876. ANDREW SHERWOOD, Portland, Ore.
1883. J. Warp Situ, Newark, N. J.
1895. CHaR LES H. Smytu, Jr., Princeton, N. J.
1890. J. SELDEN SPENCER, Tarrytown, N. Y.
1896. RosBert STEARNS, Los Angeles, Calif.
1890. Watter LE Conte STEVENS, Lexington, Va.
1876. Francis H. Srorer, Boston, Mass.
1885. Rajah SourtnpRo Mouun Tacore, Calcutta, India.
1893. J. P. THomson, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia.
1899. R. H. Traquarr, Colinton, Scotland.
1877. JouHn TRowBRIDGE, Cambridge, Mass.
1876. D. K. Turtie, Philadelphia, Pa.
1871. Henri VAN Heurck, Antwerp, Belgium.
1900. CHARLES R. VAN Hise, Madison, Wis.
1867. AppIsSON EMERY VERRILL, New Haven, Conn.
1890. ANTHONY WAYNE Vogpgs, San Diego, Calif.
1898. CHARLES DooLITTLE WaLcotr, Washington, D. C.
1876. Lronarp WALDO, New York, N. Y.
1900. SHo Wartasé, Tokyo, Japan.
1897. Stuart WELLER, Chicago, Ill.
1874. I. C. WuirTe, Morgantown, W. Va.
1898. Henry SHALER W1LLIAMS, Ithaca, N. Y.
1898. N. H. WINCHELL, Minneapolis, Minn.
1866. Horatio C. Woop, Philadelphia, Pa.
1899. A. SmirH Woopwarp, London, England.
1876. ARTHUR WILLIAMS WricHut, New Haven, Conn.
1876. Harry Criecy Yarrow, Washington, D. C.
246 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ACTIVE MEMBERS
Fellowship is indicated by an asterisk
Da
bership, by a dagger (+); Patronship, by a section mark (§).
*A bbe, Dr. Cleveland
Abercrombie, David T,
+Adams, Edward D.
Agens, F. G., Sr.
+ Alexander, Chas. B
*Allen:.J. Av. PhD:
Allen, James Lane
*t Allis, Edward Phelps, Jr., Ph.D.
Ames, Oakes
Anderson, A. A.
Anderson, A. J. C.
*Andrews, Roy C.
+Anthony, R. A.
Arend, Francis J.
tArmstrong, 8. T., M.D.
Arnold, Felix, M.D.
Ashby, George E.
Astor, John Jacob
Avery, Samuel P.
t Bailey, James M.
t Barhydt, Mrs. P. H.
*Barnhart, John Hendley
Barron, George D.
*Baskerville, Prof. Charles
Baugh, Miss M. L.
Beal, William R.
Bean, Henry Willard
*+ Beck, Fanning C. T.
*Beebe, C. William
Beller, A.
+ Bergstresser, Charles M.
*Berkey, Charles P., Ph.D.
*Berry, Edward W.
Betts, Samuel R.
van Beuren, F. T.
*Bickmore, Albert 8., Ph.D.
*Bigelow, Prof. ena Pb:D;
Bigelow, Wilham 8.
Bijur, Made
+ Billings, Miss Elizabeth
Billings, Frederick
Bishop, Heber R.
Bishop, Miss Mary C.
Bishop, Samuel H.
*Blake, J. A., M.D.
*+ Bliss, Prof. Charles B.
Bliss, Mrs. W. H.
+ Blumenthal, George
*Boas, Prof. Franz
Boettger, Henry W.
Bohler, Richard F.
+Bourn, W. B.
Boyd, James
Brinsmade, Charles Lyman
*Bristol, Prof. Charles L.
Bristol, Jno. I. D.
*S Britton; rot N: t,0P nD:
*SBrown, Hon. Addison
Brown, Edwin H.
Browne, T. Quincy
*Brownell, Silas B.
Bulkley, L. Duncan
Burr, Winthrop
*Bush, Wendell T.
*Byrnes, Miss Esther F., Ph.D
Camp, Frederick A.
*Campbell, Prof. William, Ph.D.
*Campbell, Prof. William M,
(*) before the name; Life Mem-
MEMBERSHIP
Canfield, R. A.
Cannon, J. G.
Carlebach, Walter Maxwell
*$Casey, Col. T. L., U.S. A.
Cassard, William J.
Cassebeer, H. A., Jr.
*+Cattell, Prof. J. McKeen, Ph.D.
*Chandler, Prof. C. F., Ph.D.
§Chapin, Chester W.
*Chapman, Frank M.
+Chaves, José E.
*Cheesman, Timothy M., M.D.
Childs, Wm., Jr.
Chubb, Percy
Clarkson, Banyer
Cline, Miss May
tClyde, Wm. P.
Cohn, Julius M.
Collier, Robert J.
+Collord, George W.
Combe, Mrs. William
+Constant, S. Victor
de Coppet, HE. J.
Corning, Christopher, R.
*Cox, Charles F.
*Crampton, Prof. Henry E., Ph.D.
+Crane, Zenas
Crosby, Maunsell 8.
*Curtis, Carlton C.
Curtis, G. Warrington
*Dahlgren, B. E., D.M.D.
*Davenport, Prof. C. B., Ph.D.
Davies, J. Clarence
Davis, Dr. Charles H.
Davis, David T.
*+ Davis, William T.
*+ Dean, Prof. Bashford, Ph.D.
+ Delafield, Maturin L., Jr.
Delano, Warren, Jr.
Demorest, William C.
Devereux, W. B.
De Vinne, Theodore L.
De Witt, William G.
Dickerson, Edward N.
Diefenthaler, C. E.
Dimock, George E.
Dodge, Rev. D. Stuart, D.D.
+ Dodge, Miss Grace H.
*Dodge, Prof. Richard E., A.M.
Doherty, Henry L.
Donald, James M.
*Doremus, Prof. Charles A., Ph.D.
*+ Douglas, James
Douglass, Alfred
Draper, Mrs. M-AuP:
Drummond, Isaac W., M.D.
* Dudley, Phy Phat:
*Dunham, Edward K., M.D.
+Dunn, Gano
+Dunscombe, George Elsworth
Dutcher, Wm.
*Dwight, Jonathan, Jr., M.D.
Dwight, Mrs. M. E.
*Hastman, Prof. Charles R.
Ehrich, Wiliam J,
*+ Hlhott, Prof. Ath Bi D:
Emmet, C. Temple
Eno, William Phelps
Estabrook, A. F.
Evarts, Allen W.
*Hyerman, John
Fairchild, Charles S,
Fargo, James C.
Farmer, Alexander 8.
*Farrand, Prof. Livingston, M.D.
Farrington, Wm. H.
Fearing, D. B.
Ferguson, Mrs. Juliana Armour
§ Field, C. de Peyster
Field, William B. Osgood
*Finley, Pres. John H.
*Fishberg, Maurice, M.D.
247
248
Follett, Richard E.
Foot, James D.
+ Ford, James B.
Fordyce, John A,
de Forest, Robert W.
Friedrick, J. J.
Frissell, A. S.
Fuller, Charles D.
*Gager, C. Stuart
Gardner, Clarence Roe
Gibson, R. W.
*Gies, Prof. William J.
*Girty, George H., Ph.D.
Godkin, Lawrence
Goodridge, Frederick G.
Goodwin, Albert C.
§$Gould, Edwin
§Gould, George J.
§Gould, Miss Helen M.
*+tGrabau, Prof. Amadeus W.
*Gratacap, Louis P.
Green, James W.
Greenhut, Benedict J.
*Gregory, W. K.
Griffith, Edward
Grinnell, G. B.
Griscom, C. A., Jr.
Guernsey, H. W.
Guggenheim, William
Guinzburg, A. M.
von Hagen, Hugo
Haines, John P.
Halls, William, Jr.
Hammond, James B.
Harrah, Chas. J.
+ Harriman, Mrs. E. H.
Hasslacher, Jacob
Haupt, Louis, M.D.
Havemeyer, F. C., Jr.
Havemeyer, J. C.
Havemeyer, William F.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Healy, J. R.
*Hering, Prof. Daniel W.
Hewlett, Walter J.
*Hill, Robert T.
Hirsch, Charles 8.
* Hitchcock, Miss F. R. M., Ph.D.
Hochschild, Berthold
Hollenback, Miss Amelia B.
*Hollick, Arthur, Ph.D.
+ Holt, Henry
+ Hopkins, George B. ;
*Hornaday, William T., Se.D.
Hotchkiss, Henry D.
*+ Hovey, Edmund Otis, Ph.D.
*Howe, Marshall A., Ph.D.
t Hoyt, A. W.
+ Hoyt, Theodore R.
+ Hubbard, Thomas H.,
Hubbard, Walter C.
Humphreys, Edwin M.
Humphreys, Frederic H.
t Huntington, Archer M.
*Hussakof, Louis, Ph.D.
Hustace, Francis
t Hutter, Karl
+ Hyde, B. Talbot B.
Hyde, E. Francis
+ Hyde, Frederic E., M.D.
Hyde, Henry St. John
Hyde, Jesse E.
t Iles, George
*Irving, Prof. John D.
von Isakovies, Alois
Iselin, Mrs. William E.
+Jackson, V. H.
*Jacobi, Abram, M.D.
James, F. Wilton
+Jarvie, James N.
Jennings, Robert E.
+ Johnston, J. Herbert
Jones, Dwight A.
MEMBERSHIP
*S Julien, Alexis A., Ph.D.
Kahn, Otto H.
Kautz-Eulenburg, Miss P. R.
*+Kemp, Prof. James F., A.B., E.M.
+ Keppler, Rudolph
t Kessler, George A.
Kinney, Morris
Kohlman, Charles
*+ Kunz, George F.,.M.A., Ph.D.
+Lamb, Osborn R.
Landon, Francis G.
Lang, Herbert
Langdon, Woodbury G.
Langeloth, J.
*Langmann, Gustav, M.D.
Lawrence, Amos E.
Lawrence, John B.
+Lawton, James M.
*Ledoux, Albert R., Ph.D.
*Lee, Prof. Frederic 8., Ph.D.
*SLevison, Wallace Goold
Levy, Emanuel
Lichtenstein, M.
Lichtenstein, Paul
Lieb, J. W., Jr.
Lindbo, J. A.
+ Loeb, James
*Loeb, Prof. Morris, Ph.D.
tLow, Hon. Seth, LL.D.
*Lowie, Robert H., Ph.D.
*Lucas, F. A., D. Se.
*Luquer, Prof. Lea MclI.
*Lusk, Prof. Graham, M.D.
Lydig, Philip M.
Lyman, Frank
Lyon, Ralph
McCarthy, J. M.
*+McMillin, Emerson
McNeil, Charles R.
MacArthur, Arthur F.
*MacDougall, Prof. Robert
249
Macy, Miss Mary Sutton, M.D.
tMacy, V. Everit
Mager, F. Robert
Mann, W. D.
Mansfield, Prof. William
Marble, Manton
Marcou, John B.
Marling, Alfred E.
+ Marshall, Louis
Marston, EK. 8.
t Martin, Bradley
*+tMartin, Prof. Daniel S.
*Martin, T. Commerford
*t Matthew, W. D., Ph.D.
Maxwell, Francis T.
§ Mead, Walter H.
Mellen, C. 8.
*Meltzer, S. J., M.D.
*Merrill, Frederick J. H., Ph.D.
Metz, Herman A.
Milburn, J. G.
Miller, George N., M.D.
*tMiner, Roy Waldo
Mitchell, Arthur M.
Monae-Lesser, A., M.D.
Morgan, J. Pierpont
*Morgan, Prof. Thomas H.
Morgan, William Fellowes
Morris, Lewis R., M.D.
Munn, John P.
+ Nash, Nathaniel C.
+ Nesbit, Abram G.
Notman, George
Oakes, Francis J.
Ochs, Adolph S.
Oettinger, P. J., M.D.
*t Ogilvie, Miss Ida H., Ph.D.
t Olcott, E. E.
Olmsted, Mrs. Charles T.
Oppenheimer, Henry S.
*+ Osborn, Prof. H..F., Sc.D., LL.D,
250 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Osborn, William C.
+Osborn, Mrs. William C.
*Osburn, Raymond C., Ph.D.
+Owen, Miss Juliette A.
Paddock, Eugene H.
t Parish, Henry
Parsons, C. W.
*Parsons, John EH.
+Patton, John
Paul, John J.
*Pedersen, Prof. F. M., Ph.D.
*+Pellew, Prof. C. E., Ph.D.
Pennington, William
+ Perkins, William H.
Perry, Charles J.
*Peterson, Frederick, M.D.
Pettigrew, David L.
Pfizer, Charles, Jr.
Philipp, P. Bernard
Phoenix, Lloyd
Pierce, Henry Clay
*Pitkin, Lucius, Ph.D.
Plant, Albert
Planten, John R.
Polk, Dr. W. M.
*Pollard, Charles L., Ph.D.
*Poor, Prof. Charles L.
Porter, Eugene H.
Post, Abram 8.
*Post, CA:
*Post, George B.
Preston, Veryl
*Prince, Prof. John Dyneley
*Pupin, Prof. Moi. Ph.D:
+Pyne, M. Taylor
*+Ricketts, Prof. P. de P., Ph.D.
Riederer, Ludwig
Robert, Samuel
Roberts, C. H.
+Roebling, John A.
Rogers, E. L.
Rosenbaum, Selig
Rossbach, Jacob
Rothbarth, A.
tde Rubio, H. A. C.
*tRusby, Prof. Henry H., M.D.
Russ, Edward
Sachs, Paul J.
Sage, Dean
Sage, John H.
Satterlee, Mrs. Herbert L.
+Schermerhorn, F. A.
Schiff, Jacob H.
Scholle, A. H.
Schoney, Dr. L.
+Schott, Charles M., Jr.
Scott, George S.
Scoville, Robert
Seaman, Dr. Louis L.
Seitz, Carl E.
Seligman, Jefferson
Sexton, Laurence E.
Shaw, Mrs. John C.
Shepard, C. Sidney
*Sherwood, George H.
Shillaber, William
Shultz, Charles S.
*Sickels, Ivin, M.D.
Sloan, Benson B.
Smith, Adelbert J.
*Smith, Ernest E., M.D., Ph.D.
Smith, Frank Morse
*Smith, Prof. John B.
Snow, Elbridge G.
*Southwick, Edmund B., Ph.D.
Squibb, Edward H., M.D.
Starr, Louis Morris
*Starr, Prof. M. Allen
Stefansson, V.
Steinbrugge, Edward, Jr.
+Stetson, F. L.
*Stevens, George T., M.D.
MEMBERSHIP 251
*+Stevenson, Prof. John J., LL.D.
Stokes, James
Stokes, J. G. Phelps
+Stone, Miss Ellen J.
Straus, Isidor
Strauss, Charles
Strauss, Frederick
tStreat, James
Sturgis, Mrs. Elizabeth M.
Taggart, Rush
*+Tatlock, John, Jr.
Taylor, George
Taylor, W. A.
Taylor, William H.
+Terry, James
Tesla, Nikola
*Thatcher, Edward J., Jr.
Thaw, A. Blair
Thaw, Benjamin
Thompson, Mrs. Frederick F.
Thompson, Lewis S.
+Thompson, Robert M.
*Thompson, Prof. W. Gilman
Thompson, Walter
*Thorndike, Prof. Edward L.
Thorne, Samuel
*Tower, R. W., Ph.D.
*Townsend, Charles H., Sc.D.
Tows, C. D.
*Trowbridge, Prof. C. C.
Tuckerman, Alfred, Ph.D.
Tuttle, Mrs. B. B.
Ullmann, E. 8.
+ Vail, Theo. N.
Vanderpoel, Mrs. J. A.
+ Van Slyck, George W.
+ Van Wyck, Robert A.
Vreeland, Frederick K.
Walker, William I.
*+Waller, Prof. Elwyn, Ph.D.
Warburg, F. N.
Warburg, Paul M.
Ward, Artemas
+ Ward, Charles Willis
Ward, John Gilbert
Warner, Charles St. John
Warren, Charles Elliott
*Washington, Henry S., Ph.D.
Waterbury, J. I.
Watson, John J., Jr.
+ Weir, Col. John
Wells, F. Lyman
Wheat, Silas
Wheeler, H. L.
Williams, R. H.
Wills, Charles T.
*Wilson, Prof. Ki: B., PhD:, iD:
Wilson, J. H.
Wilson, Miss M. B., M.D.
*Winslow, Prof. Charles-E. A.
*Wissler, Clark, Ph.D.
Woerishoffer, Mrs. Anna
Wood, Mrs. Cynthia A.
Wood, William C.
*Woodbridge, Prof. F. J. E.
*Woodhull, Prof. John F., Ph.D.
*Woodman, Prof. J. Edmund
*Woodward, Prof. R. 8.
*Woodworth, Prof. R. 8.
Younglove, John, M.D.
Zabriskie, George
252 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ASSOCIATE MEMBERS
Billingsley, Paul McGregor, James Howard
Brown, Harold Chapman, Ph.D. Montague, W. P., Ph.D.
Brown, T. C. Mook, Charles
Byrne, Joseph P. Moon, Miss Evangeline
Fenner, Clarence N., Ph.D. Northup, Dwight
Gordon, Clarence E. Rogers, G. Sherburne
Hunter, George W. Stevenson, A. E.
Johnson, Julius M. Wood, Miss Elvira
Kellicott, W. E., Ph.D. Ziegler, Victor
Kirk, Charles T.
NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS
Buchner, Edward F. *Lloyd, Prof. F. E.
*Bumpus, H. C. *Mayer, Dr. A. G.
Burnett, Douglass * Pratt, DrJ 244.
*Davis, Wilham H. *Ries, Prof. H.
English, George L. Reuter, L. H.
Finlay, Prof. G. I. *Sumner, Dr. F. B.
Frankland, Frederick W. *van Ingen, Prof. G.
Hoffman, 8. V. *Wheeler, Wm. Morton
Kendig, Amos B.
GENERAL INDEX
Names of Authors and other
Titles of Papers
Abnormal contact rocks of the Cort-
landt Series, 50
ACTION OF PHARMACOLOGICAL AGENTS AS
AN AID IN THE CLASSIFICATION
OF MENTAL PROCESSES, THE, H. L.
Hollingsworth, 217
Active Members, Election of, 185, 188,
194, 197, 208, 218
Active Members, List of, 246—252
Adams, Frank D., RESULTS OF EXPERI-
MENTS ON THE BEHAVIOR OF
RocKkS UNDER PRESSURE [Ab-
stract], 186
AEROPLANE, THE, Philip Wilcox [Title],
187
Frederick G.,
194
Allen, G. M., cited, 117
AMERICAN RACE, THE HISTORY OF THE,
Franz Boas, 177-183
Analyses of the Cortlandt Series, 61
Andrews, Roy C., FIELD NOTES ON JAPA-
NESE WHALES [Abstract], 187
NEW AND PECULIAR PORPOISE FROM
JAPAN, A [Abstract], 198, 199
Annelida of Wewoka Formation, 123
Annual Meeting, Minutes of the, Ed-
mund Otis Hovey, 221
Anthraconeilo subgen. noy., 151
taffiana sp. nov., 182
Antifriction metals, 207
ANTIGORITE, THE GENESIS oF, A. A.
Julien [Title], 189; [Abstract],
195
APACHE, THE DISTRIBUTION AND RELA-
TIONSHIP OF THE, Pliny E. God-
dard [Abstract], 188
Aplite of the Cortlandt Series, 47
Agens, Active Member,
TO VOLUME XXI
Persons in Heavy-face Type
in SMALL CAPS
Artificial waltzers, 102
Asia, NOTES ON A PHEASANT EXPEDITION
To, C. William Beebe [Abstract],
216, 217
Associate Members, Election of, 189, 218
Associate Members, List of, 252
Association hypothesis of mice, 111
Asymmetrical eye colors in mice, 104
Augite norite of the Cortlandt Series, 36
BACTERIA AND DECOMPOSITION IN RELA-
TION TO THE PuRE Foop Law,
C.-E. A. Winslow [Abstract], 206
Bangs, —, Reference to, 107
Bateson, W., cited, 117; References to,
109, 113
Beebe, C. William, Nores ON A PHEAS-
ANT EXPEDITION TO AsIA [Ab-
stract], 216, 217
Beede, —, cited, 128
Bellerophon crassus, 188, 139
Crassus var. wewokanus var. novy.,
138
incomptus, 138
percarinatus, 189
sublevis, 139
Bulimorpha inornata, 140
nitidula, 140
Berkey, Charles Peter, cited, 18, 19, 21
Councilor, 222
References to, 2, 8, 11, 18, 19, 21, 70
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINER-
ALOGY, 186, 189, 194, 197, 205, 209,
213, 218
seryl from Marambaya, 197
Bingham, —, Reference to, 157
Biotite augite norite (hyperite) of the
Cortlandt Series, 33
(253)
254
Biotite hornblende norite of the Cort-
landt Series, 37
Biotite norite of the Cortlandt Series, 31
Blue Corundum Mining Company, Refer-
ence to, 66
Franz, THE HISToRY OF THE
AMERICAN RACE, 177-183; [Title],
222
NOTES ON THE INDIAN TRIBES OF
Mexico [Abstract], 196
Borup, George, Active Member, 218
Brachiopoda of Wewoka Formation, 125
Bragg, I. C., Reference to, 106
BRAZIL, HXPLORATIONS IN, H. E. Cramp-
ton [Abstract], 219
Buckbee, John H., Reference to, 66, 71
Business MeEeETINGS, Edmund Otis
Hovey, 185, 188, 194, 197, 205, 208,
213, 218
Busz, K., cited, 79
By-Laws of the New York Academy of
Sciences, 234-240
Byrne, Joseph, Active Member, 218
Boas,
California Academy of Sciences, Ex-
change of publications with, 208
Campbell, William, Notes oN ANTIFRIC-
TION MeTALs [Abstract], 207
SoME RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN
MeETALLuRGey [Abstract], 212
Castle, W. E., cited, 117
References to, 94, 97, 98, 110, 111, 113
CEPHALIC INDICES IN RELATION TO SEX,
AGE AND SocrAL ConpDITIONS, Paul
R. Radosavljevich [Abstract], 196
Cephalopoda of Wewoka Formation, 142
Chonetes geinitzianus, 129
granulifer var. armatus var. nov.,
Parl
mesolobus, 127, 128, 129
mesolobus var. decipiens var. nov.,
127, 129
mesolobus var. euampygus var. Nov.,
129
Chase, David, Reference to, 66
Chicago Academy of Sciences, Exchange
of publications with, 208
Clarke, F. W., cited, 68
CLASSIFICATION OF SEAS AND LAKE
Basins, A. W. Grabau [Abstract],
197, 198
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Coat CoLtors IN Mick, THE INFLUENCE
oF TIEREDITY AND OF ENVIRON-
MENT IN DETERMINING THE, T. H.
Morgan, 87-117
Ceelenterata of Wewoka HKormation, 122
Coloceras globulare, 145
liratum sp. nov., 144
liratum var. obsoletum var. noy.,
145
Colvin, S. S., INVESTIGATIONS IN PRroG-
RESS IN THE PSYCHOLOGICAL
LABORATORY OF THE UNIVERSITY
oF IrLiInors, 218
Comparison of the Ravenswood with
the Harrison granodiorite, 9
Condit, D. D., OBSERVATIONS ON VOL-
CANOES OF GUATEMALA [Abstract],
197
SANDS OF OHIO, THE [Abstract],
209, 210
Constitution of the New York Academy
of Sciences, 233, 234
Conularia crustula var. holdenville var.
nov., 125
reperi, 125
Coomara-Swamy, A. K., cited, 79
“Coon Butte,’ Edmund Otis Hovey, 213
CoRAL REEFS OF HuROPE, A. W. Grabau
[Abstract], 206
CORRELATION OF ASSOCIATION
R. S. Woodworth, 218
Correlation of the Cortlandt Series, 19
Corresponding Members, List of, 242-
245
CORRESPONDING SECRETARY, REPORT OF
THE, H. E. Crampton, 222
CORTLANDT SERIES, GEOLOGY OF THE, AND
ITs EMERY DEPOSITS, G. Sherburne
Rogers, 11-86
TESTS,
Corundum, Artificial production of, 77
Origin of, 78
Cox, Charles F., Treasurer, 222
Crampton, Henry E., Corresponding
Secretary, 222
EXPLORATIONS IN GUIANA AND
Brazit [| Abstract], 219
GEOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE
REGION OF THE KATETEUR FALLS
AND MT. MROoORAIMA,' BRITISH
GuIANA [Abstract], 219
GENERAL INDEX TO VOLUME XXI
Crampton, Henry E., Report of the Cor-
responding Secretary, 222
Credner, Herman, cited, 14
Honorary Member, 221
Crosses between the black spotted walt-
zer and mice with chocolate coat,
100
black and white spotted waltzers
and yellow mice, 105
a wild sport of musculus and do-
mesticated varieties, 88
F. hybrid sports, 93
F.. hybrid sports and yellow mice, 93
the sport and albinos, 93
the sport and black mice, 92
the sport and chocolate mice, 92
the sport and domesticated races of
mice with uniform coat, 90
the sport and gray mice, 92
the sport and yellow mice, 90
the spotted and the uniform coat,
95
Crossing extracted gray and black to
test the hypothesis of alternate
dominance and recession, 94
Crustacea of the Wewoka Formation,
154
CRYPTOMERIC INHERITENCE IN ONAGRA,
C. Stuart Gager [Abstract], 186
Cuénot, L., cited, 117
References to, 89, 94, 96, 97, 105
CURVE OF Work, THE, E. L. Thorndike
[Abstract], 200, 202
Cyrtoceras peculiare sp. nov., 149
Dacite porphyry of the Cortlandt Series,
48
Dalton, Oscar, Reference to, 66
Daly, —, cited, 60
Dana, James D., cited, 12, 53, 55, 67;
References: to, 11, 14, 15, 16, 17,
ifs}; ais Pal 25}, SE) GB ae tay laiey
67, 69, 85
Darbishire, A. D., cited, 117
Davenport, C. B., cited, 117
Deaths, 189, 208, 213
Dentalium indianum sp. noy., 135
mexicanum, 135
semicostatum sp. nov., 135
255
Description of genera and species of
Wewoka Formation, 120
Description of the wild sport of mice, 88
Diagram of the relations of the more
important types of the Cortlandt
Series, 58
Dike rocks of the Cortlandt Series, 47
Dimorphoceras lenticulare sp. noy., 152,
153
oklahome sp. nov., 152, 153
Diorite of the Cortlandt Series, 25
Diorite phase of the Ravenswood grano-
diorite, 6
Dioritic dikes of the Cortlandt Series,
48
DISTRIBUTION AND RELATIONSHIP OF THE
APACHE, THE, Pliny E. Goddard
[Abstract], 188
Dilute gray mice, 104 :
Durham, Miss F. M., cited, 117; Refer-
ences to, 103, 105, 109, 112
Dynamic metamorphism of the Cort-
landt Series, 54
Eastman, Charles R., Active Member, 197
Fellow, 221
Hehinodermata of the Wewoka Forma-
tion, 122
Ecuapor, NORTHERN, TRAVELS IN THE
LAKE REGION oF, Marshall H.
Saville [Title], 212
Eprror, REPORT OF THE, Edmund Otis
Hovey, 224
Emery, —, Reference to, 157
Kmery deposits of the Cortlandt Series,
11-86, 189, 195
schist type of the Cortlandt
Series, 73
Enchostoma serpuliforme sp. nov., 123
Entoptic phenomena, The study of, 200,
201
Eryops, The limbs of, 190, 192
Ktna, The great eruption of, in March
and April, 1910, 189
Evidence as to the formation of Corun-
dum in the Cortlandt Series, 79
EVIDENCE FROM THE PALISADES ON THE
GENESIS OF ANTIGORITE, THE,
A. A. Julien [Title], 189, [Ab-
stract], 195
Emery
256
EVOLUTION, CLIMATE AND, W. D. Mat-
thew [Abstract], 190
EVOLUTION OF PAIRED FINS, FURTHER
NOTES ON THE, W. K. Gregory
[Abstract], 216
Exchange of publications with other
academies of sciences, 208
EXPERIMENTS IN AVIATION, Clifford B.
Harmon [Title], 187
EXPERIMENTS ON INCIDENTAL Memory,
G. C. Meyers [Title], 218
EXPLORATIONS IN GUIANA AND BRAZIL,
H. E. Crampton [Abstract], 219
Fearing, Daniel O., Active Member, 185
Feldspathic emery of the Cortlandt
Series, 69
Fellows, Election of, 221
FIELD NOTES ON JAPANESE WHALES,
R. C. Andrews [ Abstract], 186, 187
FINDING OF A GREAT BERYL AT MARAM-
BAYA, THE, George F. Kunz, 197
FLYING MACHINES, PRACTICAL UTILITY
oF, Hudson Maxim [Title], 187
Forel, —, Reference to, 157
ForMicip#, A List OF THE TYPE SPECIES
OF THE GENERA AND SUBGENERA
oF, William Morton Wheeler, 157—
175
Fouqué, —, cited, 77
Friedrich, J. J., Active Member, 213
- FURTHER NOTES ON THE EVOLUTION OF
PatRED FINs, W. K. Gregory | Ab-
stract], 216
Fusulina inconspicua sp. nov., 120
longissima, 121
lutugini, 121
minima, 121
Gabbro of the Cortlandt Series, 28
Gabbroic dikes of the Cortlandt Series,
48
Gager, C. Stuart, CryPpTromMeERIC INHERIT-
ANCE IN ONAGRA [Abstract], 186
Galton, Sir Francis, Death of, 189
Garnet, Origin of, 7
Garnet rocks of the Cortlandt Series, 52
Garrett, A. O., Active Member, 185
Gradational
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Gastrioceras angulatum sp. nov., 151
hyattianum sp. nov., 150 °
occidentale, 151
venatum, sp. noyv., 149
Gastropoda of the Wewoka Formation,
136
STONES ON MANHATTAN ISLAND,
James G. Manchester [Abstract],
206
GEOLOGICAL
GEM
OBSERVATIONS ON THE RE-
GION OF THE KAIETEUR FALLS AND
Mr. RaraIMA, BRITISH GUIANA,
H. E. Crampton [Abstract], 219
Geological section of New York City, 1
GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES AND
ITS EMERY Deposits, G. Sher-
burne Rogers, 11-86; [Title], 189;
[Abstract], 195
Geology of the emery deposits of the
Cortlandt Series, 66
Girty, George H., ON Some New GEN-
ERA AND SPECIES OF PENNSYLYA-
NIAN FOSSILS FROM THE WEWOKA
FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA, 119-
156
Goddard, Pliny E., THe DistTrRisuTION
AND RELATIONSHIP OF THE APACHE
[Abstract], 188
Gonioloboceras welleri var. gracile var.
WO Wae ches
Grabau, A. W., CLASSIFICATION OF SEAS
AND LAKE Basins [Abstract],
197, 198
NORTH AMERICAN TYPES OF LOWER
PALEOZOIC SEDIMENTATION IN
NORTHERN Scortand [Abstract],
195
Some Si~turic Corat REEFS OF
Europe [Abstract], 206
SOME STRUCTURAL FEATURES OF THE
HeLDERBERG Front [Abstract],
209, 210
Granite of the Cortlandt Series, 20
Granite phase of the
granodiorite, 4
types of the Cortlandt
Series, 72
GRANODIORITE, THE RAVENSWooD, Victor
Ziegler, 1-10
Ravenswood
GENERAL INDEX
Gray mice with a yellow belty, 93
Gregory, W. K., FURTHER NOTES ON
THE EVOLUTION OF PAIRED FINS
[Abstract], 216
NOTES ON THE ORIGIN OF PAIRED
Limes OF ‘TERRESTRIAL VERTE-
BRATES [Abstract], 219
ON THE LIMBS OF ERYOPS AND THE
ORIGIN OF LIMBS FROM PAIRED
Fins [Abstract], 190, 192
Griffithides ornatus, 156
parvulus sp. noy., 154, 156
sangamonensis, 156
scitulus, 156
welleri, 154
Guatemala, Volcanoes of, 197
GUIANA AND BRAZIL, EXPLORATIONS IN,
H. E. Crampton [Abstract], 219
GULF OF CALIFORNIA, THE VOYAGE OF
THE ALBATROSS TO THE, Charles
H. Townsend [Abstract], 211
Hagerdoorn, A. L., cited, 117
Haines, John P., Active Member, 185
Hare, James H., TAKING THE FIRST
PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE FLIGHTS OF
THE WRIGHT BROTHERS AT KITTY
Hawk, NortH Caro.ina [Title],
187
Harker, —, cited, 57, 59; Reference to,
60
Harmon, Clifford B., EXPERIMENTS IN
AVIATION [Title], 187
Harrison granodiorite, 9
Has PsycuHotocy Lost Irs Minp?, W.P.
Montague [Abstract], 200, 203
HELDERBERG FRONT, SOME STRUCTURAL
FEATURES OF THE, A. W. Grabau
[Abstract], 209, 210
Herrman, Mrs. Esther, Death of, 208
Higginson, J. J., Death of, 189
HIGHLANDS, PROMINENT STRUCTURE OF
THE NORTHERN MARGIN OF THE,
C. P. Berkey [Abstract], 209, 210
Historical review of the Cortlandt
Series, 13
HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE, THE,
Franz Boas, 177-183; [Title], 222
TO VOLUME XXI 257
Hobbs, William H., cited, 17; References
to, 12, 18, 19; 20
Hollingsworth, H. L., THe AcTIonN oF
PHARMACOLOGICAL AGENTS AS AN
AID IN THE CLASSIFICATION OF
MENTAL Processes [Title], 217
INFLUENCE OF CAFFEIN ON THE
QUALITY OF SLEEP, THE [Ab-
stract], 200, 203
Honorary Members, Election of, 221;
List of, 241, 242
Hornblende norite of the Cortlandt
Series, 36
Hornblende pyroxenite of the Cortlandt
Series, 43
Hornblendite of the Cortlandt Series,
38, 49
Hovey, Edmund Otis, Bustness MEET-
INGS, MINUTES OF, 185, 188, 189,
194, 197, 205, 208, 213, 218
COPPER QUEEN MINE, THE, BISBEE,
ARIZONA [Abstract], 206
Editor, 222
METEOR CRATER, OR “Coon BUTTE”
[Abstract], 213
recording Secretary, 222
REPORT OF THE Eprvor, 224
tEPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRE-
TARY, 223
Hudson, Henry, cited, 13
Hussakof, Louis, Secrion or BIoLoey,
186, 190, 195, 198, 206, 211, 216,
219
SPOONBILL FISHERY OF THE LOWER
Mississippi, THE [Abstract], 206,
207
Hyatt, —, Reference to, 148
Hydreionocrinus crassidiscus, 123
patulus sp. nov., 122, 123
Janthinopsis gouldiana sp. noy., 141
tumida, 141
Inclusions of the Cortlandt Series, 52
INDIAN TRIBES OF Mexico, Franz Boas
[Abstract], 196
INFLUENCE OF CAFFEIN ON THE QUALITY
OF SLEEP, THE, H. L. Hollings-
worth [Abstract], 200, 203
258
Influence of the environment on the
color of Peromyscus leucopus
ammodytes, 106
INFLUENCE OF HEREDITY AND OF EN-
VIRONMENT IN DETERMINING THE
Coat CoLors IN Mice, THE, T. H.
Morgan, 87-117
Influence of the spotted coat on the
white belly of the sport, 98
INVESTIGATIONS IN PROGRESS IN THE
PSYCHOLOGICAL LABORATORY OF
THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS, S.S.
Colvin [Title], 218
Invitations to celebrations, 208, 213
Jameson, Edwin C., Active Member, 194
Japanese Porpoise, 198, 199
JAPANESE WHALES, FIELD NOTES ON,
Roy C. Andrews [Abstract], 186,
187
Julien, A. A., EVIDENCE FROM THE PALI-
SADES ON THE GENESIS OF AN-
TIGORITE, THE [Title], 189; [Ab-
stract], 195
Kemp, James F., cited, 1, 17, 20, 50, 52,
68, 80; References to, 11, 12, 18,
20
SARATOGA MINERAL SPRINGS, THE
[Abstract], 206
Keystone Emery Company, Reference to,
66
Kimball, J. P., cited, 85
Kirk, Charles T., Associate Member, 189
Kunz, George F., Finance Committee,
222
FINDING OF A GREAT BERYL AT
MARAMBAYA, THE, 197
ON THE OCCURRENCE OF OPAL IN
NORTHERN NEVADA AND IDAHO
[Abstract], 213, 214
Lacroix, A., cited, 52, 79, 81
Lagorio, —, cited, 68, 80; References to,
78, 81
Lake basins, Classification of, 197
Lamme, M. A., Reference to, 11
Lang, Herbert, Active Member, 188
Leda bellistrista, 132, 1383
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Lee, Frederic S., Finance Committee,
222
Lehman, —, cited, 55
Leith, —, cited, 19
Lévy, —, cited, 77
LIBRARIAN, REPORT OF THE, R. W. Tower,
224.
Limatula fasciculata, 134
? fasciculata sp. noy., 134
striaticostata, 134, 135
LIST OF THE TYPE SPECIES OF THE
GENERA AND SUBGENERA OF For-
Micinp®, A, William ‘Morton
Wheeler, 157-175
Little, C. C., cited, 117; Reference to, 94
Lophophyllum profundum var. radi-
cosum var. noy., 122
Lovie, Robert H., Women’s Societies
OF THE MISSOURI VILLAGE TRIBES
[Abstract], 194
Lucas, Frederic A., Vice-President, 222
Lyon, D. O., THE RELATION OF THE
QUICKNESS OF LEARNING TO RE-
TENTIVENESS [Title], 217
McCoy, Isaac, Reference to, 66
McMillin, Emerson, Finance Committee,
222,
President, 221
REPORT OF THE TREASURER, 224
Mach, Ernst, Honorary Member, 221
Magmatic segregation, The Theory of,
80
Manchester, James G., New DISCOVERY
OF GEM STONES ON MANHATTAN
IsLanD [Abstract], 206
Marambaya, A Beryl from, 197
Mather, W. W., cited, 14
Martin, D. S., NamIne oF Two MINERAL
VaRIETIES [Abstract], 189
Matthew, W. D., CLrimate aNp Eyotu-
TION [Abstract], 190
Mauve-colored wild sport, 106
Maxim, Hudson, Pracrican Uvriuiry OF
I'Lyinc MAcHINEs [Title], 187
Meek, —, References to, 140, 141
Meekospira peracuta, 140
peracuta var. choctawensis
noy., 139
var.
GENERAL INDEX
Membership of the New York Academy
of Sciences, 241—252
Mendelian inheritance, Unit characters
and factors in, 114
Metacoceras cornutum sp. nov., 145
cornutum var. carindtum var. Nov.,
146
cornutum var.
var. nov., 147
cornutum var. sinuosum var. NOovV.,
146
hayi, 149
perelegans sp. noy., 147
sculptile sp. nov., 148, 149
walcotti, 149
METALLURGY, SOME RECENT DEVELOP-
MENTS IN, William Campbell [ Ab-
stract], 212
METEOR CRATER, OR “COON BUTTE,”
Edmund Otis Hovey [Abstract],
213
METROPOLITAN SEWERAGE COMMISSION,
SCIENTIFIC ASPECTS OF THE WORK
OF THE, George A. Soper [Ab-
stract], 195
Mexico, INDIAN TRIBES OF, Franz Boas
[Abstract], 196
Meyer, A. B., Death of, 208
Meyers, G. C., EXPERIMENTS ON INCIDEN-
TAL MEMory [Title], 218
Micaceous type of the Cortlandt Series,
75
Mice, THE INFLUENCE OF HEREDITY AND
OF ENVIRONMENT IN DETERMIN-
ING THE Coat CotLors IN, T. H.
Morgan, 87-117
Mineral occurrences in the Ravenswood
granodiorite, 3
MINERAL VARIETIES, NAMING OF Two,
D. S. Martin [Abstract], 189
Moller, —, cited, 121
Montague, W. P., Has PsycHoLogy Lost
Its MInpD? [Abstract], 200, 203
Montgomery, George R., A SIMPLE
METHOD FOR THE Stupy oF EN-
TOPTIC PHENOMENA [Abstract],
200, 201
Mook, C. C., Associate Member, 218
Moon, Miss Evangeline, Associate Mem-
ber, 189
multituberculatum
TO VOLUME XXI 959
Morgan, T. H., cited, 117
INFLUENCH OF HEREDITY AND OF
ENVIRONMENT IN DETERMINING
THE CoAT CoLors IN MICE, THE,
87-117
lord
Morozewicz, J., cited, 77, 78, 80; Refer-
ences to, 81, 84
NEw DISCOVERY OF GEM STONES ON MAN-
HATTAN ISLAND, James G. Man-
chester [Abstract], 206
AND PECULIAR PORPOISE FROM
JAPAN, A, Roy C. Andrews [Ab-
stract], 198, 199
New type of gray mice with a yellow
belly, 93
New York City, Geological section of, 1
Nichols, J. T., OBSERVATIONS ON BIRDS
AND FISHES MADE ON AN EXPEDI-
TION TO FLORIDA WaArTeERS [Ab-
stract], 198, 199
1909 ERUPTION OF TENERIFFE AND THE
GREAT ERUPTION oF ETNA IN
MARCH AND Aprit, 1910, THE,
Frank A. Perret [Title], 189
Non-Resident Members, List of, 252
Norite of the Cortlandt Series, 29
Norite proper of the Cortlandt Series,
70
Norite type of the Cortlandt Series, 73
NortH AMERICAN TYPES OF LOWER
PALEOZOIGC SEDIMENTATION IN
NORTHERN ScorLaNp, A. W. Gra-
bau [Abstract], 195
NOTES ON ANTIFRICTION METALS, Wil-
liam Campbell [Abstract], 207
NOTES ON THE INDIAN TRIBES OF MEXICO,
Franz Boas [Abstract], 196
NOTES ON THE ORIGIN OF PAIRED LIMBS
OF ‘TERRESTRIAL VERTEBRATES, W.
K. Gregory [Abstract], 219
NOTES ON A PHEASANT EXPEDITION TO
Asia, C. William Beebe [Ab-
stract], 216, 217
Nucula parva, 13
pulchella, 131
ventricosa, 133, 134.
wewokanad sp. noy., 131
Nuculopsis gen. noy., 133
NEW
260
OBSERVATIONS ON BrirpsS AND FISHES
MADE ON AN JEXPEDITION TO
FLoripA WATERS, J. T. Nichols
[Abstract], 198, 199
OBSERVATIONS ON VOLCANOES OF GUATE-
MALA, D. D. Condit [Abstract],
197
Officers, Election of, 221
Out10, THe Sanps or, D. D. Condit [| Ab-
stract], 209, 210
Oklahoma, Pennsylvanian fossils from,
119-156
Olivine augite norite of the Cortlandt
Series, 38
Olivine pyroxenite
Series, 44
ONAGRA, CRYPTOMERIC INHERITANCE IN,
C. Stuart Gager [Abstract], 186
On SoME NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF
PENNSYLVANIAN FOSSILS FROM THE
WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLA-
HOMA, George H. Girty, 119-156
ON THE LIMBS OF HRYOPS AND THE
ORIGIN OF LIMBS FROM PATRED
Wins, W. K. Gregory [Abstract],
190, 192
ON THE OCCURRENCE OF OPAL IN NORTH-
ERN NEVADA AND IDAHO, G. F.
Kunz [Abstract], 215, 214
OGLITES OF CENTRAL PENNSYLVANIA,
THE SILICEOUS, Victor Ziegler
[Abstract], 219
OPAL IN NORTHERN NEVADA AND IDAHO,
George F. Kunz [Abstract], 213,
214
ORIGIN OF LIMBS FROM PAIRED FINS,
W. K. Gregory [Abstract], 190,
192
Original gneissoid structure of the Cort-
landt Series, 55
Orestes nodosus, 136, sp. nov., 137
subgen. noy., 136
Organization of the New York Academy
of Sciences, 227-240
Origin of the Cortlandt Series, 77
Origin of garnet, 7
Origin of corundum, 78
Orthoceras tuba sp. noy., 142
Osgood, —, cited, 108
of the Cortlandt
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
PatkED FINS, FURTHER NOTES ON THE
EVOLUTION OF, W. K. Gregory
[Abstract], 216
PAIRED LIMBS OF TERRESTRIAL VERTE-
BRATES, W. K. Gregory [Abstract],
219
Paleolima fasciculata, 184
Parsons, C. W., Active Member, 185
Pedersen, F. M., Fellow, 221
Pegmatite of the Cortlandt Series, 47
Pelecypoda of the Wewoka Formation,
131
Pennsylvanian fossils from Oklahoma,
119-156
Peridotite of the Cortlandt Series. 45
Perret, Frank A., 1909 ERUPTION OF
TENERIFFE AND THE GREAT ERUP-
TION OF ETNA IN MARCH AND
APRIL, 1910, THE [Title], 189
Petrographic description and analyses
of Ravenswood granodiorite, 2
Petrography of the emery and asso-
ciated. rocks of the Cortlandt
Series, 68
Petrology of the Cortlandt Series, 20
Pharkidonotus subgen. nov., 138
PHEASANT HXPEDITION TO Asta, C. Wil-
liam Beebe [Abstract], 216, 217
Pirsson, L. V., cited, 7
Pleurotomaria ? tumida, 141
Plutonic rocks of the Cortlandt Series,
20
Poffenberger, A. T., REACTION TIME FOR
DIFFERENT RETINAL AREAS [Title],
218
Poor, Charles Lane, Vice-President, 222
Porpoise from Japan, 198, 199
Poulton, Edward B., Honorary Member,
221
PractTicaAL Utiniry oF FLyiIne Ma-
CHINES, Hudson Maxim [Title],
187
Pratt, J. H., cited, 67, 78, 79, 85
PREFERRED LENGTH OF INTERVAL, J. E.
Wallace Wallin [Abstract], 200,
201
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS, Franz Boas, 177—
183
GENERAL INDEX
Productus awquicostatus, 129, 13¢
cora var. americanus, 180
insinuatus sp. nov., 129
PROMINENT STRUCTURE OF THE NORTH-
ERN MARGIN OF THE HIGHLANDS,
C. P. Berkey [Abstract], 209, 210
Protocycloceras ? rushense var. crebri-
cinctum var. noyv., 144
Protozoa of Wewoka Formation, 120
Pseudorthoceras gen. noy., 148
knoxense, 1438
seminolense sp. nov., 148
PSYCHANALYSIS AND THE INTERPRETA-
TION OF DREAMS, E. W. Scripture
[Abstract], 200, 204
Pugnax osagensis var. occidentalis, 13
osagensis var. percostata var. nov.,
130
Pure emery of the Cortlandt Series, 69
Pure Food Law, 206
Pyroxenite of the Cortlandt Series, 40
Quartz emery schist of the Cortlandt
Series, 70
Quartz norite of the Cortlandt Series,
35
Quinn, H. M., Reference to, 66
Radosavljevich, Paul R., CEPHALIC
INDICES IN RELATION TO SEX, AGE
AND SociaAL ConpiTions — [Ab-
stract], 196
RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE, ‘THE, Victor
Ziegler, 1—10
REACTION TIME FOR DIFFERENT RETINAL
AREAS, A. T. Poffenberger [Title],
218
REACTION TO SIMULTANEOUS STIMULI,
J. W. Todd [Title], 218
RECENT CELESTIAL PHOTOGRAPHS WITH
THE Sixtry-INCH REFLECTOR OF
THE MrT. WILSON OBSERVATORY,
G. W. Ritchey [Abstract], 196
RECORDING SECRETARY, REPORT OF THE,
Edmund Otis Hovey, 225
ReEcorRDS OF MEETINGS OF THR NEW
YorK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, Ed-
mund Otis Hovey, 185-228
TO VOLUME XXI 961
RELATION OF THE QUICKNESS OF LEARN-
ING TO RETENTIVENESS, D. O. Lyon
[Title], 217
Relations of the types of the Cortlandt
Series, 57
Report of the Corresponding Secretary,
222
Editor, 224
Librarian, 224
Recording Secretary, 223
Treasurer, 224
RESULTS OF EXPERIENCES ON THE BE-
HAVIOR OF ROCKS UNDER PRESS-
uRE, Frank D. Adams [Abstract],
186
Rice, D. E., VisuAL ACUITY UNDER
LIGHTS OF DIFFERENT COLORS
[Title], 218
Ries, Heinrich, cited, 9
Riley, I. Woodbridge, Spreap oF CHRIS-
TIAN ScIENCE, THE, [Abstract],
200, 204:
Ritchey, G. W., RECENT CELESTIAL
PHOTOGRAPHS WITH THE SIxty-
INCH REFLECTOR OF THE Mt. WIL-
SON OBSERVATORY [Abstract], 196
Robb, Hon. J. Hampden, Death of, 189
RocKS UNDER PRESSURE, RESULTS OF
EXXPERIMENTS ON THE BEHAVIOR
or, Frank D. Adams [Abstract],
186
Remerella patula sp. nov., 125, 126
Rogers, G. Sherburne, GEOLOGY OF THE
CorRTLANDT SERIES AND ITS EMERY
Deposits, 11-86; [Title], 189;
[Abstract], 195
St. John, Orestes, Reference to, 136
SANDS oF OnI0, THE, D. D. Condit [ Ab-
stract], 209, 210
SARATOGA MINERAL SPRINGS, THE, James
F. Kemp [Abstract], 206
Saville, Marshall H., TRAVELS IN THE
LAKE REGION OF NORTHERN EHcua-
por [Title], 212
Scaphopoda of the Wewoka
tion, 185
Schellwein, —, cited, 121
Forma-
262
ScIENTIFIC ASPECTS OF THE WORK OF
THE METROPOLITAN SEWERAGE
CoMMISSION, George A. Soper
[Abstract], 195
ScoTLAND, NorRTH AMERICAN TYPES OF
LOWER PALEOZOIC SEDIMENTATION
IN, A. W. Grabau [Abstract], 195
Scripture, E. W., PSYCHANALYSIS AND
THE INTERPRETATION OF DREAMS
[Abstract], 200, 205
Scudder, Samuel, Death of, 208
Seas, Classification of, 197
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND Psy-
cHoLoGy, F. Lyman Wells, 188,
1938, 196, 200, 207, 208, 212, 217
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY, Edward J. Thatcher,
187, 198, 196, 200, 207, 212, 217
SECTION oF BioLtocy, L. Hussakof, 186,
190, 195, 198, 206, 211, 216, 219
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY,
Charles P. Berkey, 186, 189, 194,
197, 205, 209, 213, 218
Sedimentary material, Theory of the
absorption of, 81
Seismological Society of America, Mem-
bership in, 213
Senff, Charles H., Death of, 208
Serpentine (peridotite) of the Cort-
landt Series, 49
Serpula insita, 124
Serpulopsis gen. nov., 124
SEx AND CLASS DIFFERENCES IN RE-
SPONSE TO ADVERTISEMENTS, E. K.
Strong, Jr. [Abstract], 200, 202
Shuckard, —, Reference to, 157
Shumard, —, Reference to, 130
SILICEOUS OG6LITES OF CENTRAL PENN-
SYLVANIA, THE, Victor Ziegler
[Abstract], 219
Sillimanite schist of the Cortlandt
Series, 71
SIMPLE METHOD FoR THE STupY oF
ENTOPTIC PHENOMENA, A, George
R. Montgomery [Abstract], 200,
201
Smith Elliott C., Death of, 213
Smith, J. P., Reference to, 154
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Sodalite syenite of the Cortlandt Series,
24
SoMe RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN METAL-
LURGY, William Campbell [Ab-
stract], 212
SoME SILuRIc CorRAL REEFS OF EUROPE,
A. W. Grabau [Abstract], 206
SoME STRUCTURAL FEATURES OF THE
HELDERBERG FRONT, A. W. Grabau
[Abstract], 209, 210
Soper, George A., ScIENTIFIC ASPECTS
OF THE WORK OF THE METROPOLI-
TAN SEWERAGE COMMISSION [Ab-
stract], 195
Soret, —, Reference to, 80
Spencer, A. C., cited, 19
Spherodoma intercalaris, 141
primigenia, 141
Spinel emery of the Cortlandt Series, 68
Spongize of Wewoka Formation, 121
SPOONBILL FISHERY OF THE LOWER MIs-
sissippI, L. Hussakof [Abstract].
206, 207
SPREAD OF CHRISTIAN SCIENCE, THE,
I. Woodbridge Riley [Abstract],
200, 204.
Stoney, G. Johnstone, Death of, 208
Streptorhynchus oklahome sp. nov., 126
Strong, E. K., Jr., Sex anp CLass DIr-
FERENCES IN RESPONSE TO ADVER-
TISEMENTS [Abstract], 200, 202
Structural geology of the Cortlandt
Series, 54
Surface distribution of the Ravenswood
granodiorite, Ps
Syenite of the Cortlandt Series, 23
TAKING THE FIRST PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE
FLIGHTS OF THE WrIcHtT BrRoru-
ERS AT Kitty Hawk, NortTH
CaroLina, James H. Hare [Title],
187
Tanite Emery Company, Reference to,
66
Teneriffe, The 1909 Eruption of, 189
Terry, B. T., References to, 102, 103
Thatcher, Edward J., Section oF ASTRON-
OMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY,
187, 193, 196, 200, 207, 212, 217
GENERAL INDEX TO VOLUME XXI
Theory of magmatic segregation, 80
Theory of the absorption of sedimen-
tary material, 81
Thorndike, E. L., THE CURVE OF WORK
[Abstract], 200, 202
Ticked or gray hair as a “Unit char-
acter’ in mice, 108
Todd, J. W., REACTION TO SIMULTANE-
ous STIMULI [Title], 218
Torre, Dalla, Reference to, 157
Tower, Ralph W., Librarian, 222
REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN, 224
Townsend, Charles H., VoYAGE OF THE
ALBATROS TO THE GULF OF CALI-
FORNIA, THE [Abstract], 211
TRAVELS IN THE LAKE REGION OF
NorTHERN Ecuapor, Marshall H.
Saville [Title], 212
TREASURER, REPORT OF THE, Emerson
McMillin, 224
TyPE SPECIES OF THE GENERA AND SUB-
GENERA OF ForMIcIDa&, William
Morton Wheeler, 157-175
Types of occurrence of the Cortlandt
Series, 72
Unit characters and factors in Mende-
lian inheritance, 114
Van Hise, C. R., cited, 8, 19
Variation diagram of the Cortlandt
Series, 59
Vernadsky, —, cited, 77
VISUAL ACUITY UNDER LIGHTS OF DIF-
FERENT Coors, D. BE. Rice [Title],
218
Vogt, —, Reference to, 78
Voleanoes of Guatemala, 197
Waagen, W., cited, 138
Wallin, J. E. Wallace, THE PREFERRED
LENGTH OF INTERVAL [Abstract],
200, 201
Weismann, —, References to, 115, 116
Wells, F. Lyman, SecTIonN oF ANTHRO-
POLOGY AND PsycHo.Loey, 188, 193,
196, 200, 208, 212, 217
Wernerite schist of the Cortlandt
Series, 51
Wewoka Formation of Oklahoma, Penn-
sylvanian fossils from the, 119-
156
263
Wewokella gen. noy., 121
solida sp. nov., 121
WHALES, FireLp NOTES ON JAPANESE,
R. C. Andrews [Abstract], 186, 187
Wheat, Silas C., Active Member, 208
Wheeler, William Morton, A List or
THE TYPE SPECIES OF THE GENERA
AND SUBGENERA OF FoRMICID,
157-175
Wilcox, Philip, Tur A®ROPLANE [Title],
187
Wild sport of mice, Description of, 88
Williams, George H., cited, 24, 26, 27,
30, 37, 48, 50, 67, 82
References to, 12: 13; 15; 16° 17,48;
19, 20, 21," 25, 26; 29, Si a2saa:
40, 43, 45, 46, 47, 55, 56, 57, 67,
68, 69, 85
Wilson, E. B., cited, 117
Winchell, A. N., Reference to, 82
Winchell, N. H., Reference to, 82
Winslow, C.-E. A., BACTERIA AND Dr-
COMPOSITION IN RELATION TO THE
PuRE Foop Law [Abstract], 206
Wissler, Clark, Councilor, 222
WOMEN’S SOCIETIES OF THE MISSOURI
VILLAGE TRIBES, Robert H. Lowie
[Abstract], 194
Wood, H. L., Reference to, 104
Woodman, J. Edmund, Vice-President,
999
od
Woodworth, R. S., CORRELATIONS OF AS-
SOCIATION Tests [Title], 218
—
Vice-President, 222
Worthen, —, References to, 140, 141
Wright Brothers at Kitty Hawk, North
Carolina, 187
Yerkes, R. M., References to, 96, 102
Yoldia carbonaria, 182
knomensis, 182
oweni, 182
Ziegler, Victor, RAVENSWooD GRANODI-
ORITE, THE, 1-10
SILICEOUS OOLITES OF CENTRAL
PENNSYLVANIA, THE [Abstract],
219
cae ay ‘ ee
, D Pa zy
J Av ¢ vy, “ight ; “a onl ; 4 te
y 4 ,, y J “a LY ‘ lout b ” he ae wha
vey. oY Aoi Tee, ma A ue et . rae bti nia PERE
Ps c a . oe bAL SY
Mo Si tne aS Sh lg
WAN NIL ND oe nS i= pea ty Mg? aie sete es Sn RR MV,
agile pile OTT MRO A re
aed 3. foo) ‘sad ae ane So
iP are av. Lie... (eae
2 ae 4 wee wr’, | ela mee aos ‘bag Shee a A,
ie Dawe PL S cepe iee bonsai
a Eee 7 ot Pe ee eae ey rai] es ee
ry Lt ee ate a i ipa
ee ph Ho “ow, 0) Ca a
7 ; ay ‘ : dai “
") ain Jc? PL ce ae
> >| ro. ae at ae ne rn
WO Roe be ae gh
’ e ry
. * ph dhe ay fe
uw . 4 GE) a ‘: J 4
owe re th a ay Hale mae oa ay Me
. fb thay) alba aie
se
ed |
« : A ‘ “a v “a 4, Ap oe §) i i
. . %
; bo iw. ise. oi
Mh, a ene | sles +e
‘ ; ae ny. an 4 s
: ; mK? hi ae \ ean
’ = : r ‘3 . "FT LA ita
tas \ ahs, s sit, x ik Atm Ms iP
cy * 4 A *
GN, } bialbove . Mi stterey, bens ve | Si A Vs,
Chas! ie aa
; : Jat -
. ' ic ar ee Ti idee er ae
Le ayes Meineke).
sd aan f he,
mY, TL eee Od
Ee OE sie
Pi
ieee hte. ‘ d , 5 AH "
e™ \ ie 1.
i i ane Cth PO ee
‘ sh > ‘- en ee Ca
/ * ' vet
' ee aka MT
; ine vie
Fi e epi ‘\ ha
aight od fe AN *
/ ; rf on ae ' Paha i
j J Te PAL a vast e 5 : Oe
hdl mm ry f wy Poa ro Peer pant i
Une
Jia Te a ey A ae Seale hat
gi’, Loa AOL aa ae hie
f . : Tee. ; NGy
71 4 Pt ie Ae id er nity ye
Ay YO) oe iG et ane eh a8 \: ‘ ne
b gael uae Be LS ha “oe
i a, eae The re) Rab puts wee aan,
a6, 2 EN. Ca amici) a er | }
ci iyi as 6p. Sie ei y
Mpeaweers 80. SNR. Cb ae i i SM et a
od Ns Cg Ue i eta ile yet Sir A Fgh ho. WU
Bay Qiks ‘
aN 2")8 a ¢ b
Fe vg % ied
| See
* ad
AOR Cp abe ee as ¥ ae ae AS MEN
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or Naturau History, 1817-1876)
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz.:
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the
scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the rec-
ords of meetings and similar matter.
A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year
and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles
composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and
are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of
the separate articles depends upon their lengih and the number of illus-
trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the
Academy. ‘The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has
been printed, the date of issue appearing avove the title of each paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at
irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to
monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume
I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs,
ete. The price is one dollar per part as issued.
All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The
Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them.
_ Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of
any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to
THe LIBRARIAN,
New York Academy of Sciences,
care of:
American Museum of Natural History,
New York, N. Y.
Diese
¢ era 4
Panels
: ay i
ql ;
al
in
en ee?
HA yi he;
3 5185 00258 3548
Satht aein ie nedandsas atant